This is the multi-page printable view of this section. Click here to print.

Return to the regular view of this page.

Security

Leveraging the nation’s largest and longest‑standing experience in security service operations, we deliver automated security services customized for diverse customer environments.

1 - Key Management Service

1.1 - Overview

Service Overview

Key Management Service(KMS) is a service that easily creates encryption keys and securely stores/manages them to safely protect an application’s critical data. The user encrypts and decrypts data using an encryption key, and the encryption key is reliably managed through a centrally managed hierarchical encryption key system.

Provided Features

Key Management Service provides the following features.

  • Key Management: KMS can create, delete, and manage customer-managed keys. * The user directly generates a data key that encrypts data using the master key created by KMS.
  • Key Permission Management: You can control and manage usage permissions for master keys based on custom policy.
  • Key Lifecycle Management: Through key rotation, you can generate new encrypted data for the master key without creating a new key, and the key rotation interval can be set according to customer policy. * Through lifecycle management, encryption keys that are no longer used are deactivated or deleted, ensuring data is safely protected from cryptographic threats.
  • Platform-managed key: When another product within the Samsung Cloud Platform uses a KMS key for encryption, the CSP (Cloud Service Provider) creates a platform-managed key and performs encryption, so the user does not need to generate a key directly in KMS.

Component

Master key

The master key is used to generate data keys for encrypting data, and depending on the purpose, you can generate symmetric key (encryption/decryption (AES), generation/verification (HMAC)) and asymmetric key (encryption/decryption and signing/verification (RSA), signing/verification (ECDSA)) respectively. Proper master key management encrypts data keys, allowing you to protect frequently used data keys during operation.

  • The master key is a key generated through the creation of a KMS product service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Data key

The data key is used to encrypt the actual data and is generated for each target service that performs encryption. Thus, even if a single data key is compromised, it does not affect services encrypted with other data keys.

HSM (hardware security module)

Stores the root key of the KMS system domain. The master key is generated using the root key stored in an HSM (Hardware Security Module) that complies with the FIPS 140-2 Lv3 standard, and is securely distributed and stored in the KMS for protection.

Constraints

The Key Management Service of Samsung Cloud Platform limits the number of key creations and rotations as follows.

ItemDetailed descriptionQuota
KMS KeyNumber of KMS Keys created per region10000
KMS Validation Password KeyNumber of public authentication algorithm keys that can be generated per account100
KMS Key rotationNumber of versions that can be generated when rotating a customer-managed Key
  • Each time the key is rotated, the key version changes, and it is compatible up to the 100th key version regardless of the encryption algorithm
  • By using the newly generated key version from key rotation, data encrypted with a previous key version can be decrypted, maintaining compatibility
100
Table. Key Management Service constraints
Reference
  • In KMS, keys created as a regional service can be used only within that region.
  • The restrictions on the public authentication algorithm key apply only to the KR SOUTH region.

Preceding Service

Key Management Service has no prerequisite service.

1.2 - How-to guides

Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Key Management Service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and selecting detailed options.

Reference

Key Management Service provides the following two key services.

  • Customer-managed key: To securely protect critical application data, users can generate and manage encryption keys themselves.
  • Platform-managed key: Since the CSP (Cloud Service Provider) creates and manages it directly, users cannot modify or delete the key’s properties.

Create a customer-managed key

You can create and use a customer-managed key in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

To create a customer-managed key, follow these steps.

  1. All Services > Security > Key Management ServiceClick the menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of Key Management Service.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Customer Managed Key button. 2. Navigate to the Customer Managed Key Creation page.

  3. On the Customer Managed Key Creation page, enter the information required to create a service and provide additional details.

    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
      Category
      Required
      Detailed description
      key nameRequiredEnter key name
      Public authentication algorithmSelectionWhen Use is selected, you can generate encryption keys that meet public encryption standards
      • The public authentication algorithm option is available only in the KR SOUTH region
      • The public authentication algorithm provides the ARIA algorithm, which has passed security verification through Korea’s cryptographic module certification system
      PurposeRequiredSelect the key purpose and encryption method
      • If you do not select the public authentication algorithm, choose among encryption/decryption (AES-256), encryption/decryption and signing/verification (RSA-2048), signing/verification (ECDSA), and generation/verification (HMAC)
      Auto rotationSelectionSelect whether to enable automatic key rotation
      • If you select Use, the internal algorithm of the generated key is converted to a different value and applied at each configured rotation interval
      • The rotation interval can be set to a value between 1 and 730 days. If no rotation interval is entered, it defaults to 90 days automatically
      ExplanationSelectionEnter additional information for the key
      Table. Customer-managed key service information input items
    • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      required status
      Detailed description
      tagSelectionAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 per resource can be added
      • Add Tag After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key, Value values
      Table. Customer-managed key additional information input fields
  4. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated charges generated in the panel, and click the Create button.

    • When creation is complete, check the created resources on the Customer Managed Key List page.
Reference
When selecting a public authentication algorithm, you can create up to 100 customer-managed keys.

Check detailed information of customer-managed key

You can view and edit the complete list of resources and detailed information for customer-managed keys. Customer Managed Key Details page is composed of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.

Reference

If the status of a customer-managed key service is Creating, the service is still being created, so you cannot navigate to the detail page.

  • If it remains in the Creating state after a certain amount of time, delete the key and recreate it.

To view detailed information about the Key Management Service, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Security > Key Management Service menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of Key Management Service.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Customer Managed Key menu. 2. Navigate to the Customer Managed Key List page.
  3. On the Customer Managed Key List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Navigate to the Customer Managed Key Details page.
    • Customer Managed Key Details page displays status information and descriptions of additional features at the top.
      CategoryDetailed description
      statusIndicates the status of a customer-managed key
      • Active: available/activated
      • Stop: stopped/disabled
      • To be terminated: scheduled for deletion
      • Creating: creating/creation error (immediate retry possible)
      key rotationButton to manually rotate the generated key
      Key DeactivationButton to deactivate the generated key
      Service cancellationTerminate service button
      • When the status is To be terminated, display Cancel termination button
      Table. Customer-managed key status information and additional features

Detailed Information

On the Customer Managed Key List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and, if necessary, edit the information.

Category
Detailed description
serviceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource nameResource Name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
ConstructorUser who created the service
Creation date and timeService creation timestamp
key nameName of the generated key
Public authentication algorithmWhether to use a public authentication algorithm
PurposeKey purposes and cryptographic methods such as encryption/decryption and signing/verification
Current versionCurrent version of the generated key
  • When the key is rotated, the version increments by 1
Auto rotationAutomatic key rotation usage
  • Click the Edit icon to modify
Next rotation dayDisplay the next key rotation date according to the rotation period
  • Automatically execute key rotation on that date
rotation periodRotation period when automatic rotation is enabled
ExplanationShow additional description for the key
  • Click the Edit icon to modify
Table. Customer-managed key detailed information tab items

Tag

Customer Managed Key List page allows you to view the tag information of the selected resource, and you can add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, search the existing list of created Keys and Values and select
Table. Customer-managed key tag tab items

Job History

You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the Customer Managed Key List page.

CategoryDetailed description
Work HistoryTask execution details
  • encryption, decryption, signing, verification, data key generation, rewrap API log entry display
Work Date/TimeTask execution date and time
Resource TypeResource Type
Resource nameResource Name
Work resultTask execution result (success/failure)
Operator InformationUser information for the performed task
Table. Customer Managed Key Operation History Tab Detailed Information Items

Managing Customer-Managed Keys

You can create a new version of a registered key or change its usage status.

Configure customer-managed key rotation

Key rotation is a function that converts the internal algorithm of a generated key to a different value.

Reference
  • When rotating the key, only the master key value changes, and the ciphertext and plaintext values of previously generated data keys remain unchanged.
  • Even if key rotation is performed, the master key retains the previous version’s data, so decryption using the master key is unaffected, and the value of the data key in use also remains unchanged.
    • Note that if you wrap with the updated master key (decrypt and then re‑encrypt), calling the rewrapData API will trigger the key rotation function.
  • When rotating a customer-managed key, the key’s version is changed internally. * By using the newly generated version of the key, you can decrypt information that was encrypted with the previous version of the key. * (maintain compatibility)
    • Versions through key rotation are compatible up to the 100th version regardless of the encryption algorithm.

To create a new version of a customer-managed key (key rotation), follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Security > Key Management Service menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of Key Management Service.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Customer Managed Key menu. 2. Navigate to the Customer Managed Key List page.
  3. Customer Managed Key List page, click the resource to view detailed information. 3. Navigate to the Customer Managed Key Details page.
  4. On the Customer Managed Key Details page, click the Key Rotation button. 4. Key Rotation Go to the notification window.
  5. In the Key Rotation notification window, click the Confirm button.

Configure Customer-Managed Key Activation

You can configure the usage of the selected key.

Reference
When you set a key to a disabled state, users who rely on that key can no longer use it.

To set the activation/deactivation status of a customer-managed key you created, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Security > Key Management Service menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of Key Management Service.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Customer Managed Key menu. 2. Navigate to the Customer Managed Key List page.
  3. On the Customer Managed Key List page, click the resource to view its details. 3. Navigate to the Customer Managed Key Details page.
  4. On the Customer Managed Key Details page, click the Key Activation/Key Deactivation button. 4. Key activation/Key deactivation Navigate to the notification dialog.
  5. In the Key activation/key deactivation notification window, click the OK button.

Encryption case using Key Management Service

The following is an example procedure for encrypting and storing important data of a user application by obtaining a data key from KMS.

  1. When the application starts, it obtains a data key using the KMS master key information, then performs and stores secure data encryption on the client side with the plaintext data key.
  2. The data key is stored in the database in an encrypted form using the master key.
  3. When performing secure data decryption, the data key stored in the database is retrieved and a decryption request is made using the KMS master key information.

The encryption/decryption process using the Key Management Service key is explained with the following diagram.

Encryption

Encryption Process Example
Figure. KMS Encryption Process Example

Decryption

Decryption Procedure Example
Figure. KMS Decryption Procedure Example

Terminate customer-managed key

You can revoke customer-managed keys that are not in use.

Caution
If you revoke the key, you will no longer be able to use any requests or features of the customer-managed key, and it will be permanently deleted either immediately upon revocation or 72 hours later through a scheduled revocation.

To cancel a customer-managed key, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Security > Key Management Service menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of Key Management Service.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Customer Managed Key menu. 2. Navigate to the Customer Managed Key List page.
  3. On the Customer Managed Key List page, click the resource to view its details. 3. Navigate to the Customer Managed Key Details page.
  4. On the Customer Managed Key Details page, click the Terminate Service button. 4. Navigate to the Service Cancellation alert window.
  5. In the Service termination alert window, select Immediate termination/Scheduled termination, verify the details, and click the Confirm button.
  6. When termination is complete, verify on the Customer Managed Key List page whether the resource has been terminated.
    • When the key deletion is complete, a notification is sent to both the user who created the key and the user who deleted it.
Reference
  • Even if you click the Service Termination button in the More Options menu at the far right of the generated customer-managed key list, you can terminate the selected key.
  • To cancel the cancellation of a reserved service, click the Cancel Termination button on the customer-managed key list page or the detail page.
    • Cancel Service Termination popup window, when you click Confirm, the selected key is not deleted and is restored in a disabled state.
    • To reuse the key, click the Customer Managed Key Details page’s Activate Key button.

1.2.1 - Encryption Example Using Key Management Service Keys

Encryption example using Key Management Service keys

This is a Java code example for implementing envelope encryption and data signing/verification using a key generated in KMS.

Reference
The code below is a simple reference example to help understand the Samsung Cloud Platform KMS. Since only the functions required for KMS operation are described, executing it as is will cause an error. Be sure to modify and use it according to the user’s actual scenario.

Envelope encryption

It presents an envelope encryption scenario, and you can review the Java, Go, and Python example code and their output generated according to the scenario.

Scenario

  1. To encrypt password information using the envelope encryption method, a Data Key is issued.
  2. Encrypt the password using the issued Data Key information.
  3. Encrypt the password and encrypted Data Key information using envelope encryption and store them in a JSON file.

Java example code

This is a Java example code written according to the provided scenario.

// URI
static String KMS_API_BASE_URI = {{ OpenAPI 가이드의 URL 참조 }};
// END POINT
static String KMS_API_DECRYPT = "/v1/kms/openapi/decrypt/%s";
static String KMS_API_CREATE_DATAKEY = "/v1/kms/openapi/datakey/%s";
// KEY ID
static String KEY_ID = {{마스터 키 ID}};

createEnvelop() {
    // 새로운 데이터 키 생성을 요청
    String encryptedDataKey = getDataKey();
    // 암호화를 할 데이터
    String example_json_data = "{\"PASSWORD\":\"SECRET_CREDENTIAL\"}";
    // 암호화된 데이터 봉투(Envelop encryption)
    String envelope = encryptData(example_json_data, encryptedDataKey);
    // 이 예제 코드에서는 암호화된 데이터 봉투를 파일로 저장
    File envelopeFile = new File("envelope.json");
}

getDataKey() {
    String endPoint = String.format(KMS_API_CREATE_DATAKEY, KEY_ID);
    String url = KMS_API_BASE_URI + endPoint;
    JSONObject data = new JSONObject();
    data.put("key_type", "plaintext");
    JSONObject respJsonObject = callApi(endPoint, data.toJSONString());
    return respJsonObject.get("ciphertext").toString();
}

encryptData() {
    Map<String, String> envelope = new HashMap<>();
    // 데이터 키 복호화
    String dataKey = decryptDataKey(encryptedDataKey);
    // Cipher Class 사용 (사용자가 기 사용 중인 암호화 알고리즘 사용 가능)
    SecretKey secretKey = new SecretKeySpec(decodeBase64(dataKey), "{사용자 선택 알고리즘}");
    Cipher cipher = Cipher.getInstance("{사용자 선택 알고리즘}");
    cipher.init(Cipher.ENCRYPT_MODE, secretKey);
    byte[] iv = cipher.getParameters().getParameterSpec(IvParameterSpec.class).getIV();
    byte[] cipherText = cipher.doFinal(obj.toString().getBytes());

    envelope.put("encryptedKey", encryptedDataKey);
    envelope.put("cipherText", encodeBase64(cipherText));
    envelope.put("iv", encodeBase64(iv));

    return JSONValue.toJSONString(envelope);
}

decryptDataKey() {
    String endPoint = String.format(KMS_API_DECRYPT, KEY_ID);
    JSONObject data = new JSONObject();
    data.put("cipherText", sealedKey);
    JSONObject respJsonObject = callApi(endPoint, data.toJSONString());
    String plaintext = (respJsonObject.get("plaintext")).toString();
    return plaintext;
}

Go example code

This is a Go example code written based on the provided scenario.

// URI
const KMS_API_BASE_URI = {{ OpenAPI 가이드의 URL 참조 }}

// END POINT
const KMS_API_DECRYPT = "/v1/kms/openapi/decrypt/%s"
const KMS_API_CREATE_DATAKEY = "/v1/kms/openapi/datakey/%s"

// KEY ID
const KEY_ID = {{마스터 키 ID}}

createEnvelop() {
        // 새로운 데이터 키 생성을 요청
        encryptedDataKey := getDataKey()
        // 암호화를 할 데이터
        example_json_data := "{\"PASSWORD\":\"SECRET_CREDENTIAL\"}"
        // 암호화된 데이터 봉투(Envelop encryption)
        envelope := encryptData(example_json_data, encryptedDataKey)
        // 이 예제 코드에서는 암호화된 데이터 봉투를 파일로 저장
        file, _ := os.Create("envelope.json")
        defer file.Close()
        file.WriteString(envelope)
}

getDataKey() {
        endPoint := fmt.Sprintf(KMS_API_CREATE_DATAKEY, KEY_ID)
        data := map[string]interface{}{
            "key_type": "plaintext",
        }
        jsonData, _ := json.Marshal(data)
        respJsonObject := callApi(endPoint, jsonData)
        info := &KMSDatakeyInfo{}
        json.Unmarshal([]byte(respJsonObject), info)

        return info.DataKey
}

encryptData() {
        envelope := make(map[string]string)
        // 데이터 키 복호화
        dataKey := decryptDataKey(encryptedDataKey)
        secretKey, _ := base64.StdEncoding.DecodeString(dataKey)

        // Cipher Class 사용
        block, _ := {사용자 선택 알고리즘}.NewCipher(secretKey)
        cipherText := make([]byte, {사용자 선택 알고리즘}.BlockSize+len(example_json_data))
        iv := cipherText[:{사용자 선택 알고리즘}.BlockSize]
        if _, err := io.ReadFull(rand.Reader, iv); err != nil {
               panic(err)
        }

        mode := cipher.NewCFBEncrypter(block, iv)
        mode.XORKeyStream(cipherText[{사용자 선택 알고리즘}.BlockSize:], []byte(example_json_data))

        envelope["encryptedKey"] = encryptedDataKey
        envelope["cipherText"] = base64.StdEncoding.EncodeToString(cipherText)
        envelope["iv"] = base64.StdEncoding.EncodeToString(iv)

        jsonString, _ := json.Marshal(envelope)

        return string(jsonString)
}

decryptDataKey() {
        endPoint := fmt.Sprintf(KMS_API_DECRYPT, KEY_ID)
        data := map[string]interface{}{
               "cipherText": sealedKey,
        }
        jsonData, _ := json.Marshal(data)
        respJsonObject := callApi(endPoint, jsonData)
        info := &KMSDecryptInfo{}
        json.Unmarshal([]byte(respJsonObject), info)

        return info.DecryptedData

}

Python example code

This is a Python example code written according to the presented scenario.

# URI
KMS_API_BASE_URI = {{ OpenAPI 가이드의 URL 참조 }}

# END POINT
KMS_API_DECRYPT = "/v1/kms/openapi/decrypt/"
KMS_API_CREATE_DATAKEY = "/v1/kms/openapi/datakey/"

# KEY ID
KEY_ID = {{마스터 키 ID}}

create_envelop()
    # 새로운 데이터 키 생성을 요청
    encrypted_data_key = get_dataKey()

    # 암호화를 할 데이터
    example_json_data = {"PASSWORDTEST":"SECRET_CREDENTIALTEST"}
    json_data_str = json.dumps(example_json_data)

    # 암호화된 데이터 봉투(Envelop encryption)
    envelope = encrypt_data(json_data_str,encrypted_data_key)

    # 이 예제 코드에서는 암호화된 데이터 봉투를 파일로 저장
    with open("envelope.json", "w") as file:
        file.write(envelope)


get_dataKey()
    end_point = f"{KMS_API_CREATE_DATAKEY}{KEY_ID}"
    data = {
        "key_type": "plaintext"
    }
    response_object = call_api(end_point, data)

    data_key = response_object.get("ciphertext", "")

    return data_key


encrypt_data()
    envelope = {}
    # 데이터 키 복호화
    dataKey = decrypt_data_key(encrypted_data_key)
    decoded_data_key = base64.b64decode(dataKey)

    # Cipher Class 사용
    iv = get_random_bytes(16)
    cipher = {사용자 선택 알고리즘}.new(decoded_data_key, {사용자 선택 알고리즘}.MODE_CBC, iv)
    data_to_encrypt = obj
    data_bytes = data_to_encrypt.encode()
    padded_data = pad(data_bytes, {사용자 선택 알고리즘}.block_size)
    cipher_text = cipher.encrypt(padded_data).hex()

    envelope["encryptedKey"] = encrypted_data_key
    envelope["cipherText"] = cipher_text
    envelope["iv"] = base64.b64encode(iv).decode()

    return json.dumps(envelope)

decrypt_data_key()
    end_point = f"{KMS_API_DECRYPT}{KEY_ID}"
    data = {}
    data["cipherText"] = sealed_key
    resp_json_object = call_api(end_point,data)
    plaintext = resp_json_object.get("decryptedData")
    return plaintext

Example code result

Displays the result of the example code.

  {
        "cipherText":"d3S81rzaGAl8U12LlKSlRbDekPlGuibTntXX962KCjBIKuXdPOG8N8vk3Jet8lyG",
        "iv":"0kP7QKZ6BUeQPlThk4tySA==",
        "encryptedKey":"vault:v1:KJjjLtGHTbaV5N8LWC5O9eMDCaJVeff5SM\/MAYseugjiqiXFVgdXaKXg6kym0NmjHkO\/wLPsa+YK0aVk"
    }

Use envelope encryption

You can present an envelope encryption usage scenario and view the Java, Go, and Python example code and results written according to the scenario.

Scenario

  1. Decrypt the Data Key of the encrypted envelope file.
  2. Decrypt the encrypted data of the envelope file using the decrypted Data Key.

Java example code

This is a Java example code written according to the provided scenario.

// URI
static String KMS_API_BASE_URI = {{ OpenAPI 가이드의 URL 참조 }};
// END POINT
static String KMS_API_DECRYPT = "/v1/kms/openapi/decrypt/%s";
// KEY ID
static String KEY_ID = {{마스터 키 ID}};;


getData() {
    // 암호화된 데이터 봉투(Envelop encryption)
    String envelope = new String(Files.readAllBytes(Paths.get("envelope.json")));
    JSONParser parser = new JSONParser();
    JSONObject envelopeJson = (JSONObject) parser.parse(envelope);
    String encryptedDataKey = envelopeJson.get("encryptedKey").toString();
    String cipherText = envelopeJson.get("cipherText").toString();
    String iv = envelopeJson.get("iv").toString();

    return decryptData(cipherText, encryptedDataKey, iv);
}

decryptData() {
    String dataKey = decryptDataKey(encryptedDataKey);
    IvParameterSpec ivParameterSpec = new IvParameterSpec(decodeBase64(iv));
    SecretKey secretKey = new SecretKeySpec(decodeBase64(dataKey), "{사용자 선택 알고리즘}");
    Cipher cipher = Cipher.getInstance("{사용자 선택 알고리즘}");
    cipher.init(Cipher.DECRYPT_MODE, secretKey, ivParameterSpec);
    byte[] plaintext = cipher.doFinal(decodeBase64(cipherText));

    return new String(plaintext);
}

decryptDataKey() {
    String endPoint = String.format(KMS_API_DECRYPT, KEY_ID);
    JSONObject data = new JSONObject();
    data.put("cipherText", sealedKey);
    JSONObject respJsonObject = callApi(endPoint, data.toJSONString());
    String plaintext = (respJsonObject.get("plaintext")).toString();
    return plaintext;
}

Go example code

This is a Go example code written according to the presented scenario.

// URI
const KMS_API_BASE_URI = {{ OpenAPI 가이드의 URL 참조 }}

// END POINT
const KMS_API_DECRYPT = "/v1/kms/openapi/decrypt/%s"

// KEY ID
const KEY_ID = {{마스터 키 ID}}

getData() {
    // 암호화된 데이터 봉투(Envelop encryption) 불러오기
    jsonData, _ := os.ReadFile("envelope.json")
    var envelope map[string]interface{}
    if err := json.Unmarshal(jsonData, &envelope); err != nil {
           fmt.Println("JSON 파싱 오류:", err)
           os.Exit(1)
    }
    encryptedDataKey := envelope["encryptedKey"].(string)
    cipherText := envelope["cipherText"].(string)
    iv := envelope["iv"].(string)

    return decryptData(cipherText, encryptedDataKey, iv)
}

decryptData() {
    dataKey := decryptDataKey(encryptedDataKey)
    ciphertext, _ := base64.StdEncoding.DecodeString(cipherText)
    dataKeyBytes, _ := base64.StdEncoding.DecodeString(dataKey)
    decodedData := ciphertext[{사용자 선택 알고리즘}.BlockSize:]
    ivparam := ciphertext[{사용자 선택 알고리즘}.BlockSize]
    block, _ := {사용자 선택 알고리즘}.NewCipher(dataKeyBytes)

    mode := cipher.NewCFBDecrypter(block, ivparam)
    mode.XORKeyStream(decodedData, decodedData)
    decryptedData := string(decodedData)

    return decryptedData
}

decryptDataKey() {
    endPoint := fmt.Sprintf(KMS_API_DECRYPT, KEY_ID)
    data := map[string]interface{}{
           "cipherText": sealedKey,
    }
    jsonData, _ := json.Marshal(data)
    respJsonObject := callApi(endPoint, jsonData)
    info := &KMSDecryptInfo{}
    json.Unmarshal([]byte(respJsonObject), info)

    return info.DecryptedData
}

Python example code

This is a Python example code written according to the presented scenario.

# URI
KMS_API_BASE_URI = {{ OpenAPI 가이드의 URL 참조 }}

# END POINT
KMS_API_DECRYPT = "/v1/kms/openapi/decrypt/"

# KEY ID
KEY_ID = {{마스터 키 ID}}

get_data()
    # 암호화된 데이터 봉투(Envelop encryption) 열기
    with open("envelope.json", "r") as file:
        envelope = file.read()
    envelope_json = json.loads(envelope)
    encrypted_data_key = envelope_json["encryptedKey"]
    cipher_text = envelope_json["cipherText"]
    iv = envelope_json["iv"]
    return decrypt_data(cipher_text, encrypted_data_key, iv)

decrypt_data()
    data_key = decrypt_data_key(encrypted_data_key)
    iv_bytes = base64.b64decode(iv)
    decoded_data_key = base64.b64decode(data_key)
    cipher_txt = bytes.fromhex(cipher_text)

    cipher = {사용자 선택 알고리즘}.new(decoded_data_key, {사용자 선택 알고리즘}.MODE_CBC, iv_bytes)
    plain_text_bytes = unpad(cipher.decrypt(cipher_txt), {사용자 선택 알고리즘}.block_size)
    plain_text = plain_text_bytes.decode('utf-8')
    return plain_text

decrypt_data_key()
    end_point = f"{KMS_API_DECRYPT}{KEY_ID}"
    data = {}
    data["cipherText"] = sealed_key
    resp_json_object = call_api(end_point,data)
    plaintext = resp_json_object.get("decryptedData")
    return plaintext

Example code result

Displays the result of the example code.

  {"PASSWORD":"SECRET_CREDENTIAL"}

Use data signature

It provides a data signing usage scenario to guarantee data integrity, and you can review the Java, Go, and Python example code and their results as written according to the scenario.

Scenario

  1. Call the OpenAPI to sign the data.
  2. The signed data is enveloped and saved as a JSON file.

Java example code

This is a Java example code written according to the provided scenario.

// URI
static String KMS_API_BASE_URI = {{ OpenAPI 가이드의 URL 참조 }};

// END POINT
static String KMS_API_SIGN = "/v1/kms/openapi/sign/%s";

// KEY ID
static String KEY_ID = {{마스터 키 ID}};

signEnvelop() {
    // 서명 데이터 봉투(Envelop encryption)
    String envelope = sign();
    // 이 예제 코드에서는 서명 데이터 봉투를 파일로 저장
    File envelopeFile = new File("signEnvelope.json");
    OutputStream os = new BufferedOutputStream(new FileOutputStream(envelopeFile));

    try {
        os.write(envelope.getBytes());
    } finally {
        os.close();
    }
}

sign() {
    Map<String, String> envelope = new HashMap<>();

    String example_credential = "SCP KMS Sign Test!!!";
    String endPoint = String.format(KMS_API_SIGN, KEY_ID);
    JSONObject data = new JSONObject();
    data.put("input", encodeToBase64(example_credential));

    JSONObject respJsonObject = callApi(endPoint, data.toJSONString());

    envelope.put("signature", respJsonObject.get("signature").toString());
    if(respJsonObject.get("batch_results") != null) {

        envelope.put("batch_results", respJsonObject.get("batch_results").toString());
    }

    return JSONValue.toJSONString(envelope);
}

Go example code

This is a Go example code written according to the presented scenario.

// URI
const KMS_API_BASE_URI = {{ OpenAPI 가이드의 URL 참조 }}

// END POINT
const KMS_API_SIGN = "/v1/kms/openapi/sign/%s"

// KEY ID
const KEY_ID = {{마스터 키 ID}}

signEnvelop() {
    // 서명 데이터 봉투(Envelop encryption)
    envelope := sign()
    // 이 예제 코드에서는 서명 데이터 봉투를 파일로 저장
    file, _ := os.Create("signEnvelope.json")
    defer file.Close()
    file.WriteString(envelope)
}

sign() {
    envelope := make(map[string]string)
    example_credential := "SCP KMS Sign Test!!!"
    endPoint := fmt.Sprintf(KMS_API_SIGN, KEY_ID)
    data := map[string]interface{}{
        "input": base64.StdEncoding.EncodeToString([]byte(example_credential)),
    }
    jsonData, _ := json.Marshal(data)
    respJsonObject := callApi(endPoint, jsonData)
    info := &KMSSignInfo{}
    json.Unmarshal([]byte(respJsonObject), info)

    envelope["signature"] = info.Signature

    jsonString, _ := json.Marshal(envelope)

    return string(jsonString)
}

Python example code

This is a Python example code written according to the presented scenario.

# URI
KMS_API_BASE_URI = {{ OpenAPI 가이드의 URL 참조 }}

# END POINT
KMS_API_SIGN = "/v1/kms/openapi/sign/"

# KEY ID
KEY_ID = {{마스터 키 ID}}

sign_envelop()
    # 서명 데이터 봉투(Envelop encryption)
    envelope = sign()

    # 이 예제 코드에서는 서명 데이터 봉투를 파일로 저장
    with open("signEnvelope.json", "w") as file:
        file.write(envelope)


sign()
    envelope = {}

    example_credential = "SCP KMS Sign Test!!!"
    end_point = f"{KMS_API_SIGN}{KEY_ID}"
    credential_bytes = example_credential.encode('utf-8')

    data = {
        "input": base64.b64encode(credential_bytes).decode('utf-8')
    }

    resp_json_object = call_api(end_point,data)

    envelope["signature"] = resp_json_object.get("signature")

    return json.dumps(envelope)

Example code result

Displays the result of the example code.

  {
    "signature":"vault:v1:qHGf4ALkTao1Yy\/lpSbLQ2l8YVpsHWBP6ic3Ux1BKSodQQxnEIrjPyUwXXQ1NZfGSVxdeVe5Y6kb0nUPNADQpzkOh9\/e8T\/QCOs9==",
    "projectId":"PROJECT-qWrHRJX5sZnTkopcr9N1dk"
}

Use data validation

It presents a verification usage scenario for validating data integrity, and you can view the Java, Go, and Python example code and their results written according to the scenario.

Scenario

  1. Retrieves the signature value of the signed envelope file.
  2. Validates the signed data and outputs the result.

Java example code

This is a Java example code written according to the provided scenario.

// URI
static String KMS_API_BASE_URI = {{ OpenAPI 가이드의 URL 참조 }};

// END POINT
static String KMS_API_VERIFY = "/v1/kms/openapi/verify/%s";

// KEY ID
static String KEY_ID = {{마스터 키 ID}};

getSign() {
    // 서명 데이터 봉투(Envelop encryption)
    String envelope = new String(Files.readAllBytes(Paths.get("signEnvelope.json")));
    JSONParser parser = new JSONParser();
    JSONObject envelopeJson = (JSONObject) parser.parse(envelope);
    String signature = envelopeJson.get("signature").toString();

    return verify(signature);
}

verify() {
    String endPoint = String.format(KMS_API_VERIFY, KEY_ID);
    JSONObject data = new JSONObject();
    data.put("input", "U0NQIEtNUyBTaWduIFRlc3QhISE=");
    data.put("signature", signature);
    JSONObject respJsonObject = callApi(endPoint, data.toJSONString());
    String valid = (respJsonObject.get("valid")).toString();
    return valid;
}

Go example code

This is a Go example code written according to the presented scenario.

// URI
const KMS_API_BASE_URI = {{ OpenAPI 가이드의 URL 참조 }}

// END POINT
const KMS_API_VERIFY = "/v1/kms/openapi/verify/%s"

// KEY ID
const KEY_ID = {{마스터 키 ID}}

getSign() {
    // 서명 데이터 봉투(Envelop encryption) 불러오기
    jsonData, _ := os.ReadFile("signEnvelope.json")
    var envelope map[string]interface{}
    if err := json.Unmarshal(jsonData, &envelope); err != nil {
           fmt.Println("JSON 파싱 오류:", err)
           os.Exit(1)
    }
    signature := envelope["signature"].(string)

    return verify(signature)
}

verify() {
    endPoint := fmt.Sprintf(KMS_API_VERIFY, KEY_ID)
    data := map[string]interface{}{
           "input":          "U0NQIEtNUyBTaWduIFRlc3QhISE=",
           "signature":      signature,
    }
    jsonData, _ := json.Marshal(data)
    respJsonObject := callApi(endPoint, jsonData)
    info := &KMSVerifyInfo{}
    json.Unmarshal([]byte(respJsonObject), info)

    return info.Valid
}

Python example code

This is a Python example code written according to the presented scenario.

# URI
KMS_API_BASE_URI = {{ OpenAPI 가이드의 URL 참조 }}

# END POINT
KMS_API_VERIFY = "/v1/kms/openapi/verify/"

# KEY ID
KEY_ID = {{마스터 키 ID}}

get_sign()
    # 서명 데이터 봉투(Envelop encryption) 열기
    with open("signEnvelope.json", "r") as file:
        envelope = file.read()
    envelope_json = json.loads(envelope)
    signature = envelope_json["signature"]

    return verify(signature)


verify()
    end_point = f"{KMS_API_VERIFY}{KEY_ID}"

    data = {
        "input": "U0NQIEtNUyBTaWduIFRlc3QhISE=",
        "signature": signature
    }

    resp_json_object = call_api(end_point,data)
    valid = resp_json_object.get("valid")

    return valid

Example code result

Displays the result of the example code.

  {
    "valid": true
}

1.2.2 - Platform-managed Key

Users can view detailed information about the platform-managed key automatically generated for service provisioning on the Samsung Cloud Platform.

Reference
  • Platform-managed keys are created and managed directly by the CSP (Cloud Service Provider), so users cannot modify or delete key attributes.
  • When another product within Samsung Cloud Platform uses a KMS key for encryption, the CSP generates a platform-managed key itself and performs the encryption, even if the user does not create a key directly in KMS.

Check detailed information of platform-managed key

You can view the full resource list and detailed information of platform-managed keys. The Platform Managed Key Details page consists of Details, Operation History tabs.

To view detailed information about the Key Management Service, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Security > Key Management Service menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of Key Management Service.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Platform Managed Key menu. You will be taken to the Platform Managed Key List page.
  3. On the Platform Managed Key List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Platform Managed Key Details page.
    • Platform Managed Key Details page displays status information and descriptions of additional features at the top.
      CategoryDetailed description
      statusDisplay the status of the platform-managed key
      • Active: Available/Active
      Table. Platform Managed Key Status Information

Detailed Information

On the Platform Managed Key List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource.

Category
Detailed description
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource nameResource Name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
Creation date and timeService creation timestamp
key nameName of the generated key
ExplanationShow additional description for the key
  • Edit icon can be clicked to edit
Table. Platform Managed Key Detailed Information Tab Items

Job History

You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the Platform Managed Key List page.

CategoryDetailed description
Work logTask execution details
  • Encryption, decryption, signing, verification, data key generation, rewrap API log entry display
Operation date and timeTask execution date and time
Resource TypeResource Type
Resource nameResource Name
ResultTask execution result (success/failure)
Operator InformationUser information for the performed operation
Table. Platform Managed Key Operation History Tab Detailed Information Items

1.3 - API Reference

API Reference

1.4 - CLI Reference

CLI Reference

1.5 - Release Note

Key Management Service

2026.03.19
FEATURE Platform-managed key service offering
  • In addition to the ‘customer-managed key’ that the user creates directly, a ‘platform-managed key’ service generated and managed by the CSP (Cloud Service Provider) is also provided.
    • When another product within Samsung Cloud Platform encrypts using a KMS key, it can encrypt with a platform-managed key generated directly by the CSP without the user having to create a key directly in KMS.
2025.10.23
FEATURE Expanded log provision and notification feature improvement
  • We improved traceability by segmenting and logging operation histories for API calls such as encryption and decryption at the individual API level, making it easier to manage tracking of API calls.
  • When an encryption key is deleted, it provides a notification not only to the user who deleted the key but also to the key creator, and the notification additionally includes the region name where the encryption key is located.
2025.07.01
FEATURE Additional encryption methods provided
  • We also provide the generation/verification (HMAC) encryption method used for creating and verifying hash-based message authentication codes.
2025.02.27
NEW Key Management Service service official version release
  • We have launched an encryption key management service (Key Management Service) to securely protect critical data in customer applications.
  • You can generate, provide, and manage encryption keys for various purposes (encryption/decryption, signing/verification).

2 - Config Inspection

2.1 - Overview

Service Overview

Config Inspection is a service that diagnoses the security level of Console settings for each service of the Samsung Cloud Platform. Provides a security checklist organized by areas such as IAM, Networking, Database, and Logging, and checks the current status via API calls to verify whether the recommended security settings for each diagnostic item are applied.

Users can create a diagnostic target by creating a service, then request a diagnosis, and view the diagnosis request results through a Report. The report provides the diagnostic request history and per-item diagnostic results, and for diagnostic items that require the user’s final confirmation or action, detailed results—including the resource information and action guide corresponding to each item—can be viewed.

Configuration diagram
Figure. Config Inspection configuration diagram

Provided Features

Config Inspection provides the following features.

  • Console Diagnostics: You can call the Console API using an authentication key method to assess the security level.
  • Diagnostic Target Management: Through service creation, you can create and manage a user’s Samsung Cloud Platform account as a diagnostic target.
  • Diagnostic Request: On the resource detail screen, you can request a diagnosis by clicking the Diagnostic Request button.
  • Diagnostic Result Management: In Report, you can view the list of diagnostic requests and detailed diagnostic results, and download them as an Excel file.

Components

Checklist

The checklist is a collection of diagnostic items that serve as the basis for diagnostic results, and the checklist currently provided by Config Inspection is as follows.

  • Refer to the 체크 리스트 for the detailed diagnostic items of the checklist provided by Samsung Cloud Platform.
CloudChecklist nameNumber of items
Samsung Cloud PlatformBest Practice27
Samsung Security Index (SSI)24
Table. Config Inspection checklist types
Reference
The SSI checklist can only be used in the Samsung region.

Report

In the Config Inspection Report, you can view the diagnostic results in the order of result list, result details, and item details.

CategoryDetailed description
Diagnostic Result ListAll diagnostic request history in the Account
  • Completed: The diagnostic request has been successfully completed
    • Click the instance to view detailed diagnostic results
  • Error: The diagnostic request was not completed successfully
    • If the diagnostic result is an error, detailed diagnostic results are not provided.
    • The cause of the error can be found in the Config Inspection details
Detailed Diagnosis ResultsResult of a successfully completed diagnostic request (diagnostic item list)
  • PASS: No vulnerable resources exist in the diagnostic item.
  • FAIL: Vulnerable resources exist in the diagnostic item.
  • CHECK: User’s final confirmation is required regarding vulnerability.
  • ERROR: There is an error with user/authentication key permissions or the API call.
  • N/A: No resources correspond to the diagnostic item.
Diagnostic Item DetailsDetailed results by diagnostic item
Table. Config Inspection Report Diagnostic Configuration

Preliminary Service

Config Inspection has no preceding service.

2.1.1 - Checklist

You can view the types of checklists provided by Config Inspection and the detailed diagnostic items for each checklist.

Checklist

A checklist is a collection of diagnostic items that serve as the basis for diagnostic results, and the types of checklists currently provided by Config Inspection are as follows.

CloudChecklist nameNumber of items
Samsung Cloud PlatformBest Practice27
Samsung Security Index (SSI)24
Table. Config Inspection checklist types
Reference
The SSI checklist can only be used in the Samsung region.

Best Practice

The detailed diagnostic items of the Best Practice checklist provided by Samsung Cloud Platform are as follows.

areaDiagnostic Items
IAM
  • The authority to manage Account users should be granted only to users who need to manage IAM Users, in accordance with the principle of least privilege.
  • There must be no long‑term inactive users.
  • A policy that allows access only from authorized IPs for all users must be applied.
  • Permissions must be granted according to the principle of least privilege, taking into account job duties and usage purposes.
Networking
  • A NAT Gateway must not be created in a Private Subnet that does not require Internet access.
  • Network integration products must use a firewall.
  • Unnecessary local subnets must not exist, and only the Virtual Server (VM) or Bare Metal Server (BM) required for operation may be connected within the created local subnet.
  • Remote access ports for each protocol must have Internet access blocked, and connections should be allowed only for specified IPs that require access.
  • Security Groups should register only the necessary rules on an IP/Port basis.
  • The firewall of network integration products should register only the necessary rules on an IP/Port basis.
Compute
  • When using a Cloud Functions function URL, you must apply access control.
Container
  • The control plane of the Kubernetes cluster must not use public endpoints.
  • Only authorized resources should be allowed to access the private endpoints of the Kubernetes cluster.
  • Restrict access to the Container Registry so that only authorized IP resources can connect.
  • Enable vulnerability scanning for Container Registry images and remediate any discovered vulnerabilities.
  • Prevent the use of vulnerable images in the Container Registry.
Database
  • DB must be deployed in a Private Subnet and have internet access blocked.
  • KMS Keys must grant the minimum necessary permissions only to entities that require access.
  • KMS Keys must be rotated periodically (within 90 days) using the automatic rotation feature.
Logging
  • Enable the Trail service of Logging&Audit and set the scope to all regions/resource types/users.
  • Set the log file verification of Logging&Audit Trail to enabled.
  • The Trail logs of Logging&Audit must be retained for at least one year.
  • Security Group must have logging enabled.
  • Enable NAT logging for Internet Gateway.
  • Enable control plane logging for Kubernetes Engine clusters.
  • Network integration products must have Firewall logging enabled.
  • DB audit logs must be stored.
Table. Samsung Cloud Platform Best Practice checklist items

Samsung Security Index (SSI)

The detailed diagnostic items of the Samsung Security Index (SSI) checklist provided by Samsung Cloud Platform are as follows.

areaDiagnostic Items
IAM
  • Have you granted the authority to manage Account users to the minimum personnel?
  • Are there any unused accounts?
  • Do you enforce access control for all Samsung Cloud Platform users?
  • Are you minimizing user permissions according to job duties and usage purposes?
Networking
  • Is a Private Subnet that does not require external system access for business prohibited from connecting to a NAT Gateway?
  • Does the network integration product use a firewall?
  • Is the local subnet connected only to the resources that are needed?
  • Have only the necessary rules at the IP/Port level been registered in all Security Groups?
  • Has the firewall of the network integration product been configured with only the necessary rules at the IP/Port level?
Container
  • Are you enforcing access control on Cloud Functions?
  • Have you set the Kubernetes Engine API Server endpoint to private?
  • Are you restricting access to the Kubernetes Engine API Server endpoint?
  • Are you enforcing access control on Container Registry?
  • Have you completed vulnerability scanning and remediation for Container Registry images?
  • Are you restricting pulls of vulnerable images?
Database
  • Is the DB configured within a dedicated private subnet and its internet access blocked?
  • Have you granted only the entities that require access to the KMS key the minimal necessary permissions?
  • Is the KMS key automatically rotated on a regular basis?
Logging
  • Have you enabled the Trail service of Logging&Audit and set its scope to all?
  • Have you configured integrity verification for log files?
  • Are you storing the Trail logs of Logging&Audit?
  • Have you enabled Security Group logging?
  • Have you enabled Firewall logging for network‑integrated products?
  • (If using DBaaS) Have you enabled DB Audit?
Table. Samsung Cloud Platform SSI checklist items

2.2 - How-to guides

Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Config Inspection service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Create Certificate

To create and use the Config Inspection service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console, you need to generate an authentication key in advance.

Authentication key creation can be done from My menu > My Info. > Authentication Key Management > Create Authentication Key. For more details, refer to Manage Authentication Keys.

Reference
  • The expiration period of the authentication key is up to 365 days.
  • To generate an authentication key with no expiration date, you must create it permanently.

Create Config Inspection

You can create and use the Config Inspection service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Reference
Users must belong to the AdministratorGroup user group in order to properly use the services provided by the Config Inspection service.

To create a Config Inspection, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Security > Config Inspection menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Config Inspection.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Config Inspection button. You will be taken to the Create Config Inspection page.
  3. Config Inspection Creation On the page, input what is required to create a service, and select detailed options.
    • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      Diagnosis Type-Automatic configuration via Console
      CloudRequiredSelect cloud for diagnosis
      • SCP: Samsung Cloud Platform
      • AWS: Amazon Web Services
      • Azure: Microsoft Azure
      • Detailed input fields vary depending on the selected cloud type
      Diagnostic Target > Diagnosis NameRequiredName to distinguish the diagnostic target
      • Use the entered value as the resource name
      • Enter within 25 characters using English letters, numbers, and special characters (-, _)
      Diagnostic target > Diagnostic accountRequiredConsole information to be diagnosed
      • Select the Account ID to diagnose from the list
      • Selecting the same Account ID will result in duplicate requests and incur additional charges
      • If AWS is selected, enter the Account ID (12 digits) for the diagnostic account
      • If Azure is selected, enter the Subscription ID (36 characters, including letters, numbers, and special characters) for the diagnostic account
      Diagnosis Schedule > ChecklistRequiredAutomatically set when Use is selected for diagnostic schedule
      Diagnostic Schedule > Diagnostic CycleRequiredSelect Diagnosis Interval
      • The diagnosis runs on the selected date according to the specified interval.
      • If Monthly is selected, the diagnosis may not be performed on the selected date.
        • Example) Selecting the 31st of each month – February has no such date, so the diagnosis is not performed.
      Diagnostic Schedule > Start TimeRequiredSelect diagnostic start time
      • Set the hour and minute information for starting the diagnostic
      authentication keyRequiredSelect the authentication key to use for Open API calls
      • Select button, click to choose the appropriate authentication key from the list in the Authentication Key Selection popup
      • If no selectable authentication key is available, click Authentication Key Management to create a new authentication key
      Pricing planSelectSelect a plan to use
      • Standard: Charged based on the number of diagnoses
      • Monthly subscription: Charged a fixed amount each month regardless of the number of diagnoses (up to 30 diagnoses per month)
      • The plan cannot be changed after the service is requested
      Table. Config Inspection Service Information Input Items
    • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
      Category
      Required status
      Detailed description
      tagSelectAdd Tag
      • Up to 50 per resource can be added
      • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key and Value values
      Table. Config Inspection additional information input fields
  4. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Create button.
    • When creation is complete, check the created resources on the Config Inspection List page.

Check detailed information of Config Inspection

Config Inspection service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. The Config Inspection Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity History tabs.

To view detailed information of the Config Inspection service, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Security > Config Inspection menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Config Inspection.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Config Inspection menu. You will be taken to the Config Inspection list page.
  3. Config Inspection List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Config Inspection Details page.
    • Config Inspection Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and is composed of Details, Tags, Work History tabs.
      CategoryDetailed description
      statusDisplays the status of Config Inspection
      • Ready: When there is no diagnostic request after the service is created (diagnostic request possible)
      • In Progress: When a diagnostic request is being executed (diagnostic request/service termination not allowed)
      • Error: When an error occurs in the diagnostic request (diagnostic request possible)
      • Completed: When the diagnostic request completes successfully (diagnostic request possible)
      Diagnostic requestButton to perform console diagnostics
      Service terminationButton to cancel the service
      Table. Config Inspection status information and additional features

Detailed Information

Config Inspection List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and modify the information if necessary.

CategoryDetailed description
ServiceService name
Resource TypeResource Type
SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
Resource nameResource Name
Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
ConstructorUser who created the service
Creation date and timeService creation timestamp
EditorUser who edited the service information
Modification dateDate and time the service information was modified
Diagnosis TypeDiagnostic types offered by the service
CloudDiagnosis target types
diagnostic targetConsole information for the diagnostic target
  • Provides the diagnostic target’s diagnostic name and diagnostic account information
  • If the diagnostic target is AWS or Azure, you can click the Edit icon to modify the diagnostic account
Pricing planSelected plan type
Recent diagnosis date/timeTimestamp of the last executed diagnostic request
Recent diagnostic resultsResult of the most recent diagnostic request
  • COMPLETED: The diagnostic request completed successfully
  • ERROR: The diagnostic request did not complete successfully
    • UNAUTHORIZED: Key permissions used for the diagnostic request need to be verified
    • INVALID_INPUT_VALUE: Input values such as the diagnostic account need to be verified
    • CONNECTION_FAIL: Console access control settings need to be verified
    • ETC: Other errors such as diagnostic engine issues require contacting the service desk
※ Diagnostic results can be viewed in the Security > Config Insepction > Report menu
authentication keyThe authentication key of the user registered when creating the service
  • Access Key, user, status information provided
  • Access Key information and the edit icon are displayed only to the user who created the corresponding authentication key
    • Click the edit icon to modify the authentication key
  • If the authentication key is deleted, it is shown with a - status; if it is expired, it is shown as expired
  • Authentication key information (Access Key, status) for resources created by other users is displayed as -
Diagnostic ScheduleDisplay selected diagnostic schedule information
  • If the diagnostic target is SCP, you can click the Edit icon to change the diagnostic schedule
Table. Config Inspection Detailed Information Tab Items

tag

Config Inspection List page lets you view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.

CategoryDetailed description
Tag listTag list
  • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
  • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
  • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
Table. Config Inspection tag tab items

Job History

On the Config Inspection List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

CategoryDetailed description
Task History ListResource Change History
  • Operation Time, Resource ID, Resource Name, Operation Details, Event Topic, Operation Result, Check operator information
Table. Config Inspection work history tab items

Config Inspection Resource Management

If you need to view the status of a Config Inspection resource or request a diagnosis, you can perform the task on the Config Inspection List or Config Inspection Details page.

Modify authentication key

You can select the authentication key to use for diagnosis for each diagnostic target.

To modify the service’s authentication key, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Security > Config Inspection menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Config Inspection.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Config Inspection menu. You will be taken to the Config Inspection list page.
  3. On the Config Inspection List page, click the resource whose authentication key you want to edit. Then go to the Config Inspection Detail page.
  4. Check the authentication key and click the Edit icon. The Edit Authentication Key popup window opens.
  5. Edit Authentication Key Select the authentication key to use in the popup window and click the Confirm button.
    CategoryDetailed description
    authentication keyAuthentication Key Detailed Information
    Creation date and timeAuthentication key creation date
    Expiration date and timeAuthentication key expiration date
    statusAuthentication key status
    • Active: Usable
    • Expired: Usage period expired
    Table. Authentication key edit popup items
Reference
  • If the authentication key is deleted, it is displayed in the - state.
  • The authentication key information (authentication key, status) of resources created by other users is displayed as -.

Request Diagnosis

You can request a diagnosis from the Console based on the configured checklist.

To request a console diagnosis, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Security > Config Inspection menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Config Inspection.

  2. On the Service Home page, click the Config Inspection menu. You will be taken to the Config Inspection list page.

  3. On the Config Inspection List page, click the resource you want to request a diagnosis for. You will be taken to the Config Inspection Details page.

  4. On the Config Inspection Details page, click the Diagnostic Request button. The Diagnostic Request popup opens.

  5. In the Diagnosis Request popup, enter the information required for the diagnosis and click the Confirm button.

    • Diagnostic Request The items in the popup window vary depending on the selected Console.
      CategoryDetailed description
      Console access methodFix the authentication key method as the console access method.
      ChecklistSet to Best Practice when selecting SCP
      authentication keyIf you select SCP, choose the pre-generated authentication key.
      Access KeyIf AWS is selected, enter the Access Key.
      Secret KeyIf AWS is selected, enter Secret Key
      Client IDEnter Client ID when Azure is selected
      Client SecretIf Azure is selected, enter Client Secret
      Tenant IDIf Azure is selected, enter Tenant ID
      Table. Diagnosis request popup items
  6. Check the status value on the Config Inspection list page.

    • When the diagnostic request is completed, the status value is displayed as Completed or Error.
    • In the case of Completed, you can view the diagnostic request results in the diagnostic results menu. For more details, refer to Report Management.
Reference
For detailed information on the prerequisite settings required to run diagnostics for each console, see Set up prerequisites.

Terminate Config Inspection

You can cancel the Config Inspection service you are not using. However, canceling Config Inspection will delete all stored diagnostic data.

Caution
  • If you terminate the resource, all diagnostic data will be deleted, and you will not be able to view diagnostic results in the Report.
  • If the status of the Config Inspection service is In Progress, the service cannot be terminated.

To disable Config Inspection, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Security > Config Inspection menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Config Inspection.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Config Inspection menu. You will be taken to the Config Inspection list page.
  3. On the Config Inspection List page, click the resource to be terminated. You will be taken to the Config Inspection Details page.
  4. Config Inspection Details on the page, click the Cancel Service button.
  5. After the termination is complete, check on the Config Inspection List page whether the resource has been terminated.

2.2.1 - Check Dashboard

Users can view the diagnostic results of the Config Inspection service at a glance on the dashboard through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

Check Dashboard

On the dashboard page, you can view the status of Config Inspection diagnostic targets, diagnostic history, and more.

To view the dashboard, follow these steps.

  1. Click the All Services > Security > Config Inspection menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Config Inspection.
  2. On the Service Home page, click the Dashboard menu. You will be taken to the Dashboard page.
  3. Check the summary of diagnostic results on the Dashboard page.
    • Dashboard page at the top allows you to view dashboard information based on the period or diagnosis name.
      • Period: You can set a period within six months from the current month to view a summary of the diagnostic results.
      • Diagnosis Name: If you select All, you can view a summary of the entire diagnostic results, and if you select a diagnostic account, you can view the detailed information of that specific diagnostic result.
    • Click the Download button to download the information displayed on the dashboard page as a PDF file.
      CategoryDetailed description
      Security level (overall)Display the average of the latest diagnostic results for all subjects
      • Recent diagnostic results are displayed in the list
      • Diagnostic score calculation formula = Total – (Fail + Error + Check)) / Total x 100
      Diagnosis status by periodDisplay diagnostic status by target during the search period
      • Diagnosis Completed: Show recent completed diagnosis records
        • Diagnosis Error: Show recent diagnosis error records, navigate to the detailed diagnosis result page when a diagnosis name is selected
        Summary of diagnostic results by period (overall)Display summary of diagnostic results (overall) during the search period
        • Selecting a diagnosis name from the list navigates to the detailed diagnostic result page
        Table. Detailed dashboard item description for overall diagnostic results
        CategoryDetailed description
        Security levelDisplay the latest diagnostic result score for the selected diagnostic account
        • Recent diagnostic results are displayed in the list
        Summary of diagnostic results by periodDisplay summary of the diagnostic results for the last diagnostic account within the search period
        Vulnerability status by periodDisplay the vulnerability assessment results of the diagnostic account as a graph during the search period
        • When a graph is selected, display detailed information of the vulnerable items in the assessment results
        Table. Detailed dashboard item description for diagnostic results per diagnostic account

    2.2.2 - Manage Diagnosis Results

    Config Inspection You can view the diagnostic request results on the diagnostic results page and modify the diagnostic results.

    Reference

    The diagnostic results are generated when a diagnostic request is made in the Config Inspection service, and they are deleted when the service is terminated.

    Check diagnosis results

    On the diagnosis results page, you can view the results of the diagnosis request.

    Check diagnostic result list

    To view the list of diagnostic results, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > Config Inspection menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Config Inspection.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Diagnosis Results menu. You will be taken to the Diagnosis Results List page.
    3. View the summary information of diagnostic results on the Diagnostic Results List page.
      CategoryDetailed description
      Diagnosis nameResource name
      diagnostic accountConsole information subject to diagnosis
      ChecklistCollection of diagnostic items that serve as the basis for diagnostic results
      PASSNumber of checklist items with a diagnosis result of PASS (normal)
      FAILNumber of checklist items with a diagnosis result of FAIL (vulnerable)
      CHECKNumber of items in the checklist with a diagnosis result of CHECK (verification required)
      ERRORNumber of items in the checklist whose diagnosis result is ERROR (diagnosis not possible)
      N/ANumber of items in the checklist where the diagnosis result is N/A (not applicable)
      AllTotal number of checklist items
      diagnostic resultDiagnosis request result
      • Completed: The diagnosis request has been successfully completed; clicking Completed navigates to the detail page
      • Error: The diagnosis request was not completed successfully; error items cannot view detailed information
      Diagnosis date and timeDiagnosis request date and time
      Table. Diagnosis result list items

    View detailed diagnostic result information

    To view detailed information of the diagnostic results, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > Config Inspection menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Config Inspection.

    2. On the Service Home page, click the Diagnosis Results menu. You will be taken to the Diagnosis Results List page.

      • On the Diagnosis Result List page, you can enter a diagnosis name in the search area or click the Detailed Search button to perform a search.
    3. Diagnostic Results List page, click the item whose diagnostic result is Completed. You will be taken to the diagnostic result detail page.

      • Items with a diagnostic result in error status do not display detailed information.
    4. On the Detailed Diagnosis Results page, view the detailed diagnosis results.

      CategoryDetailed description
      Excel downloadDownload the detailed diagnosis results list as an Excel file
      More > Diagnosis Result ManagementGo to the diagnostic results management page
      ChecklistCollection of diagnostic items that serve as the basis for diagnostic results
      AreaDiagnostic Scope (services of Samsung Cloud Platform)
      Diagnostic itemsRecommended security standards for each service configuration
      ResultDiagnostic Item Criteria Inspection Results
      Table. Detailed diagnosis result items

    5. Click the diagnostic item to view detailed information. Diagnostic Item Details popup will open.

      • Diagnostic Item Details In the popup window, you can view the following information.
        CategoryDetailed description
        AreaDiagnostic Scope (services of Samsung Cloud Platform)
        Diagnostic itemsRecommended security standards for each service configuration
        ResultDiagnostic Item Criteria Inspection Results
        Diagnostic criteriaResult Evaluation Criteria
        Diagnostic methodHow to check the current settings
        Action GuideConfiguration method that meets security standards
        Detailed resultsResource information and settings for the diagnostic item
        Change diagnosis resultButton to modify the diagnosis result
        • When the diagnosis result is modified, the Check Result button is displayed, and clicking the Delete button removes the modified result
        Table. Config Inspection diagnostic item details

    Manage Diagnostic Results

    On the diagnosis results page, you can modify the results of items whose diagnosis status is CHECK.

    Change Diagnosis Result

    To change the diagnostic result, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > Config Inspection menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Config Inspection.

    2. On the Service Home page, click the Diagnosis Results menu. You will be taken to the Diagnosis Results List page.

    3. On the Diagnosis Result List page, click the item whose diagnosis result is Completed. You will be taken to the Diagnosis Result Details page.

      • Items with a diagnostic result in error status do not display detailed information.
    4. On the Diagnosis Result Details page, click the More > Diagnosis Result Management button at the top. You will be taken to the Diagnosis Result Management page.

    5. On the Diagnosis Result Management page, click the Change Result button for the item whose diagnosis result you want to modify. The Change Result popup window will open.

    6. Result Change In the popup window, select or enter the information required to change the result.

      CategoryRequiredDetailed description
      Registrant-Diagnostic result change registrant email
      Validity periodRequiredSet the diagnostic result validity period
      Result changeRequiredSelect the diagnostic result to change among Pass, Check, Fail
      Detailed reasonRequiredEnter the detailed reason for changing the result.
      Attached fileSelectUpload the files required to verify result changes
      • Click the Attach File button to upload files, up to 5 can be registered
      Inspection Result-Display detailed inspection results
      Table. Detailed items of diagnostic result changes

    7. Review the entered information and click the Register button. Verify whether the diagnostic results have changed in the Diagnostic Result Management list.

    Delete diagnostic result change history

    To delete the diagnostic result change log, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > Config Inspection menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Config Inspection.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Diagnosis Results menu. You will be taken to the Diagnosis Results List page.
    3. On the Diagnosis Result List page, click the item whose diagnosis result is Completed. You will be taken to the Diagnosis Result Details page.
      • Items with a diagnostic result in error status do not display detailed information.
    4. Diagnosis Result Details page, click the Diagnosis Result Management button at the top. You will be taken to the Diagnosis Result Management page.
    5. On the Diagnosis Result Management page, click the Check Result button for the item whose diagnosis result you want to change. The Check Result popup will open.
    6. Check Result in the popup window, click the Delete button.

    2.2.3 - Pre-configuration

    Users must perform pre‑cloud configuration such as generating authentication keys and adding access‑control IPs through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console to use the Config Inspection service.

    Reference
    The configuration items vary depending on the cloud type you use. Refer to the appropriate chapter and configure the required items for each cloud.

    Configuring Samsung Cloud Platform Console

    To diagnose Samsung Cloud Platform and external clouds in the Config Inspection service, set the items below.

    Check policies attached to user groups

    guide
    • Config Inspection can diagnose the Samsung Cloud Platform or external clouds. Depending on the diagnostic target, you can assign appropriate policy requirements to user groups for use.
      • Verify that a user group policy matching the desired diagnostic target is configured.
      • If policy creation is required, please contact the Account administrator.

    To check the policy of the user group to which the user belongs, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Management > IAM menu. Go to the Service Home page of IAM.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the User Group menu. You will be taken to the User Group List page.
    3. On the User Group List page, click the user group you want to view. You will be taken to the User Group Details page.
    4. User Group Details page, click the Policy tab. You will be taken to the Policy tab page.
    5. Click the policy you want to view on the Policy tab page. You will be taken to the Policy Details page.
    6. Check the detailed information on the Policy Details page.
      • Verify that the policy information in the table below is configured. If necessary, contact the administrator to add the policy.
        ItemPolicy Requirement 1Policy Requirement 2
        actionList, ReadCreate, Delete, List, Read, Update
        Applied resourceAll resourcesIndividual Resource (Config Inspection)
        Authentication TypeAll authenticationTemporary key authentication, Console login
        Applied IPCustom IP
        • The IP for diagnostics is 123.37.11.42, and the IP for the user to access the console must be added separately
        Custom IP
        Table. Detailed policy setting items for all cloud diagnostics

    Generate authentication key

    You can view and generate the authentication key used for the Config Inspection service.

    guide
    • You can create a maximum of two authentication keys.
    • After generating a new authentication key, you must apply the updated API authentication key to the services you are using.

    To create an authentication key in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console, follow these steps.

    1. Click the My menu > My info. menu in the Console. You will be taken to the My info. detail page.
    2. My info. Click the API Key Management tab on the detail page. Navigating to the API Key Management tab page.
    3. On the Key Management tab page, click the Create Key button. You will be taken to the Create Key page.
      • You can view the list of authentication keys on the authentication key management page.
    4. On the Create Authentication Key page, after entering the expiration period, click the Confirm button.
    5. Verify that the generated authentication key is displayed in the authentication key list.

    Add allowed IP

    You can add allowed IP addresses in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    To add an allowed IP for the Console, follow these steps.

    1. Click the My menu > My info. menu in the Console. Go to the My info. detail page.
    2. My info. Click the API Key Management tab on the detail page. You will be taken to the API Key Management tab page.
    3. Authentication Key Management tab page, click the Edit icon of the Security Settings item. Edit Authentication Key Security Settings popup opens.
    4. Edit Authentication Key Security Settings In the popup window, enter the authentication method and allowed IP address.
      • Select the authentication method authentication key.
      • Set the allowed access IP to Use, enter the IP address, and click the Add button.
    5. When the allowed IP addition is complete, click the Confirm button. Verify that the Security Settings item has been updated with the entered information.

    Configure AWS

    To diagnose the AWS (Amazone Web Services) cloud in the Config Inspection service, set the items below.

    Add permission policy

    You can add permission policies for users or user groups in the AWS Console.

    Add user permission

    To add a user access policy in the AWS Console, follow these steps.

    1. Click IAM > Users in the AWS Console.
    2. Select the diagnostic user name from the user list.
    3. Click the Permissions tab on the user information page.
    4. Select Add Permission in the permission policy.
      • When adding permissions, select ReadOnlyAccess, ViewOnlyAccess.

    Add user group permissions

    To add a user group access permission policy in the AWS Console, follow these steps.

    1. Click IAM > User Groups in the AWS Console.
    2. Select the group that the user belongs to from the user group list.
    3. Click the Permissions tab on the user group page.
    4. Select Add Permission in the permission policy.
      • When adding permissions, select ReadOnlyAccess, ViewOnlyAccess.

    Add access control IP

    If you are using an IP access control policy, you need to add an exception IP to the policy.

    Add user access control IP

    To add a user access control IP in the AWS Console, follow these steps.

    1. Click IAM > Users in the AWS Console.
    2. Select the diagnostic user name from the user list.
    3. Click the Permissions tab on the user information page.
    4. In the permission policy item, click Edit of the IP Access Control Policy.
      • Add 123.37.24.82 to the block exception IP list.

    Add IP to user group access control

    To add a user group access control IP in the AWS Console, follow these steps.

    1. Click IAM > User Groups in the AWS Console.
    2. Select the group that the user belongs to from the list of user groups.
    3. Click the Permissions tab on the user group page.
    4. In the permission policy item, click Edit of the IP Access Control Policy.
      • Add 123.37.24.82 to the block exception IP.

    Access Key creation

    To create an Access Key in the AWS Console, follow these steps.

    1. Click IAM > Users in the AWS Console.
    2. Select the diagnostic user name from the user list.
    3. Click the Security Credentials tab on the user information page.
    4. On the Security Credentials page, click Access Keys.
    5. Create Access Key page, generate an access key for third‑party services.
      • Be sure to save the generated access key information.
    Caution

    Secret Key can be downloaded as a CSV file or recorded separately.

    • Secret key information can only be viewed when creating the access key and cannot be recovered later.

    Configure Azure

    To diagnose Azure cloud in the Config Inspection service, set the items below.

    Entra ID Application registration

    To register an Entra ID Application in the Azure Console, follow these steps.

    1. Click Microsoft Entra ID > App registrations in the Azure Console.
    2. On the App Registration page, click New Registration.
    3. Register the application (client) ID.
    4. After the app registration is complete, check the app name, application (client) ID, directory (tenant) ID on the overview page.

    Add API permission

    Reference
    To use the Config Inspection service, you must preconfigure it from an account that has the Global Administrator role among Azure AD roles.

    To add API permissions in the Azure Console, follow these steps.

    1. In the Azure Console’s Microsoft Entra ID > App registration (App registrations) > Entra ID Application registration, click App name > API permissions (App permissions) > Add permission (Add a permission).
    2. From the API permissions list, select Microsoft Graph to add permissions.
    3. On the API Permission Request page, click Application Permissions.
      • Select Application.Read.All, Device.Read.All, Group.Read.All, User.Read.All, DeviceManagementManagedDevices.Read.All, AuditLog.Read.All, Directory.Read.All, Domain.Read.All, GroupMember.Read.All, Policy.Read.All, Reports.Read.All from the permission list.
    4. After adding permissions in App API permission registration, click Grant admin consent (Grant admin consent for account name).
      • Check whether the status for the account name has been changed to Allowed (Granted for account name).

    Create Client Secret

    To create a Client Secret in the Azure Console, follow these steps.

    1. In the Azure Console, click App name > Certificates & secrets(Certificates & secrets) under Microsoft Entra ID > App registrations(App registrations) > Entra ID Application registration.
    2. Click New Client Password in the Certificates and Passwords list.
    3. When the client secret is generated, check the Client Secret in the Value(Value) field of the list.
      • Be sure to save the Client Secret value.
    Caution
    The Client Secret value can only be viewed at the time of creation. Be sure to record or store it separately.

    Add subscription access permission in Azure Console

    You can add subscription access permissions in the Azure Console from the tenant root group or an individual Subscription. Choose the method you prefer to add Subscription access permissions.

    Add permission in Tenant Root Group

    To add subscription access permissions in the Azure Console from the Tenant Root Group, follow the steps below.

    1. Click Management groups > Overview in the Azure Console.
    2. Click Tenant Root Group > Access Control (IAM).
      • If you cannot access the Tenant Root Group menu, change the settings below.
        • Microsoft Entra ID > Properties > ‘Account Name’ can manage access to all Azure subscriptions and management groups in this tenant. > Yes (yes) change to
      • After adding the permission, you must change it to No.
    3. On the Access Control page, click Add(Add) > Add role assignment(Add role assignment).
    4. On the Add Role Assignment page, after entering the details, click Save (Review+assign).
      • When entering role assignment information, select the information below in the Role and Member tabs to add the app created in Entra ID Application registration. You must add all three of the following permissions.
        CategoryPermission
        Reader(Reader)User, group, or service principal(Users, group, or service principal)
        Key Vault Reader (Key Vault Reader)User, group, or service principal(Users, group, or service principal)
        Reader and Data AccessUser, group, or service principal(Users, group, or service principal)
        Table. Additional permission items when entering role assignment information

    Add permission in individual Subscription

    To add subscription access permissions in the Azure Console for an individual subscription, follow these steps.

    1. Click Subscription(Subscription) > Overview(Overview) in the Azure Console.
      • Check the Subscription ID(Subscription ID) in the basic information on the Overview page.
    2. Click Subscription(Subscription) > Access Control(IAM).
    3. On the Access Control page, click Add(Add) > Add role assignment(Add role assignment).
    4. On the Add Role Assignment page, after entering the details, click Save (Review+assign).
      • When entering role assignment information, select the information below in the Role and Member tabs to add the app created in Entra ID Application registration. You must add all three of the following permissions.
        CategoryPermission
        Reader(Reader)User, group, or service principal(Users, group, or service principal)
        Key Vault Reader (Key Vault Reader)User, group, or service principal(Users, group, or service principal)
        Reader and Data AccessUser, group, or service principal(Users, group, or service principal)
        Table. Additional permission items when entering role assignment information

    Add access permissions via PowerShell

    To add subscription access permissions in the Azure Console using PowerShell, follow these steps.

    1. Run the following command in Cloud shell > PowerShell of the Azure Console.
      • New-AzRoleAssignment -ObjectId “the App’s Object ID as seen in Enterprise Application” -Scope “/providers/Microsoft.aadiam” -RoleDefinitionName ‘Reader’ -ObjectType ‘ServicePrincipal’
      • If the command does not execute, change the settings below.
        • Microsoft Entra ID > Properties > ‘Account Name’ can manage access to all Azure subscriptions and management groups in this tenant. > yes change to
        • After adding the permission, you must change it to No (no).
    2. Run the command below to verify whether the configuration is complete.
      • Get-AzRoleAssignment –ObjectId "the App’s Object ID found in Enterprise Application" –Scope "/providers/Microsoft.aadiam"
      • If permission deletion is required, run the command below.
        • Remove-AzRoleAssignment -ObjectId “the App’s Object ID as seen in Enterprise Application” -Scope “/providers/Microsoft.aadiam” -RoleDefinitionName ‘Reader’

    2.3 - Release Note

    Config Inspection

    2025.07.01
    FEATURE Expanding service offering
    • We have launched the Config Inspection product, which enables integrated diagnosis and management of customers’ multi‑cloud console security vulnerabilities.
      • You can register the Account (or other cloud account) to be diagnosed, enabling continuous diagnostics, and view the dashboard and detailed results in the Report.
    2025.02.27
    FEATURE Common feature change
    • Samsung Cloud Platform Common Feature Changes
      • Account, IAM, Service Home, tags, and other common CX changes have been applied.
    2024.12.23
    NEW Beta version release
    • You can manage Samsung Cloud Platform Console configuration vulnerabilities through console diagnostics.
    • Provides a report that allows you to view security diagnostic results.

    3 - Certificate Manager

    3.1 - Overview

    Service Overview

    Certificate Manager is a service that supports certificate distribution and integrated management, enabling users to generate SSL/TLS certificates issued by a Certificate Authority (CA) and self‑signed certificates for development or testing purposes, and use them on Samsung Cloud Platform resources. By receiving pre‑expiration notification emails, users can identify certificates that are about to expire and manage the certificate lifecycle.

    Features

    • Simple Creation: You can generate certificates with simple steps in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console. User certificates issued externally are validated, and only certificates that pass verification are distributed.
    • Service Integration: Connect the certificates registered in Certificate Manager to the Load Balancer to encrypt network connections and protect the service.
    • Certificate Expiration Alert: You can identify and replace certificates that are about to expire with periodic notifications up to 1 day before the expiration date.

    Service Architecture Diagram

    Diagram
    Figure. Certificate Manager Diagram

    Provided features

    Certificate Manager provides the following features.

    • Certificate Creation: You can generate a user certificate issued by a certification authority or a self-signed certificate suitable for development/testing (Self-signed).
    • Connected Resource Lookup: You can view Samsung Cloud Platform resources that are using the certificate. Currently, it provides a list of Load Balancer listeners (HTTPS).
    • Expiration Alert: You can set expiration alert recipients for each certificate. Emails are sent to the recipients starting 45 days before expiration. (Sent 45/30/15/7/1 days before expiration)

    Component

    User certificates in Certificate Manager consist of a Private Key, Certificate Body, and Certificate Chain. Enter the entire certificate information, including the BEGIN and END lines.

    Private Key

    Enter the private key in PEM format. Private Key supports RSA and must be entered as a decrypted value.

    -----BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY-----
    (개인키)
    -----END RSA PRIVATE KEY-----
    

    Certificate Body

    Enter the Server (Leaf) certificate in PEM format. Only one certificate can be entered in the Certificate Body.

    -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
    (서버 인증서)
    -----END CERTIFICATE-----
    

    Certificate Chain

    Enter the upper-level certificate in PEM format. Input them in the order Sub (Intermediate) CA → Root CA, and you may omit this only for self‑signed or self‑issued certificates.

    -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
    (중간 인증서)
    -----END CERTIFICATE-----
    -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
    (루트 인증서)
    -----END CERTIFICATE-----
    

    Constraints

    Certificate Manager provides services on a per‑Region basis. Create the service in the required Region and use it. The quota per Region is as follows.

    CategoryDefault quantityExplanation
    CERTIFICATE_MANAGER.USER_CERT_DEFAULT.COUNT100Number of user certificates per Region
    CERTIFICATE_MANAGER.SELFSIGNED_CERT_DEFAULT.COUNT100Number of self-issued certificates per Region
    Table. Certificate Manager constraints

    Prior Service

    Certificate Manager has no prerequisite services.

    3.2 - How-to guides

    Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Certificate Manager service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Create Certificate Manager

    You can create and use the Certificate Manager service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    To request the creation of a Certificate Manager service, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > Certificate Manager menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Certificate Manager button. 2. Go to the Create Certificate Manager page.
    3. Create Certificate Manager page, enter the information needed to create the service, and choose detailed options.
      • In the Service Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
        Category
        required status
        Detailed description
        Certificate nameRequiredEnter the Certificate Manager name to use
        • Enter within 3-30 characters, including English letters, numbers, and special characters (-, _, .)
        • Cannot be the same as an existing name
        typeRequiredSelect the Certificate Manager type to use
        • User Certificate: a public certificate issued by a Certificate Authority (CA)
        • Self-issued Certificate: a certificate self-issued (Self-signed) by Samsung Cloud Platform
          • Since it is relatively less secure, it is recommended for development/testing use only.
        User Certificate > Certificate BodyRequiredEnter Server(Leaf) certificate information
        • Only one certificate can be entered in the certificate body
        • Enter the full content, including the lines from —–BEGIN CERTIFICATE—– to —–END CERTIFICATE—–
        User Certificate > Private KeyRequiredEnter the private key information
        • The Private Key supports the RSA encryption method
        • The Private Key can be entered in an unencrypted PEM format
        • Enter the entire content, including the lines from —–BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY—–to —–END RSA PRIVATE KEY—-
        User Certificate > Certificate ChainRequiredEnter the Certificate Chain information
        • Can be omitted when using a private certificate
        • The Certificate Chain should be entered in the order: Intermediate (Subordinate) certificate → Root certificate
        • For a public certificate, the Certificate Chain information must be entered; only when there is no intermediate certificate (Chain CA) should use be disabled
        • Enter the full content, including the lines from —–BEGIN CERTIFICATE—– —–END CERTIFICATE—–
        • If there are multiple Intermediate (Subordinate) certificates, enter each certificate’s content in order
        User Certificate > Certificate ValidationRequiredValidate the entered certificate’s validity
        Self-signed certificate > Common NameRequiredEnter the domain name to use the certificate
        Self-issued certificate > Organization UnitRequiredEnter the organization and department that will use the certificate
        Self-issued certificate > Start dateRequiredEnter the certificate start date (creation date)
        Self-issued certificate > Expiration dateRequiredEnter the certificate expiration date
        Expiration alertSelectionSet whether to receive pre‑expiration certificate alerts
        • Select Use to enable expiration alerts
        • If expiration alerts are set, an email is sent to the recipients 45, 30, 15, 7, and 1 days before the certificate expires
        Expiration Alert > Alert RecipientRequiredSelect notification recipients when using expiration alerts
        • Enter a user name in the search area to select notification recipients
        • Up to 100 recipients can be registered
        Table. Certificate Manager service information input items
        Reference
        • If the entered certificate information is invalid, you cannot create the Certificate Manager service.
        • If the Private Key is encrypted, enter the decrypted value using the openssl command below.
          • openssl rsa -in [Encrypted Private Key File name] -out [Decrypted Private Key File name]
        • For certificates issued via Let’s Encrypt, even if you already have a previously issued Certificate Chain value, extract it again and enter it.
      • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
        Category
        required status
        Detailed description
        tagSelectionAdd Tag
        • Up to 50 can be added per resource
        • After clicking the Add Tag button, input or select Key, Value values
        Table. Certificate Manager additional information input fields
    4. Review the entered service information and additional details, then click the Create button.
      • When creation is complete, check the created resource on the Certificate Manager List page.
        Reference

        To create a Load Balancer for use with the Certificate Manager service, click Load Balancer creation in Service Home.

    Check Certificate Manager detailed information

    The Certificate Manager service allows you to view and edit the full list of resources and detailed information. Certificate Manager Details page consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Activity History tabs.

    To view detailed information for Certificate Manager, follow these steps.

    1. All Services > Security > Certificate Manager Click the menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of Certificate Manager.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Certificate Manager menu. 2. Navigate to the Certificate Manager List page.
    3. On the Certificate Manager List page, click the resource to view its detailed information. 3. Navigate to the Certificate Manager Details page.
      • Certificate Manager Details page displays the status and detailed information of the Certificate Manager, and consists of Details, Connected Resources, Tags, Activity History tabs.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Service statusCertificate Manager status
        • Creating: In progress
        • Active/Valid: Certificate valid
        • Expired: Certificate expired
        • Editing: Changing settings
        • Terminating: Terminating
        • Error: Certificate error
        Service terminationButton to cancel Certificate Manager
        Table. Status information and additional features

    Detailed Information

    Certificate Manager List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and, if necessary, edit the information.

    CategoryDetailed description
    serviceService Name
    Resource typeResource Type
    SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
    Resource nameResource Name
    Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
    ConstructorUser who created the service
    Creation date and timeService creation date and time
    ModifierUser who edited the service information
    Modification dateDate and time the service information was modified
    Certificate nameCertificate Manager certificate name
    typeCertificate type information
    Issuing AuthorityUser Certificate Issuing Authority Information
    Common NameSelf-issued certificate display of information entered when creating the service
    Organization UnitSelf-issued certificate Display the information entered when creating the service
    Additional domainUser Certificate’s registered SAN information, displayed up to a maximum of 250
    Public Key informationUser Certificate’s key algorithm type and length display
    Signature algorithmUser Certificate’s issuing authority signature method display
    Use statusIndicates whether the connected resource is registered
    Start date/time / Expiration date/timeDisplay the certificate’s start/expiration date
    Number of days remaining until expirationDisplay the number of days remaining until expiration based on the current date
    • After the expiration date, display ‘-’
    Expiration alertCertificate expiration alert settings details
    • Click the Edit button to modify the usage of expiration alerts and the alert recipients
    • For expired certificates, the edit button is disabled and cannot be modified
    Table. Certificate Manager detailed information items

    Connected resource

    On the Certificate Manager List page, you can view the connected Load Balancer information.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Load BalancerLoad Balancer resource ID attached to the service
    ListenerClick the name of the Listener resource ID
    • connected to the service to display the detail information window
    statusDisplay the status of Listeners connected to the service
    Table. Connected Resources tab items of Certificate Manager

    Tag

    On the Certificate Manager List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Tag listTag list
    • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
    • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
    • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
    Table. Certificate Manager Tag tab items

    Job History

    You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the Certificate Manager List page.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Task History ListResource Change History
    • You can view operation details, operation time, resource type, resource name, operation result, and operator information
    • Operation History List When you click the corresponding resource in the list, the Operation History Details popup opens
    Table. Certificate Manager operation history tab detailed information items

    Terminate Certificate Manager

    You can request the termination of the Certificate Manager service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Caution
    You cannot delete it if there are resources connected to the Certificate Manager service. To cancel the service, first delete the connected resources.

    To request termination of the Certificate Manager service, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > Certificate Manager menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of Certificate Manager.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Certificate Manager menu. 2. Go to the Certificate Manager List page.
    3. On the Certificate Manager List page, click the resource to view its detailed information. 3. Navigate to the Certificate Manager Details page.
    4. On the Certificate Manager Details page, click the Cancel Service button.
    5. Once the termination is complete, verify the service termination status in the Certificate Manager list.

    3.2.1 - Extract Certificate Chain

    Users can extract and input the Certificate Chain certificate to be used when creating a Certificate Manager service.

    Extract Certificate Chain

    You can extract the Certificate Chain value required when creating a Certificate Manager.

    Caution

    The Certificate Chain consists of Intermediate (Subordinate) certificates issued by a trusted certification authority and the Root certificate.

    • Even if you already have a Certificate Chain value, extract and register the Intermediate (Subordinate) certificate through the Root certificate again using the Certificate Body file. (Recommended)

    Extract Intermediate (Subordinate) Certificate Value

    You can extract the intermediate (subordinate) certificate from the certificate chain required for user certificate enrollment.

    Reference
    If there are two or more Intermediate(Subordinate) certificates, extract the values for each certificate.

    To extract the Intermediate(Subordinate) certificate value, follow these steps.

    1. Run the certificate file in crt format on the PC. The certificate window will appear.
    2. In the certificate window, click the Certificate Path tab.
      • If the file is in PEM format, convert it to a .crt file.
    3. Click the certificate under Root and click View Certificate.
    4. After clicking the Details tab, click Copy to file.
    5. When the certificate export wizard runs, click Next.
    6. Select the format Base 64-encoded X.509(.CER)(S) and click Next.
    7. Click Browse to select the folder where you want to save the file, then click Next.
    8. Click Finish. The certificate export wizard will complete.
    9. Open the exported file as a TEXT file and verify the values.
      • The extracted certificate value must start and end with —–BEGIN CERTIFICATE—– and —–END CERTIFICATE—-.

    Extract Root certificate value

    You can extract the root certificate of the certificate chain required for user certificate enrollment.

    To extract the Root certificate value, follow these steps.

    1. Run the certificate file in crt format on the PC. The certificate window will appear.
    2. In the certificate window, click the Certificate Path tab.
      • If the file is in PEM format, convert it to a .crt file.
    3. Click the topmost Root certificate and click View Certificate.
    4. After clicking the Details tab, click Copy to File.
    5. When the certificate export wizard runs, click Next.
    6. Select the format Base 64-encoded X.509(.CER)(S) and click Next.
    7. Click Browse to select the path where you want to save the file, then click Next.
    8. Click Finish. The certificate export wizard will complete.
    9. Open the exported file in TEXT format and verify the values.
      • The start and end of the extracted certificate value must include the —–BEGIN CERTIFICATE—– and —–END CERTIFICATE—- entries.

    Enter Certificate Chain value

    This explains how to enter the extracted Intermediate (Subordinate) certificate and Root certificate values into the Certificate Chain field when creating a Certificate Manager.

    Reference
    For detailed instructions on creating a Certificate Manager, see Create Certificate Manager.

    To enter the Intermediate (Subordinate) certificate and Root certificate values into the Certificate Chain field, follow these steps.

    1. Execute the Intermediate (Subordinate) certificate file and the Root certificate file as text files.
    2. Copy the entire value of the Intermediate (Subordinate) certificate file.
    3. Paste it into the Certificate Chain input area on the Certicafate Manager Creation page.
      • Paste it, including the —–BEGIN CERTIFICATE—– at the beginning and the —–END CERTIFICATE—- at the end of the certificate value.
    4. Copy the entire value of the Root certificate file.
    5. Paste it into the Certificate Chain input area on the Create Certicafate Manager page.
      • Paste it, including the —–BEGIN CERTIFICATE—– at the beginning and —–END CERTIFICATE—- at the end of the certificate value.
      • Paste the Root certificate value on the line below the Intermediate (Subordinate) certificate.

    3.3 - API Reference

    API Reference

    3.4 - CLI Reference

    CLI Reference

    3.5 - Release Note

    Certificate Manager

    2025.07.01
    NEW Certificate Manager Service Official Version Release
    • We have launched the Certificate Manager service that supports SSL/TLS certificate deployment and unified management.
    • You can register a certificate issued by a Certificate Authority (CA) or generate a Self-signed certificate for development/testing purposes.
    • You can encrypt network communications and manage the certificate lifecycle by connecting to Samsung Cloud Platform resources.

    4 - Secret Vault

    4.1 - Overview

    Service Overview

    Secret Vault is a service that, by using the Open API to connect to the Samsung Cloud Platform, allows you to obtain a secure token‑based temporary key without hard‑coding security information in plain text, enabling access to the Samsung Cloud Platform’s services and resources. It also manages the lifecycle of the temporary key to maintain a hardened security environment when using APIs.

    Features

    • Enhanced Security Environment Implementation: Instead of hardcoding authentication credentials in the application source code, you can obtain a token-based temporary key to mitigate security threats arising from credential leakage.
    • Life-Cycle based temporary key management: To meet security requirements, users do not need to manually manage the lifecycle of temporary keys. It provides automated temporary key management and replacement functions according to the initially configured lifecycle.
    • Various resource utilization possible: Through the Token issued by Secret Vault, you can access not only resources within the Samsung Cloud Platform but also external resources (other CSPs, on‑premise, etc.) in a reinforced security environment.

    Service Architecture Diagram

    Diagram
    Figure. Secret Vault diagram

    Provided features

    Secret Vault provides the following features.

    • Add Token authentication and encrypt authentication key storage: Provides token issuance via an authentication key and temporary key issuance using the token, and securely stores the authentication key information encrypted (AES-256).
    • Temporary Key Life-cycle Management: Provides issuance and automatic replacement of temporary keys according to their life cycle, and allows setting a replacement interval in hours (up to 36 hours).
    • Access Control Feature: IP-based access control of the resources where the user application runs is possible.

    Component

    Secret

    A Secret is an object that combines token information and temporary key rotation information, and can be requested by the user in the console.

    Token

    A token is a unique string used to authenticate a user’s identity and verify permissions, and when making an Open API request, you can obtain a temporary token that allows access to the Samsung Cloud Platform.

    Constraints

    Secret Vault provides a region-based service. Therefore, when creating a Secret, you cannot select an authentication key that is being used by a Secret in another region.

    Prior Service

    Secret Vault does not require any separate prerequisite service work.

    4.2 - How-to guides

    Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Secret Vault service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Create Secret Vault

    You can create and use the Secret Vault service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    To create a Secret Vault, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > Secret Vault menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Secret Vault.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Secret Vault button. You will be taken to the Create Secret Vault page.
    3. On the Create Secret Vault page, enter the information required to create the service and select detailed options.
      • Select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
        Category
        Required status
        Detailed description
        Secret nameRequiredEnter Secret name
        • Enter 3~63 characters using lowercase English letters and numbers
        typeRequiredSelect the type of encryption target
        authentication keyRequiredSelect an authentication key to use with the Secret Vault service
        • Click the Use button and select a pre‑generated authentication key from the Authentication Key Management menu.
        • In the Authentication Key Management menu, you must select one‑time authentication as the security authentication method.
        • Expired authentication keys are not displayed, and keys with a remaining validity of less than 30 days or keys already in use for a Secret Vault product cannot be used. (Only one Secret Vault product can be applied per authentication key.)
        Token usage periodRequiredEnter the usage period of the Token provided by encrypting the authentication key
        • The Token usage period is automatically set to match the validity period of the entered authentication key by default.
        • If the authentication key validity period is set to permanent, the Token usage period can be set up to a maximum of 7,300 days (20 years).
        • The Token usage period cannot be changed after the service application is completed.
        • Periodic replacement of the Token is recommended to enhance security.
        • When the Token usage period expires, temporary key issuance is not possible, and you must obtain a new Token by submitting a new service application.
        • Once the Token usage period expires, it cannot be extended and the Token can no longer be used. Before the Token usage period expires, obtain a new Token by submitting a new service application and apply the issued Token information to your source code.
        IMSI key replacement intervalRequiredSelect the temporary key rotation period to be used for accessing Samsung Cloud Platform resources
        • The temporary key usage time is applied from the moment the service creation is completed.
        • For security enhancement, the temporary key usage period can be set to a maximum of 1.5 days (36 hours).
        • A new temporary key is issued before the temporary key expires, and the same usage period applies.
        Allowed IPRequiredEnter the IP to allow access, then click the Add button
        • The entered IP must also be set identically in Key Management > Security Settings > Allowed Access IP for access to be permitted.
        • Even when entering a single IP, be sure to append ‘/32’ after the IP.
        • You can register up to 10 IPs.
        ExplanationSelectEnter additional information
        Table. Secret Vault service information input fields
      • Select the required information in the Additional Information Input area.
        Category
        Required status
        Detailed description
        tagSelectAdd Tag
        • Add Tag Click the button to create and add a tag, or add an existing tag.
        • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource.
        • The newly added tags are applied after the service creation is completed.
        Table. Secret Vault additional information input fields
    4. Summary Verify the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, then click the Complete button.
      • After creation is complete, check the created resources on the Secret Vault List page.

    Check Secret Vault detailed information

    You can view and edit the full list of resources and detailed information for the Secret Vault service. The Secret Vault Details page consists of Details, Tags, and Activity Log tabs.

    To view detailed information about the Secret Vault service, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > Secret Vault menu. You will be taken to the Secret Vault Service Home page.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Secret Vault menu. You will be taken to the Secret Vault List page.
    3. On the Secret Vault List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Secret Vault Details page.
      • Secret Vault Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Secret Vault statusStatus of the Secret Vault created by the user
        • Active: Running
        • To be terminated: Pending termination after a service cancellation request
          • The scheduled termination time of the service is displayed, and you can cancel the service termination.
        • Expired: Token expired state
          • Secrets that have changed to the Expired state cannot perform any actions such as information retrieval, and are automatically deleted after 7 days.
        Replace temporary keyImmediately delete the current temporary key and generate a new temporary key
        • Only the creator of the Secret Vault service can replace the temporary key.
        Service terminationButton to cancel the service
        Table. Secret Vault status information and additional features

    Detailed Information

    Secret Vault List page lets you view detailed information of the selected resource and modify the information if necessary.

    CategoryDetailed description
    ServiceService name
    Resource TypeResource Type
    SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
    Resource nameResource Name
    Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
    ConstructorUser who created the service
    Creation date and timeService creation timestamp
    EditorUser who edited the service information
    Modification dateDate and time the service information was modified
    Secret nameName of the generated Secret
    typeEncryption method
    ExplanationAdditional information or description about the Secret Vault service
    authentication keyAuthentication key used by the Secret Vault service
    Token usage periodValidity period of the Token provided by encrypting the authentication key
    Token expiration timeToken expiration date and time
    Token IDToken’s unique ID
    Token SecretToken Secret generated as a pair with Token ID
    IMSI key replacement intervalRotation period of the temporary key used to access Samsung Cloud Platform resources
    Temporary key expiration date and timeTemporary key expiration date and time
    Allowed IPAllowed IP list
    ExplanationAdditional information or description about Secret Vault
    Table. Secret Vault detailed information tab items

    tag

    On the Secret Vault List page, you can view the tag information of the selected resource and add, modify, or delete it.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Tag listTag list
    • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
    • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
    • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
    Table. Secret Vault tag tab items

    Job History

    On the Secret Vault List page, you can view the operation history of the selected resource.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Task History ListResource Change History
    • You can view operation details, operation time, resource type, resource name, operation result, and operator information
    • Operation History List Click the relevant resource in the list. Operation History Details A popup window will open.
    Table. Secret Vault operation history tab detailed information items

    Terminate Secret Vault

    You can cancel the unused service to reduce operating costs. However, if you cancel the service, the running service may be terminated immediately, so you should thoroughly consider the impact of service interruption before proceeding with the cancellation.

    Caution
    Be careful, as data cannot be recovered after terminating the service.

    To cancel Secret Vault, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > Secret Vault menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Secret Vault.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Secret Vault menu. You will be taken to the Secret Vault List page.
    3. On the Secret Vault List page, select the resource to cancel and click the Cancel Service button. You will be taken to the Cancel Service popup window.
    4. Service Cancellation popup window, after entering the termination waiting period (7~30 days), click the Confirm button. The service will be terminated after the waiting period entered by the user.
    Reference
    • During the termination waiting period, the existing temporary key is deleted, and you cannot issue an additional temporary key to access Samsung Cloud Platform resources.

    Cancel Secret Vault termination

    You can cancel the termination of a service that is pending cancellation and use it again.

    To cancel the termination of Secret Vault, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > Secret Vault menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Secret Vault.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Secret Vault menu to go to the Secret Vault List page.
    3. On the Secret Vault List page, click the resource to cancel the termination. You will be taken to the Secret Vault Detail page.
    4. On the Secret Vault Details page, click the Cancel Termination button. You will be taken to the Cancel Service Termination popup.
    5. Cancel Service Termination After reviewing the content in the popup window, click the Confirm button. The status of the resource for which the termination was canceled will be restored to Active.
    Note
    • If the authentication key used in the Secret has been deleted, you cannot cancel the service termination.
    • If the authentication key used in the Secret has been disabled or deleted, you cannot cancel the service termination. Re‑enable the authentication key first.
    • Only the creator of the Secret Vault service can cancel the service termination.

    Configure Application Token

    The Token information issued through the Secret Vault service application is required for API calls to request OpenAPI temporary key issuance. Set the Token information according to each Application environment.

    To configure the token information, follow these steps.

    1. Apply the token information to the application’s environment variable configuration file.
    2. Configure the token information so that the API call logic within the application can reference it.
      • Use OpenAPI → GET /v1/temporarykey/{secretvault_id}
      • For more details, refer to the Open API Guide in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
    3. Configure the token information so that the API call logic within the application can reference it.
      • The temporary key removes hard coding in the existing source code and can be obtained and used via OpenAPI calls using token information. For details, refer to the Open API Guide in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
    guide
    Below is a reference example. Configure the source code to align with the Application standard that intends to use the Token.

    application.yml or application.properties environment variable configuration files

    Apply the obtained Token information to the environment variable configuration file.

    secretvault.secretvault.id= {{ ID }}
    secretvault.tokenId= {{ Token ID }}
    secretvault.tokenSecret= {{ Token Secret }}
    

    Java file

    Apply it to the class file for environment variable recognition.

    import org.springframework.beans.factory.annotation.Value;
    import org.springframework.context.annotation.Bean;
    import org.springframework.context.annotation.Configuration;
    
    @Configuration
    public class SecretVaultConfiguration {
        @Value("${secretvault.id}")
        private String id;
    
        @Value("${secretvault.tokenId}")
        private String tokenId;
    
        @Value("${secretvault.tokenSecret}")
        private String tokenSecret;
    
        @Bean
        public OpenApiClient openApiClient() {
            // OpenApiClient 또는 다른 API 클라이언트를 생성하고 설정 값을 사용하여 초기화
            return new OpenApiClient(secretVaultName, tokenId, tokenSecret);
        }
    }
    

    4.3 - API Reference

    API Reference

    4.4 - CLI Reference

    CLI Reference

    4.5 - Release Note

    Secret Vault

    2025.07.01
    NEW Secret Vault service official version release
    • The Secret Vault service, which can issue token-based temporary keys and manage their lifecycle, has been launched.

    5 - SingleID

    5.1 - Overview

    Service Overview

    SingleID not only allows authorized users to easily access information assets with a single authentication, but also enhances account security through policy-based permission management and real-time detection of abnormal authentication activities, and provides account management and access structures via comprehensive audit logs.

    Features

    • Easy and convenient login and app integration: By establishing a unified authentication system that allows login from On-Premises to SaaS apps with a single ID, you can improve work productivity. Administrators can easily integrate various apps without domain knowledge of authentication by automating connections to diverse global SaaS apps through the ready-made Pre-Built Connector.
    • Account Management Optimization and Security Enhancement: We systematically manage the account lifecycle—from creation to termination—for a diverse range of users, including employees, partners, corporations, and subsidiaries. Additionally, we grant permissions to authorized users in a timely manner and promptly revoke unnecessary permissions, thereby preventing unauthorized access and strengthening account security.
    • Enhanced Anomaly Detection: By detecting authentication anomalies based on context such as user type, login IP, device information, and access time, security policies can be applied according to the situation to prevent account compromise incidents.
    • Cloud Access Management: It consolidates the access paths of operators/developers accessing public clouds, and implements role‑based temporary‑token console/resource access control to further enhance cloud security in multi‑cloud environments.

    Service Architecture Diagram

    Diagram
    Figure. SingleID diagram

    Provided features

    SingleID provides the following features.

    • Unified Authentication and Account Management
      • Support for various authentication integration protocols (SAML, OIDC, etc.)
      • Providing a self-service feature for app usage requests and approvals
      • Account synchronization for Salesforce, Workday, etc., and synchronization/management of roles (groups) within accounts
      • Provide a sign‑up/withdrawal feature that can issue accounts to partners, customers, and others who are not employees.
    • Passwordless and Multi-Factor Authentication
      • PC/mobile passwordless authentication and multi-factor authentication (MFA)
      • Provide composite authentication for secondary authentication by integrating with the existing primary authentication environment (MFA-only service use case)
      • Private CA(Certificate Service Authority), a private certificate issuance/management feature, provides certificate-based authentication support (separate Use Case)
        • Authentication methods: SMS, email, mOTP, TOTP, PIN, biometrics, Knox Messenger, Windows Hello, etc
    • Authentication and Account Information Integration
      • Automating app integration via Pre-Built Connector
      • Simplifying custom app integration through DIY integration templates
    • Risk-Based Authentication Anomaly Detection
      • Context-based access control according to authentication attempt scenarios
      • Enhancing security through detailed login and authentication policy settings
    • Public Cloud Access Management for Cloud Operators/Developers
      • Console access control via role-based assigned accounts
      • Resource access request/approval and OTP-based credential authentication for resource access

    Component

    The components of the SingleID service are as follows. Users can access the service through the Samsung Cloud Platform SingleID Console.

    • Access Management
      • Support for various authentication integration protocols (SAML, OIDC, etc.)
      • Provide unified login to internal and external business systems with a single sign‑on.
    • Identity Management
      • Lifecycle management from account creation to decommission
      • Directory integration and synchronization (Active Directory, LDAP, etc.)
    • Multi Factor Authentication
      • PC and mobile simple authentication
      • SMS, email, mOTP, TOTP, PIN, biometric, Knox Messenger, Window Hello, etc., offering various multi-factor authentication methods
    • Anomaly Detection Management
      • Context-based access control according to authentication attempt scenarios
      • Providing adaptive access control through risk analysis
    • Cloud Access Management
      • Enhancing cloud security by unifying access paths for cloud operators/developers
      • Role-based temporary token method for console and resource access control

    Provision status by region

    SingleID is available in the environments below.

    RegionProvision status
    Korea West (kr-west1)Provided
    Korea East (kr-east1)Not provided
    South Korea South 1 (kr-south1)Not provided
    South Korea South 2 (kr-south2)Not provided
    South Korea South 3 (kr-south3)Not provided
    Table. SingleID regional availability status

    Prior Service

    SingleID has no prior service.

    5.2 - How-to guides

    Users can create the service by entering the required information for the SingleID service and selecting detailed options through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Reference

    Check the detailed services provided per item in SingleID and apply for the product. The services provided per item are as follows.

    ServiceDetailed description
    Access Management (AM)Unified Authentication (AM) is an integrated authentication service that allows users to log in to everything from on-premises to SaaS applications with a single ID.
    • Unified Authentication (SSO)
    • DIY App Integration
    • Catalog Service
    • Self Service
    • Dashboard
    • Unified Logout Service
    • Account Creation/Registration
    • Tenant Management
    • Agent Management
    Identity Management (IM)Account Management (IM) enables systematic account lifecycle management—from creation to decommissioning—for a variety of users such as employees, partners, corporations, and subsidiaries
    • Permission Management
    • Universal Directory
    • Account Lifecycle Management
    • Provisioning
    • Policy Management
    Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA)Multi-factor authentication (MFA) provides secondary authentication services in various methods when accessing major systems, external systems, mobile devices, etc.
    • Passwordless authentication
    • Multi-factor authentication
    • MFA for Web apps
    • If MFA is requested alone, only the secondary authentication function is provided
    Anomaly Detection Management (ADM)Anomalous behavior detection (ADM) is a service that detects authentication anomalies in login situations, such as user type, login IP, device information, and login time.
    • Authentication Anomaly Detection
    • Anomalous Behavior Detection Email Notification Service
    Cloud Access Management (CAM)Cloud Access Management (CAM) is a privileged account access management solution that strengthens cloud console/resource access control in public/multi-cloud environments
    • Cloud console/resource access control
    Table. Service guide for each SingleID item

    Create SingleID

    You can create and use the SingleID service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > SingleID menu. Go to the SingleID Service Home page.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Create SingleID button. You will be taken to the Create SingleID page.
    3. On the SingleID Creation page, enter the required information in the service information input area and select the detailed options.
      • In the Service Configuration Selection area, enter the information for the relevant service and select detailed options.
        Category
        Required status
        Detailed description
        Select ServiceRequiredSelect SingleID service
        • You can select multiple services and apply
        • MFA when applied alone does not provide the simple authentication feature
        • When IM, MFA are selected, AM is automatically selected
        • When ADM is selected, AM, IM, and MFA are automatically selected
        • When CAM is selected, AM, IM, and MFA are automatically selected
        • When AM, IM, MFA or AM, IM, MFA, ADM are selected, a tenant is automatically created in the TAP/UP/MFA portal. If only the MFA item is selected, a tenant is created in the TAP/MFA portal
        Number of tenant usersRequiredEnter the minimum number of Tenant users based on the selected service
        • Input allowed within the range 50 - 999,999
        Number of Resource UnitsSelectEnter the number of resource Units to register when selecting a CAM service
        • Enter a value within the range 20 - 99,999
        Integration supportSelectEnter the number of integration support units
        • Enter a value within the range 1 - 9,999
        • AM: 1 unit
        • MFA: 1 unit
        • IM: 2 units
        • When AM and MFA are used simultaneously, they are counted as 1 unit
        Table. SingleID Service Configuration Options
      • Enter the information required to create a service in the Service Information Input area.
        Category
        Required status
        Detailed description
        Tenant nameRequiredEnter tenant name
        Tenant codeRequiredEnter Tenant code
        Table. SingleID Service Information Input Items
      • In the Member selection area, select the tenant user who will use the service.
        Category
        Required status
        Detailed description
        UserRequiredSelect members from the user list
        • You must select at least one user to create the service
        Table. SingleID Service Member Selection Items
      • In the Additional Information Input area, enter or select the required information.
        Category
        Whether required
        Detailed description
        TagSelectAdd Tag
        • Up to 50 can be added per resource
        • After clicking the Add Tag button, enter or select Key and Value values
        Table. SingleID additional information input fields
    4. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated billing amount generated in the panel, and click the Complete button.
      • After creation is complete, check the created resource on the SingleID List page.

    Check SingleID detailed information

    The SingleID service allows you to view and edit the full resource list and detailed information. The SingleID Details page consists of Details, Tags, Activity Log tabs.

    To view detailed information for SingleID, follow these steps.

    1. All Services > Security > SingleID Click the menu. Navigate to the Service Home page.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the SingleID menu. You will be taken to the SingleID List page.
    3. On the SingleID List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the SingleID Details page.
      • SingleID Details page displays status information and additional feature information, and consists of Details, Tags, Work History tabs.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Service statusService status display
        • Creating: Tenant creation in progress
        • Active: Tenant creation completed
        • Terminating: Service termination in progress
        • Failed: Tenant creation failed
        CAM PortalCloud Access Management portal window popup button
        • CAM is displayed only when applying for the service
        Admin PortalAdmin portal popup button
        Service terminationService cancellation button
        Table. SingleID status information and additional features

    Detailed Information

    On the SingleID List page, you can view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if needed.

    CategoryDetailed description
    ServiceService name
    Resource TypeResource Type
    SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
    Resource NameResource name
    Resource IDService’s unique resource ID
    constructorUser who created the service
    Creation dateService creation date and time
    EditorUser who modified the service
    Modification dateDate and time the service was modified
    Tenant nameEntered Tenant name
    Tenant codeEntered Tenant code information
    Number of tenant usersEntered Tenant user count
    • Click the edit icon to edit
    Number of Resource UnitsNumber of resource Units entered
    • Displayed only when applying for the CAM service
    • Click the edit icon to modify
    Billing statusBilling status and first billing date information
    Application ServiceShow requested services
    Integration supportClick the Add Request button to apply for integration support.
    Table. SingleID detailed information tab items
    Reference
    If the service status is Failed, you can resolve the issue by checking the error details in the Support Center > Contact Us menu.

    tag

    SingleID List page allows you to view the tag information of the selected resource, and add, modify, or delete it.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Tag listTag list
    • You can view the Key and Value information of the tag
    • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
    • When entering a tag, you can search and select from the list of previously created Keys and Values
    Table. SingleID tag tab item

    Job History

    You can view the operation history of the selected resource on the SingleID List page.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Task History ListResource Change History
    • You can view operation details, operation time, resource type, resource name, operation result, and operator information
    • Operation History List Click the relevant resource in the list. Operation History Details A popup window will open.
    Table. SingleID operation history tab information items

    Using SingleID Admin Portal

    In the Admin Portal, you can configure and manage SSO authentication settings, account synchronization integration, and multi-factor authentication, among other things.

    To access SingleID’s Admin Portal, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > SingleID menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the SingleID menu. You will be taken to the SingleID List page.
    3. SingleID List page, click the resource to view detailed information. SingleID Details page will be opened.
    4. On the SingleID Details page, click the Admin Portal button. The SingleID admin portal window appears.
      • For a detailed description of the Admin Portal, see Admin Portal.

    Using SingleID CAM Portal

    In the CAM Portal, you can configure and manage console and resource access control and security management for the CSP.

    To access SingleID’s CAM Portal, follow these steps.

    1. All Services > Security > SingleID Click the menu. Navigate to the Service Home page.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the SingleID menu. You will be taken to the SingleID List page.
    3. SingleID List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the SingleID Details page. 4.SingleID Details page, click the CAM Portal button. The SingleID cloud access management portal window appears.
      • For detailed information about the CAM Portal, see CAM Portal.

    Terminate SingleID

    You can reduce operating costs by terminating the unused service.

    To cancel SingleID, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > SingleID menu. You will be taken to the SingleID Dashboard page.
    2. On the SingleID List page, click the resource to cancel. You will be taken to the SingleID Details page.
    3. Cancel Service button. Click it. A cancellation alert will appear.
    4. In the alert window, enter the Tenant name and click the Confirm button.

    5.2.1 - SingleID Manuals

    SingleID not only enables authorized users to easily access information assets with a single authentication, but also strengthens account security through policy-based permission management and real-time detection of abnormal authentication behavior, and provides account management and access frameworks through various activity logs.

    SingleID Manual List

    SingleID provides various manuals as shown in the table below.

    Categorydescription
    User PortalSingleID User Portal is the user interface of the SingleID service, providing various security features such as access to company applications, SSO, and access permission requests.
    For more information, see the User Portal.
    Admin PortalThe SingleID Admin Portal provides all configuration and management functions for all authentication services, account management services, and security policy creation and settings for organizations using the service, through the Admin Portal.
    • For more details, see the Admin Portal. | | MFA Portal | SingleID can maintain the authentication system used by existing applications while enhancing security by requiring users to perform various additional second-factor authentications through system integration. Additionally, SingleID provides an MFA Portal that allows users to pre-register and manage their preferred authentication methods during authentication.
    • For more information, see the MFA Portal. | | CAM Portal | CAM (Cloud Access Management) Portal is a service for cloud console and resource access management, providing users with an easy and convenient way to access cloud consoles and resources. Users can access the portal from a PC on the internal network using multi-factor authentication (MFA). It issues one-time tokens instead of passwords to enable access to cloud consoles and resources, and allows monitoring of all access, operation history, and abnormal behavior.
      - For more details, see CAM Portal. | | SingleID Authenticator | SingleID Authenticator is a SingleID-specific authentication tool that enables easy and secure verification of website users’ identity and multi-factor authentication using a mobile phone.
      For more information, see the SingleID Authenticator. | | SingleID Open API Guides | Provides various APIs such as applications, Idp, and authentication for using SingleID.
      For more details, refer to the Open API Guides. |
    Table. SingleID manual list

    Reference
    The features and configuration provided to the user may vary depending on the SingleID product configuration.

    5.2.1.1 - User Portal

    Overview

    SingleID not only enables authorized users to easily access information assets with a single authentication, but also strengthens account security through policy‑based permission management and real‑time detection of anomalous authentication behavior, and provides account management and access frameworks through various audit logs.

    Provided Features

    • Unified Authentication and Account Management
      • Support for various authentication integration protocols (SAML, OIDC, etc.)
      • Providing self-service functionality for app usage requests and approvals
      • Synchronization of accounts such as Salesforce and Workday, and synchronization and management of roles (groups) within those accounts.
      • Provide registration and withdrawal functions that allow issuing accounts to partners, customers, and others who are not employees.
    • Passwordless and Multi-Factor Authentication
      • PC·Mobile passwordless authentication and multi-factor authentication (MFA)
        • Authentication methods: SMS, email, SingleID Authenticator(mOTP, TOTP, PIN, biometrics), Knox Messenger, Passkey, etc
      • Provide composite authentication for secondary authentication by integrating with the existing primary authentication environment (MFA‑only service use case)
      • Support for certificate-based authentication through Private CA (Certificate Service Authority), a private certificate issuance and management function (Separate Use Case)
    • Authentication and Account Information Integration
      • App integration automation via Pre‑Built Connector
      • Simplifying custom app integration through DIY integration templates
    • Risk-based Authentication Anomaly Detection
      • Context-based access control according to authentication attempt scenarios
      • Enhancing security through detailed login and authentication policy settings
    • Public cloud access management for cloud operators/developers
      • Console access control via role-based assigned accounts

    Service diagram

    Diagram
    Figure. SingleID diagram

    What is a User Portal?

    The SingleID User Portal is the user interface of the SingleID service, providing various security features such as access to company applications, SSO, and access permission requests.

    User Portal screen layout

    The User Portal is composed of the following menus.

    1. My App: A menu that allows the user to view the list of applications currently in use. 1. Users can conveniently access and manage approved apps.
    2. App Catalog: A menu that displays a list of accessible applications.
    3. Notice: This menu allows the SingleID administrator to display announcements to users.
    4. Approval Request: This is a menu where you can manage approval requests related to application access, member registration, usage period extension, and other similar actions.
    User Portal screen
    Figure. User Portal screen

    Manual composition

    This manual is organized as follows.

    1. Announcements and Language Settings: It explains how to set the language in the SingleID solution and how to check urgent announcements that can be viewed before logging in.
    2. Login and Authentication: Explains how to register and use various authentication methods for login.
    3. Register Authentication Tool: Describes the enrollment process, which is the procedure for a user to register an authentication tool.
    4. Sign Up: Explains the two methods of signing up.
    5. ID Retrieval: Describes the procedure by which a user finds their own ID through the ID retrieval process.
    6. Privacy Policy and Terms of Service: Explains the privacy policy and terms of service that can be accessed via the link at the bottom of the screen.
    7. PC SSO Agent: Describes the PC SSO Agent, which assists with SingleID login and logout.
    8. My App: Describes the My App menu that can be accessed via SSO.
    9. App Catalog: Describes the App Catalog menu where you can view the list of apps available for request.
    10. Notification: This explains the Notification menu that allows you to view urgent notices and regular notices.
    11. Approval Request: Describes the Approval Request menu that allows you to request or approve app usage.
    12. Personal Information Settings: Photos, preferred language, and system time zone can be set in Personal Settings, Authentication Settings, login history·environment, logout, etc., describing the personal settings menu.

    5.2.1.1.1 - Announcements and Language Settings

    Notice

    You can view the notice alerts posted by the administrator on the User Portal login screen and after logging into the User Portal. There are general notices and emergency notices.

    • General Notice: It is a general notice posted by the administrator and is used to convey information to users. * User Portal > Notifications can be viewed in the menu.
    • Urgent Notice: It is an urgent announcement posted by the administrator and is used to convey information to users. * User Portal > Login screen top and User Portal > Notifications can be viewed in the menu.

    Language Settings

    To change the language displayed on the screen, follow these steps.

    1. In the User Portal screen > top language selection, click the language you want, Korean or English.
    2. A dropdown list appears, allowing you to select between Korean and English.
    3. Please select the desired language. 2. The screen switches according to the selected language.
    Reference
    On the first login, it is presented in the language configured in the user’s browser. If the language is Korean or any language other than English, it will be set to English.

    5.2.1.1.2 - Log in using an authentication method

    Log in using an authentication method

    What is an authentication method?

    Authentication method, often called Authenticator, refers to an authentication tool.

    SingleID offers the following 11 authentication methods for user authentication.

    1. Password: Enter the password on the SingleID login screen.
    2. Email OTP: Send the OTP via email and enter the OTP on the SingleID login screen.
    3. SMS OTP: Send the OTP via SMS and enter the OTP on the SingleID login screen.
    4. Knox Messenger OTP: Send the OTP via Knox Messenger and enter the OTP on the SingleID login screen.
    5. Knox Identity: Knox Portal users enter the Knox Password for the Knox Identity Password on the SingleID login screen.
    6. SingleID Authenticator Bio: Send via the dedicated SingleID mobile app and authenticate with biometric verification on the mobile device.
    7. SingleID Authenticator PIN: Send it to the dedicated SingleID mobile app and enter the PIN on the mobile device.
    8. SingleID Authenticator mOTP: Install the SingleID dedicated mobile app and enter the mOTP (Mobile OTP) number.
    9. SingleID Authenticator TOTP: Install using the SingleID dedicated mobile app and enter the TOTP (time‑based OTP) code.
    10. Passkey: An authentication method based on Mobile and Windows Hello that authenticates using biometrics (fingerprint, facial), PIN, and security keys.
    11. TOTP Authenticator: Generate TOTP (Time-based OTP) with a 3rd Party Authenticator and enter the OTP on the SingleID login screen
    12. Admin Authentication: Request authentication on behalf of the admin to integrate authentication
    Reference
    The above authentication method only provides the authentication methods allowed by the SingleID administrator in the SingleID Admin Portal.
    Reference
    If this is your first time using the SingleID Authenticator mobile app, please refer to SingleID Authenticator.

    Enter user ID

    The user attempts to log in by entering their ID on the login screen below.

    To log in using a user ID, follow these steps.

    1. Login screen > Account ID Enter the ID in the input field, then click the Next button.
    2. Enter the password in the password field, and click the Next button.
    3. Login is complete.

    Passwordless login

    SingleID provides a login service without a password.

    To log in without using a password, follow these steps.

    1. Login screen > Want to log in without a password? Click it.
    2. Select verification method The screen appears. 2. Click one of the desired authentication methods.
    3. Enter the authentication code according to the authentication method you selected.
    4. After login is completed, you will be taken to the User Portal main screen.
    Reference
    Authentication methods displayed as registration required require registration. Registration Required click to register immediately, or check Register Authentication Tool.
    information
    Passwordless login may not be provided depending on whether it is configured in Login policy settings. Please contact the administrator.

    Setting Preferred Authentication Method

    SingleID users log in to the User Portal provided by SingleID to set their preferred primary and secondary authentication methods.

    If the user sets their preferred method, the Select verification method screen is omitted during login and authentication, allowing immediate authentication with the primary and secondary methods.

    If you want to set your preferred authentication method, follow the steps below.

    1. User Portal > Personal Profile > Authentication Click the settings.
    2. Authentication Settings screen appears.
    3. Click the ☆ 1st, ☆ 2nd that corresponds to the authentication method you prefer, placed before each method.
    4. Only one selection is allowed for each of 1st, 2nd. 4. When it changes to , the selection is completed.

    After the configuration is complete, the next login will use this method, offering convenient access.

    Reference
    Even if a user sets their preferred authentication method for primary and secondary authentication, an administrator can restrict it to a specific authentication method through login policy settings.

    Register authentication method

    Users can configure all authentication methods. Registering an authentication method by a user is called enrollment. When a user account is created for the first time, the email OTP is automatically enrolled using the email information from the user data. Other authentication methods can be used by having the user enroll directly as needed.

    There are two methods for authentication enrollment.

    • Register in Authentication Settings: User Portal > Profile > Authentication settings, click the + Add New button at the bottom to register.
    • Select verification method screen registration: At login, first-factor authentication; at second-factor authentication, on the Select verification method screen, select the authentication method that has a gray check mark (V) and register it.
    Reference
    For detailed information about authentication method registration (Enrollement), refer to Register Authentication Tool.

    First login

    Password reset

    When a user logs in for the first time, they can log in after resetting their password.

    To reset your password, follow the steps below.

    1. Login screen > Account ID input field, enter the ID, and click the Next button.
    2. Click Password Reset below the Next button.

    Consent to collection/use of personal information

    Consent for the collection and use of personal information is required when logging in with SingleID for the first time or during a certain period. Please follow the consent procedure and select the required, optional items to agree.

    Required items must be selected to log in.

    Password authentication

    Password is the most basic authentication method, serving as SingleID’s default authentication tool.

    Enter password

    To log in using a user ID, follow the steps below.

    1. In the Login screen > Account ID input field, enter the ID, and click the Next button.
    2. Enter the password in the Password field, and click the Next button to log in.
    Reference
    If you click the eye-shaped icon in the password input field, you can view the password you entered.
    Caution

    If you enter the password incorrectly If the entered password is incorrect, re‑entry is required along with the message ID or password is incorrect.(1/3). The number of allowed retries is limited to the count set by the administrator in the password policy.

    When the password is entered incorrectly repeatedly and becomes locked If the password is entered incorrectly and the device becomes locked, you can unlock it using two methods.

    • Automatic unlock after 1~5 minutes: When automatic unlock is enabled, the account remains locked for 1~5 minutes. * Login will be available after that time.
    • Unlock with Password Reset: When the administrator sets the password policy to require a password reset, a password reset is required. * You can log in after resetting your password. * ID 찾기 you can view the detailed information there.

    Email OTP authentication

    Authentication

    To authenticate with email OTP, an OTP will be sent to the email address registered by the user.

    To authenticate with an email OTP, follow the steps below.

    1. In the Identity Verification Selection method, click Email.
    2. An OTP code will be sent to the registered email. 2. Enter the OTP within the time set by the administrator (usually 3~5 minutes).
    3. After entering the OTP, click the Confirm button to complete authentication.
    Reference
    1. Resend Code: If the input validity period has expired, click the resend code button. 1. Resend the OTP code via email.
    2. ‘Would you like to authenticate in a different way?’: If the current authentication cannot be used, switch to a different authentication method.
    3. ‘If you have changed your email, please register.’: Depending on the administrator’s settings, you can register a different email (Enrollment) for verification. 3. You can check the detailed information at 이메일 인증 도구 등록하기.
    information

    If the code is entered incorrectly If the user enters the OTP code incorrectly, they can re-enter it up to the number of times specified by the administrator.

    When locked due to exceeding the user input limit If the OTP code is entered incorrectly more times than the limit set by the administrator, the screen will be restricted from input for the duration configured by the administrator. You can input after waiting for the specified time. Refresh and try again after the input timeout.

    SMS OTP authentication

    Authenticate

    To authenticate with SMS OTP, an SMS OTP is sent to the mobile device registered by the user.

    To authenticate with an email OTP, follow the steps below.

    1. In the Identity verification selection method, click Email.
    2. The OTP code will be sent to the registered mobile phone. 2. Enter the OTP within the time set by the administrator (usually 3~5 minutes).
    3. After entering, click the Confirm button, and the authentication will be completed.
    Reference
    1. Resend Code: If the input validity period has expired, click the resend code button. 1. Resend the OTP code to the mobile phone.
    2. ‘Do you want to authenticate using a different method?’: If the current authentication cannot be used, switch to another authentication method.
    3. ‘If you have changed your mobile phone, please register.’: Click the link to go to the enrollment screen for the new mobile. 3. Detailed information can be found in the registration at SMS 인증 도구 등록하기.
    information

    If the code is entered incorrectly If the user enters the OTP code incorrectly, they can re-enter it up to the number of times specified by the administrator.

    When locked due to exceeding the user input limit If the OTP code is entered incorrectly more times than the administrator has allowed, the screen will be locked from input for the duration set by the administrator. You can input after waiting for the specified time. Refresh and try again after the input timeout.

    Knox Messenger OTP authentication

    Authenticate

    If you want to authenticate with Knox Messaenger OTP, the OTP will be sent to the Knox Messanger you are using.

    To authenticate Knox Messenger OTP, follow the steps below.

    1. In the Identity verification selection method, click Knox Messenger.
    2. The OTP code is sent via Knox Messenger. 2. Enter the OTP within the time set by the administrator (usually 3~5 minutes).
    3. After entering, click the Confirm button, and the authentication will be completed.
    Reference
    1. Resend Code: If the input validity period has expired, click the resend code button. 1. Resend the OTP code via Knox Messenger.
    2. ‘Would you like to authenticate using a different method?’: If the current authentication cannot be used, switch to a different authentication method.
    3. ‘Would you like to use a different Knox ID?’: Clicking the link takes you to the screen for enrolling a new Knox ID. 3. You can check the details for registration at Register Knox Messenger authentication tool.
    information

    If the code is entered incorrectly If the user enters the OTP code incorrectly, they can re-enter it up to the number of times specified by the administrator.

    If locked due to exceeding the user input limit If the OTP code is entered incorrectly more times than the limit set by the administrator, the screen will be restricted from input for the duration configured by the administrator. You can input after waiting for the specified duration. Refresh and try again after the input timeout.

    Knox Identity Password Authentication

    Authenticate

    To authenticate with Knox Identity, you must enter your Knox Identity password.

    If you want to authenticate with Knox Identity, follow the steps below.

    1. In the Identity verification selection method, click Knox Identity.
    2. Enter the password for your Knox account.
    3. After entering, click the Confirm button to complete authentication.
    Reference
    ‘Would you like to authenticate using a different method?’: If the current authentication cannot be used, switch to a different authentication method.
    information

    If the password is entered incorrectly If the user enters the password incorrectly, they can re-enter it up to the number of attempts specified by the administrator.

    When locked due to exceeding the user input limit If the password is entered incorrectly more times than the administrator’s allowed limit, the screen will be locked for the duration set by the administrator. You can input after waiting for the specified time. Refresh and try again after the input timeout.

    SingleID Authenticator authentication

    The SingleID service provides a mobile authentication app called SingleID Authenticator and offers authentication in various ways.

    Authentication Method

    Authentication methodExplanation
    SingleID Authenticator BioSend a push through the installed SingleID Authenticator mobile app on the device to request biometric authentication.
    SingleID Authenticator PinSend a push using the installed SingleID Authenticator mobile app on the mobile device and request authentication with a PIN code. Not provided.
    SingleID Authenticator TOTPSend a push notification via the installed SingleID Authenticator mobile app on the device to request authentication using TOTP.
    SingleID Authenticator mOTPSend a push using the installed SingleID Authenticator mobile app on the device to request authentication with mOTP.
    Table. SingleID Authenticator authentication method
    Reference
    Refer to SingleID Authenticator for installation and configuration of SingleID Authenticator.

    Passkey authentication

    The SingleID service offers simple authentication and multi-factor authentication using a Windows-based Passkey.

    Authentication method

    1. Convenient authentication: Provides easy login without ID/Password by using Sign in with Passkey at the bottom of the login page.
    2. Multi-factor authentication: Provides convenient login without requiring an ID/password during secondary authentication.

    Authentication Types

    • Mobile Passkey: Scan the QR code and log in using Android and iOS mobile.
    • Biometrics: Login via fingerprint recognition based on Windows Hello
    • PIN: Login using Windows PIN code
    • Security key: Log in using the Windows security key
    Reference
    Register Passkey Authentication Tool You can view the detailed information there.

    Administrator authentication

    Authenticate

    In the SingleID service, the administrator provides authentication by delegating identity verification on behalf of the user.

    To perform administrator authentication, follow the steps below.

    1. Identity verification selection method, if you cannot perform identity verification at the bottom of the screen, you can request verification from the administrator. 1. Click here. click it.
    2. Click the Request button.
    3. You will be taken to the admin selection screen. 3. Select the administrator who requested authentication delegation and click the Request button.
    4. Authentication delegation is requested to the selected administrator.
    5. When the administrator approves the authentication delegation, the authentication delegation is completed automatically.
    information
    On the administrator selection screen, if the administrator is not assigned or has not registered a SingleID authenticator, a ‘Administrator Not Assigned’ screen appears.
    information
    At the bottom If you cannot complete identity verification, you can request verification from the administrator. If there is no Click here** phrase The administrator has disabled the admin authentication delegation feature by policy. Please contact the administrator.

    5.2.1.1.3 - Register authentication tool

    1. Delete Windows Hello
    2. Register Passkey authentication tool –>

    Register authentication tool

    The principle is that all authentication tools are registered and used by the user themselves.
    Registering an authentication tool by the user is called enrollment (Enrollment).
    When a user is created for the first time, the Email OTP is automatically registered using the email information from the user data.
    The remaining information can be directly registered and used by the user as needed.

    There are three ways to register.

    1. Login screen > ID/Password enter > Identity verification method register on the selection screen
      • On the identity verification method selection screen, click the authentication tool marked Registration Required (V mark) to register.
    2. Click the User Portal(after login) > Profile > Authentication Settings > + Add New button to register.
    3. Register through the registration message link at the bottom of every authentication screen.
      • The screen below is an example of an SMS verification screen. * At the bottom, you can register by clicking the If you have changed your mobile phone, please register. message.
      • All authentication code inputs can be changed via a message below (Message format: ~ please register.)

    Authentication code input screen example

    Authentication screen
    Figure. Authentication screen

    Register Email Verification Tool

    Email registration consists of the following three steps.

    1. Verification Step: This is the identity verification step before registering the email authentication tool.
    2. Registration step: This step registers a new email and checks whether the number is valid.
    3. Completion stage: This is the final step to confirm that the registration was completed successfully.

    Check step

    This is the step of identity verification before using the authentication tool. To view the identity verification process, please refer to 로그인 및 인증하기.

    Caution
    In the verification stage, the authentication method to be used can only be performed with the authentication tool configured by the administrator.

    Registration step

    This is the step where the user registers the desired email address and checks its validity.

    The user should follow the steps below.

    1. If you complete identity verification in the Confirmation step, you will automatically move to the Registration step.
    2. Enter the email address you want to register.
    3. Click the Send verification code button.
    4. Check the OTP code sent to the entered email address, and enter the OTP code on the screen.
    5. If the authentication code is entered correctly, it proceeds to the complete stage.
    information
    According to company policy, for security reasons, a new email address that is not a company email address may not be registered.

    Completion Phase

    Registration completed screen appears, and on the next login you can perform first and second factor authentication using the email verification tool.

    Register SMS authentication tool

    SMS registration consists of the following three steps.

    1. Verification step: This is the identity verification step before registering the SMS authentication tool.
    2. Registration step: This step registers a new mobile phone number and checks whether the number is valid.
    3. Completion Stage: This is the final step to confirm that the registration was completed successfully.

    Check step

    This is the step of identity verification before using the authentication tool. To view the identity verification process, refer to 로그인 및 인증하기.

    Confirm stage can only authenticate using the authentication tool configured by the administrator.

    Registration step

    This step registers the mobile phone number the user wishes to add and checks its validity.

    The user can proceed with the following steps.

    1. If you complete identity verification in the Confirmation step, you will automatically move to the Registration step.
    2. Select the Country code, and enter the Mobile phone number you wish to register.
    3. Click the Send verification code button.
    4. Check the OTP code sent to the entered mobile phone number, and enter the OTP code on the screen.
    5. When the Authentication code is entered correctly, it proceeds to the Complete stage.

    Completion phase

    Registration Complete screen will appear, and on the next login you can perform first and second factor authentication using the SMS authentication tool.

    Register Knox Messenger authentication tool

    Knox Messenger registration consists of the following three steps.

    1. Verification step: This is the identity verification step before registering the Knox Messenger authentication tool.
    2. Registration Step: Enter the Knox ID to register. 2. This is the step that checks whether the Knox ID to be registered is valid.
    3. Completion Stage: This is the final step to confirm that the registration was completed successfully.

    Check step

    This is the step of identity verification before using the authentication tool. If you want to view the identity verification procedure, refer to Login and Authentication.

    In the verification stage, the authentication method to be used can only be performed with the authentication tool configured by the administrator.

    Registration Step

    This step registers the mobile phone number the user wants to add and checks its validity.

    The user should follow the steps below.

    1. If you complete identity verification in the Verification step, you will automatically move to the Registration step.
    2. Enter the Knox ID to register.
    3. Click the Send verification code button.
    4. Check the OTP code sent to Knox Messenger of the entered Knox ID, and enter the OTP code on the screen.
    5. When the authentication code is entered correctly, it proceeds to the complete stage.

    Completion Phase

    Registration Complete screen will appear, and on the next login you can perform first and second factor authentication using the Knox Messenger authentication tool.

    Register Passkey authentication tool

    The SingleID Authenticator is an authentication tool provided for the SingleID service.

    Passkey enrollment consists of the following three steps.

    1. Verification stage: This is the identity verification step before registering the Passkey authentication tool.
    2. Registration Stage: This is the Passkey registration stage.
    3. Completion Stage: This is the final step to confirm that the registration was completed successfully.

    Check step

    This is the step where you verify your identity before registering the authentication tool. If you want to view the identity verification procedure, refer to 로그인 및 인증하기.

    information
    In the verification stage, the authentication method to be used can only be performed with the authentication tool configured by the administrator.

    Registration stage

    This is the step to verify the mobile phone or PC environment where you want to register a Passkey.

    Complete the registration process in the four steps below.

    1. Activation: Passkey support environment guide.
    2. Confirm: Complete identity verification using an authentication method.
    3. Registration: Passkey registration stage. 3. When you click the Generate on this device button, a passkey is created and registered on the PC. 3. Create on another device Clicking the button registers with a mobile phone or a hardware security key.
    4. Complete: Registration complete step confirming that registration has been completed. 4. Click the Continue button.
    Reference

    Passkey supported environment Operating system (laptop or desktop)

    • Windows 11, macOS Ventura, ChromeOS 109 or later
    • Mobile phone: iOS 16 or Android 9 or later
    • Hardware security key: a hardware security key that supports the FIDO2 protocol

    Browse version

    • Chrome 109 or later
    • Safari 16 or later
    • Edge 109

    Device Settings

    • Enable Bluetooth
    • Set screen lock password
    • Register PIN code
    • Allow fingerprint or facial recognition

    Completion Phase

    After the passkey registration is completed, the Registration Complete screen appears. You can perform first- and second-factor authentication with the Windows Hello authentication tool on the next login.

    Reference

    PC Passkey requires that Windows Hello be configured in advance. For detailed information, see the reference link.

    When registering a passkey on mobile, it can be set in an environment where QR code scanning is possible.

    How to Register PC Passkey

    This guide explains how to register a Passkey using Windows Hello on a PC. Passkey must have Windows Hello set up in advance. For detailed information, see the Windows Hello setup.

    If you have completed registering a fingerprint or PIN in Windows Hello settings. Follow the steps below.

    1. Click User Portal > Profile > Authentication Settings.
    2. Click the Add New button.
      Authentication Settings
    3. On the Select registration authentication method screen, select Passkey.
    4. Passkey Registration The screen appears. 4. Click Start.
      Passkey registration
    5. Passkey supported environment screen appears. 5. Check the supported operating system version and click the Next button.
      Passkey supported environment
    6. The Select verification method screen appears. 6. Complete verification using an authentication method that can verify your identity.
    7. Passkey registration screen appears. 7. Click the Generate on this device button. (Generate Passkey on Windows PC)
      Create on this device
    8. (If a fingerprint or PIN is set in Windows Hello) Fingerprint or PIN entry authentication screen appears.
      Enter authentication
    9. When you enter a fingerprint or PIN code, the registration complete screen appears.
      Registration Complete
    Reference
    For PC Passkey, you can select the authentication method registered in the PC’s Windows Hello to support either simple authentication or MFA authentication.

    Mobile Passkey Registration Method

    This is a guide on registering a mobile Passkey. Mobile Passkey requires the following pre-configuration to be completed in advance.

    • Enable Bluetooth
    • Set screen lock password
    • Register PIN code
    • Allow fingerprint or facial recognition

    If you have completed registering the Passkey via mobile. Follow the steps below.

    1. Click User Portal > Profile > Authentication Settings.
    2. Click the Add New button.
      Authentication Settings
    3. Select registration authentication method on the screen, select Passkey.
    4. Passkey registration screen appears. 4. Start click.
      Passkey registration
    5. Passkey supported environment screen appears. 5. Check the supported operating system version and click the Next button.
      Passkey Supported Environment
    6. Select verification method The screen appears. 6. Complete verification using an authentication method that can verify your identity.
    7. Passkey Registration The screen appears. 7. Create on another device Click the button.(Android or iOS)
      Create on another device
    8. The QR code appears on the screen. 8. Scan the QR code to generate a passkey on your mobile.
      QR code
    9. When you enter a fingerprint or PIN code on mobile, the Registration Complete screen appears.
      Registration Complete
    Reference

    Mobile Passkey Support Scope

    1. Adriod : Supports Samsung Pass, Google Passkey Manager.
    1. iOS: Supports passkeys based on iCloud Keychain.

    SingleID Authenticator Register authentication tool

    The SingleID Authenticator is an authentication tool provided for the SingleID service.

    SingleID Authenticator enrollment consists of the following four steps.

    1. Verification step: This is the identity verification step before registering the SingleID Authenticator authentication tool.
    2. Installation Step: This is the user’s SingleID installation guide step.
    3. Registration Stage: This step registers a new mobile app and registers the service.
    4. Completion stage: This is the final step to confirm that the registration was completed successfully.

    Verification step

    This is the step of verifying your identity before using the authentication tool. To view the identity verification process, refer to 로그인 및 인증하기.

    information
    In the verification stage, the authentication method to be used can only be performed with the authentication tool configured by the administrator.

    Installation steps

    There are three main ways to install the SingleID mobile app.

    • How to install SingleID Authenticator by having the user scan a QR code on their mobile, or by searching for “SinlgeID” on Google Play (for Android) or the App Store (for iOS).
    • How to install by entering your mobile phone number and receiving the download link via SMS
    • How to install using a manual download link After installing the SingleID Authenticator app and clicking the Next button, you will proceed to the registration step.
    Information
    Sending the download link via SMS by entering your mobile phone number is limited to a single transmission for security reasons. If sent more than three times within one minute, an error message “SMS messages cannot be sent multiple times for security reasons.” will be sent. Please try again after a short while.

    Registration Step

    Install the SingleID Authenticator mobile app on the mobile phone you want to register, then launch SingleID Authenticator.

    Complete the registration process using the three steps below.

    1. Service Registration: In the SingleID Authenticator app, click the ‘+’ at the top.
    2. Enter QR or authentication number: Scan the QR code or enter the authentication code to register.
    3. Service registration complete: Click the Confirm button to complete the registration.

    Completion Phase

    After registration is completed in SingleID Authenticator, the Registration Complete screen appears. You can perform first- and second-factor authentication with the Windows Hello authentication tool on the next login.

    Information
    Check device information When the user clicks on device information such as password, SMS, email, SingleID authenticator, Nox messenger, passkey, etc., detailed information can be viewed in a popup. Device Information popup displays ‘Type’, ‘OS version’, ‘Browser’, and ‘IP’.

    Register TOTP Authenticator tool

    TOTP Authenticator registers 3rd Party TOTP to support various authentication tools.

    TOTP Authenticator enrollment consists of the following four steps.

    1. Verification step: This is the identity verification step before registering the SingleID Authenticator authentication tool.
    2. Installation Step: This is the user’s SingleID installation guide step.
    3. Registration Stage: This step registers a new mobile app and registers the service.
    4. Completion Stage: This is the final step to confirm that the registration was completed successfully.

    Verification step

    This is the step of verifying your identity before using the authentication tool. If you want to view the identity verification procedure, please refer to 로그인 및 인증하기.

    information
    In the verification stage, the authentication method to be used can only be performed with the authentication tool configured by the administrator.

    Installation Steps

    There are two main ways to install the TOTP Authenticator.

    • Mobile app
    • Web browser extension

    Click the Next button to proceed to the registration step.

    Service Registration and Verification Phase

    This step registers and verifies the 3rd Party TOTP Authenticator you wish to add.

    Complete the registration process in the two steps below.

    1. Service Registration: Scan the QR code of the TOTP Authenticator you want to register, or enter the manual code. 1. Code registration is completed in the TOTP mobile app or extension.
    2. Service verification: Run the TOTP mobile app or extension and enter the OTP.
    Information

    TOTP Authenticator Support SingleID supports a variety of standardized 3rd‑party TOTP authentication apps. Non-standard TOTP is not supported. The verified mobile and extension programs are as follows. We recommend the mobile app or extension below.

    • Mobile app
      • Google Authenticator, Microsoft Authenticator
    • Web browser extension
      • TOTP extension searchable in the Chrome Web Store and Microsoft Edge Add-ons

    Completion Phase

    After registration is completed in SingleID Authenticator, the Registration Complete screen appears. You can perform first- and second-factor authentication with the TOTP Authenticator tool on the next login.

    Information
    To register a new TOTP Authenticator, click “If you want to change your TOTP Authenticator, register here” at the bottom of the TOTP Authenticator OTP entry screen to register a new TOTP Authenticator.
    Information
    Check device information When the user clicks on device information such as password, SMS, email, SingleID authenticator, Nox messenger, and passkey, detailed information can be viewed in a popup. In the Device Information popup, ’type’, ‘OS version’, ‘browser’, ‘IP’, etc. are displayed.

    Administrator authentication

    Authenticate

    In the SingleID service, the administrator provides authentication by delegating identity verification on behalf of the user.

    To perform administrator authentication, follow the steps below.

    1. In the Identity verification selection method, if you cannot complete identity verification at the bottom of the screen, you can request verification from the administrator. 1. Click here. Click it.
    2. Click the Request button.
    3. You will be taken to the admin selection screen. 3. Select the administrator who requested authentication delegation and click the Request button.
    4. Authentication delegation is requested to the selected administrator.
    5. When the administrator approves the authentication delegation, it is automatically completed.
    information
    On the administrator selection screen, if the administrator is not assigned or has not registered a SingleID authenticator, the ‘Administrator Not Assigned’ screen appears.
    information
    If you cannot complete identity verification, you can request verification from an administrator. If the Click here** phrase is missing The administrator has disabled the admin authentication delegation feature by policy. Please contact the administrator.

    5.2.1.1.4 - Sign Up

    Sign up

    According to internal company policy, users who are not employees—such as partners, subsidiaries, and customers—can create an account through a separate registration.

    Sign up via login page link

    This is the method to sign up via the Sign Up link on the login page.

    On the login page, at the bottom of the login section, click Sign Up in the phrase “If you don’t have an account, click Sign Up.”

    Agree to terms

    To sign up, you need to agree to the terms.

    Enter Information

    Perform the following procedure.

    1. Enter the email you want to register.
    2. After entering the email, click the Send OTP button to send the OTP code.
    3. Enter the OTP code from the received email address, then click the Confirm button.
    4. If you enter the verification code correctly, the Sign Up button will be activated.
    5. Click the Sign Up button.

    Enter information

    Enter various personal information required for registration.

    CategoryExplanation
    IDEnter the ID to register
    Korean nameEnter a Korean name
    English nameEnter English name
    Enter phone numberEnter the registered country and mobile number.
    OTP codeEnter the received OTP code
    DepartmentEnter department name
    Language and Time ZoneUser language and time zone settings
    Table. Personal Information Input Items
    guide
    The required information fields may vary depending on the company’s registration policy.

    Sign up

    After entering personal information, click the Sign Up button to complete the approval request. Once approval is complete, you can proceed to the next step. Once the administrator’s approval is complete, you can log in by resetting your password.

    Sign up via invitation email

    You can sign up through an invitation email from the administrator. Click the Sign Up button in the received email to register.

    After that, the registration process is the same as Sign up via login page link.

    5.2.1.1.5 - Find ID and Reset Password

    Find ID

    If the user forgets their ID, click Find ID on the login screen.

    Find ID using mobile phone number

    The user can find their ID by entering their name and mobile phone number.

    Please follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Mobile tab.
    2. Please enter Name.
    3. Please enter surname.
    4. Please enter the country code and phone number.
    5. Click the Send verification code button.
    6. On the authentication code entry screen, enter the received authentication code and click the Confirm button.
    reference
    If there is no ID with the given information, the ‘ID cannot be found.’ message appears. To search again, click the ‘Return to ID search’ button.

    Password Reset

    Reset password

    To reset your password, click Password Reset at the bottom of the login screen.

    Perform identity verification

    To set a password, the user must first complete identity verification. Clicking the Password Reset button brings up the Select Identity Verification Method screen according to the policy set by the administrator. For detailed information about authentication, refer to Login and Authentication.

    Password Reset

    After the user completes identity verification, they are taken to a screen where they can set a new password.
    Passwords must be set to match the password pattern and complexity defined by the administrator’s policy. When a user enters a password, criteria that are met are displayed in green, and those that are not met are displayed in red. Set the password so that all items appear in green.

    Reset the password as follows.

    1. Please enter a new password.
    2. If the newly entered password fails to meet any of the complexity or pattern requirements set by the administrator, generate a more complex password.
    3. To prevent user input errors, please re-enter the password to match the one you entered.
    4. Click the Change Password button.

    When password setup is complete, click the Log in with password button to return to the login screen. When password setup is complete, click the Log in with password button to return to the login screen.

    5.2.1.1.6 - Privacy Policy, Terms of Service, Service Desk

    On the lower left of every screen, there are links to the Privacy Policy and Terms of Service, allowing users to view them at any time.

    Privacy Policy

    A Privacy Policy link is placed at the bottom left of every screen, allowing users to view the SingleID service’s privacy policy at any time.

    To view the privacy policy, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Privacy Policy at the bottom left of the screen. You can view the latest version of the privacy policy.
    2. If you want to view a previous version, select the desired version at the top to retrieve it.

    Terms of Use

    Place a Terms of Service link at the bottom left of every screen so that users can view the SingleID service terms at any time.

    To review the terms of service, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Terms of Service at the bottom left of the screen. You can view the latest version of the Terms of Service.
    2. If you want to view a previous version, select the desired version at the top to retrieve it.

    Service Desk Information

    If users have inquiries about SingleID, they can contact using the Service Desk phone number and the main email address at the bottom of the screen.

    5.2.1.1.7 - PC SSO Agent

    SingleID PC SSO Agent provides integrated SSO authentication services in a Windows Desktop environment.

    SingleID PC SSO Agent provides the following functions.

    • Integrated SSO and login/logout across web browsers
    • PC device authentication
    • Essential security software installation verification feature (SingleID administrator setting)
    guide
    The SingleID PC SSO Agent may not be used depending on the administrator’s settings. (Agentless operation)
    Reference

    Recommended installation environment for PC SSO Agent

    • Windows Desktop 10 and 11 (x86 and x64 CPU Only)
    • Web Browser: Microsoft Edge 88.x or later, Chrome 87.x or later
    • .NET Framework 4.0 or later
    • Disk Capacity 100MB or more

    Check whether PC SSO Agent is installed

    If the administrator has set a policy to use the PC SSO Agent, SingleID automatically checks whether the SingleID SSO Agent is installed on the user’s PC as follows.

    1. After the user logs in with SingleID, it automatically checks whether the PC SSO Agent is installed.
    2. If the PC SSO Agent is installed on the user’s PC, it automatically proceeds to the next screen; otherwise, it automatically redirects to the installation prompt screen.
    3. If the installation prompt does not appear automatically, click the Next button to install the PC SSO Agent.

    Using the download link for the SSO Agent installation

    PC SSO Agent installation prompt screen: Click the ‘Download’ button to download the Agent program to your PC and install it.

    Install SingleID PC SSO Agent

    If you download the SingleID Agent.exe file to the PC and install it correctly, a tray labeled ‘ID’ will appear in the lower‑right corner of the PC’s tray. If the PC SSO Agent is installed correctly and SSO authentication succeeds, right‑click and click “View Status” to verify that it operates normally.

    guide
    If the installation does not proceed smoothly, remove the app named SingleIdAgent from the list of previously installed apps and reinstall it.

    Re-authentication attempt

    After installing the PC SSO Agent, you can either log in again from the beginning, or click the re-authenticate button at the bottom of the screen below to retry authentication using the Agent.

    guide
    The SingleID PC SSO Agent performs a unified logout of Chrome and Edge browsers upon logout.

    5.2.1.1.8 - My App

    Recently used apps

    When a user logs into the User Portal, the first thing they see is the My Apps menu. The left menu bar can be expanded or collapsed by clicking the arrow(→) icon at the bottom left.

    When you click the My App menu, three submenus that are provided by default and cannot be edited will appear.

    • Recently used apps
    • Bookmark
    • Default app

    Among these, clicking Recent Apps will display the apps the user has recently used. Recent apps are shown up to a maximum of 12.

    Bookmark

    My Apps menu, when you click the Bookmark menu, the apps you have bookmarked are displayed. You can conveniently use frequently used apps by bookmarking them. You can add a bookmark by clicking the bookmark button at the lower right of the app card, and clicking it again will remove the bookmark. Up to 12 bookmarks are allowed.

    Add/Delete Bookmark

    If you click the Bookmark icon at the lower right of the app you want to add, it will be added to Bookmark. Clicking it once more will delete the bookmark.

    Default App

    The default app menu displays all apps available to the logged-in user. When the user clicks an app, they are authenticated via SSO and the app launches in a new browser window. If a disabled app is clicked, a popup appears indicating that the app is disabled.

    Add Category

    The user can click the Add Category button to create a category with a name of their choice and manage the app.

    • After clicking the Add Category button, enter the category name and click the Check button.
    • After adding a category, the user can click the More button located to the right of the category to move, edit, or delete the category.

    If you delete a category while it contains apps, the remaining apps are moved to the Default App category.

    5.2.1.1.9 - App Catalog

    Using the App Catalog

    When you click the app catalog menu, the list of apps that are pending approval is displayed by default.

    The app catalog can be viewed as a list of apps in three states.

    • Unused: state where a usage request can be made
    • Pending Approval: The usage request has been completed and is awaiting approval.
    • In Use: The usage request has been approved and is currently in use.

    If an app in an unused state does not have a request button, the user cannot request it themselves due to company policy. Please contact the administrator if you wish to use it.

    Request App Usage

    To request usage of an unused app, the user clicks the Request button, enters the purpose for using the app, and then clicks the Request button.

    The app usage approval process may vary depending on the administrator’s settings. By default, the approver list configured by the administrator is displayed, and if multiple approvers exist, the outcome is determined by whichever approver processes the approval or rejection first.

    Once the app usage request is completed, you can view the request status from the two menus.

    • You can check the status in the App Catalog > Pending Approval state.
    • You can view the detailed information in App Usage Approval > My Requests.

    In the My Requests list, click the App to view details, and when pending approval, you can cancel the request using the Cancel Request button.

    5.2.1.1.10 - Notification

    Notification

    Click the notification menu to view the list of notifications. There are two types of notifications.

    • Urgent: Tenant administrators post urgent notices that users can view before logging in, regardless of the user’s login status, such as urgent alerts (system outages, etc.)
    • General: All notifications that are not emergency alerts, which the user can view in the Notifications menu after logging in.

    Notifications menu, when clicked, is set by default to All status, so both urgent and regular notifications are shown. If there are unread notifications, they appear as a number next to the notification menu, and because they are marked with a red dot in the list, unread notifications can be easily recognized. If you click this notification, you can view the details.

    NameExplanation
    typeThis is the type of notice. It is divided into urgent and normal.
    TitleThis is a notice title.
    Start date and timeThe start date and time of the notice posting.
    End timeThe end date and time of the notice posting.
    Table. Notification List

    Approval request

    When you click the approval request menu, the administrator can view and cancel all users’ approval requests.

    Approval requests consist of the Approval Request List and Approval Request Queue tabs.

    Approval request list

    There are several types of approval request statuses. You can easily filter and view using the Approval Request, Approved, Rejected, Cancel Submission buttons at the top. If you want an advanced search, you can use the advanced search in the search bar at the top right.

    • Approval Request: Shows the status of all approval requests.
    • Approval: Shows all approved statuses.
    • Rejected: Shows approval request items that have been rejected.
    • Submission Cancellation: Displays approval requests that have been cancelled after submission.

    The description of the approval request list items is as follows.

    NameExplanation
    Approval SystemIt shows the approval system according to the approval policy. You can verify which approval system was used for the request.
    Please refer to Policy > Approval Policy.
    TitleThis is a notice title.
    Start date and timeThe start date and time of the notice posting.
    End timeThe end date and time of the notice posting.
    Table. Notification List

    5.2.1.1.11 - Approval Request

    Request approval

    The app usage approval menu provides two functions.

    1. My Request Tab: A list of apps I have requested to use is displayed.
    2. Approval List Tab: Displays the list of app usage requests submitted to me.

    Request App Usage

    To request usage of an unused app, the user clicks the Request button, enters the purpose for using the app, and then clicks the Request button again. The app usage approval process may vary by company.

    By default, the list of approvers set by the tenant administrator is displayed, and when multiple approvers exist, it is determined by the result of the first approval or rejection.

    Once the app usage request is completed, you can view the request status in both menus.

    • You can check the status from the App Catalog > Pending Approval status.
    • In Approval Request > My Requests, you can view the details and perform additional actions.

    My request

    In the My Requests list, you can click an app to view its details, and when the request is pending approval, you can cancel it using the Cancel Request button.

    When usage approval is completed, the status item in my request list will change to Approved. If you click Approved App in the list, you can view the detailed usage approval information.

    Approval List

    1. If you are the app usage approver, please click the Approval List tab.

      • If the user has a pending approval request for app usage, you can see that the status column in the list shows Pending Approval.
    2. Click the relevant list to view the details of the approval request.

    3. After reviewing the details and leaving the approver’s comments, click the Approve button to grant the requester permission to use the app.

    4. You can confirm that the status item has been changed to Approved in the Approval List tab.

    By clicking the app in the list, you can also view the detailed information of the approval history that the user approved as an approver.

    Approval List

    1. If you are the app usage approver, please click the Approval List tab.

      • If the user is in a state where approval for app usage has been requested, you can see that the status item in the list is displayed as Pending Approval.
    2. Click the relevant list to view the details of the approval request.

    3. After reviewing the details and leaving the approver’s comments, click the Approve button to allow the requester to use the app.

    4. You can confirm that the status item has been changed to Approved in the Approval List tab.

    By clicking the app in the list, you can also view the detailed information of the approval history that the user approved as an approver.

    5.2.1.1.12 - Personal Profile

    Configure Privacy Settings

    This is a menu for user settings.

    To set your privacy settings, follow these steps.

    1. Click the Personal Profile > Personal Information setting at the top right of the screen.
    2. You can view the photo, name, email, phone number, language, and time zone.
    3. Image: Image > Image Click Change to upload the icon image you want to display.
    4. Language: Choose your desired language in Korean or English.
    5. Language/Time Zone: Please select the time zone you are currently in. Click the City Search button to open the city search popup. Search for the desired city in English and select it.
    6. Click the Save button at the bottom of the screen to save.
    Reference
    If you click the Delete button at the lower left of the privacy screen, you can delete the current user account. Since withdrawing will delete the user’s account, please only withdraw when you truly intend to delete it.

    Configure Authentication

    You can register a user’s authentication tool and set a preferred authentication tool.

    To configure authentication, follow these steps.

    1. Click the Personal Profile > Authentication setting at the top right of the screen.
    2. Click the +Add New button to add using the authentication tool you prefer.
    3. Click the Delete button to delete authentication tools you do not wish to use.
    4. Click the icon to set your preferred authentication method.
    Reference
    Please refer to Register Authentication Tools for how users register or delete authentication tools.

    Change Password

    In the authentication settings, click Change Password to change your password after completing the identity verification process.

    Check login history

    You can view the user’s login history and environment.

    To view a user’s login history/environment, follow these steps.

    1. Click Personal Profile > Login History/Environment at the top right of the screen.
    2. Login History tab allows you to view information such as login date and time, location, country, city, IP address, OS type, browser type, detection status, and result.
    3. In the Login Environment tab, you can view details of any registered login environments, and if an environment is no longer used, you can delete it using the ‘Delete’ button.
    guide
    Check the country ISO codes at the link below.
    ISO 3166 - Wikipedia, the encyclopedia for everyone Please refer to the page.
    guide
    When using the SingleID ADM(Anomaly Detection Management) feature, the detection items will display Normal or Detected.
    This item is a login record where abnormal authentication activity was detected.

    Log out

    Click the photo icon located at the top right of the screen and then click Logout.

    When you click the Logout button, all applications visited through SingleID are logged out simultaneously, and if integrated logout is configured via the PC SSO Agent, logout also proceeds in the associated browsers.

    5.2.1.2 - Admin Portal

    SingleID not only allows authorized users to easily access information assets with a single authentication, but also enhances account security through policy-based permission management and real-time detection of abnormal authentication activities, and provides account management and access frameworks via comprehensive audit logs.

    All authentication services and account management services of organizations using the SingleID service, as well as the establishment and configuration of security policies, are managed through the Admin Portal.

    A user who can access the Admin Portal to configure and manage the system is called an administrator, and through the Admin Portal’s management functions, they can integrate the organization’s business systems without restriction and define security policies for accessing each business system.

    The management functions provided by the Admin Portal are as follows.

    functionExplanation
    Notification ManagementYou can register posts to announce to the organization’s users through the user portal and manage the posting period and other settings. If there is urgent information related to system usage, you can post the content on the login screen so that even users who are not logged in can view it.
    Application Integration ManagementIt connects the organization’s internal business systems or cloud-based business systems. You can configure it to use standard protocols such as SAML or OIDC for authentication integration, or use the SCIM protocol to import information such as accounts and groups into SingleID or export them via SingleID.
    Identity Provider Integration ManagementIf an integrated authentication environment is already established within the organization, you can register that system as an Identity Provider so that applications linked by SingleID can be used without re-authenticating through SingleID. Authentication integration with any Identity Providers that use standard protocols such as SAML and OIDC is possible.
    Authenticator ManagementYou can add and manage Authenticators to configure user identity verification or multi-factor authentication. Adding a desktop Authenticator such as PC SSO Agent enables multi-browser SSO.
    MFA Service Provider Integration ManagementIf you want to enhance security when accessing business systems while using an already configured in‑organization authentication system, you can connect the business system to an MFA Consumer Provider and add only the multi‑factor authentication function to the system. By linking the system to an MFA Consumer Provider, you can configure the authentication environment to perform second‑factor authentication using the Authenticators added to SingleID.
    User ManagementYou can view and edit all users registered in the organization, delete users, or directly register new users. You can also change a user’s group membership or assign permissions so the user can use the application.
    Group ManagementYou can view and edit all groups registered in the organization, delete groups, or register new groups. You can also modify a group’s membership rules or assign permissions so that group members can use the application.
    Login Policy ManagementYou can set detailed policies specifying which authentication methods can be used when a user logs in with SingleID, and, if needed, create and manage condition-based authentication policies for users authenticating in specific environments.
    Authentication Policy ManagementAccording to the organization’s security policy, detailed authentication settings can be configured in the following four categories: Session policy, Authenticator policy, MFA Service Provider policy, Password policy.
    Anomaly Detection Policy ManagementSingleID collects and analyzes user behavior data before and after authentication in real time to determine whether abnormal authentication activity is occurring, and provides a function that immediately notifies the user of risk when identified as belonging to an abnormal authentication category. Tenant administrators can manage detailed settings of policies for abnormal behavior detection and decide whether each policy is enabled.
    Terms and Conditions ManagementUse the provided templates to register privacy policies, terms of service, usage conditions, and similar documents that fit the organization’s needs, then notify users and obtain their consent.
    SMS SettingsSingleID issues an OTP via SMS for identity verification and authentication. In the SMS settings, you can configure and set the SMS messages sent by SingleID.
    Table. Features provided by the Admin Portal

    If you are using SingleID for the first time, you can set up the basic environment by configuring the features in the following order.


    The supported SingleID connection environment and recommended specifications are as follows.

    CategorySupportRecommendation
    PCWindows : Windows Desktop 10 and 11 (x86 and x64 CPU Only)
    • Web Browser: Microsoft Edge, Latest public version
    Windows : Windows Desktop 10 and 11 (x86 and x64 CPU Only)
    • Web Browser: Microsoft Edge 88.x or later, Chrome 87.x or later
    Moblie(Android)Android : 8 and later versions
    • Web Browser: Samsung Internet Latest public version
    Android : 8 and later versions
    • Models released in 2018 and beyond among Samsung Galaxy Mobile Products
    • Galaxy S9 ↑
    • Web Browser: Samsung Internet 9.0 ↑
    Moblie(iOS)iOS : 16 ,17
    • Web Browser: Safari , Latest public version
    iOS : 16 ,17
    • iPhone Xs ↑, Models released in 2018 and beyond among Apple iPhone Products
    • Web Browser: Safari 14.1 ↑
    Table. SingleID connection environment support scope and recommended specifications

    5.2.1.2.1 - Dashboard

    Notifications are a feature that can deliver and share important alerts related to SingleID usage with users.

    Administrators can register and manage notifications through the notifications menu. The administrator selects the notification type (normal/urgent) based on the notification content and priority, and when a notification is created, the user can receive the notification before login (urgent) or after login (normal/urgent).

    Administrators can register and manage notifications to be delivered to users. There are two types of notifications, presented as follows.

    typeExplanation
    GeneralYou can create and deliver general notices to users. Users can view general notifications in the User Portal > Notifications menu.
    UrgentYou can create and deliver an urgent notice to users. Users can view the urgent alert in a popup window on the login page.
    Table. Notification Type

    Notification

    list

    To view the notification list, access the menu as follows.

    • Admin Portal > Dashboard > Notifications
    CategoryExplanation
    typeNotification types.
    • General: When a notification is registered as a general announcement, users can view general notifications in the User Portal > Notifications menu.
    • Urgent: When a notification is registered as an urgent announcement, users can view urgent notifications in a popup on the login page.
    TitleThis is the title of the notification.
    PeriodThis is the period for announcing the notification.
    RegistrantThe name of the registered administrator.
    Registration DateThe date of initial registration.
    ModifierEdited administrator name.
    Modified dateThe date of the final modification.
    All buttonBoth regular notifications and urgent notifications can be viewed in the list.
    General buttonOnly regular notifications can be viewed in the list.
    Emergency buttonOnly urgent alerts can be viewed in the list.
    Search term input fieldYou can search the notification list. Enter a search term and click the magnifying glass icon or press Enter to perform the search.
    - Searchable fields: Title, Creator, Modifier
    ※ Exact match search is possible using ‘full name’, ‘first name’, or ’last name’ for encrypted personal data.
    Details buttonDetailed searches are possible. Search criteria can be combined using AND. After entering multiple fields, click the Search button, and the search will be performed according to the criteria.
    • When you click the Reset button, all search fields are reset.
    Register buttonYou can register a new notification.
    Table. List

    Register notification

    To register a notification, follow the steps below.

    1. Admin Portal > Dashboard > Notifications Click the menu.
    2. Register button, when clicked, navigates to the notification registration page.
    3. Check the input fields below and select and enter the details.
    4. Click the Save button.
    5. Check the notifications registered in the list.
    CategoryRequired or notExplanation
    typeRequiredSelect notification type “Normal”, “Urgent”
    PeriodEssentialSpecify the notification posting period “Start date~End date”
    languageRequiredSelect notification language (activates the “Language” tab based on the selected language)
    TitleRequiredNotification Title
    contentRequiredWrite notification content
    Table. Alarm registration
    Reference

    If you exceed the maximum number of characters that can be entered, an error message will be displayed.

    All required fields must be entered in every active tab. When you click the Cancel button, you go to the notification list screen without saving data.

    Edit notification

    To edit the notification, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Admin Portal > Dashboard > Notifications menu.
    2. Select the notification that needs editing, and click the Edit button at the bottom of the screen.
    3. After editing the field you want to modify, click the Save button.
    4. Check the edited notifications in the list.

    Delete notification

    To delete the notification, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Admin Portal > Dashboard > Notifications menu.
    2. Select the notifications you want to delete, and click the Delete button at the top right of the screen.
    3. The notification delete popup appears.
    4. Click the Confirm button to delete the notification.

    Approval request

    When you click the approval request menu, the administrator can view and cancel all users’ approval requests.

    Approval requests consist of the Approval Request List and Approval Request Queue tabs.

    Approval request list

    If you click the Approval Request List tab, you can view all approval requests.

    There are four types of approval request statuses. You can easily filter and view using the Approval Request, Approved, Rejected, Cancel Submission buttons at the top. If you want an advanced search, you can use the advanced search in the search bar at the top right.

    • Approval Request: Shows the status of all approval requests.
    • Approval: Shows all approved statuses.
    • Rejected: Shows approval request items that have been rejected.
    • Submission Cancelled: Shows approval requests where the approval has been cancelled.

    The description of the approval request list items is as follows.

    NameExplanation
    Approval systemIt represents the approval system based on the approval policy. You can verify which approval system the request was made through.
    Policy > Please refer to the Approval Policy.
    typeThese are types of approval requests. App Access, Sign‑up, Usage Period types are available.
    - App Access: type for application access requests.
    - Sign‑up: type for sign‑up requests during registration.
    - Usage Period: approval request used when extending the account usage period before it expires.
    TitleThis is the approval request title.
    RequesterI am the approval requester.
    Recent update dateThis is the update date of the recent approval list.
    Request date and timeThis is the initial approval request date and time.
    statusIt shows the status of the approval request and corresponds to the button at the top.
    Table. Approval request list

    View and cancel approval requests

    When you click the approval request list, the information for that approval request appears in a popup.

    View approval request list

    A list of all approval requests is displayed.

    To view the details of an approval request, click on the item, and the information will pop up.

    NameExplanation
    TitleThis is the approval request title.
    Approval SystemIt represents the approval system based on the approval policy. You can verify which approval system the request was made through.
    policy > Please refer to the approval policy.
    statusIndicates the result of processing the approval request.
    Request dateThis is the initial approval request date and time.
    Last modified dateThis is the most recent modification date for the approval request.
    RequesterInformation of the approval requester. ID, name, and organization/department details are displayed.
    ApproverThis is the approver’s information. ID, name, organization/department, task, and date information are displayed.
    NotifierThis is the notifier’s information. ID, name, organization/department, and date information are displayed.
    Table. View approval request list

    Reference
    If an approval request has not yet been completed, the administrator can cancel it via the Cancel Request button when needed.

    Approval request queue

    Click the Approval Request Queue tab to view all pending approval requests and delete them using either select all or selective selection. Through detailed search, if the requester has resigned or the approver is absent, the administrator can arbitrarily cancel (delete) the approval request.

    Delete approval request

    To delete the approval request, follow the steps below.

    1. Please check(v) the left selection box in the list.
    2. The Delete button is enabled at the top of the list. 2. Click the Delete button.
    3. Request Deletion Popup appears. 3. Click the Delete button.
    4. The selected approval request in the list has been deleted.

    Sign up

    Click the Sign Up menu to display the list of sign‑up requests.

    Sign-up request

    When you click the sign‑up request tab, the list of sign‑up requests appears.

    There are four types of approval request statuses. You can easily filter and view using the Approval Request, Approved, Rejected, and Cancel Submission buttons at the top. If you want an advanced search, you can use the advanced search in the search bar at the top right.

    • Approval Request: Shows the status of all approval requests.
    • Approval: Displays all completed approval statuses.
    • Rejection: Shows approval request items that have been rejected.
    • Submission Cancel: Shows approval requests where the approval has been canceled.
    nameExplanation
    typeThese are the types of approval requests. Standard, IdP* types are available.
    - Standard: When the request is submitted through the sign‑up on the login page or a separate sign‑up page
    - Idp: When the sign‑up is requested via an Identity Provider
    Approval systemIt shows the approval system according to the approval policy. You can verify which approval system was used for the request.
    Please refer to the Policy > Approval Policy.
    RequesterI am the approval requester.
    nameRequester name. Exact match search is possible using encrypted personal data with ‘full name’, ‘first name’, or ’last name’.
    emailThis is the requester’s email address. As encrypted personal data, exact match searches are possible using the full email address or the portion before the ‘@’.
    mobileThis is the requester’s mobile number. Since it is encrypted personal data, an exact match search using the last four digits of the phone number is possible.
    statusIt shows the status of the approval request and corresponds to the button at the top.
    Registration DateThis is the sign-up registration date.
    Modified dateLast modified date and time.
    Table. Approval Request List

    Sign-up email invitation

    An email invitation for account registration is a method where the administrator sends an invitation email to the desired user’s email address, allowing them to sign up. You can send up to 50 invitation emails at a time.

    To send an invitation email, follow the steps below.

    1. Dashboard > Sign Up > Sign Up Email Invitation Click the tab.
    2. Click the Send Invitation Email button at the top right.
    3. Send Invitation Email Popup appears.
    4. Enter the email address to invite in the email field, and click the Add button.
    5. Select the group that will be automatically assigned when a recipient joins the group item. (If not set, the group is unspecified)
    6. Click the Invite button at the bottom right of the popup.
    7. An invitation email will be sent to the specified email address.
    Reference
    Refer to the Policy > Sign‑up Policy menu for detailed registration policies.

    5.2.1.2.2 - Integration

    Integration is a service that configures and manages authentication services and account information for various applications.

    In SCP SingleID, we support integration with new applications through customized authentication integration and account provisioning services, as well as a DIY (Do-It-Yourself) feature.

    Through the integration menu, it provides integration management functions such as Application, Identity Provider, Authenticator, MFA Service Provider.

    Application

    The application is a menu for registering and linking various applications to apply SCP SingleID’s authentication service.

    The administrator can register or edit a new application through the application list screen, and can sort, search, and delete registered applications.

    Application List

    The administrator can select a registered application on the application list screen to edit/delete, sort, search, etc., and can navigate to a menu screen where a new application can be registered through registration.

    To view the list of applications, access the menu as follows.

    • Admin Portal > Integration > Application
    CategoryExplanation
    NameThis is the name of the application. It can be entered when creating the application.
    typeThe application integration protocols are classified as SAML, OIDC, and SCIM.
    Screen displayThis is an item displayed in the User Portal application list.
    • Screen display: It is shown to users in the User Portal, allowing them to request access permissions.
    • Blank: It is hidden in the User Portal, so users cannot request it directly.
    statusApplication status. It is divided into active and inactive.
    • Active: The state where the administrator has completed the settings so that the user can access the application
    • Inactive: The state where, due to the administrator’s settings, the user cannot access the application
    All buttonDisplays both active and inactive applications in the list.
    Active buttonOnly active applications are displayed in the list.
    Disabled buttonOnly inactive applications are displayed in the list.
    Search term input fieldApplication list can be searched. After entering a search term, click the magnifying glass icon or press Enter to perform the search.
    • Searchable items: name, description
    Details buttonYou can perform detailed searches. Search conditions can be combined with AND. After entering multiple fields, click the ‘Search’ button to retrieve results that match the criteria.
    • Reset button click will clear all search fields.
    Download buttonSAML metadata download is available. You can download SAML metadata files from the internal network and the Internet.
    Register buttonYou can register a new application.
    Table. Application List

    Application registration

    The administrator can register the application by clicking the Register button on the list screen.

    Application registration can be done using two methods: Custom App Integration and Pre-Built App Integration.

    To register an application, access the menu as follows.

    • Admin Portal > Integration > Application > Register Click the button
    • Custom App Integration or Pre-Built App Integration Select tab

    Custom App Integration

    Custom App Integration registration is the connection menu for authenticating the application you want to integrate and provisioning the account.

    We provide three types of connection functions as follows.

    When registering an application by linking authentication, you provide and select the type (SAML, OIDC) according to the standard authentication integration method.

    When registering an application by linking account provisioning, we provide the standard online API method (SCIM).

    Reference

    The integration features provided by SingleID can be categorized as follows, and the information input and configuration steps vary depending on the required integration scope. When configuring the standard authentication integration methods SAML and OIDC, if you do not select account provisioning, the attribute linking step is omitted, shortening the registration process.

    Standard protocolAuthentication integration, account deployment integrationAuthentication integrationAccount deployment integration
    SAML-
    OIDC-
    SCIM--
    Table. Standard protocol

    To register the application Custom App Integration, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Admin Portal > Integration > Application > Register button
    2. Custom App Integration > Web Application(SAML) orWeb Application(OIDC) or Identity Provisioning(SCIM v2.0) Select > Next Click the button
    3. Go to detailed settings

    You can register an application by entering and configuring the information required for integration through a six-step screen as shown below.

    Applications using standard protocols (SAML, OIDC, SCIM) can register information and configure policies and attributes through a screen consisting of the following six steps.

    1. General
    2. SSO
    3. Provisioning
    4. Profile
    5. Policy
    6. allocation

    General

    Enter the general application information as referenced below.

    CategoryExplanationWhether required
    NameEnter the application name.Required
    ExplanationEnter the description for the application.Selection
    logo imageRegister the logo. (File upload or URL link)Selection
    Screen displayDisplayed to the user in the User Portal.Select
    Access URLEnter the application access URL.Required
    Automatic logoutConfigure automatic logout according to the session policy.Selection
    Automatic redirectionSet automatic redirection to the Service Provider after logout.Selection
    URL after logoutEnter the URL to navigate to on logout (if left blank, use Access URL)Selection
    Table. Application General Information
    Reference
    Delete Application If you want to delete, select the checkbox ([V]) and click the Delete button at the top of the list.

    SSO

    On the SSO information entry screen, enter the Single Sign On configuration settings.

    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    IssuerEnter the SP’s unique identifier value.Required
    Single Sign-On URLEnter the full URL for login.Required
    Logout URLEnter SLO Return URL.Selection
    Logout methodProvides Back-Channel Logout, Front-Channel Logout(HTTP Redirect Binding), Front-Chennel Logout(HTTP POST Binding).Required
    Response SigningThis is the SAML Response signature configuration.Selection
    Validation On-RequestThis is the setting for enabling Signature Validation.Selection
    EncryptionThis is the setting for whether encryption is applied.Selection
    Application CertificateCertificate registration (PEM format)Required
    Attribute to map during SSOSelect SSO connection attribute information and set unique values.Required
    ‘Import Metadata File’ buttonProvides SAML metadata file upload functionality (identifies IdP endpoint and certificate).Selection
    Table. SSO information
    Reference

    Single Sign-On Configuration

    • If you select either Validation On Request or Encryption, you must register a certificate. * (Register the certificate value exported as Plain Text)
    • Attribute to map during SSO You can click Add to select attribute information provided by SingleID. * You must select a unique value for user identification among the selected attributes.
    • To deliver SingleID attribute information to the connected target application, you can map the SingleID attribute name to the attribute name used by the application and transmit it. * The information communicated during authentication is called claim information, and the received data is used by the SP to set permissions or as attribute information for operation and management.

    Provisioning

    The Provisioning menu is an account management feature that can distribute user information to applications for synchronization. SingleID provides global standard API specifications such as SCIM and REST.

    On the Provisioning information entry screen, enter the configuration settings for account distribution.

    CategoryExplanationWhether required
    Provisioning ConfigurationTo use account information synchronization, please click the On button. Selecting Off allows you to SKIP account synchronization.Required
    Base AddressEnter the Base Address (URL) that defines the Endpoint of the target system supporting the SCIM API.Required
    AcceptEnter the Accept information (e.g., application/json) used as the HTTP Accept Header value in SCIM REQUEST.Required
    Content TypeEnter the Content Type (e.g., application/json), which is the HTTP Content-Type header value used in SCIM requests.Required
    User NameRegister the User Name used for authentication to the target REST service.Required
    PasswordSet the password used for authentication to the target REST service.Required
    Bearer TokenRegister the Bearer Token used when calling the API (for authorization).Selection
    Client IDRegister the Client ID. The Client ID is an identifier issued by the authorization server to a registered client, and because the Client ID itself is information disclosed to the resource owner, it must not be used alone for client authentication.Selection
    Client SecretRegister the Client Secret information. The Client Secret is a secret generated by the authentication server, a unique value known only to the authentication server.Selection
    Access Token Node IDRegister the Access Token Node ID. The Access Token Node ID serves as the Field ID of a JSON Object Node, is returned from the target Access Token REST service, and includes the token value. The Access Token is used to authorize access to resources. It is important that the resource server accepts only the Access Token from the client.Selection
    Access Token Base AddressRegister the Access Token Base Address (URL) required to obtain an Access Token as the Base Address of the target REST service.Selection
    Access Token Content TypeRegister the Access Token Content Type (e.g., application/x-www-form-urlencoded), which is the HTTP Content-Type header value of the target Access Token REST service.Required
    ProvisioningWhen provisioning, select either a user or a group by default, and if needed, you can select both users and groups.Selection
    Inbound Provisioning ScheduleClick On to register periodically (hourly, daily, monthly, yearly) via the Intbound Provisioning Schedule.Selection
    Outbound Provisioning ScheduleYou can click On to register an Outbound Provisioning Schedule. Clicking Off allows real-time deployment.Selection
    Table. Provisioning information entry
    Reference
    If you select “Off” for Provisioning Configuration, the Provisioning and profile stages are skipped, and the application registration is set to use only the authentication service, completing the process.

    Profile

    Enter the configuration information for User/Group for deployment on the profile information input screen.

    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    Profile nameEnter the profile name.Required
    ExplanationRegister a description for the profile.Select
    attributeClick Add to select and input attribute information.Selection
    Table. Enter profile information
    Information

    Profile Mapping

    • In the tab menu for selecting the provisioning target, click User, Group to add properties.
    • Click Profile Mapping to align and connect the required information in the target application based on the SCIM schema information.
    • Provides a feature that allows you to configure an execution script (a conversion script based on the JEXL standard script) capable of real‑time conversion when running provisioning. Note that it executes exactly as entered, without any validation checks.

    After entering all items, click the Complete button to complete the basic application settings. When you complete registering a new application, it is added to the application list, and new tabs called Policy, Assignment are created.

    Policy

    You can configure login policy and access control information for application policy settings.

    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    Login PolicyConfigure the login policy applied when logging into the application. To set it, please assign the application in the login policy.Selection
    Access controlThis setting controls the user’s access to the app. When enabled, you can configure whether to request permission to access the application and whether it is approved.Selection
    Table. Policy Settings

    Allocation

    Register information for assigning application users based on users and groups. This menu assigns access permissions by configuring the users and groups that can access the registered application.

    To assign a user, follow the steps below.

    1. When you click the application, you will be taken to the application’s detail page.
    2. Click the Assignment tab and click the User tab > Assign button.
    3. User Assignment When the popup appears, select the user to assign, and click the Assign button.
    4. In the Assignment tab, the selected user appears in the list.
    Caution

    Similarly, you can assign a predefined group via the Assign button on the Group tab. Assign the group using the same method.

    Group Settings

    • When configuring the groups that can access the application, set it to include information that defines and distinguishes specific groups.
    • You must define rules and groups in advance so that you can manage access permissions using member rules that distinguish groups.
    Reference

    Application State

    • Activation (Active): Exposes the application in the User Portal and, by configuring Sign-On services, provisioning, policies, etc., places it in a state where users can access and use the application.

    • Inactive: It does not expose the application in the User Portal and is a state where the application can be deleted.

    • Delete: When deleting a registered application, caution is required. * Thus, we display a popup window to allow a second verification of the application’s information and status.

    Pre-Built App Integration

    The Pre-Built App Integration menu offers a convenient way to quickly connect and use the desired SaaS application, with necessary settings such as connection information, name, and icon prepared in advance.

    To integrate the application using Pre-Built App Integration, refer to the menu path below.

    • Admin Portal > Integration > Application > Register > Pre-Built App Integration Click the tab
    • Select Application > Next button click
    • Go to detailed settings

    The Pre-Built App Integration menu, like the Custom App Integration menu, allows you to register an application by entering the required integration information and configuring it through a six-step screen as shown below.

    The input items and methods for each step are the same, except for the information that has been predefined and entered for Pre‑Built.

    1. [General] {#general-1}
    2. [SSO] {#sso-1}
    3. [Provisioning] {#provisioning-1}
    4. [Profile]{#file-1}
    5. [Policy] {#policy-1}
    6. [Assignment] {#configuration}

    General

    Enter the general application information as referenced below.

    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    NameEnter the name of the application.Required
    ExplanationEnter a description of the application (tasks, purposes, etc.).Selection
    logo imageRegister a logo that intuitively identifies the application. Both file upload and URL link methods are available.Selection
    Screen displayWhen selected, it is displayed to the user in the User Protal.Selection
    Access URLEnter the application’s Access URL. Enter the login page for the application you will access.Required
    Automatic logoutWhen selected, the session policy automatically logs out without re‑confirmation.Selection
    Automatic redirectionWhen selected, it redirects to the Service Provider without displaying the logout completion page.Selection
    URL after logoutEnter the URL to navigate to when the user logs out. If left blank, it will be set to the Access URL.Selection
    Table. General

    SSO

    Enter the Single Sign On configuration information on the SSO information entry screen.

    CategoryExplanationRequired status
    IssuerEnter the Issuer, which is the unique identifier of the SP (Service Provider) and the value verified by the Response Issuer.Required
    Single Sign-On URLEnter the Single Sign-On URL, the full URL required when logging into the system.Required
    Logout URLEnter the Logout URL, which is the URL value for SLO (Single Logout) Return.Selection
    Logout methodThe logout methods for SLO (Single Logout) Return are provided in three ways as follows.
    • Back-Channel Logout: The user is logged out securely from the application without any interaction.
    • Front-Channel Logout (HTTP Redirect Binding): The user interacts to securely log out from the application using a browser-based logout (HTTP Redirect Binding) method.
    • Front-Chennel Logout (HTTP POST Binding): The user interacts to securely log out from the application using a browser-based logout (HTTP POST Binding) method.
    Required
    Response SigningTo sign the returned SAML Response after the authentication process, use Response Signing.Selection
    Validation On-RequestCheck to enable Signature Validation.Selection
    EncryptionSelect whether to apply encryption.Selection
    Application CertificateIf you select either Validation On Request or Encryption, you must register a “certificate”. Please enter a valid value according to the PEM(Privacy-Enhanced Mail) format.Required
    Attribute to map during SSOSelect the attribute information required for SSO connection and set a unique value for user identification. ※ The ‘Next’ button becomes active only after selecting the Subject Attribute.Required
    ‘Import Metadata File’ buttonThe SAML metadata file contains information about various SAML identity providers that can be used for SAML 2.0 protocol message exchanges. This metadata identifies the IdP endpoints and certificates to secure SAML 2.0 message exchanges. Clicking Import metadata file allows you to upload a file.Selection
    Table. SSO Information
    Information

    Single Sign-On Settings

    • If you select either Validation On Request or Encryption, you must register a certificate. * (Register the certificate value exported as plain text)
    • Attribute to map during SSO You can click Add to select the attribute information provided by SingleID. * A unique value for user identification must be selected among the chosen attributes.
    • To pass SingleID attribute information to the connected target application, you can align the SingleID attribute name with the attribute name mapped in the application. * The information communicated during authentication is called claim information, and the received data is used by the SP to set permissions or as attribute information for operation and management.

    Provisioning

    The Provisioning menu is an account management feature that can distribute user information to applications for synchronization. SingleID provides global standard API specifications such as SCIM and REST.

    Enter the configuration settings for account information distribution on the Provisioning information input screen.

    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    Provisioning ConfigurationClick the ‘On’ button to enable account information synchronization. Selecting ‘Off’ allows you to SKIP account synchronization.Essential
    Base AddressEnter the Base Address (URL) that defines the Endpoint of the target system supporting the SCIM API.Required
    AcceptEnter the Accept information (e.g., application/json) used as the HTTP Accept Header value in SCIM REQUEST.Required
    Content TypeEnter the Content Type (e.g., application/json) that is the HTTP Content-Type header value used in SCIM requests.Required
    User NameRegisters the User Name used for authentication to the target REST service.Required
    PasswordSet the password used for authentication to the target REST service.Required
    Bearer TokenRegister the Bearer Token used when calling the API (for authorization).Selection
    Client IDRegister the Client ID. The Client ID is an ID issued by the authorization server to a registered Client, and because the Client ID itself is information disclosed to the resource owner, it must not be used alone for Client authentication.Selection
    Client SecretRegister the Client Secret information. The Client Secret is a secret generated by the authentication server, a unique value known only to the authentication server.Selection
    Access Token Node IDRegister the Access Token Node ID. The Access Token Node ID serves as the Field ID of a JSON Object Node, is returned from the target Access Token REST service, and includes the token value. The Access Token is used to authorize (authorize) access to resources. It is important that the resource server accepts only the Access Token from the client.Selection
    Access Token Base AddressRegister the Access Token Base Address (URL) required to obtain an Access Token as the Base Address of the target REST service.Selection
    Access Token Content TypeRegister the Access Token Content Type (e.g., application/x-www-form-urlencoded), which is the HTTP Content-Type header value of the target Access Token REST service.Required
    ProvisioningWhen provisioning, select either a user or a group by default, and if needed, you can select both users and groups.Selection
    Inbound Provisioning ScheduleClick On to register periodically (hour, day, month, year) via the Intbound Provisioning Schedule.Select
    Outbound Provisioning ScheduleClick On to register an Outbound Provisioning Schedule. Click Off to deploy in real time.Selection
    Table. Provisioning information
    Reference
    If you select “Off” for Provisioning Configuration, the Provisioning and profile stages are skipped, and the application registration is set to use only the authentication service, completing the process.

    Profile

    On the profile information entry screen, enter the user/group settings for deployment.

    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    Profile nameEnter the profile name.Required
    ExplanationRegister a description for the profile.Required
    attributeClick Add to select and enter the property information.Required
    Table. Profile
    guide

    Profile Mapping

    • In the tab menu for selecting the provisioning target, click User, Group to add properties.
    • Click Profile Mapping to align and connect the required information in the target application based on the SCIM schema information.
    • Provides the ability to configure an execution script (written as a conversion script based on the JEXL standard script) that can perform conversion in real time when running provisioning.

    Note that it executes exactly as entered, without any validation checks.

    After entering all items, click the Complete button to complete the basic application configuration. When you complete registering a new application, it is added to the application list, and new tabs called Policy, Assignment are created.

    Policy

    You can configure login policies and access control information for application policy settings.

    CategoryExplanationRequired status
    Login PolicyConfigure the login policy applied when logging into the application. To set it, assign the application in the ‘Login Policy’ you want to configure.Selection
    Access controlThis setting controls the user’s access to the app. When enabled, you can configure whether to request permission to access the application and whether approval is granted.Selection
    Table. Policy

    Allocation Settings

    Register information for assigning application users based on users and groups. This menu assigns access permissions by configuring the users and groups that can access the registered application.

    To assign a user, follow the steps below.

    1. When you click the application, you are taken to its detail page.
    2. Click the Assign tab and then click the User tab > Assign button.
    3. User Assignment popup appears, select the user to assign, and click the Assign button.
    4. The selected user appears in the list on the Assignment tab.
    Caution

    Similarly, in the Group tab, you can assign a predefined group using the Assign button. Assign the group using the same method.

    Group Settings

    When configuring the groups that can access the application, set it to include information that defines specific groups for distinction. You must define rules and groups in advance so that you can manage access permissions with member rules that can distinguish groups.

    Reference

    Application State

    • Activation (Active): Exposes the application in the User Portal and, by configuring Sign-On services, provisioning, policies, etc., places the application in a state where users can access and use it.
    • Inactive: It does not expose the application in the User Portal and is a state where the application can be deleted.
    • Delete: When deleting a registered application, caution is required. * Thus, we display a popup window to allow a second verification of the application’s information and status.

    Application modification

    When you click an application in the list view, you can edit its settings.

    To modify the application, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Admin Portal > Integration > Select Application > Edit button.
    2. Click the General, SSO, Provisioning, Policy, Assignment, Aggregation, Permission Items, Rebranding tab to edit the items you want to modify.
    3. Click the Save button.
    Reference
    Please refer to Application Registration for editing items in the General, SSO, Provisioning, Policy, Assignment tab.

    Permission item

    The permission items provide synchronization by linking the user roles of the integrated application with SingleID.

    Register permission item

    To set the permission items, follow the steps below.

    1. When you click the application, you are taken to its detail page.
    2. Click the Allocation tab and the Permission Items tab > click the Register button.
    3. When the Permission item popup appears, you need to register the permission item.
    4. Enter Name, Key, Display Name, Content and click Save to register the permission.
    CategoryExplanationRequired status
    NameEnter the permission name.
    The permission name cannot be changed after it is registered once. If you want to change it, you need to register a new one.
    Required
    KeyEnter the authorization key. The authorization key cannot be changed after it is registered once. If you want to change it, you need to register a new one.Selection
    Display nameEnter the permission display name.Selection
    ExplanationEnter the permission description.Selection
    Table. Permission Registration
    Reference
    SSO, Permission Items, Rebranding tab is not displayed on the screen when integrated via the SCIM protocol.

    Rebranding

    A rebranding tab that does not appear during registration in the application is added. Rebranding of the application includes login page rebranding functionality when accessed as a separate application.

    The included rebranding features are as follows.

    • Favicon: The favicon can be modified in the browser.
    • Header logo: The header logo on the login screen can be modified to the logo you desire.
    • Key visual image: The key image set by default on the login page can be modified.
    • Sign‑up page redirection: Registration can be directed to a separate operational sign‑up page instead of SingleID’s sign‑up page.
    • Privacy Policy Redirection: You can register the privacy policy URL that was used in the existing application.
    • Terms of Service redirection: You can register the Terms of Service URL previously used in the existing application.

    UI

    From the list screen, click the application, then in the Rebranding tab, click the Edit button to configure application-specific rebranding settings for the UI.

    guide
    Clicking the temporary save button at the lower right allows you to save the settings midway.
    Change favicon

    In the application, you can set a custom favicon to match the characteristics of the enterprise application.

    To modify the favicon, follow the steps below.

    1. Admin Portal > Integration > Select Application > UI > Edit Click the button.
    2. Select custom in the Favicon item.
    3. Favicon image (pencil shape) item, then click the favicon image.
    4. Upload an icon file or enter the icon image URL.
    5. Click the Save button and use the preview screen to confirm that the upload was successful. 6.Korean page Enter the title in Korean.
    6. English page Enter the title in English.
    7. Once the input is complete, use the preview on the right to confirm that it was entered correctly.
    8. Click the Publish button at the lower right corner.
    Information
    The recommended size for the favicon image is 256 × 256 px, and only ICO files are supported; please upload a file no larger than 2 MB. Favicon images are applied only on PC screens.
    Header logo change

    In the application, you can configure separate header logo changes to match the characteristics of the corporate application.

    To modify the header logo, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Admin Portal > Integration > Select Application > UI > Edit button.
    2. Select Custom in the Header Logo item.
    3. You can select and configure a text logo or an image logo.
    4. Enter the Korean Redirect URL and the English Redirect URL.
    5. If the input is complete, use the preview on the right to confirm that it was entered correctly.
    6. Click the Publish button at the lower right.
    Information
    The recommended size for the header logo image is 288 × 72 px. Only PNG, JPG, and JPEG files are allowed, and please upload files no larger than 1 MB. You can set the logo image separately for each language.
    Key visual change

    In the application, you can configure separate key visual changes to match the characteristics of the corporate application.

    To edit the key visual, follow the steps below.

    1. Admin Portal > Integration > Select Application > UI > Edit Click the button.
    2. In the key visual item, select Custom.
    3. Click to use a single key visual for all languages or language‑specific key visuals.
    4. If the image upload is complete, verify through the right preview that it was entered correctly.
    5. Click the Publish button at the lower right corner.
    Information
    The recommended size for the key visual image is 600 x 612 px. Only PNG, JPG, and JPEG files are allowed, and please upload files no larger than 1 MB.

    Redirection

    From the list screen, click the application, then in the Rebranding tab, click the Edit button to configure application‑specific rebranding settings for the redirect.

    Information
    You can save the settings midway by clicking the temporary save button at the bottom right.
    Sign up

    Sign-up allows you to configure a registration link for each application.

    CategoryExplanation
    defaultWe use the default registration provided by SingleID instead of a separate sign‑up page. The default settings can be configured in the registration policy.
    User-definedIf you operate a separate sign‑up page, you can set a separate Redirection link.
    • Use a single URL for all languages: Enter a common Redirect URL regardless of language settings.
    • Use language‑specific URLs: Enter a Redirect URL for each language.
    HiddenIf you do not accept separate sign‑ups, select Hide.
    Table. Sign up
    information
    The login page design is displayed via the preview. You can click the Korean and English buttons to view previews for each language.
    Privacy Policy

    The privacy policy can be redirected to the URL link of the privacy policy provided for each application.

    CategoryExplanation
    defaultSet as the default privacy policy for SingleID.
    User-definedIf you operate a privacy policy for a separate application, you can set a separate Redirection link.
    • Use a single URL for all languages: Enter a common Redirect URL regardless of language settings.
    • Use language‑specific URLs: Enter a Redirect URL for each language.
    Table. Privacy Policy
    Terms of Use

    The Terms of Service can be redirected to the privacy policy URL link provided for each application.

    CategoryExplanation
    defaultSet as SingleID default terms of service.
    User-definedIf you operate terms of service for a separate application, you can set a separate Redirection link.
    • Use a single URL for all languages: Enter a common Redirect URL regardless of language settings.
    • Use language-specific URLs: Enter a Redirect URL for each language.
    Table. Terms of Use
    information
    The login page design is displayed via the preview. You can click the Korean and English buttons to view previews for each language.
    Reference
    SSO, Permission Items, Rebranding tab is not displayed on the screen when integrated via the SCIM protocol.

    Delete application

    On the application list screen, select the application, deactivate it, then return to the list screen and you can delete it from the three‑dot menu.

    Identity Provider

    This is the menu for registering and managing IdPs that provide authentication services and credentials to SCP SingleID. At this point, the SCP SingleID acts as a Service Provider and receives authentication services from the IdP.

    Identity Provider list

    On the list screen, you can select a registered Identity Provider to edit/delete, sort, search, etc., and you can navigate to a menu screen where you can register a new Identity Provider.

    To view the Identity Provider list, you can access the following menu.

    • Admin Portal > Integration > Identity Provider
    CategoryExplanation
    NameIdentity Provider name.
    typeDisplays the standard protocols registered for the Identity Provider. Identity Provider types are distinguished by SAML2.0 and OIDC methods.
    statusDisplays the status of the Identity Provider. It is distinguished as active or inactive.
    Active buttonOnly active Identity Providers are displayed in the list.
    disabled buttonOnly inactive Identity Providers are displayed in the list.
    Search term input fieldYou can search the Identity Provider list. After entering a search term, click the magnifying glass icon or press Enter to perform the search. Searchable fields: name, description
    Details buttonDetailed searches are possible. Search conditions can be combined using AND. After entering multiple fields, click the Search button to perform a search that matches the criteria. Click the Reset button to clear all search fields.
    Download buttonSAML metadata download is available. You can download SAML metadata files from the internal network and the Internet.
    Register buttonYou can register a new application.
    Table. Identity Provider list
    Reference
    Delete Identity Provider If you want to delete, select the checkbox (V) and click the Delete button at the top of the list.

    Identity Provider registration

    On the Identity Provider list screen, click Register at the top to add a new entry.

    To register an Identity Provider, follow the steps below.

    1. Admin Portal > Integration > Identity Provider > Register Click the button
    2. Custom App Integration > Web Application(SAML) or Web Application(OIDC) Select > Next Click the button
    3. Go to detailed settings

    You can register an Identity Provider by entering and configuring the required integration information through a three-step screen as follows.

    • [General] {#General-2}
    • [SSO] {#sso-2}
    • [JIT provisioning] {#jit}

    General

    Enter the general information for the IdP (Identity Provider).

    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    nameEnter the name of the Identity Provider. Since it is identified by its name, rules are needed for distinction and management.Required
    ExplanationEnter a description of the Identity Provider (including its functions, purposes, etc.).Select
    logo imageRegister a logo that intuitively identifies the Identity Provider.Select
    Login buttonDisplay the IdP as a button/link (text) etc.
    • Logo icon display: Choose whether to show the logo icon on the login button.
    • Button text: Enter the text to display on the login button.
    Required
    Table. Identity Provider General

    SSO

    Enter the Single Sign-On configuration information on the SSO input screen.

    When integrating with a Web Application (OIDC)

    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    Client IDRegister the Client ID. The Client ID is an ID issued by the authentication server to a registered Client, and because the Client ID itself is information disclosed to the resource owner, it must not be used alone as the Client ID during client authentication.Required
    Client SecretRegister the Client Secret information. The Client Secret is a unique value known only to the authentication server, used as secret information when authenticating to the target REST service.Required
    Authorization Endpoint URLThe Authorization Endpoint must obtain authorization from the Resource Owner. Enter the Authorization Endpoint URL, which is the URL value used at this time.Required
    Token Endpoint URLThe Token Endpoint is used by the client and obtains an Access Token via an Authorization Grant or a Refresh Token. Enter the Token Endpoint URL, which is the URL value used at this time.Required
    Logout URLEnter the Logout URL, which is the URL value for SLO (Single Logout) Return.Selection
    Userinfo Endpoint URLEnter the Userinfo Endpoint URL provided by the IdP(Identity Provider) that includes the user profile (username, name, etc.).Selection
    IdP Sign-In KeySet the IdP Sign-In Key value and select the SingleID mapping property for the IdP Sign-In Key.Required
    Table. Web Application (OIDC) SSO
    Information

    IdP Sign-In Key Configuration There are two methods to process login in SCP SingleID by receiving the key value that provides the ID.

    • How to obtain the identifier ID value using a standard SAML keyword
    • How to create and receive a custom identifier ID

    You can map the name obtained by one of the above methods to User ID, or you can also map it to the CN value. This feature configures how authentication information is mapped to a value for processing login.

    JIT provisioning

    The JIT provisioning feature tab has been added to the Identity Provider. This feature synchronizes the account in real time when a user’s changes occur. You can configure items when the account is synchronized in real time.

    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    JIT provisioningJIT provisioning, short for Just-In Provisioning, is an ID and access management feature used to quickly create user accounts when a user logs into the system for the first time.
    • The feature can be set to On or Off.
    Required
    If there is no SingleID user mapped to the IdP user.When a user accesses for the first time, manage the action.
    • Navigate to the sign‑up page: create a new account. To prevent ID duplication, set a distinct ID suffix for the logged‑in ID.
    • Automatically create a new SingleID user without user invitation: automatically generate an ID.
    • Navigate to the user registration website: if a separate user sign‑up page exists, go to that separate registration page.
    Required
    If there is a SingleID user mapped to the IdP userIf a user exists, update the user information.Required
    Table. JIT provisioning

    After entering all items, click the Complete button to complete the basic application setup.

    Modify Identity Provider

    On the list screen, you can modify the settings by clicking the Identity Provider.

    If you want to modify the Identity Provider, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Admin Portal > Integration > Select Identity Provider > Edit button.
    2. Click the General, SSO, Provisioning, Policies, Assignment tab to edit the items.
    3. Click the Save button.
    Information
    To deactivate the application, select the application and click the Deactivate button.

    Delete Identity Provider

    On the Identity Provider list screen, select an Identity Provider, deactivate it, then return to the list screen where you can delete it from the three‑dot menu. To register again, click the Add button.

    Authenticator

    Configure by integrating the Authenticator provided by SCP SingleID. Password and Email are enabled by default.

    The types and functions of Authenticators are as follows.

    • Password: The Password Authenticator verifies a password known only to the user to authenticate the user as a knowledge‑based authentication method. * It is the built-in Authenticator used for primary and secondary authentication, and it cannot be deleted or disabled for security reasons.
    • Email: An ownership-based authentication method that authenticates the user through an OTP (One-Time Password) delivered to the user’s email account.
    • Active Directory: Enter the user password of the linked Active Directory to authenticate.
    • Knox Identity: Authenticate by entering the user password of the linked Knox Portal.
    • Knox Messenger: Enter the Knox Messenger OTP received via the registered Knox Messenger to authenticate.
    • PC SSO Agent: Install SingleID’s PC SSO Agent on a PC to perform integrated authentication (SSO) and unified logout across various web browsers, and to authenticate through PC security checks.
    • SingleID Authenticator: SingleID dedicated authentication mobile app that supports biometrics (fingerprint, facial), PIN, mOTP, and TOTP.
    • SMS: Enter the SMS OTP received on the registered mobile phone to authenticate.
    • Passkey: Mobile Passkey, security key, a convenient authentication method that enables easy login with Windows biometric/PIN code.
    • TOTP Authenticator: Enter the TOTP received via the registered authentication app or web extension to authenticate.

    Authenticator list

    We support all authenticators of the six supported types.

    To check the Authenticator, please refer to the following path.

    • Admin Portal > Integration > Authenticator

    Add Authenticator

    On the Authenticator list screen, clicking Register moves to the next screen, switching to a screen where you can add an Authenticator.

    To add an Authenticator, follow the steps below.

    1. Admin Portal > Integration > Authentictor > Add Click the button.
    2. Each authentication methodselect > Next click the button.
    3. Enter the information required for authentication settings.
    4. Click the Save button.
    Information
    All nine types of Authenticators, which include various optimized work environments that a typical IdP service can provide, are already offered and registered/configured, so there is no need to add a new Authenticator until a new type of Authenticator is required.
    information
    To disable the Authenticator, select the application and click the Disable button.

    Add Active Directory {#Active Directory-add}

    Users can authenticate using the connected Active Directory.

    To add Active Directory, follow the steps below.

    1. Admin Portal > Integration > Authentictor > Add Click the button.
    2. Select Active Directory > Click the Next button.
    3. The General page appears. 3. Please review Authnticator Overview and click the Next button.
    4. Settings page appears. 4. Enter the information to register Active Directory as an Authenticator.
    5. After entering all information, click the Connection Test button to verify.
    6. After checking everything, click the Save button.
    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    LDAP URLEnter the LDAP URL of Active Directory.
    Enter a valid URL that includes ldap:// or ldaps:// for encrypted communication.
    Example) ldap://ldap.example.com/dc=example,dc=com
    Required
    Service User DNEnter the unique identifier of the service-dedicated LDAP account.Required
    service user passwordEnter the service user’s password in password format.Required
    User search base DNEnter the user search base DN, the string that specifies the starting point for searches in the LDAP directory tree.Required
    User attributeEnter user attributes.Required
    Check LDAP connectionAfter entering all the above LDAP settings correctly, click the Connection Test button to perform the integration test.Required
    Table. Add Active Directory
    Reference

    Active Directory Authenticator can be used as follows:

    1. Login
    2. Identity verification during the registration process
    3. Password reset
    4. Unlock ID

    Add Knox Identity

    Users can authenticate using the connected Nox portal.

    To add Knox Identity, follow the steps below.

    1. Admin Portal > Integration > Authentictor > Add Click the button.
    2. Select Knox Identity > Click the Next button.
    3. General page appears. 3. Check the Authnticator Overview and click the Next button.
    4. Policy page appears. 4. Enter the information to register Knox Identity as an Authenticator.
    5. After entering all information, click the Connection Test button to verify.
    6. After checking everything, click the Save button.
    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    Maximum allowed authentication failure attemptsSet the maximum allowed number of authentication failures when using Knox Identity. It can be set from 1 to 10 times.Required
    Nox IDEnter the Nox ID to test whether the account is linked.Required
    Nox passwordEnter the Nox password to test whether the account is linked.Required
    Verify Knox Identity connectionClick the Connection Test button to run the test.
    If the test fails, contact the administrator.
    Required
    Table. Add Knox Identity
    Reference

    Active Directory Authenticator can be used as follows:

    1. Login
    2. Identity verification during the registration process
    3. Password reset
    4. Unlock ID

    Add Knox Messenger

    Enter the Knox Messenger OTP received via Knox Messenger to authenticate.

    To add Knox Messenger, follow the steps below.

    1. Admin Portal > Integration > Authentictor > Add Click the button.
    2. Select Knox Messenger > Click the Next button.
    3. General page appears. 3. Check the Authenticator Overview and click the Next button.
    4. Policy page appears. 4. Enter the information required to register Knox Identity as an Authenticator.
    5. After entering everything, click the Save button.
    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    Access TokenEnter the Access Token for Knox Messenger.Required
    Authentication code timeout (minutes)Enter the expiration time (minutes) for the verification code. It can be set from 3 minutes up to a maximum of 30 minutes.Required
    Maximum allowed authentication failure attemptsThis is the maximum number of re-entries allowed after authentication failure. Please select the maximum allowed count.
    You can select from 1 to 10 times.
    Required
    Table. Add Knox Messenger
    Reference

    Knox Messenger Authenticator can be used as follows:

    1. Login
    2. Passwordless authentication
    3. Identity verification during the registration process
    4. Find ID
    5. Password reset
    6. Unlock ID

    Add PC SSO Agent

    To use SSO across multiple browsers, you can install the PC SSO Agent on the user’s PC.

    To add the PC SSO Agent, follow the steps below.

    1. Admin Portal > Integration > Authentictor > Add button, click it.
    2. Select PC SSO Agent > Click the Next button.
    3. General page appears. 3. Check the Authenticator Overview and click the Next button.
    4. Policy page appears. 4. Enter the information required to register with the PC SSO Agent.
    5. After entering everything, click the Save button.
    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    Use PC SSO Agent for multi-browser SSOClick the Activate button to enable it.
    To enable multi-browser SSO, you must configure a login policy for each application.
    Once enabled, SSO between Chrome and Edge browsers is possible.
    Set the login policy in Policy > Login Policy.
    Selection
    Prevent login using unsupported browsersClick the Activate button to activate.
    If activated, login will be restricted on browsers other than Chrome and Edge.
    Selection
    Forcefully close the browser upon PC SSO Agent logoutClick the Activate button to enable it.
    When activated, it will be forcibly closed on Chrome and Edge browsers upon logout.
    Selection
    Property SettingsWhen launching the PC SSO Agent, you can configure the user attributes that SingleID will pass to the PC SSO Agent. The configured user attributes are used for multi-browser SSO and C/S program (Rich Client application) authentication. To set the
    attribute, click the Add button to configure user attributes.
    Selection
    Forcefully close the browser upon PC SSO Agent logoutClick the Activate button to enable it.
    When activated, it will be forcibly closed on Chrome and Edge browsers upon logout.
    Selection
    Table. Add Knox Messenger
    Reference

    This Authenticator can be used as follows:

    1. Multi-browser SSO
    2. Rich Client application authentication

    Add SingleID Authenticator

    Authenticate using the SingleID Authenticator mobile app provided by SingleID.

    If you want to add the SingleID Authenticator, follow the steps below.

    1. Admin Portal > Integration > Authentictor > Add Click the button.
    2. Select SingleID Authenticator > Click the Next button.
    3. The General page appears. 3. Please review the Authnticator Overview and click the Next button.
    4. Policy page appears. Enter the information to register the SingleID Authenticator as an Authenticator.
    5. After entering everything, click the Save button.
    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    Authentication wait time (minutes)Enter the authentication waiting time (minutes). This is the input time for authentication processing. It can be set between 3 and 30 minutes.Required
    Maximum allowed authentication failure attemptsThis is the maximum number of re-entries allowed after authentication failure. Please select the maximum allowed number of attempts.
    You can select from 1 to 10 times.
    Required
    TOTP generation interval (seconds)This is the interval (seconds) for automatically generating OTPs. It can be set from 15 to 120 seconds.Required
    Number of adjacent TOTP intervalsThis is the count of TOYP codes to allow before and after based on the SingleID server time. If this value is 3, three TOPT codes before and after the SingleID server time are allowed. This setting can prevent authentication failures caused by the time difference between the SignleID server time and the SingleID Authenticator. You can select 0 to 5.Required
    App Push TypeYou can set the push type for the SingleID Authenticator app.Required
    SingleID Authenticator biometric authentication replacement settingIf the user’s mobile phone does not have fingerprint or facial recognition features, authentication can be performed using alternative methods. It can be replaced with PIN, mOTP, or TOTP; when all users are selected, the user can change to another authentication method for authentication. If you want to apply it only to a separate group, select Apply only to the group below.Required
    Table. Add SingleID Authenticator
    Reference

    This Authenticator can be used as follows:

    1. Login
    2. Passwordless authentication
    3. Identity verification during the registration process
    4. Find ID
    5. Password reset
    6. Unlock ID

    Add TOTP Authenticator

    Enter the TOTP received through the registered authentication app or web extension to authenticate. You can use TOTP authentication methods to support 3rd Party Authenticators such as mobile authentication apps (Google Authenticator, Microsoft Authenticator, etc.) and web browser extensions (Chrome Web Store, Microsoft Edge Add-ons, etc.).

    To add the TOTP Authenticator, follow the steps below.

    1. Admin Portal > Integration > Authentictor > Add Click the button.
    2. Select TOTP Authenticator > click the Next button.
    3. General page appears. 3. Please review the Authenticator Overview and click the Next button.
    4. Policy page appears. 4. Enter the information required to register with the TOTP Authenticator.
    5. After entering everything, click the Save button.
    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    Maximum allowed authentication failure attemptsThis is the number of allowed re‑entries when an incorrect TOTP is entered or a TOTP that exceeds the time limit is entered. It can be set from 1 to 10 times.Required
    Number of adjacent intervals in TOTPThis is the number of TOTP codes allowed before and after based on the SingleID server time. If this value is 3, three TOTP codes before and after the SingleID server time are allowed. This setting can prevent authentication failures caused by time differences between the SingleID server time and the SingleID Authenticator. 0 ~ 5 can be selected.Required
    IssuerWhen a user registers a ‘TOTP Authenticator’ using an ‘Authenticator App’ or ‘Web Extention’ and registers via a QR code, the format ‘Issuer : Tenanat/UserID’ appears on the user screen.Required
    Table. Add Knox Messenger
    Reference

    This TOTP Authenticator can be used as follows:

    1. Login
    2. Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA)
    3. Authentication during Authenticator registration
    4. Password reset
    5. Unlock
    6. Conditional authentication
    7. Authentication for non‑compliant PCs
    Reference

    To apply the TOTP Authenticator, set it in the authentication policy.

    1. Available Authenticator (for login policy) → Use TOTP Authenticator when the user logs in
    2. Authenticator registration authentication → User uses TOTP Authenticator during Authenticator registration
    3. Account recovery > Password reset → Use TOTP Authenticator when the user resets the password

    Modify Authenticator

    On the Authenticator list screen, after selecting an Authenticator and clicking Edit, it switches to the edit screen.

    If you want to modify the Authenticator, follow the steps below.

    1. Admin Portal > Integration > Authentictor > Edit button click
    2. Edit each item, then click the Edit button to complete the changes.
    Reference
    To edit each Authenticator, please refer to each Autheticator Add in the Authenticator List and make the modifications.

    Delete Authenticator

    On the Authenticator list screen, select an Authenticator, disable it, then return to the settings screen, and you can delete it using the delete button in the three‑dot menu. You must exclude the authentication policy settings before disabling; otherwise, the disable cannot be applied.

    To delete the Authenticator, follow the steps below.

    1. Admin Portal > Integration > Authentictor List > Authenticator right three dots Click.
    2. Disable popup click
    3. If a warning popup appears, check the applied authentication policy.
    4. To manage the lower authentication policy, please click here. Then click to exclude the policy from the authentication settings.
    5. Deactivation is completed when the corresponding authentication policy is excluded from the authentication policy information.
    6. After deactivation is complete, click the Authenticator and then click the Delete button.

    MFA Service Provider

    MFA Service Provider provides a service that enhances user convenience by applying biometric and simple authentication technologies along with strengthened authentication methods, meeting the security requirements required by enterprises through multi-factor authentication.

    Reference
    The MFA Service Provider performs additional multi-factor authentication (MFA) for registered applications when users log in.

    MFA Service Provider List

    To view the list of MFA Service Providers, you can access the following menu.

    • Admin Portal > Integration > MFA Service Provider
    CategoryExplanation
    NameThis is the name of the MFA Service Provider.
    System codeDisplays system code information.
    project codeDisplays project code information.
    User TagDisplays the User Tag.
    typeShows how to integrate the MFA Service Provider. It is presented in the following three methods.
    • ADFS Plugin
    • MFA API
    • RADIUS
    System code input fieldEnter the system code information.
    Project code input fieldEnter the project code information.
    Search term input fieldYou can search the Identity Provider list. Enter a search term and click the magnifying glass icon or press Enter to perform the search.
    • Searchable fields: name, description, system code, project code
    Details buttonDetailed searches are possible. Search conditions can be combined using AND. After entering multiple fields, click the Search button, and the search will be performed according to the criteria.
    • Reset button click clears all search fields.
    Register buttonYou can register a new MFA Service Provider.
    Table. MFA Service Provider List

    MFA Service Provider registration

    To register the MFA Service Provider, follow the steps below.

    1. Admin Portal > Integration > MFA Service Provider > Register Click the button
    2. ADFS Federated Application or Custom Application or Network Equipment Select > Next Click the button
    Information

    There are three types of MFA Service Provider.

    • ADFS Federated Application : It uses the AD Flugin method and registers an ADFS federation application that will be linked with SingleID MFA.
    • Custom Application : Registers an application that uses the MFA API in API mode and integrates with SingleID MFA.
    • Network Equipment : It uses the RADIUS method and registers network equipment that will be linked with RADIUS‑based MFA.

    Through a three-step screen as shown below, you can enter the required information, configure it, and register the MFA Service Provider for integration.

    • [General] {#General-3}
    • [MFA integration] {#integration}
    • [Owner] {#owner}

    General

    Enter general information for the MFA Service Provider.

    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    NameEnter the name of the MFA Service Provider. Since it is identified by its name, a rule for distinction and management is required.Required
    ExplanationEnter a description of the MFA Service Provider (including its functions, usage, etc.).Selection
    Logo imageRegister a logo that can intuitively identify the MFA Service Provider.Selection
    Manage users using User TagIf you enable User Tag usage, when a new user is registered from the MFA Service Provider, “#"+User Tag is automatically appended to the user’s ID, preventing duplicate ID registrations.Selection
    User TagOnly one User Tag can be registered per MFA Service Provider.
    - A User Tag cannot be modified after registration; it is a tag attached to the MFA Service Provider and the user.
    - Tenant administrators can define and use User Tags. Users provisioned via JIT through the MFA Service Provider have the same User Tag set as a user attribute, allowing identification of where the user was created.
    Required
    System codeEnter the system code information.Selection
    project codeEnter the project code information.Selection
    campaignIf only one authentication method is used, a pop-up page guiding the user to register an authentication method is displayed. It becomes active when the selection box is selected.Selection
    Table. MFA Service Provider General

    MFA integration

    Enter MFA integration information.

    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    Conditional authenticationConditional authentication is a policy that performs additional authentication when the authentication conditions registered in conditional authentication are met.
    To apply conditional authentication, click the check box.
    Select the WHEN policy and the THEN policy.
    The WHEN policy is an authentication policy executed when a specific condition occurs at login.
    The THEN policy performs an additional identity verification when the WHEN policy is satisfied.
    Selection
    LoginAdd the provided Authenticator to the Chip Box.
    When logging in, click the Activate button to use the delegation to the administrator.
    If you enable the delegation option to the administrator, you can see the following guide messages on the ‘Select Authentication Option’ page for registration.
    1. “If you cannot complete identity verification due to any issue, you can request verification from the manager. Click here”
    2. “If a problem occurs with identity verification, you can request delegated verification from the administrator. Please click here."
    ※ Delegation is only possible to administrators who have registered the SingleID Authenticator mobile app as an Authenticator.
    Required
    Authentication during Authenticator registrationSet the identity verification method that the user must perform during the Authenticator registration process.
    The user configures an Authenticator for identity verification.
    Perform the following additional authentication: strengthen verification during the identity verification process.
    * Whether to perform authentication during registration when no Authenticator is registered: set whether to proceed when the user has no registered Authenticator.
    1. Perform When selected, the user can register an additional authentication method and then authenticate.
    2. Do not perform When selected, authentication is not carried out if there is no registered authentication method.
    3. Follow JWT When selected, the predetermined JWT policy is adhered to.
    * Click the Enable button to use the authentication delegation feature for administrators.
    ※ Authentication delegation is only available to administrators who have registered the SingleID Authenticator mobile app as an Authenticator.
    Selection
    List of administrators to delegate authenticationSelect the checkbox if you want to use the delegated administrator list of the SCP cloud object storage as a separate authentication administrator list when delegating authentication to an administrator.
    This option is available only when “Delegate authentication to administrator” is enabled in the “Authenticate during Authenticator registration” or “Login” items.
    To retrieve and apply an administrator list stored as a JSON file in cloud object storage, the following settings are required.
    1. Access Key: Enter the Access Key of the cloud object storage.
    2. Secret Key: Enter the Secret Key of the cloud object storage.
    3. Endpoint: Enter the URL of the cloud object storage service provider. It must start with “http://”.
    4. Bucket name: Enter the bucket name of the cloud object storage.
    5. File path: Enter the file path in the cloud object storage.
    6. Verify cloud object storage connection: After entering all items, click the Connection Test button to check the result. The result will show success or failure.
    7. If the connection verification succeeds, the Test File Search button will appear. Click the button.
    8. A file search test popup will appear; enter the file name and click the Validate button.
    9. After clicking the button, a .json file will be created; if a file with the same name already exists, rename it to complete the test.
    Selection
    User information update method during login (MFA) processSelect the user information update method during the login process.
    1. Automatic update with JWT Claim information: a method that automatically updates the Claim information among the authentication data of a JWT token
    2. Maintain information at the time the user data is created: retain the initially created user information.
    Follow JWT When selected, it complies with the defined JWT policy.
    Required
    Whether to automatically register Knox Messenger as
    Authenticator during the login (MFA) process
    Select whether to automatically register Knox Messenger during login execution.
    If an ID is not registered in Knox Messenger, selecting ‘Register’ will not automatically register it.
    1. Automatic update with JWT claim information: a method that automatically updates the claim information among the authentication data of a JWT token
    2. Preserve the information at the moment the user data is created: retain the initially generated user information.
    Follow JWT When selected, it adheres to the defined JWT policy.
    Required
    ClaimEnter the Claim name.
    A Claim is an authentication method that manages user authentication and permissions through a specific key value, and allows you to add the necessary data for use.
    Defines the mapping that verifies whether the user is the same. Up to 30 can be registered.
    Required
    Secret KeyThe Secret Key is an encryption key for trusted communication between SingleID and the MFA Service Provider.
    Click the Issue button to issue it.
    Required
    Table. MFA integration
    Information
    The person who will handle identity verification on your behalf can be set in the person in charge tab.

    Owner

    Select and register the person in charge of the newly registered MFA Service Provider.

    CategoryExplanation
    Add buttonYou can add a person in charge of the MFA Service Provider.
    searchYou can find the person in charge using a search term (ID, name, email, status).
    Select (Check Box)Select the person in charge retrieved from the list.
    AddYou can add the selected assignee.
    CompletedComplete assigning the person in charge.
    Table. Register person in charge

    When you click the Complete button, the registration is completed.

    MFA Service Provider edit

    On the MFA Service Provider list screen, after selecting an Authenticator and clicking Edit, you are taken to a screen where you can make modifications.

    To modify the MFA Service Provider, follow the steps below.

    1. Admin Portal > Integration > MFA Service Provider > Edit Click the button.
    2. Edit each item, then click the Edit button to complete the changes.

    Delete MFA Service Provider

    After selecting an MFA Service Provider on the MFA Service Provider list screen, deactivate it, return to the list screen, and you can delete it from the three‑dot menu.

    To delete the MFA Service Provider, follow the steps below.

    1. Click Admin Portal > Integration > MFA Service Provider List > MFA Service Provider right three dots.
    2. Delete Click the popup button.
    3. If a warning popup appears, check the MFA Service Provider information.
    4. Enter the MFA Service Provider name below and click the Delete button.

    5.2.1.2.3 - Identity Store

    Identity Store is an integrated directory service that centrally manages user, group, and authentication information, supports both cloud and on-premises environments, enables easy implementation of single sign-on (SSO) and multi-factor authentication (MFA), and automates secure integration between applications and user provisioning.

    There are various cases in which users or groups are added to an organization, such as being provisioned through a registered application or being added directly by an administrator.

    Identity Store allows integration and retrieval of users and groups registered in various ways, and provides various management features so that administrators can configure detailed settings for each user or group.

    Administrators can manage all users and groups registered in the organization through the Identity Store.

    User

    Administrators can view and edit all users registered in the organization using the functions provided in the User menu, and can delete users or directly register new users.

    You can also change a user’s group membership or assign permissions to allow the user to use the application.

    Users are registered to SingleID in various ways as follows.

    • Register via account synchronization (Inbound Provisioning) from the application
    • Register via JIT (Just In Time) provisioning from the Identity Provider
    • Register from MFA Service Provider
    • Manually registered by administrator

    Administrators can use the User menu to manage registered users collectively in various ways.

    To access the user menu, navigate as follows.

    • Admin Portal > Identity Store > User

    User List

    You can view and search all users registered in SingleID in a list format.

    CategoryExplanation
    IDThe user’s ID is displayed.
    NameThe user’s name is displayed.(Surname, given name order)
    emailThe user’s email address is displayed.
    phoneThe user’s mobile number is displayed.
    AdministratorDisplays whether the user is an administrator in the Admin Portal.
    System Mapping IDThis is the application system mapping ID.
    statusIndicates whether the account is active.
    Active: The user state where login is currently possible.
    Inactive: The user state that has been manually deactivated.
    Pending: The account synchronization is complete, and the account remains in a pending state until the user logs in.
    Locked: An account locked due to password errors.
    Dormant: An account that has been marked as dormant after being offline for a certain period.
    Management entityIndicates the entity that manages the account. You can tell whether it was automatically registered by a system or manually registered.
    SingleID: Account manually registered by the administrator
    Other: Account automatically synchronized.
    Registration dateAccount’s initial registration date
    Modified DateLatest update date
    Expiration dateAccount expiration date
    Dormant User buttonYou can query dormant users.
    Search term input fieldYou can search the user list. Enter a search term and click the magnifying glass icon or press Enter to perform the search.
    - Searchable fields: name, email, ID
    1. Name: Exact match search is possible using encrypted personal data with ‘full name’, ‘first name’, or ’last name’.
    2. Email: Exact match search is possible using encrypted personal data with the full email address or the part before ‘@’.
    3. Phone number: Exact match search is possible using encrypted personal data with the last four digits of the phone number.
    Details buttonDetailed searches are possible. Search conditions can be combined with AND. After entering multiple fields and clicking the ‘Search’ button, the search is performed according to the criteria.
    Clicking the ‘Reset’ button clears all search fields.
    - Name: Exact match search is possible using encrypted personal data with ‘full name’, ‘first name’, or ’last name’.
    - Email: Exact match search is possible using encrypted personal data with the full email address or the part before ‘@’.
    - Phone number: Exact match search is possible using encrypted personal data with the last four digits of the phone number.
    Register buttonRegister the MFA Service Provider.
    Table. User List
    Information
    Click the dormant user button in the list to display the dormant user list. After selecting the selection box and clicking the Activate button, the account will be changed to Active status. If you want to delete your account, click the delete button.
    information

    There are three ways to search for users in the user list.

    • User status filter
    • Keyword search
    • Advanced Search

    User status filter

    To filter users by status, follow these steps.

    1. Click the button in the group that shows the user statuses (All, Active, Inactive, Pending, Locked) you want to filter.
    2. It is displayed in the list according to the user’s status.
    3. You can search for the desired user using keyword search while filters are applied. 3. (Note: If you perform an advanced search while filters are applied, the filters will be cleared)
    4. To remove the filter, click the All button.

    Keyword Search

    To perform a keyword search, follow these steps.

    1. Click the mouse on the keyword search input field.
    2. Enter the word to search. 2. Enter a search term, and a dropdown menu appears below the search input field. 2. If you select one of the “ID”,“Name”, “Email” displayed in the dropdown menu, the search will be executed on that field, and if you select All, the search will be executed on the ID, English name, and email fields.
    3. After entering a search term, press the Enter key or click the magnifying‑glass icon with the mouse to execute the search. 3. At this time, the search is executed across the ID, English name, and email fields.
    4. Search results are displayed in the user list.
    5. If you want to cancel the search results and display the full list, click the X icon to the right of the keyword search input box.

    Advanced Search

    To perform an advanced search, follow these steps.

    1. Click the Details button.
    2. On the detailed search screen, enter the search term in the field you want to search.
    3. In the advanced search screen, you can limit the search range by selecting the user’s registration and modification dates.
    4. When you enter search terms in multiple fields, the search is performed with an “AND” condition.
    5. After entering a search term, press Enter or click the Search button to execute the search.
    6. Search results are displayed in the user list.
    7. If you want to cancel the search results and display the full list, click the Reset button on the advanced search screen.

    User registration

    Tenant administrators can manually register users directly from the screen without going through account synchronization.

    To register a user, follow the steps below.

    • Admin Portal > Identity Store > User > Register Click button

    Users can enter and register information through a three-step screen as follows.

    1. Profile
    2. User group
    3. Summary

    Profile

    Enter the user’s basic profile information on the profile screen.

    The fields that need to be entered are as follows.

    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    IDEnter the user’s ID. Values that duplicate an already registered user’s ID cannot be entered.Required
    AdministratorSpecify whether the user is an administrator. Selecting “Allow” grants administrator privileges.Required
    Name (Korean name, surname)Enter the Korean given name and family name in order.Essential
    Name (English name, last name)Enter the English given name and surname in order. If an English name is not available, enter the Korean given name and surname again.Required
    emailEnter the email address. Since this information is used for identity verification, accurate information must be entered.Required
    Phone numberEnter your mobile number. Since this information is used for identity verification, accurate information must be entered.Essential
    DepartmentEnter the department name in Korean and English.Selection
    organizationEnter the Korean organization name and the English organization name.Select
    languageSpecifies the user’s preferred language. When the user logs in, the screen is displayed in the specified language.Essential
    time zoneSpecifies the user’s time zone. All times are displayed in the designated time zone when the user logs in.Required
    Expiration dateSet the user expiration date. The default is “Not set”.
    Choose the date to delete when automatic account deletion is set after the set date.
    Selection
    Table. Profile Information

    Click the Next button to go to the user group screen.

    User group

    Specify the group for the user to be registered on the User Group screen. All groups that can be assigned to the user are displayed on the left side of the screen. After selecting the group to assign to the user, click the > button to move to the assigned group.

    To cancel a group assignment, select the group to cancel from the assigned groups, then click the < button. Click the Next button to go to the summary screen.

    Reference
    The reason for assigning groups to users is to control access organically across login policies, authentication policies, application access policies, and similar settings.

    Summary

    1. After reviewing the information entered on the summary screen, register the user.
    2. If you want to edit the entered information, you can click the Back button to return to the screen you want to edit.
    3. To cancel the registration, click the Cancel button.
    4. When you click the Complete and Add button, it registers the user and returns to the profile screen so you can continue registering a new user.
    5. Clicking the Complete button registers the user and navigates to the registered user’s detail screen.

    User edit

    If you want to modify a user, follow the steps below.

    1. In Admin Portal > Identity Store > User, click the user you want to edit.
    2. profiles, groups, applications, multi-factor authentication (MFA) methods, devices, active sessions are displayed.
    3. Click the Edit button at the bottom and modify the data you want to change.
    4. Click the Save button.

    User status change

    The status of users managed by SingleID is as follows.

    CategoryExplanation
    ActiveThis is a user who, after initial registration, logged into SingleID, reset their password, and is now using it normally.
    InactiveThis user has been disabled by the administrator.
    WaitingThis is a user who has never logged into SingleID after the initial registration.
    LockedThe user is locked due to repeated login failures, etc. (The user can unlock themselves by resetting the password)
    Human userThe account is in a human‑processed status due to being inactive for a certain period.
    Table. User status

    A tenant administrator can change a user’s status based on the user’s current state as follows.

    CurrentChangeExplanation
    ActiveInactiveYou can click the Deactivate button to change an active user to an inactive state.
    InactiveActiveYou can click the Activate button to change a user from inactive to active.
    WaitingNoneA user in standby cannot be switched to active or inactive state.
    LockedActiveA locked user can click the password reset button to reset the password and simultaneously change the status to active.
    Table. User status

    The button that changes the user’s status is displayed on the list and detail screens as follows.

    • When one or more users in Active or Inactive state are selected on the list screen
    • Active or Inactive state when navigating to the user detail screen
    Information

    When a tenant administrator attempts to deactivate a user, the following confirmation popup is displayed.

    After verifying the information of the user to be deactivated, click the deactivate button once more to change the user’s status from active to inactive. In contrast, when changing a deactivated user to an active state, no separate confirmation popup is displayed.

    Password reset

    The tenant administrator can reset a user’s password. When a tenant administrator resets a user’s password, an informational email is sent to that user.

    Reference

    The reset password is not displayed to the administrator. Additionally, the reset password is not directly included in the notification email sent to the user.

    After receiving the notification email, the user must log in to SingleID directly, use the password reset function to complete identity verification, and then change the password.

    To change the user’s password, follow the steps below.

    1. Select the user whose password you want to change from the user list and click.
    2. Click the Reset Password button located at the top right of the user detail screen.
    3. If a confirmation popup appears, click the Confirm button.
    4. Resetting a locked user’s password unlocks the account and changes it to active status.

    Group

    The tenant administrator can view the groups that a user belongs to as a member and can add or remove group memberships.

    To manage a user’s groups, click the Group tab on the detail screen.

    CategoryExplanation
    Group TabDisplays the user’s group management screen.
    All groupsDisplays the full list of groups that can be assigned to the user.
    Assigned groupDisplays the list of groups already assigned to the user.
    Search all groupsSearch groups or group descriptions across all groups that can be assigned to the user. The search results are displayed in the list below. After searching, click the X button on the right of the search input field to display the full list.
    Search assigned groupsSearch for groups or group descriptions among groups already assigned to the user. The search results are displayed in the list below. After searching, click the X button on the right side of the search input field to show the full list.
    Delete assigned groupDelete the selected group from the groups assigned to the user. The user will be removed from the deleted group’s members.
    Group assignmentAssign the selected group to the user. The user becomes a member of the assigned group.
    Group tab

    Delete group

    To delete the group assigned to a user, follow the steps below.

    1. Select the group to delete from the assigned group list. 1. (Check the checkbox to the left of the group name)
    2. Click the < button to delete the assigned group.
    information
    Groups assigned by group rules do not display a checkbox next to the group name. Memberships established by rules cannot be manually removed by an administrator.

    Group assignment

    To assign a new group to a user, follow the steps below.

    1. Select the group to assign from the entire group list. 1. (Check the checkbox to the left of the group name)
    2. > Click the button to assign the group.
    Information
    Assigning a group automatically grants permissions for the applications assigned to the added group.

    Application

    The tenant administrator can view applications designated for user use and can add, assign, or delete applications. To manage the user’s application, click the Application tab on the detail screen.

    CategoryExplanation
    Application tabDisplays the user’s application management screen.
    List of assigned applicationsApplications assigned to the user are displayed in a list format.
    Assign buttonYou can assign additional applications to a user.
    Application tab

    Delete application

    To delete an application assigned to a user, follow the steps below.

    Select the application to delete from the list of assigned applications. (Check the checkbox to the left of the application name) Click the Unassigned button displayed above the application list. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button.

    information
    If you delete the assigned application, it will no longer appear in the User Portal > My Apps menu.

    Application allocation

    To assign a new application to a user, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Assign button displayed at the top right of the application list.
    2. Application Assignment Select the application in the popup. 2. (Check the checkbox to the left of the application name)
    3. Click the Assign button.
    4. If you have assigned all applications, click the Cancel button to close the popup.
    Reference
    The assigned application can be found in the User Portal > My Apps menu. (If the assigned application’s “Display” option is turned off, it will not appear in the user portal)

    View and Manage Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) Methods

    The tenant administrator can view the multi-factor authentication methods registered by users and can modify or delete parts of the registration information.

    To manage a user’s multi-factor authentication (MFA) method, click the Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) Method tab on the details screen.

    CategoryExplanation
    Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) method tabDisplays the user’s multi-factor authentication (MFA) method management screen.
    List of Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) MethodsThe multi-factor authentication (MFA) methods registered by the user are displayed as a list.
    Edit buttonUsers can modify or delete the multi-factor authentication (MFA) methods they have registered.
    List of Multi-Factor Authentication (MFA) Methods

    Modify multi-factor authentication (MFA) method

    To modify the multi-factor authentication (MFA) method registered by the user, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Edit button at the bottom right of the screen.
    2. Click the Registration Info column of the MFA list you want to edit.
    3. After editing the information, click the Save button at the bottom right of the screen.

    Delete multi-factor authentication (MFA) method

    To delete the multi-factor authentication (MFA) method registered by the user, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Edit button at the bottom right of the screen.
    2. Click the Delete button on the right side of the MFA method you want to remove.
    3. Click the Confirm button in the warning popup.
    4. Click the Save button at the bottom right of the screen.

    View user device information

    Administrators can view the device information added when a user registers a multi-factor authentication method.

    To view the user’s device information, click the Device tab on the detail screen.

    CategoryExplanation
    Device TabDisplays the user’s device management screen.
    Device ListWhen a user registers a multi-factor authentication (MFA) method, the added devices are displayed in a list format.
    Device Tab
    information
    Device information can only be viewed, and tenant administrators cannot add, modify, or delete it.
    Information
    Check user device information If you click on the user’s registered password, SMS, email, SingleID authenticator, Nox messenger, passkey, and other devices, you can view detailed information in a popup. Device Information popup displays ’type’, ‘OS version’, ‘browser’, ‘IP’, etc.

    Active session

    When a user logs into SingleID, SingleID manages the session information of the logged-in user.

    The tenant administrator can view a user’s current active session and forcibly terminate the session to log the user out.

    To manage the user’s session, click the Active Session tab on the detail screen.

    CategoryExplanation
    Active Sessions TabDisplays the user’s session management screen.
    Active session listThe user’s currently active sessions are displayed in a list format.
    Exit buttonForcefully terminates the user’s active session.
    Active Sessions Tab
    information
    If the user’s active session list is displayed as an empty list, it means that the current user is not logged into SingleID.

    Force Terminate Session

    To forcibly terminate a user’s session, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Terminate button displayed at the top right of the session you want to force close.
    2. In the Exit Confirmation popup, click the Exit button.
    Information
    Users whose session has ended are forcibly logged out of SingleID and must log in again to use the system. However, the sessions of applications that logged in using SingleID are retained until the session ends, and each application’s sessions are managed by the respective application.

    Force terminate multiple sessions

    If you want to select one or more user sessions and terminate them simultaneously, follow the steps below.

    1. Select the sessions to forcefully terminate from the list and check the checkbox (V) displayed to the left of the session information.
    2. Click the Exit button displayed above the list.
    3. Exit Confirmation in the popup, click the Exit button.

    Delete user

    Tenant administrators can delete user information from SingleID.

    The button for deleting a user appears on both the list and detail screens as shown.

    • When one or more users are selected on the list screen
    1. After selecting a user, click the Delete button, and a confirmation popup appears on the screen.
    2. To delete a user, verify the user information, then enter the user’s ID and click the Delete button.
    3. After selecting multiple users and clicking the Delete button, a confirmation popup appears on the screen.
    4. To delete the selected users, use the <, > button, review all user information, then enter the phrase Delete All and click the Delete button.
    information

    Verify all users’ information and you must enter the phrase Delete All for the delete button to become active.

    When navigating to the user detail screen

    1. When an administrator attempts to delete a user, a confirmation popup is displayed.
    2. To delete a user, verify the user information, then enter the user’s ID and click the Delete button.
    Reference

    Deleted user information cannot be recovered.

    When a user’s information is deleted, the groups, applications, and multi-factor authentication (MFA) methods assigned to the user are also deleted, and even if the user is re-registered with the same ID, the deleted groups, applications, and MFA methods are not restored.

    Users registered through an application’s inbound provisioning can be reprovisioned from that application even if they are deleted from SingleID.

    To completely delete a user, you must remove them from the primary system that manages user information.

    After deletion, even if the user registers again with the same ID, the deleted groups, applications, and multi‑factor authentication (MFA) methods will not be automatically restored.

    Group

    Administrators can use the functions provided in the Group menu to view and edit all groups registered in the organization, and can delete groups or register new groups.

    You can also modify the group’s membership rules or assign permissions so that group members can use the application.

    Groups are registered to SingleID in various ways as follows.

    Tenant administrators can centrally manage registered groups in various ways using the group menu.

    To access the group menu, navigate as follows.

    • Admin Portal > Identity Store > Group

    Group List

    Administrators can view and search all groups registered in the organization in a list format.

    Category Description

    CategoryExplanation
    Group ListThe group list is displayed.
    Keyword searchSearch by group name and description.
    Detailed SearchDisplays detailed options for searching groups on the screen.
    Table. Group List

    Create group

    Administrators can manually register groups directly on the screen without going through inbound provisioning.

    1. To register a group manually, click the Register button on the group list screen.
    2. When you click the Register button, the group registration popup is displayed on the screen.

    The fields that need to be entered for group registration are as follows.

    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    typeSelect the group type.Required
    NameEnter the name of the group. Values that duplicate an already registered group name cannot be entered.Required
    ExplanationEnter the description of the group.Required
    Table. Group List
    1. Complete button click registers the group and navigates to the detailed information screen of the registered group.

    View and edit detailed information

    The administrator can click Group in the group list to navigate to the group’s detailed information view screen.

    If you have newly registered a group, you will be taken directly to the group’s detail screen immediately after registration.

    At the top of the group detail screen, the group’s name, description, and managing entity information are displayed, and below that, group information organized into multiple tabs is shown.

    CategoryExplanation
    typeThe group’s type is displayed.
    NameThe name of the group is displayed.
    Management entityThe system that manages the group is displayed. For groups directly registered by a tenant administrator in SingleID, SingleID is shown; for groups provisioned inbound through an application, the application’s name is displayed.
    ExplanationThe group’s description is displayed.
    Table. View detailed information

    The tenant administrator can view detailed information of registered groups via the Group Profile tab.

    CategoryExplanation
    Group profileThe group profile is displayed.
    ListButton that returns to the list.
    EditEdit the profile.
    Table. View detailed information

    To edit the group’s detailed information, follow the steps below.

    1. On the group detail screen, select the Profile tab.
    2. Click the Edit button.
    3. Edit Group Information.

    The fields that can be edited are as follows.

    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    NameEnter the group’s name. You cannot enter a value that duplicates an already registered group name.Required
    ExplanationEnter the description of the group.Required
    Table. Edit field
    1. Click the Save button.
    2. To return to the view state without saving the edited information, click the Cancel button.

    Group membership rule management

    Administrators can set rules that automatically assign users meeting certain conditions as members of a group.

    When you set rules for a group, members are automatically provisioned without the tenant administrator having to manually manage them, and members are added or removed according to the configured condition expression.

    To manage the group’s membership rules, click the Rules tab on the detail screen.

    CategoryExplanation
    Rules tabGroup rules are displayed.
    RuleThe rules of the configured group are displayed. (The default membership policy setting after creating a group is Off) If the membership policy setting is Off, members are not managed automatically.
    ListThis is a button that returns to the list.
    EditModify the rules.
    Table. Rules tab

    To set the group’s rules, follow the steps below.

    1. Select the Rules tab on the group detail screen.
    2. Click the Edit button.
    3. Click the On button in the membership policy settings.
    4. Set the condition expression for the WHEN area.
    5. Click the Save button.
    6. If you want to return to the query state without saving the configured rule, click the Cancel button.
    Information
    When a group’s membership rule is set, if an administrator changes a user’s detailed information or the user’s details are changed by inbound provisioning, the system automatically searches for the user according to the configured rule and manages each group’s members automatically. Members automatically added according to the group’s membership rules cannot be manually removed by the tenant administrator.

    The condition expression in the WHEN clause is constructed as follows.

    CategoryExplanation
    Operator relationship between conditional expressionsWhen there is one or more condition expressions, define the logical relationship between them. You can choose either AND or OR, and it applies to all condition expressions.
    Conditional expression typeSet the condition type. You can select User Attribute.
    Condition itemSet the condition items of the condition expression. When the expression type is User Attribute, you can select a user’s attributes from the list.
    operatorSet the operation mode of the conditional expression.
    condition valueSet the condition value of the conditional expression.
    Add condition expressionAdd a condition expression.
    Delete conditionDelete the condition. It cannot be deleted when there is only one condition.
    Table. Rules tab

    The user attributes that can be set in the condition item are as follows.

    attributeData typeExplanationRequired or not
    keyStringkeyRequired
    usernameStringIDRequired
    passwordGuardedStringPasswordRequired
    statusStringstatusRequired
    mustChangePasswordBooleanWhether to enforce password settingRequired
    suspendedBooleanStandby statusRequired
    creatorStringConstructorSelection
    creationDateDateCreation dateSelection
    lastModifierStringLast editorSelection
    lastChangeDateDateLast modified dateSelection
    administratorBooleanAdmin statusSelection
    displayNameStringDisplay nameSelection
    cnStringCommon NameSelection
    localStringLocale (email sending criteria)Selection
    userSourceStringUser sourceSelection
    syncDateStringLast synchronization timeSelection
    contractNumberStringContract numberSelection
    contractStartDateStringContract start dateSelection
    contractEndDateStringContract End DateSelection
    agreementDateStringDate of agreement to required termsSelection
    accountStartDateStringAccount start dateSelection
    accountEndDateStringAccount expiration dateSelection
    partnerOrganizationCodeStringPartner company codeSelection
    approvalUserStringApprover IDSelection
    formattedNameStringKorean display nameSelection
    familyNameStringKorean surnameSelection
    givenNameStringKorean nameSelection
    enFormattedNameStringEnglish display nameSelection
    enFamilyNameStringEnglish surnameSelection
    enGivenNameStringEnglish nameSelection
    adDomainStringAD DomainSelection
    nickNameStringNicknameSelection
    employeeNumberStringEmployee numberSelect
    epIdStringEP IDSelect
    emailStringemail addressSelection
    phoneNumberWorkStringPhone numberSelect
    mobileStringmobile phone numberSelection
    titleStringJob TitleSelection
    executiveYnStringExecutive statusSelect
    timeZoneStringTime zoneSelection
    accountLockedBooleanForced account lockSelection
    accountAutoLockedBooleanAutomatic account lockSelection
    accountDisabledBooleanUnused accountSelection
    accountSuspendedBooleanDormant accountSelection
    accountSuspendedTimeDateIdle processing timeSelection
    lastLoginTimeDateLast login timeSelection
    accountStateStringAccount statusSelection
    Table. Condition attribute

    The operators that can be configured in the operator are as follows.

    operatorExplanation
    EqualsSearches for users whose condition field value matches the condition value.
    Not EqualsSearch for users whose condition item value does not match the condition value.
    Starts withSearch for users whose condition field value begins with the condition string.
    Ends withSearch for users whose condition field value ends with the condition string.
    ContainsSearch for users whose condition field value includes the condition string.
    Table. Operator List

    Group member management

    Tenant administrators can manually assign members to a group or remove users from the group’s members.

    To manage the group’s members, click the Member tab on the details screen.

    NameExplanation
    Member tabDisplays the group member management screen.
    Member listDisplays group members in a list format.
    Filter button groupFilters group members by status and displays the list.
    Keyword searchEnter a keyword to search for group members.
    - Name: Exact match search is possible using encrypted personal data with ‘full name’, ‘first name’, or ’last name’.
    Email: Exact match search is possible using encrypted personal data with the full email address or the part before ‘@’.
    - Phone number: Exact match search is possible using encrypted personal data with the last four digits of the phone number.
    Detailed SearchEnter detailed search criteria to find group members.
    - Name: Exact match searches are possible using encrypted personal data with ‘full name’, ‘first name’, or ’last name’.
    - Email: Exact match searches are possible using encrypted personal data with the full email address or the part before ‘@’.
    - Phone number: Exact match searches are possible using encrypted personal data with the last four digits of the phone number.
    Add buttonAdd a member to the group.
    Table. Member tab

    There are three ways to search for members within the Group tab.

    • Filter by member status
    • Keyword search
    • Advanced Search
    information

    Member Status Classification

    • Active: User who, after initial registration, logs into SingleID, resets their password, and is now using it normally.
    • Inactive: User disabled by the administrator
    • Pending: users who have never logged into SingleID after initial registration
    • Locked: User locked due to reasons such as repeated login failures (a state where the user can unlock themselves by resetting the password)

    Filter by Member Status

    To filter members by status, follow these steps.

    1. Click the button of the group that displays the status of the members you want to filter. 1. (Active, Inactive, Standby, Locked button)
    2. You can navigate pages in the filtered view to see the list of the desired members.
    3. You can search for the desired member using keyword search while the results are filtered. 3. (Note: If you perform an advanced search while filters are applied, the filters will be cleared.)
    4. To remove the filter, click the All button.

    Keyword Search

    To perform a keyword search, follow these steps.

    1. Click the mouse in the keyword search input field.
    2. Enter the word to search. 2. At this point, a dropdown menu appears below the search input field. 2. If you select one of “ID”, “English name”, or “Email” displayed in the dropdown menu, the search will be performed on that field, and if you select “All”, the search will be performed on the ID, English name, and Email fields.
    3. After entering a search term, press the Enter key or click the magnifying glass icon with the mouse to execute the search. 3. At this time, the search is executed across the ID, English name, and email fields.
    4. Search results are displayed in the member list.
    5. If you want to cancel the search results and display the full list, click the X icon to the right of the keyword search input box.

    Advanced Search

    To perform an advanced search, follow these steps.

    1. Click the Details button.
    2. On the detailed search screen, enter the search term in the field you wish to search.
    3. In the advanced search screen, you can select a member’s registration date to limit the search range.
    4. When you enter search terms in multiple fields, the search is performed with an “AND” condition.
    5. After entering a search term, press the Enter key or click the Search button to execute the search.
    6. Search results are displayed in the member list.
    7. If you want to cancel the search results and display the full list, click the Reset button on the advanced search screen.

    Delete member

    To remove a member from a group, follow these steps.

    1. Select one or more members to delete from the member list. 1. (Check the checkbox to the left of the member ID)
    2. Click the Delete button displayed at the top of the list.
    3. Click the Confirm button in the warning popup.
    information
    Removing a member from a group does not delete the member’s user information. Deleted members lose the application permissions assigned via the group.

    Add member

    To add a member to a group, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Add button at the top right of the member list.
    2. In the member addition popup, select the user to add as a member. 2. (Check the checkbox to the left of the user ID)
    3. Click the Add button.
    4. If you have added all desired users as members, click the Cancel button on the popup to close the member addition popup.
    Information
    Added members immediately obtain the application permissions assigned via the group upon being added.

    Application Management

    The tenant administrator can view applications assigned to a group and can add or remove applications.

    To manage the group’s applications, click the Group tab on the details screen.

    NameExplanation
    Application tabDisplays the application management screen for the group.
    List of assigned applicationsApplications assigned to the group are displayed in a list format.
    Assign buttonYou can add and assign applications to a group.
    Table. Application Management

    Application deletion

    To delete an application assigned to a group, follow the steps below.

    1. Select the application to delete from the list of assigned applications. 1. (Check the checkbox to the left of the application name.)
    2. Click the Unassigned button displayed above the application list.
    3. In the confirmation popup, click the Confirm button.
    Information
    If you delete an assigned application, it will no longer appear in the User Portal > My Apps menu for group members.

    Application assignment

    To assign a new application to a group, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Assign button displayed at the top right of the application list.
    2. Select the application in the Application Assignment popup. 2. (Check the checkbox next to the left side of the application name)
    3. Click the Assign button.
    4. If you have assigned all applications, click the Cancel button to close the Application Assignment popup.
    information
    The assigned application can be viewed in the group members’ User Portal > My Apps menu. (If the assigned application’s screen display option is turned off, it will not appear in the user portal)

    Delete Group

    The tenant administrator can delete a group from SingleID.

    The button for deleting a group is displayed on the list and detail screens as follows.

    • When one or more groups are selected on the list screen.
      1. After selecting a group and clicking the Delete button, the following confirmation popup appears on the screen.
      2. To delete a group, verify the group information, then enter the group name and click the Delete button.
      3. After selecting multiple groups and clicking the Delete button, the following confirmation popup appears on the screen.
      4. To delete the selected groups, use the <, > button to view all group information, then enter the phrase Delete All and click the Delete button.
    Information

    You must verify the information of all groups and enter the phrase Delete All before the Delete button becomes active.

    • When navigating to the group detail screen

      1. When a tenant administrator attempts to delete a group, the following confirmation popup is displayed.
      2. To delete a group, verify the group information, then enter the group name and click the Delete button.
    Reference

    Information of a deleted group cannot be recovered.

    When group information is deleted, the group’s members and the applications assigned to the group are also deleted, and re‑registering a group with the same name will not restore the members or application data.

    Groups registered through the application’s inbound provisioning can be provisioned again from the application even if they are deleted in SingleID. To completely delete a group, you must remove it from the ledger system that manages group information. Even if the group is re‑registered with the same name after deletion, the deleted members or application information will not be automatically restored.

    AI agent

    AI agents are intelligent services used for various purposes such as internal workflow automation, data analysis, and customer support. Using SingleID(integrated authentication and certification system), control the access and permissions of AI agents registered with a single authentication.

    To access the menu, navigate as follows.

    • Admin Portal > Identity Store > AI Agent
    Reference
    The detailed access permission feature for AI agents is planned to be developed in the second half of 2026.

    AI Agent List

    The administrator can view and search all registered AI agents in a list format.

    Category Description

    CategoryExplanation
    AI Agent ListAI agents are displayed in the list.
    Keyword searchSearches for AI agent names and the agent list.
    Detailed SearchSearch using detailed options that search groups.
    Table. List of AI agents

    Register AI Agent

    Administrators can register, modify, or delete AI agents.

    1. To register an AI agent, click the Register button on the AI agent list screen.
    2. When you click the Register button, the AI agent registration popup appears on the screen.

    The fields you need to enter to register an AI agent are as follows.

    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    NameEnter the AI agent name. Values that duplicate an already registered name cannot be entered.Required
    Agent purposeEnter the AI agent’s purpose.Selection
    AI modelEnter the AI model name. eg. ChatGPTSelection
    URLEnter the AI agent URL. eg. http://www.example.comSelection
    Table. List of AI agents
    1. When you click the Complete button, a confirmation popup appears to finalize the AI agent registration.
    CategoryExplanation
    Agent IDAI agent IDs are automatically generated for internal and external networks. Please copy the agent ID and keep it safe.
    Agent SecretAI agent secrets for internal and external networks are generated automatically. Since they cannot be viewed on the screen later, please copy them now and keep them safe.
    NameVerify the AI agent name you entered.
    Agent purposeCheck the AI agent purpose you entered.
    AI modelCheck the AI model name.
    URLCheck the AI agent URL.
    Table. AI Agent registration completed
    1. Click the Confirm button to register the AI agent successfully.

    View and edit AI agent information

    The administrator can click AI agent in the AI agent list to navigate to the AI agent’s detailed information view screen.

    If you have newly registered an AI agent, you will be taken directly to the AI agent’s detail screen immediately after registration.

    At the top of the AI agent detail screen, the AI agent’s agent ID and agent information are displayed.

    CategoryExplanation
    Agent IDThe AI agent ID can verify the unique identifiers for internal and external networks. The unique identifier cannot be changed after it is issued.
    NameThe name of the AI agent is displayed.
    Agent purposeThe purpose of the AI agent you entered is displayed.
    AI modelThe AI model name you entered is displayed.
    URLThe URL you entered is displayed.
    Agent SecretYou can view the secrets for internal and external networks.
    If you have lost or forgotten the agent secret, you can request a reissue.
    Click the Reissue button to request a reissue.
    Table. View detailed information
    Reference

    The agent ID and agent secret serve as the user’s ID and password, providing authentication.

    Agent ID The agent ID is a unique identifier that the system automatically issues upon registration. Once issued, it cannot be reissued.

    Agent Secret Authentication credentials for the agent to securely access applications and APIs. You can obtain a new agent secret by reissuing it, but you must update all APIs or applications that are currently using the agent secret.

    To modify the AI agent information, follow the steps below.

    1. Select the AI agent you want to edit from the AI agent list screen.
    2. Click the Edit button at the lower right corner.
    3. Edit AI agent information.

    The fields that can be edited are as follows.

    CategoryExplanationRequired or not
    NameEnter the AI agent name. Values that duplicate an already registered group name cannot be entered.Required
    Agent purposeEnter the agent’s objective.Selection
    AI modelEnter the AI model name.
    URLEnter the AI agent URL.
    Table. Edit
    1. Click the Save button.
    2. To return to the view state without saving the edited information, click the Cancel button.

    Delete AI agent

    To delete an AI agent, you can delete it by clicking the Delete button on the right side of the AI agent detail screen.

    To delete the AI agent, follow the steps below.

    1. Select the AI agent you want to edit from the AI agent list screen.
    2. Click the Delete button on the right.
    3. The AI Agent Deletion popup appears.
    4. Enter the name of the AI agent you want to delete, then click the Delete button.
    5. Click to complete the deletion.

    5.2.1.2.4 - Policy

    Add Dormant User Policy #User Lifecycle Management #Conditional Authentication Policy –>

    When logging into SingleID or logging into an application registered with SingleID, various settings such as login methods, authentication sessions, and passwords need to be configured according to the organization’s security policy.

    SingleID provides a policy management feature that allows detailed configuration of login and authentication information.
    If you have purchased the anomalous behavior detection feature (ADM), you can configure it to analyze a user’s login activity at sign‑in and, when it detects authentication anomalies that differ from the norm, notify the user of a potential security threat.

    The policy features provided by SingleID are as follows.

    • Login Policy
    • Authentication Policy
    • Anomaly detection policy

    By using SingleID’s policy feature, you can configure a secure authentication environment that meets organizational security requirements by specifying detailed login methods based on who is logging in, when, from which environment, and to which application.

    Login Policy

    The administrator can set detailed policies specifying which authentication methods users can use when logging in with SingleID, and, if necessary, create condition-based authentication policies for users authenticating in specific environments.

    Login policies can be configured using the following conditions.

    • Which application are you logging into?
    • Who is logging in?
    • In what environment are you logging in?

    To access the login policy menu, navigate as follows.

    • Admin Portal > Policy > Login Policy

    Default login policy

    The Admin Portal automatically creates the following two policies by default.

    • Admin Portal Policy: Admin Portal access permission control policy
    • Default Policy: User’s default access control policy

    The Admin Portal Policy is the login policy applied when attempting to log in to the Admin Portal, and the Default Policy is the login policy applied when attempting to log in to the user portal.

    If you have linked an application to SingleID and have not assigned a separate login policy, the Default Policy will be automatically assigned as the default login policy.

    guide
    The above two default policies cannot be disabled or deleted.

    Register Login Policy

    Login policy sets the login policies for administrators and users. You can configure login policies based on the access environment, application, and situation.

    Login policies can be registered through a screen consisting of four steps as follows.

    1. General
    2. Allocation
    3. Initial Redirection
    4. Rule

    General

    Enter the name and description of the login policy on the general screen.

    The fields that need to be entered are as follows.

    NameExplanationRequired status
    NameEnter the name of the login policy.Required
    ExplanationEnter the description of the login policy.Required
    Table. General

    Click the Next button to go to the assignment screen.

    allocation

    Specify the application to which the login policy will be applied on the assignment screen.

    NameExplanation
    FilterFilter applications by status.
    Keyword searchSearch by application name and description.
    Advanced SearchDisplays detailed options for searching applications on the screen.
    Assign buttonDisplays the application assignment popup on the screen.
    Assigned Application ListThe assigned applications are displayed in a list format. It starts with an empty list.
    Table. Assignment
    1. Click the Assign button to display the application assignment popup on the screen.
    2. In the Application Assignment popup, select one or more applications to assign to the login policy, then click the Assign button.
    3. If you have assigned all applications, click the Cancel button to close the Application Assignment popup.

    Initial Redirection

    Specifies how users access the login screen and the login method on the Initial Redirection screen.

    • Redirected to SingleID’s Sign-in page (login page)

    • Redirected to the external IdP


    The explanations of the two methods above are as follows.

    • If you select Redirected to SingleID’s Sign-in page, the SingleID login page will be displayed to the user attempting to log in.
    • If you select Redirected to the external IdP, the user trying to log in will see the login page of the selected Identity Provider.
    • After selecting Redirected to the external IdP, you must choose the Identity Provider from the selection list and designate it.
    • If you select Redirected to SingleID’s Sign-in page, you can optionally display an additional button at the bottom of the SingleID login screen that allows login via an Identity Provider.
    • AND see the following external IdP buttons on the Sign-In page Click the text input field below, select one or more Identity Providers registered in SingleID, and configure them to be displayed on the login screen.
    guide
    The settings for registering an Identity Provider or displaying a registered Identity Provider on the login screen Please refer to Identity Provider Registration.

    Rule

    On the Rules screen, modify or add login rules and set the priority among login rules.

    NameExplanation
    List of rulesLogin rules are displayed on the screen as a list. The Default Rule is shown by default and cannot be deleted.
    Keyword searchSearch by the name or description of the login rule.
    Register buttonRegister a new login rule.
    Complete buttonRegister a login policy.
    Table. Rules

    Default Rule configuration

    In the rule screen’s login rule list, Default Rule is displayed by default.

    Default Rule cannot be deleted and can only be edited. Also, when you add one or more login rules, you cannot set the priority. (It always has the lowest priority.)

    To modify the Default Rule, follow the steps below.

    1. Click Default Rule in the rule list.
    2. Default Rule’s WHEN condition cannot be modified.
    3. You can modify the THEN result of Default Rule.
    NameExplanation
    Set access permissionSet whether access is allowed.
    Mandatory authentication methodConfigure the primary login method. Additional login methods can be displayed on the login screen in addition to the default login method.
    MFA authenticationConfigure it to require an additional login after the first login succeeds.
    Terms and conditions for collecting consentSet it to display the terms and conditions and request consent when a user logs into SingleID for the first time.
    Save buttonSave the modified login rules.
    Table. Default Rule

    You can select one of the following two options when configuring access permission settings.

    • Deny Access
    • Allow Access

    If you select Deny Access, it will reject login for all users.

    When you select Allow Access in the access permission setting, you can configure the user’s login method.

    guide
    • If you selected Redirected to the external IdP as the method to enter the login screen on the Initial Redirection screen, the first login settings will not be displayed.

    • The required authentication method is performed by an external Identity Provider according to the Initial Redirection settings.

      • To have the user log in via multi-factor authentication, check the MFA authentication checkbox and then select one or more Authenticators in the text input box.

      • If a user logs in to SIngleID for the first time, to display the terms and conditions and request the user’s consent, check the Terms and Conditions Consent Setting (d) checkbox and then select one or more terms or conditions to display on the screen from the text input box.

    Add rule

    To add a login rule, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Register button at the top right of the rule list.
    2. Enter the rule’s name and description on the rule registration screen.
    3. Refer to the following and enter the rule items.
    NameExplanation
    NameThis is the name of the rule.
    ExplanationThis is an explanation of the rules.
    User group assignmentSelect the user group to apply the rule to.
    Profile property assignmentClick the ‘Add’ button in the profile property assignment list to add a property. Refer to the help below for descriptions of the property and operator.
    Group SettingsSpecify the group that the logged-in user belongs to as a member.
    User attribute listSpecify the attributes of the user logging in and the conditions for each attribute.
    Add User Property buttonDisplay the “Add Property” popup on the screen.
    Table. Add rule
    Access Environment
    NameExplanation
    NetworkSpecify the IP or network range of the user logging in. The default is “IP address anywhere”.
    - Desktop
    - Mobile
    PlatformSpecify the device information of the user who logs in. The default is “Any platforms”.
    - Desktop
    - Mobile
    browserSpecifies the browser information of the user who logs in. The default is “Any browsers”.
    - Edge
    - Chrome
    - Safari
    OSSpecify the OS information for login. The default is “Any OS”.
    - Windows 10
    - Windows 11
    - Android
    - iOS
    AND Anomalies (Abnormal behavior)Set the condition to determine whether abnormal behavior is detected during login.
    Abnormal behavior detection condition settings are only available for tenants who have purchased the Abnormal Behavior Detection (ADM) feature option.
    To use the Abnormal Behavior Detection (ADM) feature, you must select the additional option when signing a SingleID contract.
    If you wish to use the Abnormal Behavior Detection feature, you can purchase it additionally on the SCP product purchase page.
    After configuring all “WHEN” condition areas, set the login method that will be used when a user matching the conditions logs in.
    Table. Access environment
    guide

    The selectable user attributes are as follows.

    User attribute information

    attribute nameData typeRequired?Explanation
    keyStringRequiredKey
    usernameStringRequiredID
    passwordGuardedStringRequiredPassword
    statusStringRequiredstatus
    mustChangePasswordBooleanRequiredWhether password enforcement is required
    suspendedBooleanRequiredStandby status
    creatorString-constructor
    creationDateDate-Creation date
    lastModifierString-Last editor
    lastChangeDateDate-Last modified date
    administratorBoolean-Admin status
    displayNameString-Display name
    cnString-Common Name
    localString-Locale (email sending standard)
    userSourceString-User source
    syncDateString-Last synchronization time
    contractNumberString-Contract Number
    contractStartDateString-Contract start date
    contractEndDateString-Contract End Date
    agreementDateString-Date of required terms agreement
    accountStartDateString-Account start date
    accountEndDateString-Account expiration date
    partnerOrganizationCodeString-Partner company code
    approvalUserString-Approver ID
    formattedNameString-Korean display name
    familyNameString-Korean surname
    givenNameString-Korean name
    enFormattedNameString-English display name
    enFamilyNameString-English surname
    enGivenNameString-English name
    adDomainString-AD Domain
    nickNameString-nickname
    employeeNumberString-Employee ID
    epIdString-EP ID
    emailString-Email address
    phoneNumberWorkString-phone number
    mobileString-mobile phone number
    titleString-Job title
    enTitleString-English job title
    titleCodeString-Job grade code
    entitlementString-Job title
    departmentString-Department name
    enDepartmentString-English department name
    departmentCodeString-Department code
    organizationString-Company name
    enOrganizationString-English company name
    organizationCodeString-Company code
    regionString-base
    userStatusString-Employee status
    userTypeString-Employee type
    securityLevelString-Security rating
    preferredLanguageString-Knox language
    executiveYnString-Executive status
    timeZoneString-Time zone
    accountLockedBoolean-Forced account lock
    accountAutoLockedBoolean-Automatic account lock
    accountDisabledBoolean-Unused account
    accountSuspendedBoolean-Dormant account
    accountSuspendedTimeDate-Dormant processing time
    lastLoginTimeDate-Last login time
    accountStateString-Account status
    Table. User attributes

    The operators are as follows.

    operatorExplanation
    EqualsSearches for users whose attribute value matches the condition value.
    Not EqualsSearch for users whose attribute values do not match the condition value.
    Starts withSearch for users whose attribute value starts with the condition string.
    Ends withSearch for users whose attribute value ends with the condition string.
    ContainsSearch for users whose attribute value includes the condition string.
    Table.operator

    THEN configuration

    THEN Set the login method and procedure in the result area.

    In the access permission setting (a), you can select one of the following two options.

    • Deny Access
    • Allow Access

    If you select Deny Access, login for all users will be denied. (The default value for the access permission setting (a) is Deny Access.)

    To allow users to log in and configure detailed login methods, select Allow Access.

    NameExplanation
    Configure access permissionSet whether access is allowed.
    First login setupSet the primary login method. Additional login methods can be displayed on the login screen besides the default login method.
    Additional login settingsConfigure it to require an additional login after the initial login succeeds.
    Terms and Conditions Agreement SettingsConfigure it to display the terms and conditions and request consent when a user logs into SingleID for the first time.
    PC SSO Agent SettingsConfigure it to verify whether a security program (Endpoint Security) is installed on the user’s PC using the PC SSO Agent.
    Save buttonSave the modified login rules.
    Table. THEN
    1. Select the Authenticator to use for login from the first login configuration’s selection list.
    2. If you want users to be able to log in with another Authenticator in addition to the selected primary login method, select the checkbox (V) of And allow another factors below: and choose one or more Authenticators to add in the text input box.
    guide

    On the Initial Redirection screen, if you select Redirected to the external IdP as the method to enter the login screen, the first login settings will not be displayed.

    The first login occurs at an external Identity Provider according to the Initial Redirection settings.

    1. To require users to log in via multi-factor authentication, select the checkbox (V) in the additional login settings, then choose one or more Authenticators in the text input field.
    2. If a user logs in to SIngleID for the first time, to display the terms and conditions and request the user’s consent, check the terms and conditions consent setting checkbox and then select one or more terms or conditions to display on the screen from the text input box.
    3. To verify whether a security program (Endpoint Security) is installed on a user’s PC using the PC SSO Agent, select the checkbox (V) in the PC SSO Agent settings. When this setting is enabled, login attempts from users whose PCs do not have the security program installed will be blocked.

    If the PC SSO Agent is not registered, the PC SSO Agent configuration option will not be displayed on the screen.

    When the PC SSO Agent setting (e) is enabled, if you want to require additional authentication instead of blocking the login of users who do not have a security program installed on the PC, select the checkbox (V) below and then choose one or more Authenticators in the text input box.

    Click the Save button to register the login rule and return to the rule list.

    Rule priority management

    If one or more login rules are added, the administrator can set the priority among the login rules. If a user matches the conditions set in multiple rules, the login method of the rule with the higher priority will be applied.

    Follow the steps below to set the priority of login rules.

    1. Drag the area displayed to the left of the rule name in the rule list with the mouse.
    2. The priority of login rules is determined by the drag-and-drop location.
    3. Rules that appear higher in the list have higher priority.
    Reference
    The Default Policy has the lowest priority and its priority cannot be changed.

    Policy Status Change

    The status of the login policies managed by SingleID is as follows.

    statusExplanation
    ActiveLogin policy operating normally
    InactiveLogin policy disabled by the administrator
    Table. Policy status

    The administrator can change the login policy status according to its current state as follows.

    Current statusMutable stateExplanation
    ActiveInactiveClick the Disable button to change an active login policy to an inactive state.
    InactiveActiveClick the Activate button to change a disabled login policy to an active state. You can also delete a disabled login policy.
    Table. Policy status
    information

    Among login policies, the two policies provided by default in SingleID, Admin Portal Policy and Default Policy, cannot be disabled.

    If you disable a login policy, applications assigned to the disabled login policy will automatically be changed to be assigned to the default policy (Default Policy).

    Disable policy

    To disable an active login policy, follow these steps.

    1. Click the policy you want to deactivate in the policy list to navigate to the policy detail screen.
    2. Click the Disable button.
    3. Confirm popup displays login policy information (number of assigned applications, number of rules included in the login policy); after reviewing it, click the Deactivate button.
    guide

    If you disable a login policy, applications assigned to the disabled login policy will automatically be changed to be assigned to the default policy (Default Policy).

    Even if you reactivate a disabled login policy, the applications previously assigned are not automatically reassigned.

    Policy activation

    To change a login policy from inactive to active, follow these steps.

    1. Click the policy you want to activate in the policy list to navigate to the policy detail screen.
    2. Click the Activate button to change the login policy status to active.
    guide
    When activating a login policy that is disabled, the status changes immediately without a separate confirmation popup.

    Delete Policy

    Administrators can delete the login policy from SingleID.

    To delete the login policy, follow these steps.

    1. Click the policy you want to delete in the policy list to navigate to the policy detail screen.
    2. If the login policy is enabled, click the Disable button to deactivate the policy.
    3. Click the Delete button displayed at the top right of the disabled login policy.
    4. A popup screen confirming the deletion of the login policy is displayed.
    5. To delete a login policy, first review the policy information, then enter the name of the policy you want to delete and click the Delete button.
    Reference

    Deleted login policies cannot be restored.

    When a login policy is deleted, the rules contained within the policy are also deleted, and even if you re-register a login policy with the same name, the deleted rules or configuration information will not be restored.

    Access Simulation

    When there are many login policies and the rules they contain, it can be difficult to determine which user is governed by which policy for login methods.

    SingleID provides an access simulation feature that allows administrators to quickly verify the login policies and rules applied to users.

    Using the access simulation feature, you can select the user and the target application, arbitrarily define the user’s login environment (network, device, browser, OS), and predict in advance which login method the user will experience under various circumstances.

    Additionally, if there are review requests from users experiencing login difficulties, you can quickly verify using the access simulation feature and modify the problematic policies or rules.

    To use the access simulation feature, click the Access Simulation button located at the top right of the login policy list screen.

    NameExplanation
    Enter user IDEnter the user ID of the simulation target.
    Network SettingsSpecify the IP address of the user to simulate. The default is “IP address anywhere”.
    Platform SettingsSpecify the device information of the user to be simulated. The default is “Any platforms”.
    Browser SettingsSpecifies the browser information of the user to be simulated. The default is “Any browsers”.
    OS SettingsSpecify the OS information of the user to be simulated. The default is “Any OS”.
    Select ApplicationSelect the application to be simulated. Click the application selection button to display the popup.
    Run Simulation buttonRun the access simulation.
    Simulation resultsDisplays the access simulation results on the screen. The login policies and rules applied to the specified user are shown.
    List buttonReturn to the login policy list.
    Table. Access Simulation

    To run the access simulation, follow the steps below.

    1. Enter the ID of the user to be simulated.
    2. Specify the IP of the user to simulate. After selecting Specific IP Address, you can manually enter the IP. Enter the IP in the format 123.123.123.123.
    3. Specify the device information of the user to simulate. After selecting Platform, you can choose a device from the selection list.
    4. Specify the browser information of the user to be simulated. After selecting Browser, you can choose a browser from the dropdown list.
    5. Specify the OS information of the user to simulate. After selecting OS, you can choose the OS from the selection list.
    6. Click the Application Selection button to select the application to simulate.
    7. In the Application Selection popup, click the radio button to the left of the application name to select the application, then click the Add button.
    Reference

    If you want to re-select the application, click the X button to the right of the selected application name, then click the Select Application button again.

    1. Click the Run Simulation button.
    2. The access simulation runs, and when it finishes, the login policies and rules are displayed on the screen according to the simulation results as shown below.

    Authentication Policy

    The administrator needs to change detailed authentication settings according to the organization’s security policy.

    SingleID classifies and manages detailed authentication settings into the following four policies.

    • Session Policy
    • Authenticator policy
    • MFA Service Provider Policy
    • Password Policy

    To access the authentication policy menu, navigate as follows.

    • Admin Portal > Policy > Authentication Policy

    To modify the authentication policy, click the Edit button at the lower right of the authentication policy screen to change the settings, then click the Save button.

    Session Policy

    To change the session policy, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Edit button at the lower right of the authentication policy screen.
    2. In the maximum session limit setting, you set the maximum number of sessions a user can create simultaneously.
    3. The minimum value that can be set is 1, and the maximum value is 100. When set to 1, a user can log in only from a single browser at a time and cannot log in simultaneously from multiple PCs or browsers.
    4. Set the priority of the session created by the user in the session priority settings. The priority can be selected from the following two options.
      • Old session
      • New session

    When you set the maximum session limit to 1 and select Old session, a logged-in user will be blocked from logging in when they attempt a new login from another PC or browser where they are not logged in.

    Also, when the maximum session limit setting (Œ) restricts the maximum number of sessions to 1 and New session is selected, if a logged-in user attempts a new login from another PC or browser that is not logged in, the previous browser’s session is forcibly expired and the session logged in from the new PC or browser is maintained.

    In the maximum session time setting, set the maximum duration a session can be retained.

    The maximum session time can be set to one of the following two options.

    • No time limit
    • Set time limit

    If you set No time limit, a session that has been created will not automatically expire until the user logs out. After setting Set time limit and specifying a time, the session expires when the set time elapses, and the user is automatically logged out. Configure the maximum idle session time for the session in the maximum idle session time setting. If you set the maximum idle session time, the session will expire and the user will be automatically logged out when the user does not make an authentication request for the configured duration.

    To save the changed settings, click the Save button at the bottom right of the authentication policy screen.

    To avoid saving the changed settings, click the Cancel button at the lower right of the authentication policy screen.

    NameExplanation
    Maximum session limit settingSets the maximum number of concurrent sessions per user.
    Session priority settingWhen a session exceeds the user’s maximum concurrent session count, set the priority between the previous session and the new session.
    Maximum session time settingSet the maximum session duration after the session is created. The session expires when the maximum session duration elapses.
    Maximum idle session time settingSet the session expiration time for when the user does not make an authentication request to the server for a certain period after the session is created.
    Table. Access Simulation

    Authenticator policy

    To change the Authenticator policy, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Edit button at the lower right of the authentication policy screen.
    2. Configure according to each item below.
    3. When the setup is complete, click the Save button.
    NameExplanation
    Available Authenticator settings
    (for login policy)
    Configure an Authenticator that can be used for authentication.
    Authentication method during registrationSet the user’s primary identity verification method when registering the Authenticator.
    Perform the following authentication.When registering an Authenticator, set additional identity verification methods to allow beyond the primary verification method designated for the user.
    Find AccountSet the authentication method when retrieving the ID.
    Password resetSet the authentication method for password recovery.
    Unlock settingIf a user repeatedly fails authentication while using Authenticators, the ID becomes locked. You can set a duration so that the locked user’s lockout is automatically cleared after a specified period.
    Table. Authenticator policy
    guide
    1. To remove a specified Authenticator from the available Authenticator settings, it must first be removed from the rules of all login policies.

    2. Configurable Authenticators can be registered in the Authenticator addition menu. Disabled Authenticators cannot be configured in the available Authenticator settings.

    guide

    If you have not purchased an MFA product

    • Available Authenticator Settings (for login policy) is not displayed on this screen.
    • If you want to purchase additional MFA products, please contact us via Support Center > Contact Us.
    guide
    1. If a user repeatedly enters an incorrect password, fails to log in, and becomes locked, the lock will not be released even after a certain amount of time has passed. Configure the lock and unlock methods for password‑based lockouts in Password Policy.

    2. If you reset a user’s password from the user menu, you can unlock a locked user before the unlock wait time expires. Refer to password reset.

    MFA Service Provider Policy

    To change the MFA Service Provider policy, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Edit button at the lower right of the authentication policy screen.
    2. Refer to the table below and configure each item accordingly.
    3. When the configuration is complete, click the Save button.
    Namedescription
    Available Authenticator Settings
    (for MFA Service Provider)
    Configure the Authenticator that the user can use when an authentication request is generated by the MFA Service Provider.
    Terms and Conditions OptionsWhen a user registers from the MFA Servicce Provider, you can display the terms and conditions and obtain the user’s consent.
    Unlock settingWhen an authentication request occurs from the MFA Service Provider and the user repeatedly fails authentication, the ID becomes locked. You can set a duration so that the locked user’s lockout is automatically cleared after a certain period.
    Table. MFA Service Provider Policy
    guide
    1. To remove a specified Authenticator from the available Authenticator settings, it must first be removed from all MFA Service Providers.

    2. Configurable Authenticators can be registered from the Add Authenticator menu. Disabled Authenticators cannot be set in the available Authenticator settings.

    3. If a user authenticates with the MFA Service Provider for the first time, to display the terms and conditions to the user and require their consent, check the terms and conditions option checkbox and then select one or more terms or conditions to display on the screen in the text input box.

    4. If a user authenticating with the MFA Service Provider repeatedly fails authentication, the user’s ID becomes locked. To automatically unlock after a certain period, set the unlock wait time in the unlock settings.

    Password Policy

    To change the password policy, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Edit button at the lower right of the authentication policy screen.
    2. Refer to the table below and configure each item accordingly.
    3. When the configuration is complete, click the Save button.
    Namedescription
    Password historyYou can configure the system to prevent reuse of previously used passwords. Specify the number of recent passwords to block reuse.
    users will be unable to use the number of past passwords set above.
    Password expirationSpecify the password validity period. After the validity period expires, you must change the password to log in.
    It can be set from 1 day to 365 days.
    Password lockIf the password is entered incorrectly repeatedly, the user’s ID will be locked. Specify the number of allowed repeated entry failures.
    • Automatic unlock after the set time (minutes) (1~1,440): Accounts that exceed the failure count will be locked for the configured time (minutes). Enter the automatic unlock time (minutes).
    • Automatic unlock after password reset
    Pattern and ComplexitySet the minimum password length, minimum characters, numbers, etc.
    Set minimum character countSpecifies the minimum password length.
    Minimum alphabetic character count settingSpecifies the minimum number of alphabetic characters to include in the password.
    Minimum number count settingSpecifies the minimum number of digits to include in the password.
    Set minimum number of special charactersSpecifies the minimum number of special characters to include in the password.
    Set maximum character countSpecifies the maximum length of the password.
    Allow using the user ID as the passwordSet whether to allow the user’s ID to be included in the password.
    Table. Password Policy
    guide
    Users locked out due to repeated password entry failures must reset their password themselves to unlock the account. To change the status of a user locked due to repeated password entry failures, refer to User Status Changes.

    Sign‑up Policy

    To allow user sign‑up, enable the registration policy, which permits registration of users other than those provisioned from the HR system or IdP. Through account synchronization, you can not only register, create, modify, and delete accounts but also provide features to invite users via the login screen or email.

    To enable and use the registration policy, follow the steps below.

    1. Click Admin Portal > Policy > Sign‑up Policy.
    2. Enable Allow user registration.
    3. If you enable it, the Policy tab and User Invitation tab will appear.
    4. Review the descriptions of the Policy tab and the User Invitation tab below, and configure the policy.
    5. Click the Save button when the setup is complete.

    Policy

    You can set general policies for member registration.

    NameExplanation
    Display the sign‑up link on the login screenDisplay the sign‑up link on the SingleID login screen.
    • Show the SingleID sign‑up screen as a link: select when using the default SingleID sign‑up screen
    • Show an external sign‑up screen as a link: select when you have a separate sign‑up page
    Terms and Conditions OptionsSelect the option to agree to the terms and conditions during sign‑up. During sign‑up, you can separately select and apply the terms and conditions.
    Allow sign‑up invitationsWhen the feature is enabled, you can invite users via email. You can configure it so that only invited users can sign up, instead of using a separate registration page. With this setting, registration through the SingleID sign‑up link is not possible.
    Sign-up input formSet the user attributes to be entered during registration. Additional inputs can be requested based on whether they are required.
    ID duplication prevention settingWhen enabled, a suffix is added to the ID to prevent ID duplication.
    This setting prevents cases where the ID of automatically provisioned accounts is the same. Since duplicate ID values are common, we recommend enabling this setting.
    When signing up, the specified PostFix value is appended to the ID.
    Maximum usage periodThe maximum usage period is set after registration. It can be set from day 1 to day 2000.
    Approval upon sign‑up requestWhen a sign‑up request is made, you can enable the approval setting to load and apply the registered approval policy.
    Table. Policy tab

    Dormant User Policy

    Provides a feature that changes users who have not used the SingleID system for an extended period to a dormant state. Users who have been set to a dormant state can be configured, according to the settings, to be restored either by the user themselves or by an administrator.

    To enable and use the dormant user policy, follow these steps.

    1. Click Admin Portal > Policy > Human User Policy.
    2. Human User Policy Activation Click the toggle button
    guide
    If even one human user exists, it cannot be reverted to a disabled state.

    Additional settings are as shown in the table below.

    Namedescription
    Criteria for setting a user as dormantThis setting converts users who do not log in to SingleID for N days into dormant users. It can be set from 1 day up to 365 days.
    Send notification emailThis setting sends notification emails to users starting N days before the dormant state.
    Additionally, you can also select the option to send notification emails to users when changing to the dormant state.
    User exempt from dormant status changeClick the Add button to add an exception user for changing to dormant status.
    Dormant State Exception GroupYou can configure exceptions for users who are members of the group.
    Long-term human user managementThis feature automatically deletes a user account after it has been changed to a human user. It can be set for up to 1~365 days.
    - You can configure it to send a reminder email N days before deleting the user (1~30 days)
    - You can set it to send a notification email to the user when their information is deleted.
    Allow dormant users to restore their status themselves.When the option is enabled, a dormant user can restore their own status to active. A dormant user can change their status to active by resetting the password through ‘Password Reset’, which also updates the password.
    Table. Human User Policy List

    Approval Policy

    The administrator can select an approval system and, depending on the type, set policies for member registration and app access through various approval lines. With diverse approval policies, security policies can be flexibly applied each time they change.

    Approval can be performed by distinguishing between the built-in approval system function and the Knox Portal approval system. If integration with another approval system is required, please request it via a 1:1 inquiry.

    To check the approval policy, follow the path below.

    • Admin Portal > Policy > Approval Policy

    Approval Policy List

    The administrator can select an approval system and, depending on the type, set policies for member registration and app access using various approval lines. With diverse approval policies, security policies can be flexibly applied each time they change.

    NameExplanation
    IDThis is an automatically generated ID when creating an approval policy.
    Approval SystemIt is distinguished by SingleID and Knox Portal. If registration with another approval system is required, please request it via a 1:1 inquiry.
    typeIt is divided into app access and sign-up.
    statusThis is the approval policy status. If Not usable, you must change the approver and notifier.
    Enable approvalIt is categorized as in-use or not-in-use. Clicking the Details button lets you view applications that use the approval policy.
    Table. Approval Policy List

    Register Approval Policy

    When you click the Register button, you can set the approval system, type, approver, notification method, and approval period.

    NameExplanation
    Approval SystemTwo options are available.
    • SingleID: can be approved through the user portal with self-approval
    • Knox Portal: can be approved using the Samsung Knox Portal approval system
    typeTwo options are available.
    • App Access: Select to request application access permission
    • Sign Up: Select to apply for membership registration
    ApproverSelect and register the approver and notifier.
    Notification methodWhen an approval request is sent to the approver or notifier, choose the notification method.
    Table. Approval Policy Registration

    Anomaly Detection Policy

    SingleID provides a feature that collects and analyzes user behavior data before and after authentication in real time to determine whether there are abnormal authentication activities, and immediately notifies the user of risk when identified as belonging to an abnormal authentication category.

    To access the anomalous behavior detection policy menu, proceed as follows.

    • Admin Portal > Policy > Anomalous Activity Detection Policy
    guide
    Detailed explanations of the anomalous behavior detection policy menu are provided separately to ADM purchasing customers. If you did not purchase the anomalous behavior detection feature as an option, you cannot view the policy management menu in the Admin Portal. If you wish to use the anomalous behavior detection feature, please contact us via a 1:1 inquiry or reach out to a sales representative.

    User Life Cycle Management

    User lifecycle management provides configuration functions for setting default values when a user is created or registers, and for extending the user account’s usage period.

    To enable and configure the user lifecycle management function, refer to the following.

    Onboarding (subscriber)

    Set the phone country code, language, and time zone when creating a user and signing up. To configure, click the Edit button at the bottom right to make changes.

    Offboarding (former member)

    Users can request an extension of their account usage period, and it can be configured to allow the maximum possible extension.

    1. Click the Activate toggle when requesting an extension of the user’s usage period.
    2. Enter N days for the maximum extendable period.
    3. Click the Change button in the usage period request approval to set the approver.

    Conditional Authentication Policy

    Conditional authentication policies can set rules to match the environment, settings, and individual circumstances of user accounts.

    You can set the following rules.

    Namedescription
    Use multiple authenticatorsUsers who have relied on a single authentication method for an extended period must additionally verify their identity using a different type of authentication tool.
    Table. Register Conditional Authentication Policy
    guide
    This conditional authentication policy will have rules added continuously, and it is slated for an upgrade to a workflow feature in the future.

    5.2.1.2.5 - Terms and Conditions

    We provide a feature that lets each company using SingleID manage Privacy Policy, Terms of Service, and other items according to their specific circumstances and characteristics.

    You can draft a privacy policy that meets your organization’s requirements and notify users, or for users of SingleID, display the terms of service or usage conditions before use and obtain their consent.

    Through the Terms and Conditions menu, you can notify users of the privacy policy, terms of use, usage conditions, etc., and obtain their consent. SingleID provides a default template to make drafting terms and conditions easier.

    To access the Terms and Conditions menu, proceed as follows.

    • Tenant Admin Portal > Rebranding > Terms and Conditions

    The features provided in the Terms and Conditions menu are as follows.

    • Terms and Conditions Property Settings
    • Version management of terms and conditions
    • Issuance of terms and conditions

    Terms and Conditions List

    The tenant administrator can view the terms and conditions in a list format.

    The default template provided by SingleID is as follows.

    Terms Type Template

    • Privacy
    • Terms of Use
    • Collection and Use of Personal Information
    • Marketing

    Condition Type Template

    • Are you over age 14?

    Cookie Type Template

    • Cookie

    From the list, click a term or condition to edit its settings and navigate to its detailed screen.

    NameExplanation
    typeThe type is displayed as an icon.
    NameThe name is displayed.
    ExplanationThe description is displayed.
    Type SettingsYou can change the type.
    NameYou can edit the name.
    Set required statusYou can set whether it is required.
    Email notification settingYou can configure whether to notify changes via email when terms or conditions are modified.
    ExplanationYou can edit the description.
    Registration date and registrantThe registration date and registrant are displayed.
    Modified DateThe last modified date and the last modifier are displayed.
    List buttonThis is a button that returns to the list.
    Edit buttonModify the terms or conditions.
    Table. List of terms and conditions
    1. In the detail screen of the terms or conditions, select the General Settings tab.
    2. Click the Edit button.
    3. Title can be edited.
    4. You can edit required status. The selectable options are as follows.
      • Required: If these terms or conditions are presented to the user and they do not agree, usage will be restricted, preventing further login.
      • Choice: Whether you agree is up to the user, and even if you do not agree to the terms or conditions, you will not be restricted from logging in.
      • Note: We do not verify consent.
    5. You can edit the description of terms or conditions. The description is not shown to users and is used for the administrator’s reference.
    6. If you have modified all settings, click the Save button.

    To return to the view state without saving the edited information, click the Cancel button.

    Terms and Conditions Version Management

    Tenant administrators can view and manage the versioned list of terms and conditions. The default version for each term and condition is v1.0.0, and it is registered by default for each template when a tenant is created. To view the version list, click the Version History tab on the detailed screen of the terms or conditions.

    Version History

    You can view the previous version by clicking the Version item at the top of the privacy policy and terms of use.

    Click List to view the history of past publications. Once a version has been published, it cannot be edited.

    Add version

    If you click the Add button on the Version History tab, you can create a new version of terms and conditions.

    If you want to add a version, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Add button in the Version History tab.
    2. Click the desired locale to select the writing language.
    3. The language you selected indicates the region to be displayed in the privacy policy and terms of service. You need to draft the terms and conditions for each selected language.
    4. Enter the title and content for each locale language.
    5. Click the Save button and click the List button to return to the list.

    After completing the draft, review the written article.

    Reissue

    Newly created versions are published by setting a reissue date.

    To publish a new version, follow the steps below.

    1. In the Version History tab, click the Reissue Scheduled Date button.
    2. Set the version.
    3. Set the reissue date.
    4. Enable Reissue Modification. If enabled, the revised terms/conditions will be reissued, and users may need to consent based on the General Settings > Required status as of the terms/conditions modification date.
    5. Modification reason, please enter briefly.
    6. Click the Publish Settings button to complete the configuration.
    Reference
    Before the scheduled reissue date, you can edit the titles and content of the terms and conditions. After reissuance, editing is prohibited for version control. In the version history tab, pressing the Delete button in the version history list cancels the republishing.

    5.2.1.2.6 - Settings

    The Settings menu consists of Role Management, which manages the permissions of Admin Portal administrators, Ledger Management, which registers and manages SoT (ledger), and SMS Service, which registers SMS integration information for use in secondary multi-factor authentication.

    Role management

    Role management can control the permissions of administrators in the Admin Portal. In line with the principle of least privilege, we provide role management to enable administrators to operate with minimal permissions.

    Administrators have two roles by default.

    • ADMINSTRATOR - a super administrator account with all privileges
    • SOT_MANAGER - a director, application system administrator, and an account with app management capabilities
    information
    Role permissions are configured only with ADMINISTRATOR and SOT_MANAGER. When adding permissions, please contact us via 1:1 Inquiry.

    User assignment

    To add a user with ADMINISTRATOR privileges, follow the steps below.

    1. Select ADMINSTRATOR from the menu, and click the User tab.
    2. To add a user, click the Add button.
    3. You can search for a user using the user ID, name, email address you wish to add.
    4. After searching for a user and selecting, click the Add button to add the user.
    Reference
    Delete User Select the user you want to delete and click Delete to delete them.

    Director Management

    SingleID can manage and view various SoTs.

    nameExplanation
    defaultThere are two basic types, and they are generated automatically.
    - Mfa: Users coming from the MFA Service Provider (primary authentication system) correspond to the Mfa type. (When the MFA Service Provider does not specify a SoT)
    - SingleID: Users and Groups created by the administrator through the Admin Portal’s Identity Store are linked to the corresponding SoT.
    ApplicationThis is an SoT that is automatically generated by receiving user/group information via inbound provisioning from an external application (SoT).
    MFA service ProviderThis is a SoT automatically generated based on the User Tag entered when creating an MFA Service Provider.
    Table. Director Management

    default

    • It is the primary ledger of SingleID, receiving entries through the Identity Store and MFA Service Provider.
      • Mfa: Mfa is the default SoT of the MFA service provider. * All users created through an MFA Service Provider without a specified User Tag are managed as MFA SoT. * MFA cannot be changed or deleted.
      • SingleID: SingleID is the default SoT. * It is used to manage users and groups created through the Admin Portal. * You cannot change or delete the SingleID.

    Application

    • It is a ledger that is automatically created by receiving user/group information via inbound provisioning from an external application (SoT).
    • You can assign the person in charge of managing the ledger through the PIC tab (up to 50 people).

    MFA Service Provider

    • When registered as an MFA Service Provider, setting a User tag creates a SoT, and new users who receive secondary authentication from that system are marked with #SoT.
    • You can view and manage the ledger received through this MFA Service Provider.
    • You can assign the person responsible for managing the ledger through the PIC tab (up to 50 people).

    info
    The ledger has a role designated for the responsible person, and SoT staff can only view, edit, or delete ledgers that are assigned to them.
     

    SMS service configuration

    Administrators can enable the SMS service using the activation toggle button.

    SCP SMS Service Configuration

    After activating the SMS service, set the SCP SMS service in the SMS service settings.

    NameExplanation
    Activate SMS serviceSet SMS service activation/deactivation to toggle mode
    Select SMS serviceSelect SMS to use (SCP SMS)
    SMS service configurationSelected SMS settings (URL and Key registration)
    SMS sending testSettings for SMS sending test
    Table. SCP SMS Service Configuration

    To set up and use the SMS service, follow the steps below.

    1. SMS Service Activation Click the toggle button to activate the service.
    2. Select SCP SMS Service.
    3. Click Edit, enter the required values to configure SMS, and save.
      • SCP SMS - SCP SMS Service Endpoint URL, SCP SMS Service App Key
    4. To save changes, click the Save button. 4. When you click the Save button, a notification popup appears asking whether to save the changes.
    5. When you click the Confirm button, the changes are saved, and when the changes are successfully completed, a toast message appears. 5. When the Cancel button is clicked, the administrator’s registration/modification changes are not updated and it returns to the SMS screen.

    Knox SMS Settings

    Knox SMS is an SMS service provided by Knox. After enabling the SMS service, select Knox SMS to configure it.

    nameExplanation
    Select SMS serviceSelect SMS service to use (Knox SMS)
    Selected SMS service settingsRegister caller phone number
    SMS signatureIf you enable the activation toggle, you can set the first phrase when sending an SMS. It is added as the initial header of the SMS content according to the customer’s situation. Example: [XX Electronics]
    SMS sending testSettings for SMS sending test
    Table. Knox SMS

    SMS sending test

    To set up and use the Knox SMS service, follow the steps below.

    1. Select the Knox SMS service.
    2. Click Edit to register the sender phone number for configuring the SMS service.
    3. To save changes, click the Save button.
    4. To verify that the SMS settings are correct, you can enter a phone number for the SMS sending test and click Send to perform the test.
    5. When you click the Send button, a popup appears asking whether to send an SMS test to that number. 5. When you click Confirm, an SMS is sent to the entered number and a popup window appears. 5. A toast message appears indicating that an SMS has been sent to the specified number.

    BizBuriO SMS Settings

    After activating the SMS service, select Bizburio SMS in the Bizburio SMS service settings to configure it.

    NameExplanation
    Select SMS serviceSelect SMS service to use (BizBuriO SMS)
    Selected SMS service settingsRegister caller phone number
    SMS sending testSettings for SMS sending test
    Table. BizpuriO SMS

    SMS sending test

    To configure and use the BizBuriO SMS service, follow the steps below.

    1. Select the BizBuriO SMS service.
    2. Click Edit to register the sender phone number for configuring the SMS service.
    3. To save changes, click the Save button.
    4. To verify that the SMS settings are correct, you can enter a phone number for the SMS sending test and click Send to perform the test.
    5. When you click the Send button, a popup appears asking whether to send an SMS test to that number. 5. When you click Confirm, an SMS is sent to the entered number and a popup window appears. 5. A toast message appears indicating that an SMS has been sent to that number.

    5.2.1.2.7 - Monitoring

    The Monitoring menu lets you view the login history of all users, MFA history, and administrator audit logs.

    Login History

    Provides users’ login history through the Monitoring menu. Users can also view their own login history via the User Portal.

    NameExplanation
    AllClicking All displays the history of successful and failed logins.
    SuccessWhen you click Success, the history of successful logins will be displayed.
    This record shows that the user successfully logged in.
    FailureClicking Failure will display the history of failed login attempts.
    This entry records a user login failure.
    CSV downloadClicking CSV Download will download the history as a CSV file.
    Table. Login History
    NameExplanation
    Login date and timeThe date and time the user logged in
    IDUser ID
    NameUser name
    LocationUser’s connection location
    countryCountry of connection
    cityConnected city
    IP addressConnecting IP address
    ApplicationConnecting application
    Operating SystemOperating system environment you are connecting to
    BrowserConnecting browser
    DetectionDetection
    ResultLogin success result
    Table. Login history items

    MFA History

    In the Admin Portal, you can view users’ MFA (multi-factor authentication) history through the Monitoring menu. Users can also view their own MFA history via the User Portal.

    guide
    You need to purchase the MFA product to view the log.
    NameExplanation
    AllClicking All displays the history of successful and failed composite authentication.
    SuccessWhen you click Success, the history of successful multi-factor authentication is retrieved.
    This history is the record of the user successfully logging in.
    FailureClicking “Failure” will display the history of failed multi-factor authentication.
    This history shows the user’s failed login attempts.
    ExpirationClicking Expire displays the history of expired multi-factor authentication.
    CSV downloadClicking CSV Download will download the history as a CSV file.
    Table. MFA history
    NameExplanation
    Event date and timeDate and time the user attempted multi-factor authentication
    IDUser ID
    NameUser name
    IP addressConnecting IP address
    Management entityUser account management entity
    Event typeTypes used for authentication
    - Enrollment : Registration
    - Authentication : Authentication
    - Secondary multi-factor authentication
    ApplicationConnecting application
    System codeSystem code entered when registering the MFA provider
    AuthenticatorAuthentication methods used for multi-factor authentication
    ResultLogin success result
    Table. MFA history items
    guide
    You need to purchase the MFA product to view the log.

    Administrator audit log

    In the Admin Portal, the monitoring menu records the administrator’s activity history.

    NameExplanation
    dateLog timestamp
    IDAdministrator ID
    MenuMenu
    SubmenuSubmenu
    ActionActivity Log
    - View : Retrieve
    - List : List View
    - Update : Edit
    - Create : Create
    Event typeTypes used for authentication
    - Enrollment : Registration
    - Authentication : Authentication
    - Secondary multi-factor authentication
    ResultResult of activity log
    Table. Administrator Audit Log
    guide

    To download monitoring history as Excel (CSV), we recommend staying below the following count. You can adjust the number of retrieved items by changing the search criteria.

    • Login history: 20,000 entries or less
    • MFA history: 100,000 entries or less
    • Administrator audit log: 20,000 entries or less

    5.2.1.2.8 - Open Source licence

    The open source licenses used in the SingleID solution are as follows. For more details, see below.

    SingleID_SSO-Agent-Windows

    The following sets forth attribution notices for third party software that may be contained in portions of this product. If you have any questions, please contact global.cs@samsung.com

    LicenseOpen Source ComponentLicense Text
    BSD 3-clause “New” or “Revised” LicenseNLog - Advanced .NET Logging http://www.nuget.org/packages/NLogNLog - Advanced .NET Logging:

    Copyright (c)2004-2023 Nlog

    Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

    * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

    * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

    * Neither the name of the nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

    THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
    MIT LicenseJose JWT: http://www.nuget.org/packages/jose-jwt

    cassia: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Cassia

    Bouncy-Castle: https://www.nuget.org/packages/Bouncy-Castle

    Fody: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Fody

    Json.NET: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Newtonsoft.Json

    Costura.Fody: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Costura.Fody

    Opencover: http://www.nuget.org/packages/OpenCover

    Fleck2: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Fleck2

    chartist-js: http://github.com/gionkunz/chartist-js/
    The MIT License

    Jose JWT: Copyright (c) 2014-2021 dvsekhvalnov

    cassia: Copyright (c) 2008 - 2017 Dan Ports

    Bouncy-Castle: Copyright (c) 2000-2023 The Legion of the Bouncy Castle Inc.

    Bouncy-Castle: https://www.nuget.org/packages/Bouncy-Castle

    Fody: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Fody

    Json.NET: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Newtonsoft.Json

    Costura.Fody: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Costura.Fody

    Opencover: http://www.nuget.org/packages/OpenCover

    Fleck2: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Fleck2

    chartist-js: http://github.com/gionkunz/chartist-js/

    Fody: Copyright (c) Simon Cropp Json.NET: Copyright (c) 2007 James Newton-King

    Costura.Fody: Copyright (c) 2012 Simon Cropp and contributors

    Opencover: Copyright (c) 2011-2019 Shaun Wilde

    Fleck2: Copyright (c) 2013 Peter Sunde

    Copyright (c) 2010-2012 Jason Staten

    chartist-js: Copyright (c)2013 Gion Kunz gion.kunz@gmail.com

    Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

    The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

    THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
    Mozilla Public License 2.0OpenRPA: https://github.com/open-rpa/openrpa.gitMozilla Public License Version 2.0

    1. Definitions

    1.1. “Contributor”

    means each individual or legal entity that creates, contributes to the creation of, or owns Covered Software.

    1.2. “Contributor Version”

    means the combination of the Contributions of others (if any) used by a Contributor and that particular Contributor’s Contribution.

    1.3. “Contribution”

    means Covered Software of a particular Contributor.

    1.4. “Covered Software”

    means Source Code Form to which the initial Contributor has attached the notice in Exhibit A, the Executable Form of such Source Code Form, and Modifications of such Source Code Form, in each case including portions thereof.

    1.5. “Incompatible With Secondary Licenses”

    means

    a. that the initial Contributor has attached the notice described in Exhibit B to the Covered Software; or

    b. that the Covered Software was made available under the terms of version 1.1 or earlier of the License, but not also under the terms of a Secondary License.

    1.6. “Executable Form”

    means any form of the work other than Source Code Form.

    1.7. “Larger Work”

    means a work that combines Covered Software with other material, in a separate file or files, that is not Covered Software.

    1.8. “License”

    means this document.

    1.9. “Licensable”

    means having the right to grant, to the maximum extent possible, whether at the time of the initial grant or subsequently, any and all of the rights conveyed by this License.

    1.10. “Modifications”

    means any of the following:

    c. any file in Source Code Form that results from an addition to, deletion from, or modification of the contents of Covered Software; or

    d. any new file in Source Code Form that contains any Covered Software.

    1.11. “Patent Claims” of a Contributor

    means any patent claim(s), including without limitation, method, process, and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable by such Contributor that would be infringed, but for the grant of the License, by the making, using, selling, offering for sale, having made, import, or transfer of either its Contributions or its Contributor Version.

    1.12. “Secondary License”

    means either the GNU General Public License, Version 2.0, the GNU Lesser General Public License, Version 2.1, the GNU Affero General Public License, Version 3.0, or any later versions of those licenses.

    1.13. “Source Code Form”

    means the form of the work preferred for making modifications.

    1.14. “You” (or “Your”)

    means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under this License. For legal entities, “You” includes any entity that controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with You. For purposes of this definition, “control” means (a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than fifty percent (50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity.

    2. License Grants and Conditions

    2.1. Grants

    Each Contributor hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license:

    a. under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by such Contributor to use, reproduce, make available, modify, display, perform, distribute, and otherwise exploit its Contributions, either on an unmodified basis, with Modifications, or as part of a Larger Work; and

    b. under Patent Claims of such Contributor to make, use, sell, offer for sale, have made, import, and otherwise transfer either its Contributions or its Contributor Version.

    2.2. Effective Date

    The licenses granted in Section 2.1 with respect to any Contribution become effective for each Contribution on the date the Contributor first distributes such Contribution.

    2.3. Limitations on Grant Scope

    The licenses granted in this Section 2 are the only rights granted under this License. No additional rights or licenses will be implied from the distribution or licensing of Covered Software under this License. Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above, no patent license is granted by a Contributor:

    c. for any code that a Contributor has removed from Covered Software; or

    d. for infringements caused by: (i) Your and any other third party’s modifications of Covered Software, or (ii) the combination of its Contributions with other software (except as part of its Contributor Version); or

    e. under Patent Claims infringed by Covered Software in the absence of its Contributions.

    This License does not grant any rights in the trademarks, service marks, or logos of any Contributor (except as may be necessary to comply with the notice requirements in Section 3.4).

    2.4. Subsequent Licenses

    No Contributor makes additional grants as a result of Your choice to distribute the Covered Software under a subsequent version of this License (see Section 10.2) or under the terms of a Secondary License (if permitted under the terms of Section 3.3).

    2.5. Representation

    Each Contributor represents that the Contributor believes its Contributions are its original creation(s) or it has sufficient rights to grant the rights to its Contributions conveyed by this License.

    2.6. Fair Use

    This License is not intended to limit any rights You have under applicable copyright doctrines of fair use, fair dealing, or other equivalents.

    2.7. Conditions

    Sections 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, and 3.4 are conditions of the licenses granted in Section 2.1.

    3. Responsibilities

    3.1. Distribution of Source Form

    All distribution of Covered Software in Source Code Form, including any Modifications that You create or to which You contribute, must be under the terms of this License. You must inform recipients that the Source Code Form of the Covered Software is governed by the terms of this License, and how they can obtain a copy of this License. You may not attempt to alter or restrict the recipients’ rights in the Source Code Form.

    3.2. Distribution of Executable Form

    If You distribute Covered Software in Executable Form then:

    a. such Covered Software must also be made available in Source Code Form, as described in Section 3.1, and You must inform recipients of the Executable Form how they can obtain a copy of such Source Code Form by reasonable means in a timely manner, at a charge no more than the cost of distribution to the recipient; and

    b. You may distribute such Executable Form under the terms of this License, or sublicense it under different terms, provided that the license for the Executable Form does not attempt to limit or alter the recipients’ rights in the Source Code Form under this License.

    3.3. Distribution of a Larger Work

    You may create and distribute a Larger Work under terms of Your choice, provided that You also comply with the requirements of this License for the Covered Software. If the Larger Work is a combination of Covered Software with a work governed by one or more Secondary Licenses, and the Covered Software is not Incompatible With Secondary Licenses, this License permits You to additionally distribute such Covered Software under the terms of such Secondary License(s), so that the recipient of the Larger Work may, at their option, further distribute the Covered Software under the terms of either this License or such Secondary License(s).

    3.4. Notices

    You may not remove or alter the substance of any license notices (including copyright notices, patent notices, disclaimers of warranty, or limitations of liability) contained within the Source Code Form of the Covered Software, except that You may alter any license notices to the extent required to remedy known factual inaccuracies.

    3.5. Application of Additional Terms

    You may choose to offer, and to charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations to one or more recipients of Covered Software. However, You may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf of any Contributor. You must make it absolutely clear that any such warranty, support, indemnity, or liability obligation is offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to indemnify every Contributor for any liability incurred by such Contributor as a result of warranty, support, indemnity or liability terms You offer. You may include additional disclaimers of warranty and limitations of liability specific to any jurisdiction.

    4. Inability to Comply Due to Statute or Regulation

    If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this License with respect to some or all of the Covered Software due to statute, judicial order, or regulation then You must: (a) comply with the terms of this License to the maximum extent possible; and (b) describe the limitations and the code they affect. Such description must be placed in a text file included with all distributions of the Covered Software under this License. Except to the extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such description must be sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary skill to be able to understand it.

    5. Termination

    5.1. The rights granted under this License will terminate automatically if You fail to comply with any of its terms. However, if You become compliant, then the rights granted under this License from a particular Contributor are reinstated (a) provisionally, unless and until such Contributor explicitly and finally terminates Your grants, and (b) on an ongoing basis, if such Contributor fails to notify You of the non-compliance by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after You have come back into compliance. Moreover, Your grants from a particular Contributor are reinstated on an ongoing basis if such Contributor notifies You of the non-compliance by some reasonable means, this is the first time You have received notice of non-compliance with this License from such Contributor, and You become compliant prior to 30 days after Your receipt of the notice.

    5.2. If You initiate litigation against any entity by asserting a patent infringement claim (excluding declaratory judgment actions, counter-claims, and cross-claims) alleging that a Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then the rights granted to You by any and all Contributors for the Covered Software under Section 2.1 of this License shall terminate.

    5.3. In the event of termination under Sections 5.1 or 5.2 above, all end user license agreements (excluding distributors and resellers) which have been validly granted by You or Your distributors under this License prior to termination shall survive termination.

    6. Disclaimer of Warranty

    Covered Software is provided under this License on an “as is” basis, without warranty of any kind, either expressed, implied, or statutory, including, without limitation, warranties that the Covered Software is free of defects, merchantable, fit for a particular purpose or non-infringing. The entire risk as to the quality and performance of the Covered Software is with You. Should any Covered Software prove defective in any respect, You (not any Contributor) assume the cost of any necessary servicing, repair, or correction. This disclaimer of warranty constitutes an essential part of this License. No use of any Covered Software is authorized under this License except under this disclaimer.

    7. Limitation of Liability

    Under no circumstances and under no legal theory, whether tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, shall any Contributor, or anyone who distributes Covered Software as permitted above, be liable to You for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character including, without limitation, damages for lost profits, loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses, even if such party shall have been informed of the possibility of such damages. This limitation of liability shall not apply to liability for death or personal injury resulting from such party’s negligence to the extent applicable law prohibits such limitation. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so this exclusion and limitation may not apply to You.

    8. Litigation

    Any litigation relating to this License may be brought only in the courts of a jurisdiction where the defendant maintains its principal place of business and such litigation shall be governed by laws of that jurisdiction, without reference to its conflict-of-law provisions. Nothing in this Section shall prevent a party’s ability to bring cross-claims or counter-claims.

    9. Miscellaneous This License represents the complete agreement concerning the subject matter hereof. If any provision of this License is held to be unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed against the drafter shall not be used to construe this License against a Contributor.

    10. Versions of the License

    10.1. New Versions Mozilla Foundation is the license steward. Except as provided in Section 10.3, no one other than the license steward has the right to modify or publish new versions of this License. Each version will be given a distinguishing version number.

    10.2. Effect of New Versions You may distribute the Covered Software under the terms of the version of the License under which You originally received the Covered Software, or under the terms of any subsequent version published by the license steward.

    10.3. Modified Versions

    If you create software not governed by this License, and you want to create a new license for such software, you may create and use a modified version of this License if you rename the license and remove any references to the name of the license steward (except to note that such modified license differs from this License).

    10.4. Distributing Source Code Form that is Incompatible With Secondary Licenses

    If You choose to distribute Source Code Form that is Incompatible With Secondary Licenses under the terms of this version of the License, the notice described in Exhibit B of this License must be attached.

    Exhibit A - Source Code Form License Notice

    This Source Code Form is subject to the terms of the Mozilla Public License, v. 2.0. If a copy of the MPL was not distributed with this file, You can obtain one at http://mozilla.org/MPL/2.0/.

    If it is not possible or desirable to put the notice in a particular file, then You may include the notice in a location (such as a LICENSE file in a relevant directory) where a recipient would be likely to look for such a notice.

    You may add additional accurate notices of copyright ownership.

    Exhibit B - “Incompatible With Secondary Licenses” Notice

    This Source Code Form is “Incompatible With Secondary Licenses”, as defined by the Mozilla Public License, v. 2.0.
    SingleID_SSO-Agent-Windows

    SingleID_ADFS-Adapter

    The following sets forth attribution notices for third party software that may be contained in portions of this product. If you have any questions, please contact global.cs@samsung.com

    LicenseOpen Source ComponentLicense Text
    Apache License 2.0Microsoft.NetFramework.Analyzers, Microsoft.CodeAnalysis.VersionCheckAnalyzer, Microsoft.NetCore.Analyzers, Microsoft.CodeAnalysis.FxCopAnalyzers, Microsoft.CodeQuality.AnalyzersApache License Version 2.0, January 2004

    http://www.apache.org/licenses/

    TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION

    1. Definitions.

    “License” shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.

    “Licensor” shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.

    “Legal Entity” shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, “control” means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.

    “You” (or “Your”) shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License. “Source” form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.

    “Object” form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.

    “Work” shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice License Open Source Software License Text that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).

    “Derivative Works” shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.

    “Contribution” shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, “submitted” means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as “Not a Contribution.”

    “Contributor” shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.

    2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.

    3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.

    4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:

    a. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and

    b. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and

    c. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and

    d. If the Work includes a “NOTICE” text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License.

    You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.

    You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License.

    5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.

    6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.

    7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or License Open Source Software License Text redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.

    8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.

    9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.

    END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

    APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work

    To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets “[]” replaced with your own identifying information. (Don’t include the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be included on the same “printed page” as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party archives.

    Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner] Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.
    Microsoft .NET Library LicenseSystem.Security.Claims http://www.nuget.org/packages/System.Security.ClaimsMICROSOFT SOFTWARE LICENSE TERMS MICROSOFT .NET LIBRARY

    These license terms are an agreement between Microsoft Corporation (or based on where you live, one of its affiliates) and you. Please read them. They apply to the software named above, which includes the media on which you received it, if any. The terms also apply to any Microsoft

    * updates,

    * supplements,

    * Internet-based services, and

    * support services

    for this software, unless other terms accompany those items. If so, those terms apply.

    BY USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU ACCEPT THESE TERMS. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THEM, DO NOT USE THE SOFTWARE.

    IF YOU COMPLY WITH THESE LICENSE TERMS, YOU HAVE THE PERPETUAL RIGHTS BELOW.

    1. INSTALLATION AND USE RIGHTS.

    a. Installation and Use. You may install and use any number of copies of the software to design, develop and test your programs. You may modify, copy, distribute or deploy any .js files contained in the software as part of your programs.

    b. Third Party Programs. The software may include third party programs that Microsoft, not the third party, licenses to you under this agreement. Notices, if any, for the third party program are included for your information only.

    2. ADDITIONAL LICENSING REQUIREMENTS AND/OR USE RIGHTS.

    a. DISTRIBUTABLE CODE. In addition to the .js files described above, the software is comprised of Distributable Code. “Distributable Code” is code that you are permitted to distribute in programs you develop if you comply with the terms below.

    i. Right to Use and Distribute.

    * You may copy and distribute the object code form of the software.

    * Third Party Distribution. You may permit distributors of your programs to copy and distribute the Distributable Code as part of those programs.

    ii. Distribution Requirements. For any Distributable Code you distribute, you must

    * use the Distributable Code in your programs and not as a standalone distribution;

    * require distributors and external end users to agree to terms that protect it at least as much as this agreement;

    * display your valid copyright notice on your programs; and

    * indemnify, defend, and hold harmless Microsoft from any claims, including attorneys’ fees, related to the distribution or use of your programs.

    iii. Distribution Restrictions. You may not

    * alter any copyright, trademark or patent notice in the Distributable Code;

    * use Microsoft’s trademarks in your programs’ names or in a way that suggests your programs come from or are endorsed by Microsoft;

    * include Distributable Code in malicious, deceptive or unlawful programs; or

    * modify or distribute the source code of any Distributable Code so that any part of it becomes subject to an Excluded License. An Excluded License is one that requires, as a condition of use, modification or distribution, that

    * the code be disclosed or distributed in source code form; or

    * others have the right to modify it. 3. SCOPE OF LICENSE. The software is licensed, not sold. This agreement only gives you some rights to use the software. Microsoft reserves all other rights. Unless applicable law gives you more rights despite this limitation, you may use the software only as expressly permitted in this agreement. In doing so, you must comply with any technical limitations in the software that only allow you to use it in certain ways. You may not

    * work around any technical limitations in the software;

    * reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the software, except and only to the extent that applicable law expressly permits, despite this limitation;

    * publish the software for others to copy;

    * rent, lease or lend the software; or

    * transfer the software or this agreement to any third party.

    BACKUP COPY.

    You may make one backup copy of the software. You may use it only to reinstall the software.

    DOCUMENTATION.

    Any person that has valid access to your computer or internal network may copy and use the documentation for your internal, reference purposes.

    EXPORT RESTRICTIONS.

    The software is subject to United States export laws and regulations. You must comply with all domestic and international export laws and regulations that apply to the software. These laws include restrictions on destinations, end users and end use. For additional information, see www.microsoft.com/exporting SUPPORT SERVICES. Because this software is “as is,” we may not provide support services for it. ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This agreement, and the terms for supplements, updates, Internet-based services and support services that you use, are the entire agreement for the software and support services. APPLICABLE LAW.

    a. United States. If you acquired the software in the United States, Washington state law governs the interpretation of this agreement and applies to claims for breach of it, regardless of conflict of laws principles. The laws of the state where you live govern all other claims, including claims under state consumer protection laws, unfair competition laws, and in tort.

    b. Outside the United States. If you acquired the software in any other country, the laws of that country apply.

    LEGAL EFFECT.

    This agreement describes certain legal rights. You may have other rights under the laws of your country. You may also have rights with respect to the party from whom you acquired the software. This agreement does not change your rights under the laws of your country if the laws of your country do not permit it to do so.

    DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. THE SOFTWARE IS LICENSED “AS-IS.” YOU BEAR THE RISK OF USING IT. MICROSOFT GIVES NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES OR CONDITIONS. YOU MAY HAVE ADDITIONAL CONSUMER RIGHTS OR STATUTORY GUARANTEES UNDER YOUR LOCAL LAWS WHICH THIS AGREEMENT CANNOT CHANGE. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER YOUR LOCAL LAWS, MICROSOFT EXCLUDES THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.

    FOR AUSTRALIA – YOU HAVE STATUTORY GUARANTEES UNDER THE AUSTRALIAN CONSUMER LAW AND NOTHING IN THESE TERMS IS INTENDED TO AFFECT THOSE RIGHTS.

    LIMITATION ON AND EXCLUSION OF REMEDIES AND DAMAGES. YOU CAN RECOVER FROM MICROSOFT AND ITS SUPPLIERS ONLY DIRECT DAMAGES UP TO U.S. $5.00. YOU CANNOT RECOVER ANY OTHER DAMAGES, INCLUDING CONSEQUENTIAL, LOST PROFITS, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES.

    This limitation applies to

    * anything related to the software, services, content (including code) on third‑party Internet sites, or third‑party programs; and claims for breach of contract, breach of warranty, guarantee or condition, strict liability, negligence, or other tort to the extent permitted by applicable law.

    It also applies even if Microsoft knew or should have known about the possibility of the damages. The above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you because your country may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental, consequential or other damages.

    Please note: As this software is distributed in Quebec, Canada, some of the clauses in this agreement are provided below in French.

    Note: This software is distributed in Quebec, Canada, and some of the clauses in this agreement are provided below in French.

    DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. The licensed software is provided “as is”. Any use of this software is at your sole risk. Microsoft gives no other express warranties. You may have additional rights under local consumer protection law, which this agreement cannot modify. Where permitted by local law, the implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, and non‑infringement are excluded.

    LIMITATION OF DAMAGES AND EXCLUSION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES. You may obtain compensation from Microsoft and its suppliers for direct damages only up to US $5.00. You cannot claim any compensation for other damages, including special, indirect, or incidental damages and loss of profits.

    This limitation applies to:

    * anything related to the software, services, or content (including code) on third‑party Internet sites or in third‑party programs; and

    * claims for breach of contract or warranty, or for strict liability, negligence, or any other fault to the extent permitted by applicable law.

    It also applies even if Microsoft knew or should have known about the possibility of such damage. If your country does not allow exclusion or limitation of liability for indirect, incidental, or any other type of damages, the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you.

    LEGAL EFFECT. This agreement describes certain legal rights. You may have other rights under the laws of your country. This agreement does not alter the rights granted to you by your country’s laws if those laws do not permit it.
    MIT LicenseSystem.IdentityModel.Tokens.Jwt, http://www.nuget.org/packages/System.IdentityModel.Tokens.Jwt

    Microsoft.IdentityModel.Abstractions, https://www.nuget.org/packages/Microsoft.IdentityModel.Abstractions

    System.ValueTuple, http://www.nuget.org/packages/System.ValueTuple

    System.Threading.Tasks.Extensions, http://www.nuget.org/packages/System.Threading.Tasks.Extensions

    System.Security.AccessControl, http://www.nuget.org/packages/System.Security.AccessControl

    System.IO.FileSystem.AccessControl, http://www.nuget.org/packages/System.IO.FileSystem.AccessControl

    System.Runtime.CompilerServices.Unsafe, http://www.nuget.org/packages/System.Runtime.CompilerServices.Unsafe

    Microsoft.Bcl.AsyncInterfaces, https://www.nuget.org/packages/Microsoft.Bcl.AsyncInterfaces

    System.DirectoryServices, http://www.nuget.org/packages/System.DirectoryServices

    System.Buffers, http://www.nuget.org/packages/System.Buffers

    System.Text.Json, http://www.nuget.org/packages/System.Text.Json

    Microsoft.IdentityModel.Tokens, http://www.nuget.org/packages/Microsoft.IdentityModel.Tokens

    System.Numerics.Vectors, http://www.nuget.org/packages/System.Numerics.Vectors

    Microsoft.IdentityModel.Logging, http://www.nuget.org/packages/Microsoft.IdentityModel.Logging

    System.Security.Principal.Windows, http://www.nuget.org/packages/System.Security.Principal.Windows

    System.Memory, http://www.nuget.org/packages/System.Memory

    System.Text.Encodings.Web, http://www.nuget.org/packages/System.Text.Encodings.Web

    azure-activedirectory-identitymodel-extensions-for-dotnet http://www.nuget.org/packages/Microsoft.IdentityModel.JsonWebTokens
    The MIT License

    azure-activedirectory-identitymodel-extensions-for-dotnet

    Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.

    Microsoft.Bcl.AsyncInterfaces

    Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.

    Microsoft.IdentityModel.Abstractions

    Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved

    Microsoft.IdentityModel.Logging

    Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved

    Microsoft.IdentityModel.Tokens

    Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved

    System.Buffers

    Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved

    System.DirectoryServices

    Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved

    System.IdentityModel.Tokens.Jwt

    Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved

    System.IO.FileSystem.AccessControl

    Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved

    System.Memory

    Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved

    System.Numerics.Vectors

    Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved

    System.Runtime.CompilerServices.Unsafe

    Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved

    System.Security.AccessControl

    Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved

    System.Security.Principal.Windows

    Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved

    System.Text.Encodings.Web

    Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved

    System.Text.Json

    Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved

    System.Threading.Tasks.Extensions

    Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved

    System.ValueTuple Copyright (c) Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved

    Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

    The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

    THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
    SingleID_ADFS-Adapter

    5.2.1.3 - MFA Portal

    Overview

    SingleID’s MFA service provides users with a variety of additional second-factor authentication services through system integration, while maintaining the authentication system used by applications to enhance security. Additionally, SingleID provides an MFA Portal that lets you pre‑register and manage your preferred authentication methods for authentication, allowing convenient configuration.

    The MFA Portal manual provides a feature that allows users to self-register secondary multi-factor authentication.

    For detailed information, refer to the items below.

    SingleID language settings

    • User portal screen > top language selection, choose the language you want from ‘Korean’ or ‘English’.
    • It will be changed to the language you selected.
    Reference
    On the first login, it is presented in the language configured in the user’s browser. If the language is other than Korean or English, it will be set to English.

    SingleID connection environment and support

    CategorySupportRecommendation
    PCWindows : Windows Desktop 10 and 11 (x86 and x64 CPU Only)
    • Web Browser: Microsoft Edge, Latest public version
    Windows : Windows Desktop 10 and 11 (x86 and x64 CPU Only)
    • Web Browser: Microsoft Edge 88.x or later, Chrome 87.x or later
    Moblie(Android)Android : 8 and later versions
    • Web Browser: Samsung Internet Latest public version
    Android : 8 and later versions
    • Models released in 2018 and beyond among Samsung Galaxy Mobile Products
    • Galaxy S9 ↑
    • Web Browser: Samsung Internet 9.0 ↑
    Moblie(iOS)iOS : 16 ,17
    • Web Browser: Safari , Latest public version
    iOS : 16 ,17
    • iPhone Xs ↑, Models released in 2018 and beyond among Apple iPhone Products
    • Web Browser: Safari 14.1 ↑
    Table. SingleID connection environment support scope and recommended specifications

    5.2.1.3.1 - Log in using an authentication method

    Log in using an authentication method

    What is an authentication method?

    Authentication method, commonly called Authenticator, refers to an authentication tool.

    SingleID provides the following 11 authentication methods for user authentication.

    • Password: Enter password on the SingleID login screen
    • Email OTP: Send the OTP via email and enter the OTP on the SingleID login screen
    • SMS OTP: Send OTP via SMS and enter the OTP on the SingleID login screen
    • Knox Messenger OTP: Send OTP via Knox Messenger and enter OTP on the SingleID login screen
    • Knox Identity: Knox Portal user ID password authentication integration
    • SingleID Authenticator Bio: Install the dedicated SingleID mobile app and link authentication using biometric authentication (fingerprint, facial recognition)
    • SingleID Authenticator PIN: Install the SingleID‑dedicated mobile app and link authentication with a PIN.
    • SingleID Authenticator mOTP: Install the SingleID‑exclusive mobile app and integrate authentication with mOTP (Mobile OTP).
    • SingleID Authenticator TOTP: Install the SingleID‑dedicated mobile app and integrate authentication with TOTP(Time base OTP).
    • Passkey: Login and authentication using biometrics (fingerprint, facial), mobile, or PIN code without a password, based on Windows Hello.
    • Admin Authentication: If the admin permits direct authentication, request authentication on the admin’s behalf
    Reference
    SingleID Authenticator If this is your first time using the SingleID Authenticator mobile app, please refer to SingleID Authenticator.

    Setting the preferred authentication method

    The user logs into the User Portal provided by SingleID and sets their preferred primary and secondary authentication methods.

    If the user sets their preferred method, the screen for selecting a verification method is skipped during login and authentication, allowing immediate authentication using the primary and secondary methods.

    If you want to set your preferred authentication method, follow the steps below.

    1. User Portal > Personal Profile > Authentication settings, click.
    2. Click the star (☆) for each of your preferred 1st authentication method, 2nd authentication method.

    After the configuration is complete, the next login will use this method, offering convenient access.

    Information
    Even if users set their preferred authentication methods for primary and secondary authentication, administrators can restrict them to specific authentication methods through login policy settings.

    Register authentication tool

    All authentication methods can be configured by the user. Registering an authentication method by a user is called enrollment. When a user account is created for the first time, the email OTP is automatically enrolled using the email information from the user data. Other authentication methods can be used by having the user enroll directly as needed.

    I will explain the two authentication enrollment methods.

    • Register in Authentication Settings: User Portal > Profile > Authentication settings, click the + Add New button at the bottom to register.
    • Register on the Identity Verification Method Selection Screen: During login, for first-factor authentication and second-factor authentication, on the Identity Verification Method Selection screen, select the authentication method marked with a gray check mark (V) and register it.
    Reference
    Refer to Register authentication tool for enrollment.

    First login

    Consent for collection/use of personal information

    Consent for the collection and use of personal information is required when logging in with SingleID for the first time or during a certain period. According to the consent procedure, select the required, optional items to agree. Required items must be selected to log in.

    Password authentication

    Password is the most fundamental authentication method as SingleID’s default authentication tool.

    Enter password

    To log in using a user ID, follow the steps below.

    1. Login screen > Account ID input field, enter the ID, and click the Next button.
    2. Password field, enter your password, and click the Next button to log in.
    Reference
    If you click the eye-shaped icon in the password input field, you can view the password you entered.
    Information

    If you enter the password incorrectly

    If the entered password is incorrect, you will see an error message and can try again. The number of allowed retries is limited to the count set by the administrator in the password policy.

    When the password is entered incorrectly repeatedly and becomes locked

    If the password is entered incorrectly and the device becomes locked, you can unlock it using two methods.

    • Automatic unlock after 1~5 minutes: When automatic unlock is enabled, the account remains locked for 1~5 minutes. * Login will be available after that time.
    • Unlock with password reset: When the administrator configures the password policy to use password reset, a password reset is required. * You can log in after resetting your password. Find ID you can view the detailed information there.

    Email OTP authentication

    Authenticate

    To authenticate with email OTP, an OTP will be sent to the email address registered by the user.

    To authenticate with an email OTP, follow the steps below.

    1. In Identity verification selection method, click Email.
    2. An OTP code will be sent to the registered email. 2. Enter the OTP within the time set by the administrator (usually 3~5 minutes).
    3. After you enter, click the Confirm button, and the authentication will be completed.
    Reference
    1. Resend Code: If the input validity period has expired, click the resend code button. 1. Resend the OTP code via email.
    2. Would you like to authenticate using a different method?: If the current authentication cannot be used, switch to a different authentication method.
    3. If you changed your email, please register.: You can register (Enrollment) a different email and authenticate it according to admin settings. You can view the details for registration at Register Email Authentication Tool.
    guide

    If the code is entered incorrectly

    If the user enters the OTP code incorrectly, they can re-enter it up to the number of times specified by the administrator.

    When locked due to exceeding the user input limit

    If the OTP code is entered incorrectly more times than the administrator’s allowed limit, the screen will be locked from input for the duration set by the administrator. You can input after waiting for the specified duration. Refresh and try again after the input timeout.

    SMS OTP authentication

    Authenticate

    To authenticate with SMS OTP, an SMS OTP is sent to the mobile device registered by the user.

    To authenticate with an email OTP, follow the steps below.

    1. In the Verification method selection, click Email.
    2. An OTP code will be sent to the registered mobile phone. 2. Enter the OTP within the time set by the administrator (usually 3~5 minutes).
    3. After entering, click the Confirm button, and the authentication will be completed.
    Reference
    1. Resend Code: If the input validity period has expired, click the resend code button. 1. Resend the OTP code to the mobile phone.
    2. Would you like to authenticate using a different method?: If the current authentication cannot be used, switch to a different authentication method.
    3. If you have changed your mobile phone, please register.: Click the link to go to the enrollment screen for the new mobile. You can see the detailed information for registration at Register SMS authentication tool.
    Information

    If the code is entered incorrectly

    If the user enters the OTP code incorrectly, they can re-enter it up to the number of times specified by the administrator.

    When locked due to exceeding the user input limit

    If the OTP code is entered incorrectly more times than the administrator’s allowed limit, the screen will be locked for the duration set by the administrator. You can input after waiting for the specified duration. Refresh and try again after the input timeout.

    Knox Messenger OTP authentication

    Authenticate

    If you want to authenticate with Knox Messaenger OTP, the OTP will be sent to the Knox Messanger you are using.

    To authenticate Knox Messenger OTP, follow the steps below.

    1. In Identity verification selection method, click Knox Messenger.
    2. The OTP code is sent via the Knox Messenger you are using. 2. Enter the OTP within the time set by the administrator (usually 3~5 minutes).
    3. After entering, click the Confirm button, and the authentication will be completed.
    Reference
    1. Resend Code: If the input validity period has expired, click the resend code button. 1. Resend the OTP code to the mobile phone.
    2. Would you like to authenticate using a different method?: If the current authentication cannot be used, switch to a different authentication method.
    3. Would you like to use a different Knox ID?: Clicking the link will take you to the screen for enrolling a new Knox ID. You can find detailed information about registration at Register Knox Messenger authentication tool.
    information

    If the code is entered incorrectly

    If the user enters the OTP code incorrectly, they can re-enter it up to the number of times specified by the administrator.

    When locked due to exceeding the user input limit

    If the OTP code is entered incorrectly more times than the administrator’s allowed limit, the screen will be locked from input for the duration set by the administrator. You can input after waiting for the specified duration. Refresh and try again after the input timeout.

    Knox Identity Password Authentication

    Authenticate

    To authenticate with Knox Identity, you must enter your Knox Identity password.

    To authenticate with Knox Identity, follow the steps below.

    1. In Verification selection method, click Knox Identity.
    2. Enter the password for your Knox account.
    3. After entering, click the Confirm button, and the authentication will be completed.
    Reference
    Would you like to authenticate using a different method?: If the current authentication cannot be used, switch to a different authentication method.
    information

    If the password is entered incorrectly

    If the user enters the password incorrectly, they can re-enter it up to the number of attempts specified by the administrator.

    When locked due to exceeding the user input limit

    If the password is entered incorrectly more times than the administrator’s allowed limit, input on the screen will be restricted for the duration set by the administrator. You can input after waiting for the specified time. Refresh and try again after the input timeout.

    SingleID Authenticator authentication

    The SingleID service provides a mobile authentication app called SingleID Authenticator and offers authentication in various ways.

    Authentication method

    Authentication methodExplanation
    SingleID Authenticator BioSend a push using the installed SingleID Authenticator mobile app on the device to request biometric authentication.
    SingleID Authenticator PINSend a push using the installed SingleID Authenticator mobile app on the device to request authentication with a PIN code.
    SingleID Authenticator TOTPSend a push notification to the installed ID Authenticator mobile app on the device to request authentication via TOTP.
    SingleID Authenticator mOTPSend a push using the installed SingleID Authenticator mobile app on the device to request authentication with mOTP.
    Table. SingleID Authenticator authentication method
    Reference

    Passkey authentication

    The SingleID service provides simple authentication and multi-factor authentication using a Windows-based Passkey.

    Authentication method

    1. Convenient authentication: Provides easy login without ID/Password by using Sign in with Passkey at the bottom of the login page.
    2. Multi-factor authentication: Offers convenient login without requiring ID/password during secondary authentication.

    Authentication Types

    • Mobile Passkey: Scan the QR code to log in using Android and iOS mobile
    • Security key: Log in using the Windows security key
    • PIN: Login using the Windows PIN code
    Reference

    Passkey supported environment Operating system (laptop or desktop)

    • Windows 11, macOS Ventura, ChromeOS 109 or later
    • Mobile phone: iOS 16 or Android 9 and above
    • Hardware security key: a hardware security key that supports the FIDO2 protocol

    Browse version

    • Chrome 109 or later
    • Safari 16 or later
    • Edge 109

    Device Settings

    • Enable Bluetooth
    • Set screen lock password
    • Register PIN code
    • Allow fingerprint or facial recognition
    Reference
    Passkey requires that Windows Hello be set up in advance. For detailed information, see the reference link.

    Administrator authentication

    Authenticate

    In the SingleID service, the administrator provides authentication by delegating identity verification on behalf of the user.

    To perform administrator authentication, follow the steps below.

    1. In the Identity verification selection method, if you cannot perform identity verification at the bottom of the screen, you can request verification from the administrator. 1. Click here. Click it.
    2. Click the Request button.
    3. You will be taken to the admin selection screen. 3. Select the administrator who requested authentication delegation and click the Request button.
    4. Authentication delegation is requested to the selected administrator.
    5. When the administrator approves the authentication delegation, it is completed automatically.
    Information
    On the administrator selection screen, if the administrator is not assigned or has not registered a SingleID authenticator, a ‘Administrator Not Assigned’ screen appears.
    information
    If you cannot complete identity verification, you can request verification from the administrator. Click here** if the phrase is missing The administrator has disabled the admin authentication delegation feature by policy. Please contact the administrator.

    5.2.1.3.2 - Register authentication tool

    Register authentication tool (Enrollment)

    The principle is that all authentication tools must be registered and used by the user themselves. Registering an authentication tool by a user is called enrollment (Enrollment). When a user is initially created, only the Email OTP is automatically registered using the user’s email information. The remaining information can be directly registered and used by the user as needed.

    There are three ways to register.

    1. Login screen > ID/Password entry > Select verification method Register on the screen
      • On the authentication method selection screen, click the authentication tool marked as ‘Registration Required’ (gray check mark) to register.
    2. User Portal(after login) > Profile > Authentication Settings +Add New Click the button to register.
    3. Register through the registration message link at the bottom of every authentication screen.
      • The screen below is an example of an SMS verification screen. * You can register by clicking the ‘If you have changed your mobile phone, please register.’ message at the bottom.
      • All authentication code inputs can be changed via a message below (Message format: ~ please register.)
    Diagram
    Figure. Authentication screen example

    Register Email Verification Tool

    Email registration consists of the following three steps.

    1. Verification step: This is the identity verification step before registering the email authentication tool.
    2. Registration step: This step registers a new email and checks whether the number is valid.
    3. Completion Stage: This is the final step to confirm that the registration was successful.

    Verification step

    This is the step where you verify your identity before using the authentication tool. To view the identity verification process, please refer to 로그인하기.

    Caution
    In the verification stage, the authentication method to be used can only be performed with the authentication tool configured by the administrator.

    Registration step

    This is the step where the user registers the desired email address and checks its validity.

    The user should follow the steps below.

    1. If you complete identity verification in the confirmation step, you will automatically proceed to the registration step.
    2. Enter the email address you want to register.
    3. Click the Send verification code button.
    4. Check the OTP code sent to the email address you entered, and enter the OTP code on the screen.
    5. If the verification code is entered correctly, you will proceed to the completion stage.

    Completion phase

    The registration completion screen will appear, and on the next login you can perform first- and second-factor authentication using the email verification tool.

    Register SMS authentication tool

    SMS registration consists of the following three steps.

    1. Verification Step: This is the identity verification step before registering the SMS authentication tool.
    2. Registration step: This step registers a new mobile phone number and checks whether the number is valid.
    3. Completion Stage: This is the final step to confirm that the registration was completed successfully.

    Check step

    This is the step where you verify your identity before using the authentication tool. To view the identity verification process, please refer to 로그인하기.

    In the verification stage, the authentication method to be used can only be performed with the authentication tool configured by the administrator.

    Registration Phase

    This step registers the mobile phone number the user wants to add and checks its validity.

    The user should follow the steps below.

    1. If you complete identity verification in the confirmation step, you will automatically proceed to the registration step.
    2. Select the country code and enter the mobile phone number you want to register.
    3. Click the Send verification code button.
    4. Check the OTP code sent to the mobile phone number you entered, and enter the OTP code on the screen.
    5. If the verification code is entered correctly, it proceeds to the completion stage.

    Completion phase

    Registration Complete screen will appear, and on the next login you can perform first and second authentication using the SMS verification tool.

    Register Knox Messenger authentication tool

    Knox Messenger registration consists of the following three steps.

    1. Verification step: This is the identity verification step before registering the Knox Messenger authentication tool.
    2. Registration Step: Enter the Knox ID to register. 2. This is the step that checks whether the Knox ID to be registered is valid.
    3. Completion Stage: This is the final step to confirm that the registration was successful.

    Check step

    This is the step where you verify your identity before using the authentication tool. If you want to view the identity verification process, refer to Log In.

    In the verification stage, the authentication method to be used can only be performed with the authentication tool configured by the administrator.

    Registration stage

    This step registers the mobile phone number the user wants to add and checks its validity.

    The user should follow the steps below.

    1. If you complete identity verification in the confirmation step, you will automatically proceed to the registration step.
    2. Please enter the Knox ID to register.
    3. Click the Send verification code button.
    4. Check the OTP code sent to the Knox Messenger of the entered Knox ID, and enter the OTP code on the screen.
    5. If the verification code is entered correctly, you will proceed to the completion stage.

    Completion Phase

    Registration Complete screen will appear, and on the next login you can perform first and second factor authentication using the Knox Messenger authentication tool.

    Register Passkey authentication tool

    The SingleID Authenticator is an authentication tool provided for the SingleID service.

    Passkey enrollment consists of the following three steps.

    1. Verification Step: This is the identity verification step before registering the Passkey authentication tool.
    2. Registration Stage: This is the Passkey registration stage.
    3. Completion Stage: This is the final step to confirm that the registration was successful.

    Verification step

    This is the step where you verify your identity before registering the authentication tool. To view the identity verification process, refer to 로그인 및 인증하기.

    Information
    In the verification stage, the authentication method to be used can only be performed with the authentication tool configured by the administrator.

    Registration Step

    This is the step to verify the mobile phone or PC environment where you want to register a Passkey.

    Complete the registration process in the four steps below.

    1. Activation: Passkey support environment guide.
    2. Verification: Complete identity verification using an authentication method.
    3. Registration: Passkey registration stage. 3. When you click the Generate on this device button, a passkey is generated and registered on the PC. 3. Create on another device button click registers with a mobile phone or a hardware security key.
    4. Complete: Registration Complete verification step. 4. Continue Click the button.
    Reference

    Passkey supported environment Operating system (laptop or desktop)

    • Windows 11, macOS Ventura, ChromeOS 109 or later
    • Mobile phone: iOS 16 or Android 9 or later
    • Hardware security key: a hardware security key that supports the FIDO2 protocol

    Browse version

    • Chrome 109 or later
    • Safari 16 or later
    • Edge 109

    Device Settings

    • Enable Bluetooth
    • Set screen lock password
    • Register PIN code
    • Allow fingerprint or facial recognition

    Completion Phase

    After the passkey registration is completed, the registration complete screen appears. You can perform first- and second-factor authentication with the Windows Hello authentication tool on the next login.

    Reference

    PC Passkey requires that Windows Hello be configured in advance. For detailed information, see the reference link.

    When registering a passkey on mobile, it can be set in an environment where QR code scanning is possible.

    SingleID Authenticator Register authentication tool

    The SingleID Authenticator is an authentication tool provided for the SingleID service.

    SingleID Authenticator enrollment consists of the following four steps.

    1. Verification step: This is the identity verification step before registering the SingleID Authenticator authentication tool.
    2. Installation Step: This is the user’s SingleID installation guide step.
    3. Registration Stage: This step registers a new mobile app and registers the service.
    4. Completion stage: This is the final step to confirm that the registration was completed successfully.

    Verification step

    This is the step where you verify your identity before using the authentication tool. If you want to view the identity verification process, please refer to 로그인하기.

    Information
    In the verification stage, the authentication method to be used can only be performed with the authentication tool configured by the administrator.

    Installation steps

    There are three main ways to install the SingleID mobile app.

    • How to install SingleID Authenticator by scanning a QR code on the user’s mobile device or searching for “SinlgeID” on Google Play (for Android) or the App Store (for iOS)
    • How to install by entering your mobile phone number and receiving the download link via SMS.
    • How to install via a manual download link Install the SingleID Authenticator app and click the Next button to proceed to the registration step.
    Information
    Entering your mobile phone number to receive the download link via SMS is limited to a single transmission for security reasons. If you attempt to send more than three times within one minute, an error message saying “Due to security reasons, SMS messages cannot be sent multiple times.” will be sent. Please try again after a short while.

    Registration Phase

    Install the SingleID Authenticator mobile app on the mobile phone you want to register, then launch SingleID Authenticator.

    Complete the registration process using the three steps below.

    1. Service Registration: In the SingleID Authenticator app, click the ‘+’ at the top.
    2. Enter QR or authentication number: Scan the QR code or enter the authentication code to register.
    3. Service registration complete: Click the Confirm button to complete the registration.

    Completion Phase

    After registration is completed in SingleID Authenticator, the Registration Complete screen appears. You can perform first- and second-factor authentication with the Windows Hello authentication tool on the next login.

    Registration Phase

    Install the SingleID Authenticator mobile app on the mobile phone you want to register, then launch SingleID Authenticator.

    Complete the registration process using the three steps below.

    1. Service Registration: In the SingleID Authenticator app, click the ‘+’ at the top.
    2. Enter QR or authentication number: Scan the QR code or enter the authentication code to register.
    3. Service registration complete: Click the Confirm button to complete the registration.

    Completion Phase

    After registration with SingleID Authenticator is completed, the Registration Complete screen appears. During the next login, you can use the Windows Hello authentication tool for primary and secondary authentication.

    Register TOTP Authenticator authentication tool

    TOTP Authenticator registers third‑party TOTP to support various authentication tools.

    TOTP Authenticator enrollment consists of the following four steps.

    1. Verification step: This is the identity verification step before registering the SingleID Authenticator authentication tool.
    2. Installation Step: This is the user’s SingleID installation guide step.
    3. Registration Stage: This step registers a new mobile app and registers the service.
    4. Completion Stage: This is the final step to confirm that the registration was successful.

    Verification step

    This is the step of identity verification before using the authentication tool. To view the identity verification process, refer to the Login and Authentication.

    guide
    In the verification stage, the authentication method to be used can only be performed with the authentication tool configured by the administrator.

    Installation steps

    There are two main ways to install the TOTP Authenticator.

    • Mobile app
    • Web browser extension

    If you click the Next button, you will proceed to the registration step.

    Service Registration and Verification Phase

    This step registers and verifies the 3rd‑party TOTP authenticator you want to add.

    Complete the registration process in the two steps below.

    1. Service Registration: Scan the QR code of the TOTP Authenticator you want to register, or enter the manual code. 1. Code registration is completed in the TOTP mobile app or extension.
    2. Service verification: Run the TOTP mobile app or extension and enter the OTP.
    Information

    TOTP Authenticator Support SingleID supports a variety of standardized 3rd‑party TOTP authentication apps. Non-standard TOTP is not supported. The authenticated mobile and extension programs are listed below. We recommend the mobile app or extension below.

    • Mobile app
      • Google Authenticator, Microsoft Authenticator
    • Web browser extension
      • TOTP extension searchable in the Chrome Web Store, Microsoft Edge Add-ons
    Information
    To register a new TOTP Authenticator, on the TOTP Authenticator OTP input screen. Click the “If you want to change your TOTP Authenticator, register here” at the bottom to register a new TOTP Authenticator.
    information
    Check device information When the user clicks on device information such as password, SMS, email, SingleID authenticator, Nox messenger, and passkey, detailed information can be viewed in a popup. Device Information popup displays ’type’, ‘OS version’, ‘browser’, ‘IP’, etc.

    5.2.1.3.3 - policy

    When logging into SingleID or logging into an application registered with SingleID, various settings such as login method, authentication session, and password need to be configured according to the organization’s security policy.

    SingleID provides a policy management feature that allows detailed configuration of login and authentication information.
    If you have purchased the Anomalous Behavior Detection feature (ADM), you can configure it to analyze a user’s login activity at login and, when it detects authentication anomalies that differ from the norm, notify the user of a potential security threat.

    The policy features provided by SingleID are as follows.

    • Login Policy
    • Authentication Policy
    • Anomaly detection policy

    By using SingleID’s policy feature, you can configure a secure authentication environment that meets organizational security requirements by specifying detailed login methods based on who is logging in, when, in which environment, and to which application.

    Login Policy

    The administrator can set detailed policies specifying which authentication methods users can use when logging in with SingleID, and, if necessary, create condition-based authentication policies for users authenticating in specific environments.

    Login policies can be configured using the following conditions.

    • Which application are you logging into?
    • Who is logging in?
    • In which environment are you logging in?

    To access the login policy menu, navigate as follows.

    • Admin Portal > Policy > Login Policy

    Basic login policy

    The Admin Portal creates two default policies as follows.

    • Admin Portal Policy: Admin Portal access permission control policy
    • Default Policy: User’s default access control policy

    The Admin Portal Policy is the login policy applied when attempting to log in to the Admin Portal, and the Default Policy is the login policy applied when attempting to log in to the user portal.

    If you have linked an application to SingleID and have not assigned a separate login policy, the Default Policy is automatically assigned as the default login policy.

    Information
    The above two default policies cannot be disabled or deleted.

    Register login policy

    The login policy sets the login policies for administrators and users. You can configure login policies based on the connection environment, application, and situation.

    Login policies can be registered through a screen consisting of four steps as follows.

    1. General
    2. Allocation
    3. Initial Redirection
    4. rule

    General

    On the general screen, enter the name and description of the login policy.

    The fields that need to be entered are as follows.

    NameExplanationRequired or not
    nameEnter the name of the login policy.Required
    ExplanationEnter the description of the login policy.Required
    Table. General

    Click the Next button to go to the assignment screen.

    Allocation

    Specify the application to which the login policy will be applied on the assignment screen.

    nameExplanation
    filterFilter applications by status.
    Keyword searchSearch by application name and description.
    Detailed SearchDisplays detailed options for searching applications on the screen.
    Assign buttonDisplays the application allocation popup on the screen.
    List of assigned applicationsThe assigned applications are displayed in a list format. It starts with an empty list.
    Table. Assignment
    1. Click the Assign button to display the application assignment popup on the screen.
    2. In the Application Assignment popup, select one or more applications to assign to the login policy, then click the Assign button.
    3. If you have assigned all applications, click the Cancel button to close the Application Assignment popup.

    Initial Redirection

    Specifies the user’s login screen entry method and login method on the Initial Redirection screen.

    • Redirected to SingleID’s Sign-in page (login page)

    • Redirected to the external IdP


    The explanations of the two methods above are as follows.

    • If you select Redirected to SingleID’s Sign-in page, the SingleID login page will be displayed to the user attempting to log in.
    • If you select Redirected to the external IdP, the user attempting to log in will see the login page of the selected Identity Provider.
    • After selecting Redirected to the external IdP, you must select the Identity Provider from the selection list and designate it.
    • If you select Redirected to SingleID’s Sign-in page, you can optionally display an additional button at the bottom of the SingleID login screen that allows login via an Identity Provider.
    • AND see the following external IdP buttons on the Sign-In page. Click the text input field below and select one or more Identity Providers registered in SingleID to configure them to be displayed on the login screen.
    Information
    The settings for registering an Identity Provider or displaying a registered Identity Provider on the login screen Please refer to Identity Provider registration.

    Rule

    In the Rules screen, edit or add login rules and set the priority among them.

    nameExplanation
    Rule ListLogin rules are displayed on the screen as a list. The Default Rule is shown by default, and the Default Rule cannot be deleted.
    Keyword searchSearch by the name or description of the login rule.
    Register buttonRegister a new login rule.
    Complete buttonRegister a login policy.
    Table. Rules

    Default Rule configuration

    The login rule list on the rule screen displays Default Rule by default.

    Default Rule cannot be deleted and can only be modified. Also, you cannot set a priority when adding one or more login rules. (Always the lowest priority.)

    To modify the Default Rule, follow the steps below.

    1. Click Default Rule in the rule list.
    2. The WHEN condition of Default Rule cannot be modified.
    3. You can modify the THEN result of Default Rule.
    nameExplanation
    Configure access permissionSet whether access is allowed.
    Required authentication methodSet the primary login method. Additional login methods can be displayed on the login screen besides the default login method.
    MFA authenticationConfigure it to require an additional login after the initial login succeeds.
    Terms and conditions for collecting consentSet it to display the terms and conditions and request consent when a user logs into SingleID for the first time.
    Save buttonSave the modified login rule.
    Table. Default Rule

    In the access permission setting, you can select one of the following two options.

    • Deny Access
    • Allow Access

    If you select Deny Access, login will be denied for all users.

    When Allow Access is selected in the access permission setting, you can configure the user’s login method.

    Information
    • If you selected Redirected to the external IdP as the method to enter the login screen on the Initial Redirection screen, the primary login settings will not be displayed on the screen.

    • The required authentication method is performed by an external Identity Provider according to the Initial Redirection settings.

      • To have the user log in via multi-factor authentication, check the MFA authentication checkbox and then select one or more Authenticators in the text input box.

      • If a user logs in to SingleID for the first time, to display the terms and conditions and require the user’s consent, check the “Terms and Conditions Consent Setting (d)” checkbox and then select one or more terms or conditions to display on the screen in the text input box.

    Add rule

    To add a login rule, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Register button at the top right of the rule list.
    2. On the rule registration screen, enter the rule’s name and description.
    3. Enter the rule items by referring to the below.
    NameExplanation
    NameThis is the name of the rule.
    ExplanationThis is an explanation of the rules.
    User group assignmentSelect the user group to apply the rule to.
    Profile attribute assignmentClick the ‘Add’ button in the profile property assignment list to add a property. Refer to the help below for descriptions of the property and the operator.
    Group SettingsSpecify the group that the logged-in user belongs to as a member.
    User attribute listSpecifies the attributes of the logging-in user and the conditions for each attribute.
    Add User Attribute button“Add Property” popup is displayed on the screen.
    Table. Add rule
    Access environment
    NameExplanation
    NetworkSpecify the IP or network range of the user logging in. The default is “IP address anywhere”.
    - Desktop
    - Mobile
    platformSpecifies the device information of the user logging in. The default is “Any platforms”.
    - Desktop
    - Mobile
    browserSpecifies the browser information of the user logging in. The default is “Any browsers”.
    - Edge
    - Chrome
    - Safari
    OSSpecifies the OS information for login. The default is “Any OS”.
    - Windows 10
    - Windows 11
    - Android
    - iOS
    AND Anomalies (abnormal behavior)Set the condition to determine whether anomalous behavior is detected during login.
    The anomalous behavior detection condition can be configured only for tenants that have purchased the Anomalous Behavior Detection (ADM) feature.
    To use the Anomalous Behavior Detection (ADM) feature, you must select the additional option when contracting for SingleID.
    If you wish to use the Anomalous Behavior Detection feature, you can purchase it additionally on the SCP product purchase page.
    After configuring all “WHEN” condition areas, set the login method that will be used when a user matching the condition logs in.
    Table. Access Environment
    Information

    The selectable user attributes are as follows.

    User attribute information

    Attribute nameData typeRequired or notExplanation
    keyStringRequiredkey
    usernameStringEssentialID
    passwordGuardedStringRequiredPassword
    statusStringRequiredstatus
    mustChangePasswordBooleanRequiredForce password setting
    suspendedBooleanRequiredStandby status
    creatorString-Constructor
    creationDateDate-Creation date
    lastModifierString-Last editor
    lastChangeDateDate-Last modified date
    administratorBoolean-Admin status
    displayNameString-Display name
    cnString-Common Name
    localString-Locale (email sending criteria)
    userSourceString-User source
    syncDateString-Last synchronization time
    contractNumberString-Contract number
    contractStartDateString-Contract start date
    contractEndDateString-Subcontract termination date
    agreementDateString-Date of required terms agreement
    accountStartDateString-Account start date
    accountEndDateString-Account expiration date
    partnerOrganizationCodeString-Partner company code
    approvalUserString-Approver ID
    formattedNameString-Korean display name
    familyNameString-Korean surname
    givenNameString-Korean name
    enFormattedNameString-English display name
    enFamilyNameString-English surname
    enGivenNameString-English name
    adDomainString-AD Domain
    nickNameString-Nickname
    employeeNumberString-Employee ID
    epIdString-EP ID
    emailString-Email address
    phoneNumberWorkString-Phone number
    mobileString-mobile phone number
    titleString-Job Title
    enTitleString-English job title
    titleCodeString-Rank code
    entitlementString-Job Title
    departmentString-Department name
    enDepartmentString-English department name
    departmentCodeString-Department code
    organizationString-Company name
    enOrganizationString-English company name
    organizationCodeString-Company code
    regionString-base
    userStatusString-Employee status
    userTypeString-Employee type
    securityLevelString-Security rating
    preferredLanguageString-Knox language
    executiveYnString-Executive status
    timeZoneString-Time zone
    accountLockedBoolean-Forced account lock
    accountAutoLockedBoolean-Automatic account lock
    accountDisabledBoolean-Unused account
    accountSuspendedBoolean-Dormant account
    accountSuspendedTimeDate-Dormancy processing time
    lastLoginTimeDate-Last login time
    accountStateString-Account status
    Table. User attributes

    The operators are as follows.

    operatorExplanation
    EqualsSearches for users whose attribute value matches the condition value.
    Not EqualsSearch for users whose attribute values do not match the condition value.
    Starts withSearch for users whose attribute value starts with the condition string.
    Ends withSearch for users whose attribute value ends with the condition string.
    ContainsSearches for users whose attribute value includes the condition string.
    Table.operator

    THEN configuration

    THEN Set the login method and procedure in the result area.

    You can select one of the two options in the access permission setting (a).

    • Deny Access
    • Allow Access

    Selecting Deny Access will deny login for all users. (The default value for access permission setting (a) is Deny Access.)

    To allow users to log in and configure detailed login methods, select Allow Access.

    NameExplanation
    Configure access permissionSet whether access is allowed.
    First login setupSet the primary login method. Additional login methods can be displayed on the login screen besides the default login method.
    Additional login settingsConfigure it to require an additional login after the initial login succeeds.
    Terms and Conditions Agreement SettingsWhen a user logs in to SIngleID for the first time, configure it to display the terms and conditions and request consent.
    PC SSO Agent SettingsConfigure it to use the PC SSO Agent to verify whether a security program (Endpoint Security) is installed on the user’s PC.
    Save buttonSave the modified login rules.
    Table. THEN
    1. From the first login settings selection list, select the Authenticator to use for login.
    2. If you want users to be able to log in with another Authenticator besides the selected primary login method, select the checkbox (V) of And allow another factors below: and choose one or more Authenticators to add in the text input box.
    Information

    If you selected Redirected to the external IdP as the method to enter the login screen from the Initial Redirection screen, the primary login settings will not be displayed on the screen.

    The first login is performed at an external Identity Provider according to the Initial Redirection settings.

    1. To have the user log in via multi-factor authentication, select the checkbox (V) in Additional Login Settings, then select one or more Authenticators in the text input field.
    2. If a user logs in to SingleID for the first time, to display the terms and conditions to the user and require their consent, check the terms and conditions consent checkbox and then select one or more terms or conditions to display on the screen in the text input box.
    3. To verify whether a security program (Endpoint Security) is installed on the user’s PC using the PC SSO Agent, select the checkbox (V) in the PC SSO Agent settings. 3. When this setting is enabled, login attempts by users without a security program installed on the PC are blocked.

    If the PC SSO Agent is not registered, the PC SSO Agent configuration items will not be displayed on the screen.

    If you want to require additional authentication instead of blocking the login of users who do not have security software installed on the PC while the PC SSO Agent setting (e) is enabled, select the checkbox (V) below and then choose one or more Authenticators in the text input box.

    Click the Save button to register the login rule and return to the rule list.

    Rule priority management

    If one or more login rules are added, the administrator can set the priority among the login rules. If a user meets the conditions set in multiple rules, the login method is applied according to the rule with the highest priority.

    To set the priority of login rules, follow the steps below.

    1. Drag the area displayed to the left of the rule name in the rule list with the mouse.
    2. The priority of login rules is set based on the drag-and-drop position.
    3. The higher a rule appears in the list, the higher its priority.
    Reference
    The Default Policy has the lowest priority and its priority cannot be changed.

    Change Policy Status

    The status of the login policies managed by SingleID is as follows.

    statusExplanation
    ActiveLogin policy operating normally
    InactiveLogin policy disabled by the administrator
    Table. Policy status

    An administrator can change the status of the login policy according to its current state as follows.

    Current statusModifiable stateExplanation
    ActiveInactiveClick the Disable button to change an active login policy to an inactive state.
    InactiveActiveActivate button can be clicked to change a disabled login policy to an enabled state. You can also delete a disabled login policy.
    Table. Policy status
    information

    Among login policies, the two policies provided by default in SingleID, Admin Portal Policy and Default Policy, cannot be disabled.

    If you disable a login policy, applications that were assigned the disabled policy will automatically be reassigned to the default policy (Default Policy).

    Disable policy

    To disable an active login policy, follow these steps.

    1. Click the policy you want to deactivate in the policy list to navigate to the policy detail screen.
    2. Click the Disable button.
    3. After reviewing the login policy information displayed in the Confirm popup (the number of assigned applications and the number of rules included in the login policy), click the Deactivate button.
    information

    If you disable the login policy, applications that were assigned the disabled login policy will automatically be reassigned to the default policy (Default Policy).

    Even after reactivating a disabled login policy, the applications that were previously assigned are not automatically reassigned.

    Activate policy

    To change a login policy from inactive to active, follow these steps.

    1. Click the policy you want to activate in the policy list to navigate to the policy detail screen.
    2. Click the Activate button to change the login policy status to active.
    information
    When activating a login policy that is disabled, the status changes immediately without a separate confirmation popup.

    Delete policy

    Administrators can delete the login policy from SingleID.

    To delete the login policy, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the policy you want to delete in the policy list to navigate to the policy detail screen.
    2. If the login policy is enabled, click the Disable button to deactivate the policy.
    3. Click the Delete button displayed at the top right of the disabled login policy.
    4. A popup screen confirming the deletion of the login policy is displayed.
    5. To delete a login policy, first verify the policy information, then enter the name of the policy you want to delete and click the Delete button.
    Reference

    Deleted login policies cannot be restored.

    When a login policy is deleted, the rules contained within the policy are also deleted, and even if you re-register a login policy with the same name, the deleted rules or configuration information will not be restored.

    Access Simulation

    When there are many login policies and the rules they contain, it can be difficult to determine which user is governed by which policy for login methods.

    SingleID provides an access simulation feature so that administrators can quickly verify the login policies and rules applied to users.

    Using the access simulation feature, you can select the user and target application, arbitrarily define the user’s login environment (network, device, browser, OS), and predict in advance which login method the user will experience in each scenario.

    Additionally, if there are review requests from users experiencing login difficulties, you can quickly verify using the access simulation feature and modify the problematic policies or rules.

    To use the access simulation feature, click the Access Simulation button located at the top right of the login policy list screen.

    NameExplanation
    Enter user IDEnter the user ID of the simulation target.
    Network SettingsSpecifies the IP of the user to simulate. The default is “IP address anywhere”.
    Platform SettingsSpecify the device information of the user to be simulated. The default is “Any platforms”.
    Browser SettingsSpecify the browser information of the user to be simulated. The default is “Any browsers”.
    OS settingsSpecify the OS information of the user to be simulated. The default is “Any OS”.
    Select ApplicationSelect the application to be simulated. Click the application selection button to display the popup.
    Run Simulation buttonRun the access simulation.
    Simulation resultsDisplays the access simulation results on the screen. The login policies and rules applied to the specified user are shown.
    List buttonReturn to the login policy list.
    Table. Access simulation

    To run the access simulation, follow the steps below.

    1. Enter the ID of the user to be simulated.
    2. Specify the IP of the user to simulate. 2. After selecting Specific IP Address, you can manually enter the IP. 2. Enter the IP in the format 123.123.123.123.
    3. Specifies the device information of the user to be simulated. 3. After selecting Platform, you can select a device from the selection list.
    4. Specify the browser information of the user to be simulated. 4. After selecting Browser, you can select a browser from the selection list.
    5. Specify the OS information of the user to be simulated. 5. After selecting OS, you can select the OS from the selection list.
    6. Click the Application Selection button to select the target application for simulation.
    7. In the Application Selection popup, click the radio button to the left of the application name to select the application, then click the Add button.
    Reference

    If you want to re-select the application, click the X button to the right of the selected application name, then click the Select Application button again.

    1. Click the Run Simulation button.
    2. The access simulation runs, and when it finishes, the login policies and rules are displayed on the screen according to the simulation results as shown below.

    Authentication Policy

    The administrator needs to change detailed authentication settings according to the organization’s security policy.

    SingleID categorizes and manages detailed authentication settings into the following four policies.

    • Session Policy
    • Authenticator policy
    • MFA Service Provider Policy
    • Password policy

    To access the authentication policy menu, navigate as follows.

    • Admin Portal > Policy > Authentication Policy

    To modify the authentication policy, click the Edit button at the lower right of the authentication policy screen to change the settings, then click the Save button.

    Session Policy

    To change the session policy, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Edit button at the lower right of the authentication policy screen.
    2. In the maximum session limit setting, set the maximum number of sessions a user can create simultaneously.
    3. The minimum value that can be set is 1, and the maximum value is 100. 3. When set to 1, the user can only log in from one browser at a time and cannot log in simultaneously from multiple PCs or browsers.
    4. In the session priority settings, set the priority of sessions created by the user. 4. The priority can be set to one of the following two options.
      • Old session
      • New session

    When you set the maximum session limit to 1 and select Old session in the maximum session count restriction setting, a logged-in user will have their login blocked when they attempt a new login from another PC or browser that is not logged in.

    Also, when the maximum session limit setting (Œ) restricts the maximum number of sessions to 1 and New session is selected, if a logged-in user attempts a new login from another PC or browser that is not logged in, the session of the previously logged-in browser is forcibly expired and the session logged in from the new PC or browser is maintained.

    In the maximum session time setting, set the maximum duration a session can be kept.

    The maximum session time can be selected from one of the following two options.

    • No time limit
    • Set time limit

    If set to No time limit, a session that has been created will not automatically expire until the user logs out. After configuring Set time limit and setting the time, when the specified time elapses, the session expires and the user is automatically logged out. In the Maximum Idle Session Time setting, set the session’s maximum idle time. If you set the maximum idle session time, the session will expire and the user will be automatically logged out when the user does not make an authentication request for the configured duration.

    To save the changed settings, click the Save button at the bottom right of the authentication policy screen.

    To avoid saving the changed settings, click the Cancel button at the lower right of the authentication policy screen.

    NameExplanation
    Set maximum session count limitSets the maximum number of concurrent sessions per user.
    Session priority settingWhen a session exceeds the user’s maximum concurrent session limit, set the priority between the previous session and the new session.
    Maximum session time settingSet the maximum session lifetime after the session is created. The session expires when the maximum session lifetime elapses.
    Maximum idle session time settingSet the session expiration time for when the user does not make an authentication request to the server for a certain period after the session is created.
    Table. Access Simulation

    Authenticator policy

    To change the Authenticator policy, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Edit button at the lower right of the authentication policy screen.
    2. Configure each item as described below.
    3. When the setup is complete, click the Save button.
    NameExplanation
    Available Authenticator settings
    (for login policy)
    Configure an Authenticator that can be used for authentication.
    Authentication method during registrationWhen registering the Authenticator, configure the user’s primary verification method.
    Carry out the following additional authenticationWhen registering an Authenticator, configure additional identity verification methods to be allowed in addition to the user’s primary verification method.
    Find AccountSet the authentication method when retrieving the ID.
    Password resetSet the authentication method for password recovery.
    Unlock settingIf a user repeatedly fails authentication while using Authenticators, the ID becomes locked. You can set a duration so that the lockout is automatically cleared after a specified period.
    Table. Authenticator policy
    Information
    1. To remove a specified Authenticator from the available Authenticator settings, it must first be removed from the rules of all login policies.

    2. Configurable Authenticators can be registered in the Add Authenticator menu. 2. Disabled Authenticators cannot be configured in the available Authenticator settings.

    Information

    If you have not purchased an MFA product

    • Available Authenticator Settings (for login policy) is not displayed on this screen.
    • If you want to purchase additional MFA products, please contact us via Support Center > Contact Us.
    Information
    1. If a user repeatedly enters an incorrect password, fails to log in, and becomes locked out, the lock will not be released even after a certain amount of time has passed. 1. Configure lock and unlock methods based on the password in the Password Policy.

    2. If you reset a user’s password in the User menu, you can unlock a locked user before the unlock wait time expires. 2. Please refer to password reset.

    MFA Service Provider Policy

    To change the MFA Service Provider policy, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Edit button at the lower right of the authentication policy screen.
    2. Refer to the table below and configure each item accordingly.
    3. When the setup is complete, click the Save button.
    NameExplanation
    Available Authenticator settings
    (for MFA Service Provider)
    Set the Authenticator that the user can use when an authentication request occurs from the MFA Service Provider.
    Terms and Conditions OptionsWhen a user registers from the MFA Servicce Provider, you can show the terms and conditions and obtain the user’s consent.
    Unlock settingWhen an authentication request occurs from the MFA Service Provider and the user repeatedly fails authentication, the ID becomes locked. You can set a time so that the locked user’s lockout is automatically cleared after a certain period.
    Table. MFA Service Provider Policy
    Information
    1. To remove a specified Authenticator from the available Authenticator settings, it must first be removed from all MFA Service Providers.

    2. Configurable Authenticators can be registered from the Add Authenticator menu. 2. Disabled Authenticators cannot be set in the available Authenticator settings.

    3. If a user authenticates with the MFA Service Provider for the first time, to configure the system to display terms and conditions to the user and require the user’s consent, check the terms and conditions option checkbox and then select one or more terms or conditions to display on the screen in the text input box.

    4. If a user authenticating with the MFA Service Provider repeatedly fails authentication, the user’s ID becomes locked. 4. To automatically release the locked state after a certain period, set the unlock wait time in the unlock settings.

    Password policy

    To change the password policy, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the Edit button at the lower right of the authentication policy screen.
    2. Refer to the table below and configure each item accordingly.
    3. When the setup is complete, click the Save button.
    NameExplanation
    Password historyYou can configure the system to prevent reuse of previously used passwords. Specify the number of recent passwords to prevent reuse.
    users will be unable to use the number of previously used passwords set above.
    Password expirationSpecify the password validity period. After the validity period expires, you must change the password to log in.
    You can set it from 1 day up to 365 days.
    Password lockIf the password is entered incorrectly repeatedly, the user’s ID will be locked. Specify the number of allowed repeated entry failures.
    • Automatic unlock after the configured time (minutes) (1~1,440): Accounts that exceed the failure count will be locked for the configured time (minutes). Enter the automatic unlock time (minutes).
    • Automatic unlock after password reset
    Pattern and ComplexitySet the minimum password length, required characters, numbers, etc.
    Set minimum character countSpecifies the minimum password length.
    Set minimum number of lettersSpecifies the minimum number of alphabetic characters to include in the password.
    Minimum number of digits settingSpecifies the minimum number of digits to include in the password.
    Set minimum number of special charactersSpecifies the minimum number of special characters to include in the password.
    Set maximum character countSpecifies the maximum password length.
    Allow using the user ID as the password.Set whether to allow the user’s ID to be included in the password.
    Table. Password Policy
    Information
    Users locked due to repeated password entry failures must reset their password themselves to unlock the account. To change the status of a user locked due to repeated password entry failures, refer to User Status Change.

    Sign-up Policy

    If you want to allow user registration, enable the sign‑up policy, and users other than those provisioned from the HR system or IdP can also be registered. Through account synchronization, it provides the ability to register, create, modify, and delete accounts, as well as to invite users via the login screen or email.

    To enable and use the registration policy, follow the steps below.

    1. Admin Portal > Policy > Sign‑up Policy click.
    2. Enable User Registration Allowed.
    3. If you enable it, the Policy tab and User Invitation tab will appear.
    4. Review the descriptions of the Policy tab and the User Invitation tab below, and configure the policy.
    5. When the setup is complete, click the Save button.

    Policy

    You can configure general policies for member registration.

    NameExplanation
    Display the sign‑up link on the login screenDisplay a sign‑up link on the SingleID login screen.
    • Display the SingleID sign‑up screen as a link: Select this if you will use the default SingleID sign‑up screen
    • Display an external sign‑up screen as a link: Select this if you have a separate sign‑up page
    Terms and Conditions OptionsSelect the option to agree to terms and conditions during sign‑up. During sign‑up, you can select and apply terms and conditions separately.
    Allow sign‑up invitationsWhen the feature is enabled, you can invite users via email. You can configure it so that only invited users can sign up, rather than using a separate registration page. With this setting, registration through the SingleID sign‑up link is not possible.
    Sign-up input formConfigure the user attributes to be collected during registration. You can also specify whether each attribute is required.
    ID duplicate prevention settingWhen enabled, a suffix is added to the ID to prevent duplicate IDs.
    This setting prevents duplicate IDs for automatically provisioned accounts. Since there are often cases where the ID values are the same, we recommend configuring it.
    When you sign up through registration, the corresponding PostFix value is appended to the ID.
    Maximum usage periodThe maximum usage period is set after registration. It can be set from day 1 to day 2000.
    Approval upon sign‑up requestWhen a sign-up request is submitted, you can enable the approval setting to load and apply the registered approval policy.
    Table. Policy tab

    Dormant User Policy

    Provides a function to set users who have not used the SingleID system for an extended period to a dormant status. Users who have been changed to a dormant state can be configured, according to settings, to allow either self-recovery by the user or recovery by an administrator.

    To enable and use the dormant user policy, follow the steps below.

    1. Admin Portal > Policy > Human User Policy Click.
    2. Human User Policy Activation Click the toggle button.
    Information
    If even one human user exists, it cannot be reverted to a disabled state.

    Additional settings are shown in the table below.

    NameExplanation
    Criteria for setting a user as dormantThis setting converts users who do not log into SingleID for N days into dormant users. It can be set from 1 day up to 365 days.
    Send notification emailThis setting sends notification emails to users starting N days before the dormant state.
    Additionally, you can also select the option to send notification emails to users when changing to the dormant state.
    User exempt from dormant status changeYou can click the Add button to add an exception user to change to dormant status.
    Dormant State Exception GroupYou can set exceptions for users included in the group.
    Long-term human user managementThis feature automatically deletes the user account after it has been changed to a human user. It can be set for up to 1 to 365 days.
    - You can configure it to send a reminder email N days before deleting the user (1 to 30 days)
    - You can set it to send a notification email to the user when their information is deleted.
    Allow dormant users to directly restore their status.Enabling the option allows dormant users to restore their status to active themselves. Dormant users can change their status to active by resetting their password through “Password Reset”.
    Table. Human User Policy List

    Approval Policy

    The administrator can select an approval system and, depending on the type, configure sign‑up and app‑access policies across various approval lines. Various approval policies allow flexible application whenever the security policy changes.

    Approval can be performed using either the built-in approval system feature or the Knox Portal approval system. If integration with another approval system is required, please request it via a 1:1 inquiry.

    To check the approval policy, follow the path below.

    • Admin Portal > Policy > Approval Policy

    Approval policy list

    The administrator can select an approval system and, depending on the type, configure sign‑up and app‑access policies across various approval lines. It can be flexibly applied whenever the security policy changes, using various approval policies.

    NameExplanation
    IDThis is an automatically generated ID when creating an approval policy.
    Approval systemIt is distinguished by SingleID and Knox Portal. If registration with another approval system is needed, please request it through a 1:1 inquiry.
    typeIt is divided into app access and sign-up.
    statusThis is the approval policy status. If unavailable, you must change the approver and notifier.
    Approval useIt is categorized as in use and not in use. When you click the Details button, you can view applications where the approval policy is used.
    Table. Approval Policy List

    Register approval policy

    When you click the Register button, you can set the approval system, type, approver, notification method, and approval period.

    NameExplanation
    Approval systemTwo options are available.
    • SingleID : Approval can be done through the user portal with self‑approval
    • Knox Portal : Approval can be done via Samsung Knox Portal approval system
    typeTwo options are available.
    • App Access: Select to request application access permission
    • Sign Up: Select to apply for membership registration
    ApproverSelect and register the approver and the notifier.
    Notification methodWhen an approval request is received by the approver or notifier, select the notification method.
    Table. Approval Policy Registration

    Anomaly Detection Policy

    SingleID provides a function that collects and analyzes user behavior information before and after authentication in real time to determine whether there is abnormal authentication behavior, and if identified as belonging to an abnormal authentication category, immediately notifies the user of the risk.

    To access the Anomaly Detection Policy menu, navigate as follows.

    • Admin Portal > Policy > Anomalous Activity Detection Policy
    Information
    Detailed information about the anomalous behavior detection policy menu is provided separately to ADM purchasing customers. If you did not purchase the anomalous behavior detection feature as an option, you cannot view the policy management menu in the Admin Portal. If you wish to use the anomalous behavior detection feature, please contact us through a 1:1 inquiry or reach out to a sales representative.

    User lifecycle management

    User lifecycle management provides configuration functions for setting default values when a user is created or registers, and for extending the user account usage period.

    To enable and configure user lifecycle management, refer to the following.

    Onboarding (subscriber)

    Set the phone country code, language, and time zone when creating a user and signing up. To configure, click the Edit button at the bottom right to make changes.

    Offboarding (departed user)

    Users can request an account usage period extension, and it can be configured to allow the maximum possible extension.

    1. When requesting a user usage period extension, click the Activate toggle.
    2. Enter N days for the maximum extendable period.
    3. Click the Change button in the usage period request approval to set the approver.

    Conditional Authentication Policy

    Conditional authentication policies can set rules to match the environment, settings, and individual circumstances of user accounts.

    You can set the following rules.

    NameExplanation
    Use multiple authenticatorsUsers who have relied on a single authentication method for an extended period must additionally verify their identity using a different type of authentication tool.
    Table. Register Conditional Authentication Policy
    information
    This conditional authentication policy will continuously have rules added and will be upgraded to a workflow feature in the future.

    5.2.1.3.4 - Configure Privacy Settings

    Configure Privacy Settings

    This is a menu for user settings.

    To set your privacy preferences, follow these steps.

    1. Click the Personal Profile > Personal Information setting at the top right of the screen.
    2. You can view the photo, name, email, phone number, language, and time zone.
    3. Image: Image > Image Click Change to upload the icon image you want to display.
    4. Language: Choose your desired language in Korean or English.
    5. Language/Time Zone: Please select the time zone you are currently in. Click the City Search button to open the city search popup. Search for the desired city in English and select it.
    6. Click the Save button at the bottom of the screen to save.
    Reference
    If you click the Delete button at the lower left of the privacy screen, you can delete the current user account. If you delete your account, it will be permanently removed, so please only proceed with withdrawal if you truly wish to delete it.

    Configure Authentication

    You can register a user’s authentication tool and set the preferred authentication tool.

    To configure authentication, follow these steps.

    1. Click the Personal Profile > Authentication setting at the top right of the screen.
    2. +Add New button: click to add using the authentication tool of your choice.
    3. Click the Delete button to remove the authentication tool you do not wish to use.
    4. Star (☆) Click the icon to set your preferred authentication method.
    Reference
    For instructions on how users register or delete authentication tools, please refer to Register Authentication Tools.

    Change Password

    In the authentication settings, click Change Password to complete an identity verification process and update your password.

    Check login history

    You can view the user’s login history and environment.

    To view a user’s login history/environment, follow these steps.

    1. Click Personal Profile > Login History/Environment at the top right of the screen.
    2. In the Login History tab, you can view information such as login date and time, location, country, city, IP address, OS type, browser type, detection status, and result.
    3. In the Login Environment tab, you can view the details of any registered login environments, and if an environment is no longer used, you can delete it via the ‘Delete’ button.
    guide
    Check the country ISO codes at the link below. Refer to the method at ISO 3166 - Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia.
    guide
    When using the SingleID ADM (Anomaly Detection Management) feature The detection items will display Normal or Detected. This entry represents a login record where abnormal authentication activity was detected.

    Log out

    Click the photo icon located at the top right of the screen and then click ‘Logout’.

    When you click the Logout button, all applications visited through SingleID are logged out simultaneously, and if integrated logout is configured via the PC SSO Agent, logout also proceeds in the associated browsers.

    5.2.1.3.5 - Settings

    The Settings menu consists of Role Management, which manages the permissions of Admin Portal administrators; Ledger Management, which registers and manages SoT (ledger); and SMS Service, which registers SMS integration information used for secondary multi-factor authentication.

    Role management

    Role management can control the permissions of administrators in the Admin Portal. In line with the principle of least privilege, we provide role management to allow administrators to operate with minimal permissions.

    The administrator has two roles by default.

    • ADMINSTRATOR - a super administrator account with all privileges
    • SOT_MANAGER - an account that is a director and application system administrator with app management capabilities
    Information
    Only the ADMINISTRATOR and SOT_MANAGER permissions are configured for the Role. If you need to add permissions, please contact us via 1:1 Inquiry.

    User assignment

    To add a user with ADMINISTRATOR privileges, follow the steps below.

    1. From the menu, select ADMINSTRATOR, and click the User tab.
    2. To add a user, click the Add button.
    3. You can search for a user using the user ID, name, email address you want to add.
    4. After searching for a user and selecting, click the Add button to add the user.
    Reference
    Delete User Select the user you want to delete and click Delete to delete them.

    Director Management

    SingleID can manage and view various SOTs.

    NameExplanation
    defaultThere are two basic types, and they are generated automatically.
    - Mfa: Users coming from an MFA Service Provider (primary authentication system) correspond to the Mfa type. (When the MFA Service Provider does not specify a SoT)
    - SingleID: Users and Groups created by an administrator through the Admin Portal’s Identity Store are linked to the corresponding SoT.
    ApplicationThis is an SOT that is automatically created by receiving user/group information via Inbound Provisioning from an external application (SoT).
    MFA service ProviderThis is the SoT automatically generated based on the User Tag entered when creating the MFA Service Provider.
    Table. Ledger Management

    default

    • It is the primary ledger of SingleID, receiving entries through the Identity Store and MFA Service Provider.
      • Mfa: Mfa is the basic SoT of the MFA service provider. * All users created through an MFA Service Provider that does not specify a User Tag are managed as MFA SoT. * MFA cannot be changed or deleted.
      • SingleID: SingleID is the default SoT. * It is used to manage users and groups created through the Admin Portal. * You cannot change or delete the SingleID.

    Application

    • It is a ledger automatically generated by receiving user/group information via Inbound Provisionsing from an external application (SoT).
    • You can assign the person in charge of managing the ledger through the PIC tab (up to 50 people).

    MFA Service Provider

    • When registered as an MFA Service Provider, if you set a User tag, a SoT is created, and new users who receive secondary authentication from that system are marked with #SoT.
    • You can view and manage ledgers that come in through this MFA Service Provider.
    • You can assign the person in charge of managing the ledger through the PIC tab (up to 50 people).

    Information
    The principal has a role designated as the person in charge. SoT managers can only view, edit, or delete the principals assigned to them.
     

    SMS service configuration

    The administrator can activate the SMS service using the activation toggle button.

    SCP SMS Service Configuration

    After activating the SMS service, set the SCP SMS service in the SMS service settings.

    NameExplanation
    Activate SMS serviceSet SMS service activation/deactivation to toggle mode
    Select SMS serviceSelect SMS to use (SCP SMS)
    Endpoint URLEnter the SCP SMS Endpoint URL.
    API KeySet the API Key for the SCM SMS service.
    SMS signature settingsWhen you click the activation button, the SMS signature input field appears.
    The SMS signature is a signature used at the beginning of the message body when sending an SMS.
    1. The signature can be used to verify the sender when the user receives a message and to exempt the message from blocking when sending international SMS.
    2. The default signature is ‘[SingleID]’, and when a signature is set, it is automatically added at the beginning of the SMS message.
    3. For the signature specifications used to exempt international SMS from blocking, contact the Infobank SMS service provider and configure it according to the specifications.
    ※ For detailed inquiries regarding signatures, please contact the Infobank SMS service provider.
    SMS signaturePlease enter the SMS signature.
    Table. SCP SMS Service Configuration

    To set up and use the SMS service, follow the steps below.

    1. SMS Service Activation Click the toggle button to enable the service.
    2. Select SCP SMS Service.
    3. Click Edit, enter the required values to configure SMS, and save.
      • SCP SMS - SCP SMS Service Endpoint URL, SCP SMS Service App Key
    4. To save changes, click the Save button. 4. When you click the Save button, an alert popup appears asking whether to save the changes.
    5. When you click the Confirm button, the changes are saved, and a toast message appears when the changes are successfully completed. 5. When the Cancel button is clicked, the administrator’s registration/modification changes are not updated and it returns to the SMS screen.

    SMS sending test

    To set up and test the SMS service, follow the steps below.

    1. Enter the mobile number to receive the test.
    2. To verify that the SMS settings are correctly configured, enter a phone number for the SMS sending test and click Send to run the test.
    3. When you click the Send button, a popup appears asking whether to send an SMS test to the specified number. 3. When you click Confirm, an SMS is sent to the entered number and a popup window appears. 3. A toast message appears indicating that an SMS has been sent to the specified number.

    Knox SMS Settings

    Knox SMS is an SMS service provided by Knox. After activating the SMS service, select Knox SMS in the SMS service settings and configure it.

    NameExplanation
    Select SMS serviceSelect SMS service to use (Knox SMS)
    Service IDEnter the service ID of Knox SMS.
    Access TokenEnter the Access Token for Knox SMS.
    Caller phone numberEnter the sender’s phone number for Knox SMS.
    SMS signature settingsWhen you click the activation button, the SMS signature input field appears.
    The SMS signature is a signature used at the beginning of the message body when sending an SMS.
    1. The signature can be used for the recipient to verify the sender and to exempt the message from blocking when sending international SMS.
    2. The default signature is ‘[SingleID]’, and when a signature is set, it is automatically added at the beginning of the SMS message.
    3. For the signature specifications used to exempt international SMS from blocking, contact the Infobank SMS service provider and configure it according to the specifications.
    ※ For detailed inquiries about signatures, please contact the Infobank SMS service provider.
    SMS signaturePlease enter the SMS signature.
    Table. Knox SMS

    SMS sending test

    To set up and test the SMS service, follow the steps below.

    1. Enter the mobile number to receive the test.
    2. To verify that the SMS settings are correctly configured, enter a phone number for the SMS sending test and click Send to run the test.
    3. When you click the Send button, a popup appears asking whether to send an SMS test to the specified number. 3. When you click Confirm, an SMS is sent to the entered number and a popup window appears. 3. A toast message appears indicating that an SMS has been sent to the specified number.

    InfoBank SMS Settings

    After activating the SMS service, select Infobank SMS in the SMS service settings and configure it.

    NameExplanation
    Select SMS serviceSelect SMS service (InfoBank SMS)
    API KeySet the API Key for the Infobank SMS service.
    To use both domestic and international SMS services with a single API key, contact the Infobank provider.
    Sender IDIt is an identification code entered to specify the original sending carrier when sending SMS, using the additional telecom carrier registration number (a 9‑digit number).
    2. If the original sending carrier is a reseller, the original reseller’s registration number is used, and if the message is sent directly to a message relay without going through a reseller, the relay’s registration number is used.
    For further inquiries, contact the Infobank SMS service provider.
    Caller phone numberPlease enter the sending phone number.
    SMS signature settingsWhen you click the activation button, the SMS signature input field appears.
    The SMS signature is a signature used at the beginning of the message body when sending an SMS.
    1. The signature can be used for confirming the sender when the user receives a message and for exempting from blocking when sending international SMS.
    2. The default signature is ‘[SingleID]’, and when a signature is set, it is automatically added at the beginning of the SMS message.
    3. For the signature specifications used to exempt from blocking when sending international SMS, contact the Infobank SMS service provider and configure it according to the specifications.
    ※ For detailed inquiries regarding signatures, please contact the Infobank SMS service provider.
    SMS signaturePlease enter the SMS signature.
    SMS sending testSettings for SMS sending test.
    Table. Infobank SMS

    SMS sending test

    To set up and test the SMS service, follow the steps below.

    1. Enter the mobile number to receive the test.
    2. To verify that the SMS settings are correct, you can enter a phone number for the SMS sending test and click Send to perform the test.
    3. When you click the Send button, a popup appears asking whether to send an SMS test to the specified number. 3. When you click Confirm, an SMS is sent to the entered number and a popup window appears. 3. A toast message appears indicating that an SMS has been sent to the specified number.

    Bizppurio SMS Settings

    After activating the SMS service, select Bizburio SMS in the Bizburio SMS service settings to configure it.

    NameExplanation
    Select SMS serviceSelect SMS service to use (BizBuriO SMS)
    Caller phone numberEnter the sending phone number.
    SMS signature settingsClick the activation button to display the SMS signature input field.
    The SMS signature is a signature used at the beginning of the message body when sending an SMS.
    1. The signature can be used to verify the sender when the user receives a message and to exempt the message from blocking when sending international SMS.
    2. The default signature is ‘[SingleID]’, and when a signature is set, it is automatically added at the beginning of the SMS message.
    3. For the signature specifications used for exempting international SMS from blocking, contact the Infobank SMS service provider and configure it according to the specifications.
    ※ For detailed inquiries about signatures, please contact the Infobank SMS service provider.
    SMS signaturePlease enter the SMS signature.
    SMS sending testSettings for SMS sending test.
    Table. BizpuriO SMS

    SMS sending test

    To set up and test the SMS service, follow the steps below.

    1. Enter the mobile number to receive the test.
    2. To verify that the SMS settings are correct, you can enter a phone number for the SMS sending test and click Send to perform the test.
    3. When you click the Send button, a popup appears asking whether to send an SMS test to the specified number. 3. When you click Confirm, an SMS is sent to the entered number and a popup window appears. 3. A toast message appears indicating that an SMS has been sent to the specified number.

    User profile

    You can view and edit the attributes that make up a user profile, or add custom attributes. Attributes are classified into three categories: default, system, and custom. You can modify some attribute settings based on the category.

    Default : This is a property displayed on the Admin Portal or User Portal screen. Some property settings can be modified, but properties cannot be deleted. ㆍ System : a predefined attribute that can be used for inbound or outbound provisioning profile mapping of an application, and cannot be modified or deleted. ㆍ Custom : An attribute that administrators can add so it can be displayed on the screen or used for mapping the application’s provisioning profile. You can edit after adding, but you cannot delete.

    Add custom property

    You can add and manage custom attributes.

    5.2.1.4 - CAM Portal

    Service Overview

    CAM(Cloud Access Management) is a service for managing access to cloud consoles and resources, providing users with an easy and convenient way to access cloud consoles and resources.

    Users can access the portal from PCs located on the internal network using multi-factor authentication (MFA, Multi-Factor Authentication). Instead of a password, a one-time token is issued to enable access to the cloud console and resources, and all console access logs, operation logs, and permission approval logs can be monitored.

    CAM concept
    Figure. CAM concept

    Service scenario

    Previously, we accessed the console and resources directly with individual IAM accounts, but now we provide a unified access path through CAM.

    • Step 1: During the transition period, newly establish the TO-BE access channel and operate it in parallel with the AS-IS access channel.
    • Step 2: After blocking the AS-IS access channel via Cut-Over, switch to the TO-BE channel
    Service Scenario
    Fig. Service Scenario

    Key Features

    User Scenario

    The user scenario proceeds in the following order.

    • Authentication → Base Information Settings → Console Access Management → Resource Access Management → Monitoring
    User Scenario
    Figure. User Scenario

    Login & Home

    Log in using SingleID or an SSO account (e.g., Knox Portal) and complete multi-factor authentication (MFA). Enter the verification code received via SMS or email to finish the login process and access CAM.

    Login &amp; Home
    Figure. SingleID Login

    On the Home screen, a personalized custom view is provided so that users can access the cloud console and resources with a single click, allowing easy access to the console and resources.

    Home
    Figure. SingleID login

    Configuration

    After creating a project, you can easily register a CSP (Cloud Service Provider) account. You can also add users to the project to grant permissions within the project.

    Console Access

    You can create roles and policies to set and control access permissions for the cloud console, and map roles to specific accounts and users to define which users can access the CSP console and their permission levels.

    Resource Access

    Manages access permissions for cloud resources. To manage cloud resource access, each user first requests permission, downloads and installs the PC client agent, and registers the access IP address. Once the setup is complete, users can connect to the desired resources from their personalized resource list.

    5.2.1.4.1 - Getting Started

    This manual aims to help users quickly understand the essential functions and processes needed to use CAM effectively.

    Network Environment

    Access is allowed only from network environments authorized for each tenant.

    • CAM portal and console access: can be accessed from the network environment permitted for each tenant.
    • DEV, STG, ETC resource access: can be accessed from the allowed network environment for each tenant.
    • PRD resource access: It can only be accessed in a network environment where the internet is blocked, and can only be accessed from specific IP ranges per tenant.
    • Additional individual PC environment configuration is required.

    Preliminary work

    To use the CAM portal, several preliminary steps are required. If you are a PM (Project Manager) or PL (Project Leader) group user, please review the cloud account and resource preparation items below and set up the environment in advance.

    Prepare cloud account

    To register and manage an account in CAM, you first need to create a role in the IAM service of the CSP (AWS, Azure, SCP), configure it with the policies required by CAM, and then assume the role in CAM.

    information
    If the document is external, please refer to the Add Account of Configuration.

    Resource preparation

    Resource configuration

    To register resources in CAM and connect, several configuration steps are required when setting up the resources.

    First, you must enable ‘Password authentication’. Since a One-Time-Password (OTP) for SSH connections is issued when accessing resources from CAM, this configuration is essential for accessing resources through CAM.

    Additionally, when the resource type is Compute, you must add the configuration below.

    1. Add the following content to a file named /etc/sudoers.
      • ubuntu : %sudo ALL=(ALL) NOPASSWD:ALL
      • amazon linux : %wheel ALL=(ALL) NOPASSWD: ALL
    2. Restart the server using systemctl restart sshd.service.

    Network Settings

    To access resources through CAM, you must register firewalls and security groups according to each tenant’s network environment so that CAM can connect to the resources. Please verify the required information with the tenant administrator and proceed with the network configuration.

    Service scope

    Currently, Console Access supports AWS, Azure, and SCP, while Resource Access supports only AWS. We plan to gradually expand to other CSPs in the future.

    ItemExplanation
    AWSAmazon Web Services
    IAM (Console)AWS Identity and Access Management
    SCPSamsung Cloud Platform (KR EAST1 region, KR WEST1 region)
    EC2Elastic Compute Cloud
    RDSRelational Database Service
    Table. CSP abbreviation
    OSVersion
    UbuntuUbuntu Server 24.04 LTS
    UbuntuUbuntu Server 22.04 LTS
    Amazon LinuxAmazon Linux 2023 AMI
    RedhatRed Hat Enterprise Linux 9.4
    Table. OS
    DB EngineVersion
    PostgreSQL16.x
    MySQL8.0.x
    Aurora PostgreSQL15.x
    Aurora MySQL3.05.x
    Aurora MySQL3.04.x
    Aurora MySQL3.03.x
    MariaDB10.11.10x
    Table. DB

    5.2.1.4.2 - Home

    After logging in, you can access the CSP console and your individually allocated resources with a single click from the personalized homepage. Administrators and developers can efficiently streamline their work by quickly and easily accessing approved consoles and resources from a single location.

    The home screen of CAM (Cloud Access Management) is divided into two sections.

    • Top Resources
    • My CSP Consoles

    Both sections provide access to allocated resources and the CSP console.

    Top Resources

    This section shows a list of the top 30 accessible resources.

    Card view and list view

    By default, resources are displayed in a card view, and can be switched to a list view based on the icon.

    You can quickly find specific resources using the search function, and you can filter resources based on the following items.

    • Project
    • CSP(Cloud Service Provider)
    • Environment (e.g., DEV, STG, PRD, ETC)
    • Resource type (e.g., Compute, DB)

    Favorites

    Bookmark (★) You can set a bookmark using the icon, and you can set a bookmark filter to filter only resources that have been bookmarked.

    Sorting

    The resource list can be sorted by the following two criteria.

    • Recent (default sorting)
    • Creation date

    Resource Information

    Depending on the selected view mode, you can view detailed information about resources in cards and lists.

    • Resource Name
    • Project
    • CSP (e.g., AWS, Azure, SCP)
    • Environment (e.g., DEV, STG, PRD, ETC)
    • Resource type (e.g., Compute, DB)

    Resource Connect/Disconnect

    Each resource has a Connect button that can be used to connect or disconnect. If the resource is already connected, the following details are displayed:

    • Last login date/time
    • Connection status

    Resource Access

    When you click the Connect button on a card or in a list, a popup opens for connection.

    To access the resource, enter the details of the following items.

    1. Local Port: Enter a port number between 1024 and 65535 that is not currently in use on the PC.
    2. Remote Port: Enter the port number of the resource.
    3. Launch Putty : To have Putty start automatically during the connection process, select ‘ON’.
    Reference
    Before attempting to connect, ensure that the client agent is installed and that the IP address is registered. For configuration, refer to Resource Access > PC Settings.

    Connection Details

    When accessing a resource, click the dropdown to view detailed connection information such as user ID, password, and local IP. This information is provided via a popup as details that allow the user to connect to the resource through an SSH connection.

    1. User ID: Click the copy icon on the right to copy the user ID.
    2. Password: Click the copy icon on the right to copy the password.
    3. Local IP: Click the copy icon on the right to copy the local IP address.
    4. Client Server IP: Refer to the client server IP displayed on the screen.

    Resource Access Release

    When you access the resource, the Disconnect button appears. Click this button to start the disconnect process. A popup for final confirmation will be displayed before the connection is terminated.

    My CSP Consoles

    We provide a CSP access link in a sticky footer at the bottom of the page. Since access to the CSP console is offered through SAML SSO, you can connect directly without any additional authentication steps.

    5.2.1.4.3 - Console Access

    The console access feature allows PM and PL group users to assign roles and policies to cloud accounts and users, enabling management of access to the CSP console. Based on the permissions set here, users can access the console with the appropriate privileges.

    The console access section consists of four main management areas.

    1. Role Management: Defines and manages the level at which a user (User) can access the CSP console.
    2. Policy Management: Define new policies (Policy) and manage the roles mapped to each policy.
    3. Account Management: Manage cloud accounts (Account) and ensure each account is mapped to the correct role permissions.
    4. User Management: By mapping each user to the appropriate role (Role), we ensure they have the permissions required to access the cloud console, thereby controlling user console access.

    Role Management

    In the role management menu, you can view and manage all roles registered in the project, and filter roles by CSP or by project for review.

    Create role

    To create a role, click the Create Role button. To create a new role, you must fill in the following required information in the popup window.

    1. Project: Select a project from the user’s project list.
    2. CSP: Select CSP.
    3. Role Name: Enter a unique role name and click the Validate button to check consistency.
    4. Description: Add a brief description of the role.

    View role

    To access detailed information about a role, go to the role management menu and click the desired role. All project users can view role details, including policies, cloud accounts, and users mapped to the role.

    The role view screen displays key details, including the following.

    1. Role Information: Basic details related to the role.
    2. Delete Role: Delete click the button to remove this role.
    3. Policy: Shows the list of policies mapped to the current role.
    4. Account: Shows a list of accounts related to the role.
    5. User: Shows the list of users associated with a role.
    Reference
    To set up policy, account, and user mappings, you must first create a policy in the policy management menu, and the cloud accounts and users must already be registered in the project.
    Reference
    • The CSP process starts after the user addition approval is completed. Therefore, it may take some time (up to 10 minutes) for the status to change to ‘Approved’ and appear in the user’s CSP role list.
    • You can map up to 10 policies to an AWS role.
    • Each account has role limits based on the CSP; AWS can have up to 800 roles, while Azure can have up to 5,000 roles.
    • Each user has role limits based on the CSP, and in AWS up to 10 roles can be mapped, while in Azure up to 4,000 roles can be mapped.

    Delete role

    PM or PL group users can delete roles within a project. In the role management list, select the role to delete and click the Delete button. Or you can delete them one by one by clicking the Delete button on a specific role screen.

    Policy Management

    PM and PL group users can select or deselect policies from the policy list to add or remove policies mapped to a role.

    Create Policy

    To create a new policy, click the “Create Policy” button and fill in the required information in the “Create Policy” popup.

    1. Project: Select a project from the list of registered projects.
    2. CSP: Select CSP.
    3. Policy Name: Enter the policy name and click the “Validate” button to verify its consistency.
    4. JSON code: Enter the JSON code that defines the policy.
    5. Description: Add a brief description of the policy.

    To map policies to a role, click the Add button above the policy list to open the popup window. In the popup, you can view and select policies defined within the same project. Click the Save button to complete the mapping process. You can map multiple policies at once.

    Before mapping the policy, verify that the desired policy has been created in the policy management menu.

    View policy

    To view detailed information about a policy, go to the Policy Management menu and click the desired policy. All project users can view policy details, including the roles mapped to the policy.

    Delete Policy

    To remove a policy mapping from a role, select the policy from the list and click the Delete button. The deleted policy will reappear in the Add Policy popup list, and can be added again if needed. Removing the policy mapping eliminates the relationship between the role and the associated policies.

    Account Management

    PM and PL group users can map or remove cloud accounts from roles.

    View Account

    To view account details:

    • Go to Account Management and click the desired account.
    • All project users can access the details of that account, and the account includes a list of mapped roles.
    • PM or PL group users can also edit or delete roles associated with the account.

    Add role to account

    • To map roles to an account, click the Add button above the role list to open the Add Roles popup.
    • In the popup, select a role that belongs to the same project as the account and click the Save button to complete the mapping process.
    Reference
    • You can map up to 800 roles in an AWS account and up to 5,000 roles in an Azure account.

    Delete role from account

    To remove a role from an account, select the role from the list and click the Delete button. The removed role reappears in the Add Role popup, and you can add it again if needed. You can also delete multiple roles at once.

    User Management

    Through the User Management menu, users can view and manage all users registered within the project. Users can search for a user by name.

    User view

    To view the user’s details:

    • Go to User Management and click the user.
    • All project users can view user details, including the roles mapped to that user.
    • PM or PL group users can add or remove roles for a user.

    Add role to user

    To map a role to a user, click the Add button above the role list to open the Add Role popup. In the popup, you can view all roles in the project the user belongs to, select the role to add, and click the Create Approval button to proceed with the approval process.

    Reference
    • Each user has role limits based on the CSP and can map up to 10 AWS roles and 4,000 Azure roles.

    Create approval

    To assign a role to a user, an approval process is required. The approval process proceeds through the Create Approval popup and then via the Knox approval system or CAM’s own approval system.

    1. Title: Automatically entered by the system and cannot be edited.
    2. Approver: The approval route is automatically assigned by the system, and you can manually add approvers and consentees according to the approval guide.
    3. Content: Project and role information is automatically entered by the system and cannot be edited.

    Remove role from user

    To unmap a role from a user, click the Delete button. After confirming the final deletion, the user’s role mapping is removed. The removed role reappears in the Add Role popup, allowing you to add it again if needed. Note that unmapping a role does not require approval, but re-adding a role does require approval.

    5.2.1.4.4 - Resource Access

    You can view all resources with individual permissions and access them. To access resources, a PM or PL group user must register the cloud account resources associated with the project and go through the user’s permission request and approval process.

    Resource

    Displays all resources for which the user has been granted permission. The user can view the resource list and access resources directly.

    Connection

    Click the Connect button to access the resource, and after connecting, it provides connection details.

    1. Local Port: Enter a port number that is not being used for other purposes on the PC.
    2. Remote Port: Enter the port number of the resource.
    3. Putty Execution: To enable automatic execution of Putty, you need to set it to ON.
    Reference
    Before accessing the resource, please ensure that the client agent is installed and the IP address is registered. For more details, refer to Resource Access > PC Settings.

    Connection Information

    Provides detailed connection information to access resources via SSH.

    1. User ID: Click the copy icon to copy the user ID for use.
    2. Password: You can click the copy icon to copy the password and use it.
    3. Local IP: Click the copy icon to copy the local IP for use.
    4. Cloud Server IP: Click the copy icon to copy the cloud server IP for use.

    Disconnect

    When the resource is connected, the Connect button changes to a Disconnect button. To disconnect the resource, click the Disconnect button.

    Resource Registration

    In this menu, you can register the resource information required for access, and it displays the list of resources that have been registered.

    Register

    To register a resource, cloud account registration must be performed first in the project menu. PM and PL group users can register resources created within a cloud account. Click the Enroll button to go to the resource registration screen, then configure the resource connection information.

    1. Project: Select a project among those registered for PM or PL group users.
    2. Account: Select a cloud account among those registered in the selected project.
    3. Region: Select the region information of the selected account.
    4. Resource Type: Select one of Compute or DB.
    5. Resource: Select resources that match the selected criteria.
    6. Connection Type: Choose between Direct (direct connection to the server) and Bastion (connection via a proxy server).
    7. Address: Enter the resource’s address information.
    8. Root User: Provides the root user’s IP and password for the resource.
    Reference
    Before registering resources, please ensure that the cloud account registration and resource creation have been completed. Cloud account registration can be done in Configuration > Project.
    guide

    Supported OS/DB

    Currently, the OSes and DBs that can perform ‘resource registration’ are limited as shown below, and supported OSes and DBs will be continuously added.

    OSVersion
    UbuntuUbuntu Server 24.04 LTS
    UbuntuUbuntu Server 22.04 LTS
    Amazon LinuxAmazon Linux 2023 AMI
    RedhatRed Hat Enterprise Linux 9.4
    Table. Supported OS
    DB EngineVersion
    PostgreSQL16.x
    MySQL8.0.x
    Aurora PostgreSQL15.x
    Aurora MySQL3.05.x
    Aurora MySQL3.04.x
    Aurora MySQL3.03.x
    MariaDB10.11.10x
    Table. Supported DB

    Network Settings

    To register resources in CAM and access them through CAM, network configuration must be performed first.

    After receiving guidance from the tenant administrator and completing network configurations appropriate for each tenant environment, such as firewall registration and security group registration, please proceed with resource registration.

    Withdrawal

    Resources that are no longer used must be removed from the registered resource list. After selecting from the resource view or resource registration list, click the Withdraw button to prevent further access.

    Permission request

    In the permission request menu, you can view project members’ resource permissions and request permissions for each user’s CSP resource types.

    Request

    Users can select a duration and permission type to request resource permissions for each CSP resource type. All permissions require approval, but when ‘Emergency’ is selected, the permission is granted simultaneously with the approval request.

    Resource Information

    • Project: Select a project from those the user belongs to.
    • Account: Select the account registered in the selected project.
    • Resource Type: Select one of Compute or DB.

    Permission

    • Period: Select the period (e.g., 4h, 8h, 24h, 10d, 30d, 12M).
    • Emergency: If checked, permission is granted immediately upon the approval request, and a related email is sent to the approver.
    • Permission Level: Choose one of USER, ADMIN, DBA.
    • Comment: Add a comment for approval.

    Create approval

    To obtain resource access permissions, an approval process is required. To proceed with the approval process, go through the “Create Approval” popup, which is sent to Knox for approval and processed through Knox.

    1. Title: Automatically entered by the system and cannot be edited.
    2. Approver: Add the approver and the consenter according to the guide.
    3. Content: Project and permission information is automatically entered by the system and cannot be modified.

    Withdrawal

    To remove permissions that are no longer needed, select the permission in the request list and click the Withdraw button.

    PC configuration

    To access cloud resources, you must install the client agent and register the IP address of the access environment.

    Client Agent Download

    Click Download Client Agent to start the download, then install the client agent.

    User Guide

    To access the resource, you need to download and install the client. Also, if the installation is incomplete or the version is unsupported, you cannot connect to the resource even if all other preparations, such as permissions and IP registration, are completed.

    Installation Guide

    To start the installation process, click the Download Client Agent button to download the installation file. Once the download is complete, refer to the following information to proceed with the installation.

    1. Download Location: Specify a folder on the local drive.
    2. Execution: Select the downloaded file, right‑click, and click Run as administrator to execute.

    IP registration

    Access to cloud resources is allowed only from registered IPs, and up to five IPs can be registered. Please register the IP using the following information.

    • To add a new IP, click the Add button.
    • To remove an existing IP, select the IP from the list and click the Delete button.

    5.2.1.4.5 - Monitoring

    The monitoring menu of CAM provides essential features for tracking console access logs, user activity, and approval records. This feature ensures transparency, security, and compliance by offering detailed information.

    Connection History

    Connection logs provide a record of user activity within the CAM console, enabling administrators to track and review access-related actions across projects and the entire cloud environment. This ensures compliance with security regulations and offers visibility into how and when users interact with cloud resources through the CAM interface.

    Console Access History

    Console access logs record all events related to console connections performed through CAM. These logs enable tenant administrators to monitor console connection attempts, review event outcomes, and identify access patterns for AWS, Azure, and SCP accounts. The console access log page can be viewed from Monitoring > Access Log > Console Access Log.

    Console Access History Feature

    History Range

    • Tenant (Company) Administrator: You can view the history of all console accesses within the tenant.
    • User: You can only view the history of your own projects.

    Detail History

    • Console access history records event data for all console-related activities initiated through CAM.
    • History is provided for all configured tenants and includes connection events across AWS, Azure, and SCP.
    • The history details display information such as event type, date/time, project, Account ID, etc.
    • Click the expand icon to view detailed information for all actions. This detailed view feature provides deeper insight into each connection attempt. Detailed event information includes the following:
      • Event ID
      • Event Source
      • Event Result
      • Request Type
      • User Agent
      • Region
      • Source IP Address
      • User Information
    • You can narrow the results by using filters such as project, CSP, and environment.
    • You can select a specific period to filter the history. The default period is 30 days.
    • The history is sorted in reverse order, with the most recent action displayed at the top.
    • Each log entry serves as an audit trail to track console access patterns and user activity across the entire CAM.
    • You can download all history data for the selected period as an Excel file for offline analysis or record keeping.

    Audit History

    guide
    1. From the menu, go to Monitoring > Audit Log.
    2. Select the desired history type: Audit Log, Approval Log
    3. Search the history using search and filter options based on criteria such as user, resource type, or period.
    4. Check details such as the connection timestamp, user information, and resource specifics.

    Audit logs provide a comprehensive history of user and system actions performed within the CAM portal, and are divided into two detailed categories.

    1. Activity Log (Audit Log)
    2. Permission Approval History (Approval Log)

    Activity Log (Audit Log)

    Activity history shows the operation logs related to creation, update, and deletion of data within the CAM portal.

    Activity Log Feature

    History Range

    • Tenant (Company) Administrator: You can view the history of all projects within the tenant.
    • User: You can only view the history of your own projects.

    Detail History

    • Displays information such as event type, date/time, user, and IP.
    • Click the Expand icon to view detailed information for all actions.
    • You can narrow the results by using filters such as project, event type, and user.
    • You can select a period to filter the history. The default period is 30 days.
    • The history is sorted in reverse chronological order, with the most recent actions displayed at the top.
    • You can download all history data within the selected period as an Excel file for offline analysis or archiving.

    Permission Approval Log (Approval Log)

    The permission approval history provides all approval request details and approval statuses within CAM.

    Permission Approval History Feature

    History Range

    • Tenant (Company) Administrator: You can view the approval history for permission approvals for all projects within the tenant.
    • User: You can only view the authorization approval history for your own project.

    History Details

    • Displays the approval type, approval status, details, and approval history.
    • You can check the approval status, such as pending, approved, or rejected.
    • You can open a specific approval item to view its details.
    • You can narrow the results by using filters such as project, approval type, approval status, and user.
    • You can select a period to filter the history. The default period is 30 days.
    • The history is sorted in reverse chronological order, with the most recent approvals displayed at the top.
    • You can download all history data within the selected period as an Excel file for offline analysis or archiving.

    5.2.1.4.6 - Configuration

    In the configuration module, PM and PL group users can manage projects, and tenant administrators can set approval routes and organizational charts.

    Project

    In the Project menu, users can view all projects they belong to. The project details are initially registered by the PM, and can be edited by the PM or PL group users as needed.

    Create Project

    To create a project, click the Create Project button and enter the project information.

    1. Project Name: Assign a name to the project.
    2. PM: Assign a project manager who can manage the project’s related information and permissions. Note that if you assign someone other than yourself, you will no longer be able to manage the project after creation.
    3. Organization: Choose the organization that will carry out the project.
    4. Description: Enter a description of the project.

    View project

    On the Project View screen, PM or PL group users manage project information and can add CSP accounts and users to the project.

    1. General Information: Project Creation screen displays the registered project information.
    2. Edit: Click the Edit button to modify the project’s general information.
    3. Delete: Click the Delete button to delete this project.
    4. User: Displays a list of users registered in the project.
    5. Cloud Account: Shows the list of accounts registered in the project.

    Cloud Account Management

    PM and PL group users can add new accounts to a project or delete accounts that are no longer used.

    Add AWS account

    CAM supports a keyless method to enhance security when connecting cloud accounts. To register an account, you must create a new role in the AWS IAM service with the policy required by CAM. You can create the role in AWS by following the steps below.

    1. Access AWS IAM service
    2. Click Create Role in the Roles menu
      • After accessing Access Management > Roles, click Create to go to the Create Role screen.
    3. Create Role > Step 1: Trusted Entity selection This step is for entering CAM account information.
      • Select AWS account and Another AWS account in order, then enter the CAM account ID 022499039571 in the account ID.
    4. Create Role > Step 2: Add Permission Assign the CAM policy to the newly created role.
    guide

    Search for the item, select the relevant policy, and proceed to the next step.

    • IAMFullAccess
    • AmazonEC2FullAccess
    • AmazonRDSFullAccess
    • AWSCloudTrail_FullAccess
    • AmazonS3FullAccess
    • AmazonEventBridgeFullAccess
    1. Create Role > Step 3: Name, Confirm, Create Enter the role name and click the Create Role button to complete role creation. ※ This role name is used as Role Name when registering an account in CAM.
    guide

    When role creation in IAM is complete, return to the Project View screen in CAM and register an account in CAM. Click the Add button above the account list and enter account information to register the account to the project. Completing account registration requires an approval process. To proceed with the approval process, press the Create Approval button to initiate approval, which is sent to an approval system such as Knox for processing. Once approval is complete, you can see the newly registered account in the account list.

    1. CSP: Select CSP.
    2. Environment: Select the service environment.
    3. Account Name: Assign a name to the account.
    4. Account ID: Enter the account ID registered in AWS and click the ‘Verify’ button to confirm.
    5. AWS type: Set to ON if the account is a China account.
    6. Role Name: Enter the role name created in AWS IAM.
    Reference
    Account registration policies vary by tenant. Depending on the tenant’s policy, an account may be restricted to registration in only one project.
    1. Title : It is automatically entered by the system and cannot be edited.
    2. Approver: The system automatically adds an approval line, and you can add approvers and co‑signers according to the approval guide.
    3. Content: Account information is entered automatically by the system and cannot be edited.

    Add SCP account

    PM and PL group users can add a new SCP account to a CAM project via the Add Account button on the View Project page. CAM supports a keyless connection method to enhance security, so credentials are not exchanged directly when registering an account. Before you begin, verify that the required settings have been completed in the SCP console.

    Reference
    SCP includes both the SCP for Samsung and SCP for Enterprises environments. Depending on the user’s CSP permissions or choices, the prerequisites and steps for adding an account are the same for both environments.

    Step 1. Pre-configuration (One-time trust setup for CAM account) Before adding an SCP account to CAM, verify that the following configuration has been completed on the SCP side. This setting enables CAM to securely access the target project and validate the account information.

    First, if the policy has not already been created according to the steps described in the manual, you need to set it up. Then approve the CAM account through the permission group and add members.

    1. Create policy for CAM access
    • Go to the SCP console.
    • After logging in, navigate to the IAM > Policies section in the SCP console.
    • Create a policy with the name ‘CAM_Linked_Policy’.

    Create a new policy that includes the permissions required for CAM operation according to the table below.

    IDActionReason
    [Platform] Permission ManagementList, Read, Create, Delete, Update PermissionCreate/Delete Policy, Assign Policy to Role
    [Platform] Resource ManagementList, ReadView List, SCP Details
    [Platform] Tag ManagementList, ReadView Tag List/Information, etc.
    [Platform] Project ManagementList, ReadAssigned Project List/Information
    Table. Policy creation items for CAM access

    • Or you can also add policy requirements in JSON mode.
    • Since you can link permission groups and roles later, complete the policy creation without checking anything.
    1. CAM account approval through permission groups
    • After a policy is created, link it to the CAM system account using a permission group.
    • Step-by-step:
      • IAM > Go to Permission Groups.
      • Create a new permission group (e.g., CAM-Access-Group).
      • Create a permission group named ‘CAM_Linked_Group’.
      • Attach the CAM policy created above to this group.
      • When adding a user to a project, the user is linked to a permission group, so you can complete the creation of the permission group without verifying the user at this time.
    1. Assign permission group to CAM service account
    • Go to the project members section of the SCP console.
    • Add the required account as a member of the target project.
    • This account represents CAM and is used for integration.
    • Select the target project for addition > Identity and Access Management > Add User > Add Project Member > Proceed to add an SCP user to the target project.
    • Proceed with adding project members.
      • Search for a CAM user using the email address cam.app@samsung.com.
      • Click the ADD button to select a cam.app user.
      • Add an available user from the list, or you can also search for a user using the search function.
    • Search for users to add as project members.
      • Select the permission group called ‘CAM_Linked_Group’ that you created above and complete the project member addition task.
    • Connect a permission group to complete adding project members.
    • After completing the above steps, return to the project view screen in CAM and add an SCP account.

    Step 2. Add an account in the CAM console

    • In CAM, go to View Project > Manage Accounts.
    • Click the Add Account button.
    • Enter the following information in the popup window that opens:
      • CSP and Environment Selection
        • CSP: Choose either SCP for Enterprises or SCP for Samsung.
        • Environment: Select the environment to which this account belongs (e.g., DEV, STG, PRD, or ETC).
      • Enter account information
        • Account name:
          • Enter a name to identify this account within CAM.
          • You can enter up to 50 characters.
          • Only English letters and numbers are allowed.
        • Project ID (in the SCP console):
          • Enter the project ID of the SCP project you prepared earlier.
          • Allowed characters: only English alphabet letters, numbers, and hyphens.
          • Maximum: 30 characters
      • Enter the project ID and click the Confirm button. CAM checks the following:
        • Whether the project exists in SCP.
        • Check if the required roles (cam-Administrator, cam-Operator, cam-Developer) exist.
        • Ensure that the project is not already registered in another CAM project or awaiting approval.
        • If any of the above conditions is not met, a validation message will be displayed.

    Step 3. Create Approval When the project ID is verified and the other information is completed, the Create Approval button becomes active.

    Click this button to send the account addition request as an approval request. Depending on the CAM settings, you can manually select an approver or have the system automatically route it to the default approver.

    Once approval is completed, the SCP account will appear in CAM’s project account list.

    Add Azure account

    Before adding an Azure account to CAM, you must complete the following configuration steps in Microsoft Entra ID and the Azure Portal. These steps must be performed by the tenant administrator.

    Step 1. Prerequisite setup (One-time trust configuration and domain configuration for CAM accounts) This step ensures that CAM is trusted within the target Azure tenant and has the necessary access permissions. This step must be completed by the tenant administrator before adding an Azure account to CAM.

    These pre-configurations are divided into two sections:

    • Trust configuration
    • Domain configuration

    Trust configuration for CAM accounts This step ensures that the CAM is trusted within the target Azure tenant and has the necessary access permissions. It must be performed by the tenant administrator of the target Azure tenant. The purpose is to grant the CAM the required permissions to access features within Microsoft Entra ID.

    To enable CAM to integrate with Azure, the tenant administrator must open the CAM Admin Consent URL. This URL triggers the consent dialog in the Microsoft Entra Admin Center, where the administrator can approve the permissions requested for CAM.

    • Retrieve the tenant ID.

    The CAM Admin Consent URL includes the App Client ID associated with a specific tenant. Before using it, you must verify the tenant ID of the target Azure tenant.

    • How to find the tenant ID:
      • Log in to the Azure Portal.
      • From the left navigation menu, go to Microsoft Entra ID.
      • Find the tenant ID field on the Overview tab (first screen).
      • Copy the tenant ID to use for the Admin Consent URL.
    • Access the CAM Admin Consent URL.
      • Open the CAM Admin Consent URL in a web browser. (https://login.microsoftonline.com/{Your_Tenant_ID}/adminconsent?client_id=39613ae7-2fd4-4f3c-9471-aba2391da0b5)

        Replace the {Your_Tenant_ID} placeholder in the URL with the actual tenant ID you copied earlier.

      • When the prompt appears, select the Global Administrator account of the target tenant.

      • This account must have the highest administrative privileges in the tenant.

      • Please review the displayed consent agreement. This agreement specifies the exact authority that will be granted to CAM.

      • If you agree, click “Accept” to approve the integration.

      • By completing this step, CAM can access tenant-level features in Microsoft Entra ID.

      • No Subscription Access Yet: In this step, CAM does not receive access permissions to the Azure subscription. Subscription-level access permissions are configured separately in later steps (creating management group roles and assigning subscription roles).

    • After granting consent, verify the CAM application registration.
      • In Azure Portal, go to Microsoft Entra ID → Enterprise Applications.
      • Search for the CAM application.
      • Verify that the CAM app appears in the list and is correctly registered.
    Reference
    It provides tenant-level recognition to CAM when granting admin consent.

    CAM Account Domain Settings In Azure, a domain connection is required so that users can authenticate via email and integrate with CAM’s Keycloak authentication. The domain configuration process consists of the following two main steps:

    ProcessExecutorfrequency
    Domain creationTenant admin or PM/PLOnce per tenant (may be repeated for a new domain as needed)
    Register a domain in an Azure tenantTenant adminOnce per tenant (unless additional domains are added later)
    Table. CAM account domain configuration steps

    Create Domain You can create a public domain using a DNS service that can create TXT records (e.g., AWS Route 53, SCP DNS). This guide uses SCP DNS as an example.

    • Tasks before creating a domain
      • Log in to SCP DNS.
        • After accessing the SCP console, navigate to the DNS menu.
      • Starting public domain purchase.
        • Click the product request button.
        • This action opens the purchase form.
      • Enter the details for the domain purchase form.
        • Usage type: select ‘Public’.
        • Domain name: Enter the desired public domain name.
        • Registrant information: Enter name, email, address, and phone number.
        • Description and designated fields
        • Payment information is displayed before purchase confirmation.
      • Purchase Confirmation
        • Confirm the final payment amount.
        • Click the following to verify.
      • Check DNS status
        • After creation, the domain appears in the SCP DNS list.
        • Wait until the status shows “active”. This indicates that it is now publicly available.
        • Now there is an activated public domain, and you can connect it to an Azure tenant to perform user authentication.

    Register domain in Azure tenant

    Now that we have a public domain, we need to connect it to Microsoft Entra ID for authentication.

    • Pre-domain configuration tasks (Azure tenant)

      • Log in to the Azure Portal with a tenant administrator account.
      • Microsoft Entra ID → Go to custom domain name.
      • Click +Add Custom Domain.
      • Enter the public domain name (created in SCP).
      • Click Add Domain.
    • Create a TXT record for the domain (Azure → SCP DNS).

      • After adding a domain in Azure:
        • Azure displays the TXT record value that must be added to the DNS settings to verify domain ownership.
        • Copy the TXT record value in Azure.
    • Add TXT record to SCP/Domain Host

      • After accessing SCP DNS, select the active public domain.
      • Click Add Record.
      • Record Type: Select TXT.
      • Value: Paste the TXT record value copied from Azure.
      • TTL(Time to Live): Select according to preference.
      • Click Confirm.
      • Check whether the record appears in the domain’s DNS list.
    • Domain verification in Azure

      • Return to the Azure Portal, select Microsoft Entra ID, and then select Custom Domain Names.
      • Initially, the domain status is shown as “Unverified”.
      • Click the domain, then click the “Verify” button.
      • When Azure detects the TXT record (propagation may take a few minutes), the status changes to “Verified”.
      • The public domain is now officially linked to the Azure tenant.

    Step 2. Add an account in the CAM console

    • In CAM, go to View Project > Manage Accounts.
    • Click the Add Account button.
    • Enter the following information in the popup window that opens:
      • CSP and environment selection
        • CSP: Select Azure.
        • Environment: Select the environment to which this account belongs (e.g., DEV, STG, PRD, or ETC).
      • Enter account information
        • Account name:
          • Enter a name to identify this account within CAM.
          • You can enter up to 50 characters.
          • Only English letters and numbers are allowed.
        • Tenant ID (in Azure portal):
          • Enter the tenant ID.
          • Allowed characters: only English letters, numbers, and hyphens.
          • You can enter up to 36 characters.
          • When you click Verify, CAM checks the following:
            • Check that the subscription ID format is correct.
            • Validate Azure to confirm that it actually exists.
            • The subscription ID field is enabled only after the tenant ID has been validated.
        • Subscription ID (in Azure portal):
          • Please enter the subscription ID.
          • Only English letters, numbers, and hyphens are allowed.
          • You can enter up to 36 characters.
          • When you click Verify, CAM checks the following.
            • Check that the subscription ID format is correct.
            • Check whether the subscription ID is already linked to another CAM project.
            • Check if the subscription ID is already registered or if an approval request is pending.
            • The federation domain field is enabled only after the subscription ID has been verified.
        • Federation domain (in Azure portal):
          • Please enter the federation domain.
          • Only English letters, numbers, hyphens, and periods are allowed.
          • You can enter up to 48 characters.
          • When you click Verify, CAM checks the following.
            • Check whether the federation domain format is correct.
            • Verify that it matches the existing validated domain registered in the Azure domain configuration.

    Step 3. Create Approval When all fields are validated and the details are completed, the Create Approval button becomes active.

    Click this button to submit an account addition approval request. Depending on the CAM settings, you can manually select an approver or have the system automatically route it to the default approver.

    When approval is complete, the Azure account will appear in CAM’s project account table.

    Delete account

    Click the Delete button in the View Account section to delete accounts that are no longer in use.

    User Management

    PM and PL group users can add or remove users from a project. Only users registered in the project can be granted and managed console and resource access within that project, so users who need console or resource access must be registered as project users.

    Add user

    Click the Add button above the user list to add a user to the project.

    1. Name: Search by the user name registered in CAM.
    2. Group: Select the user’s group.
    3. PL : can manage project-related information and have the same permissions as the project manager.
    4. Operator, Developer: Users who can view project-related information and request resource permissions; they are categorized for role management within the project, but in the CAM portal they have identical permissions.

    Delete User

    Select the user to delete from the user list and click the Delete button. After a user is deleted, the deleted user can no longer view project-related information.

    Notice

    The announcements section allows tenant administrators to create and manage notices for users within the tenant. These notices are displayed in the GNB announcement panel. Multiple notices can be active simultaneously. Each notice may include a title, detailed description, optional attachment, and a specified display period.

    Create Notice

    To create a notice, click the Create button on the list page. On the Create Notice page, enter the following details:

    1. Title: Enter the notice title.
    2. Description: Provide the content or message to display.
    3. Attachment(Optional): Upload supporting files (up to 5 files, total size up to 50MB). Empty files cannot be uploaded, and supported file formats are images, documents, .mp4, and .zip.
    4. Display: To show announcements in the GNB, turn the toggle ON. After turning the toggle ON, you can select the period or date range during which the announcement will be displayed to users.

    To create an announcement, select *Save. The newly created announcement will appear in the announcement list.

    Notice Details

    Select a notice title from the list to navigate to the notice detail page. All notice information (title, description, attachment, display period, author, and creation date) is displayed in read-only mode.

    In this view:

    1. Use Edit to modify the announcement.
    2. Use Delete to permanently delete the announcement.

    Edit Notice

    • Select a notice from the notice list and navigate to its detail view page.
    • Select Edit.
    • Edit the required fields (title, description, attachment, display settings, or date range).
    • To update the notice, select Save.
    Reference
    Changes to the notice are applied immediately.

    Delete Notice

    • On the notice detail page, select Delete.
    • If a prompt appears asking you to confirm deletion, confirm it. The selected announcement will be removed from the list and will no longer appear in the GNB announcements.

    Approval Path

    The tenant administrator can predefine the approval route that users must specify when creating an approval.

    Create Approval Path

    To create an approval route, click the Create button and specify the approval case and organization to generate it.

    1. Name: Enter a workflow name for administrative purposes that is not exposed to users.
    2. Target : Select when and which organization to apply it to.
    3. Approver Guide: Enter the responsible person’s information that cannot be automatically assigned by the system but must be included in the approval route. When entered, it will be displayed on the user screen as shown below.
    4. Approver: The system automatically assigns the approver to be displayed; add them by searching for their name.

    View approval path

    To view detailed information about the approval route, go to the Approval Route menu and click the desired approval route. You can view information for all approval routes, and Edit or Delete them as well.

    Edit Approval Path

    On the View Approval Route screen, you can click the Edit button to modify the information.

    Delete approval path

    Click the Delete button to delete the approval route that is no longer used.

    organization

    In the Organization menu, a tenant administrator can manually manage the tenant’s organization. When a tenant administrator creates an organization, they can manage projects and approval routes at the organization level.

    Add organization

    To add an organization, click the Add button and, when the Add Organization popup appears, enter the following details.

    1. Parent (Higher-level Organization): Select the name of the higher-level organization. The default is the tenant name.
    2. Name: Enter the name of the organization to create.
    3. Display: To have it appear in the list of organizations shown to the user, set the toggle to ON.

    View organization

    On the View Organization page, you can see a list of all created organizations. Clicking the organization name you want to view displays detailed organization information on the right. You can expand the entire organization list. When you expand an organization, you can view the entire hierarchy down to the lowest level at once, and when you collapse the organization list, you can see only the top‑level items.

    Organization modification

    The data entered when creating the organization is displayed, and you can edit all data. After editing, click the Save button.

    Delete organization

    Click the Delete button on the View Organization screen to delete an Organization that is no longer used.

    reference
    Organizations that have parent organizations or registered projects cannot be deleted.

    Tenant Administrator

    In the tenant administrator menu, you can add or remove administrators who manage the tenant. When the system is first opened, the user listed on the service application form is designated as the tenant administrator, and thereafter, users with tenant administrator privileges can directly add, delete, and manage.

    Tenant administrators can manage tenant-level information through dedicated menus (Approval Line, Organization, etc.) and can view all content within the tenant.

    Add tenant administrator

    To add a tenant administrator, click the Add button, and when the tenant administrator addition popup appears, search among the users registered in the tenant and register them.

    Delete Tenant Administrator

    In the tenant administrator list, select the user to delete, then click the Delete button to remove them.

    5.2.1.5 - SingleID Authenticator Manual Overview

    SingleID Authenticator is a SingleID-specific authentication tool that enables easy and secure verification of website users’ identity and multi-factor authentication using a mobile phone.

    SingleID Authenticator authentication method

    • Biometric (fingerprint, facial)
    • TOTP(Time base One Time Password)
    • mOTP(mobile One Time Password)
    • PIN
      guide
      The authentication methods that can be registered may vary depending on the authentication methods supported by the service and the range of device support.

    Mobile environment support

    SingleID Authenticator supports the mobile environments listed below.

    SupportRecommended
    Android : 8 and later versions
    • Web Browser: Samsung Internet  Latest public version
    Android : 8 and later versions
    • Models released in 2018 and beyond among Samsung Galaxy Mobile Products
    • Galaxy S9 ↑
    • Web Browser: Samsung Internet 9.0 ↑
    iOS : 16 ,17
    • Web Browser: Safari , Latest public version
    iOS : 16 ,17
    • iPhone Xs ↑, Models released in 2018 and beyond among Apple iPhone Products
    • Web Browser: Safari 14.1 ↑
    Table. Mobile environment support

    5.2.1.5.1 - Install App

    The SingleID Authenticator mobile app can be downloaded in various ways.

    Download by scanning QR

    In SingleID User Protal, when setting up authentication or on authentication pages, you can scan the QR code during the SingleID Authenticator registration process to conveniently visit the app store and download it.

    Reference
    If you are a user in China who cannot access the App Store, please click “If you are a Chinese user or cannot access the App Store, click here” located just below the QR code on the screen to receive the SMS URL.

    Search in the mobile app store and download

    Due to internal company security, if you cannot scan the QR code with a camera, you can directly search for and download it from the Android and iOS app stores.

    1. Open the Play Store (Android) or the App Store on your smartphone.
    2. Enter ‘SingleID’ to search.
    3. After confirming the ‘SingleID Authenticator’, press the install button to install.

    Access via a smartphone browser and download

    If you access the additional authentication page on a mobile device, follow the steps below to download and install the app.

    1. Click the button below on the service registration guide page.
    2. Click the app download button to download the installation file, then install it.
    Caution
    For iOS, after installation, you can use it by setting Device Settings > General > Device Management to trust SAMSUNG SDS.

    5.2.1.5.2 - User Authentication

    Authenticate by receiving a PUSH

    When a user registered with the service reaches the additional authentication screen, a PUSH is automatically sent to the user’s mobile app. To receive a PUSH and authenticate, follow the steps below.

    1. When additional authentication is requested, a PUSH is received from SingleID Authenticator. Press PUSH to launch the app.
    2. Authenticate using your preferred authentication method.
    3. If authentication is successful, return to the browser to complete the authentication.
    Caution
    For iOS, the user must manually click ◀Safari at the top left of the browser to switch to the browser for authentication to complete. For Android OS devices, it automatically switches to the browser.

    Request Manual Authentication

    If you launch the app without pressing PUSH or do not receive a PUSH, you can request additional verification directly from the app as shown below. To authenticate by requesting verification from the app, follow the steps below.

    1. Run the app and click the + button in the upper right corner.
    2. Scan the QR code displayed in the web browser or enter the manual code into the mobile app.
    3. When the input is completed correctly, the authentication service will be registered.

    Authenticate with OTP

    For users registered with the OTP service, the additional authentication screen automatically sends OTP information to the user’s mobile app via PUSH. Follow the steps below to view and verify the OTP in the app.

    1. When OTP authentication is requested, a PUSH is received in SingleID Authenticator. Press PUSH to launch the app.
    2. Verify that the OTP displayed in the app matches the OTP on the web screen. If they match, select Confirm in the app.
    3. If authentication is successful, return to the browser and complete the authentication.
    Caution
    If you are using an older version of the app that does not support OTP, you can use OTP authentication after updating the app. Follow the guide on the authentication screen to update the app, register OTP, and then use it.

    5.2.1.5.3 - Manage Authentication Method

    To use SingleID Authenticator, you must set a PIN, and you can add other authentication methods supported by the service.

    Change PIN

    When you first register a service in SingleID Authenticator, you will register a PIN as a required authentication method. To change the PIN, follow the steps below.

    1. Navigate to Main screen > Authentication method.
    2. Click Change on the PIN item. Complete the verification process and change to the desired number.
    Reference
    The authentication methods that can be registered may vary depending on the service’s supported methods and the device.

    Terminate authentication method

    If you no longer use a registered authentication method or need to re‑register, you can deactivate the authentication method. To deactivate the authentication method, follow the steps below.

    1. Go to Settings > Authentication Method Management.
    2. Authentication with a PIN is required when accessing the menu.
    3. Select the icon on the right of the authentication method you wish to cancel.
    4. A delete confirmation popup appears as shown below.
    5. If the authentication method is deregistered, the icon on the right changes to the Off state.
    Reference
    After registering the service, the initial PIN cannot be disabled as it is set by default. If you do not want to authenticate with SingleID Authenticator, delete the service.

    5.2.1.5.4 - Manage Service List

    You can change the order of the registered services list or delete services you no longer use.

    Changing List Order

    If you want to change the order of the service list, follow the steps below.

    1. From the home screen, select the icon to navigate to the service list change.
    2. Press and hold the icon of the service you want to reorder, then drag it to the desired location.
    3. Change to the desired order and click Done. The updated list will be saved.

    Delete registered service

    The process for deleting registered services offers both a method to delete a single service and a method to delete multiple services in bulk.

    If you want to delete a service, you can delete it directly from the list. Follow the steps below.

    1. From the Home screen, select the service you want to delete and slide it to the left.
    2. If the trash icon appears on the right, click the trash icon.
    3. Do you want to delete the selected service? When the popup appears, click Confirm to delete.
    4. Confirm that the service has been removed from the list.

    FAQ

    The app does not open when using Samsung Browser.
    For users of the latest Samsung Browser, the app logo appears in the browser as shown below depending on the smartphone settings, and the app does not open automatically.

    You can open the app by selecting the app icon next to the browser address bar. To set the app to open automatically, follow the steps below.

    1. Go to Samsung Browser > Internet Settings > Useful Features.
    2. Change the “Open links in other apps” setting to On.
    3. If you return to the browser and run the app again, it operates correctly.

    5.2.1.5.5 - Open Source Licence(Android)

    The open source licenses used in the SingleID solution are as follows. For more details, see below.

    SingleID_MobileApp_Client-APK

    The following sets forth attribution notices for third party software that may be contained in portions of this product. If you have any questions, please contact <global.cs@samsung.com.>

    LicenseOpen Source ComponentLicense Text
    Jdom LicenseJDOM(http://www.jdom.org/)JDOM License
    Copyright (C) 2000-2004 Jason Hunter & Brett McLaughlin. All rights reserved.
    Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

    1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer.
    2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the disclaimer that follows these conditions in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
    3. The name “JDOM” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact {request_AT_jdom_DOT_org}.
    4. Products derived from this software may not be called “JDOM”, nor may “JDOM” appear in their name, without prior written permission from the JDOM Project Management {request_AT_jdom_DOT_org}.

    In addition, we request (but do not require) that you include in the end-user documentation provided with the redistribution and/or in the software itself an acknowledgment equivalent to the following: “This product includes software developed by the JDOM Project (http://www.jdom.org/)." Alternatively, the acknowledgment may be graphical using the logos available at http://www.jdom.org/images/logos.

    THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE JDOM AUTHORS OR THE PROJECT CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
    MIT LicenseXamarin.Android.Support.VersionedParcelable (http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android .Support.VersionedParcelable) , Animal Sniffer Annotations (http://mojo.codehaus.org/animal-sniffer/ animal-sniffer-annotations) , Checker Qual (http://checkerframework.org) , Xamarin.Android.Support.SwipeRefreshLayout (http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android .Support.SwipeRefreshLayout) , chai (https://www.npmjs.org/package/chai) , The Legion of the Bouncy Castle (http://www.bouncycastle.org/index.html) , SLF4J API Module(http://www.slf4j.org) , jsrsasign(https://www.npmjs.org/package/jsrsasign) ,Checker Qual(http://checkerframework.org) , , jsrsasign (https://www.npmjs.org/package/jsrsasign) , Mocha(https://www.npmjs.org/package/mocha) , Xamarin.Android.Support.ViewPager (http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin. Android.Support.ViewPager) , SLF4J LOG4J-12 Binding (http://www.slf4j.org) , android-gif-drawable (http://github.com/koral--/android-gif-drawable/)
    Android - platform - hardware - intel - common – libva (http://developer.android.com/index.html)
    The MIT License

    Xamarin.Android.Support.VersionedParcelable : Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors

    Animal Sniffer Annotations : Copyright (c) 2009 codehaus.org.

    Checker Qual : Copyright 2004-present by the Checker Framework developers

    Xamarin.Android.Support.SwipeRefreshLayout : Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors

    chai : Copyright (c) 2017 Chai.js Assertion Library

    The Legion of the Bouncy Castle : Copyright © 2013 Legion of the Bouncy Castle Inc. (ABN 84 166 338 567) All rights reserved.

    SLF4J API Module , SLF4J LOG4J-12 Binding : Copyright © 2004-2023 QOS.ch

    jsrsasign : Copyright (c) 2010-2021 Kenji Urushima

    Checker Qual : Copyright 2004-present by the Checker Framework developers

    Mocha: Copyright (c) 2011-2022 OpenJS Foundation and contributors, https://openjsf.org

    Xamarin.Android.Support.ViewPager , Android - platform - hardware - intel - common - libva: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors

    android-gif-drawable : Copyright (c) 2013 - present Karol Wrótniak, Droids on Roids LLC

    Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

    The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

    THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF License Open Source Component License Text MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
    SingleID_MobileApp_Client-APK

    SingleID_MobileApp_Flutter-UMA

    The following sets forth attribution notices for third party software that may be contained in portions of this product. If you have any questions, please contact global.cs@samsung.com

    LicenseOpen Source ComponentLicense Text
    Apache License 2.0Android Support Library media compat, Converter: Gson, Adapter: RxJava 2, Android Support Library core utils, Android Arch-Runtime, Guava (Google Common Libraries), Android Support AnimatedVectorDrawable, Android Support Library core UI, Android Support Library Custom View - androidx.customview:customview, Android Lifecycle LiveData, OkHttp, Gson, android.support.annotation, Android Support Library Custom View - androidx.swiperefreshlayout:swiperefreshlayout, Android Support Library v4, OkHttp, Android Lifecycle ViewModel, Commons Lang, rxjava, Android Support Library compat, Roboto Fonts, Apache Commons Collections, Android Support Library v4, Android Lifecycle LiveData Core, RxAndroid, joda-time, okio, Apache Commons IO, JetBrains/java-annotations, Android AppCompat Library v7, Android Support Library Collections, Android Support VectorDrawable, Kotlin Stdlib, Android Lifecycle-Common, Android Support Library loader, RetrofitApache License Version 2.0, January 2004

    http://www.apache.org/licenses/

    TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION

    1. Definitions.

    “License” shall me an the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.

    “Licensor” shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.

    “Legal Entity” shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, “control” means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.

    “You” (or “Your”) shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.

    “Source” form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.

    “Object” form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.

    “Work” shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).

    “Derivative Works” shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.

    “Contribution” shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, “submitted” means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as “Not a Contribution.”

    “Contributor” shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.

    2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.

    3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.

    4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:

    a. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
    b. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
    c. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
    d. If the Work includes a “NOTICE” text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.

    You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License.

    5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.

    6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.

    7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.

    8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.

    9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.

    END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

    APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work

    To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets “[]” replaced with your own identifying information. (Don’t include the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be included on the same “printed page” as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party archives.

    Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner] Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.
    Creative Commons Zero v1.0 Universalreactive-streams: http://www.reactive-streams.org/Creative Commons CC0 1.0 Universal

    Creative Commons Legal Code CC0 1.0 Universal

    CREATIVE COMMONS CORPORATION IS NOT A LAW FIRM AND DOES NOT PROVIDE LEGAL SERVICES. DISTRIBUTION OF THIS DOCUMENT DOES NOT CREATE AN ATTORNEY-CLIENT RELATIONSHIP. CREATIVE COMMONS PROVIDES THIS INFORMATION ON AN “AS-IS” BASIS. CREATIVE COMMONS MAKES NO WARRANTIES REGARDING THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR THE INFORMATION OR WORKS PROVIDED HEREUNDER, AND DISCLAIMS LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR THE INFORMATION OR WORKS PROVIDED HEREUNDER.

    Statement of Purpose

    The laws of most jurisdictions throughout the world automatically confer exclusive Copyright and Related Rights (defined below) upon the creator and subsequent owner(s) (each and all, an “owner”) of an original work of authorship and/or a database (each, a “Work”).

    Certain owners wish to permanently relinquish those rights to a Work for the purpose of contributing to a commons of creative, cultural and scientific works (“Commons”) that the public can reliably and without fear of later claims of infringement build upon, modify, incorporate in other works, reuse and redistribute as freely as possible in any form whatsoever and for any purposes, including without limitation commercial purposes. These owners may contribute to the Commons to promote the ideal of a free culture and the further production of creative, cultural and scientific works, or to gain reputation or greater distribution for their Work in part through the use and efforts of others.

    For these and/or other purposes and motivations, and without any expectation of additional consideration or compensation, the person associating CC0 with a Work (the “Affirmer”), to the extent that he or she is an owner of Copyright and Related Rights in the Work, voluntarily elects to apply CC0 to the Work and publicly distribute the Work under its terms, with knowledge of his or her Copyright and Related Rights in the Work and the meaning and intended legal effect of CC0 on those rights.

    1. Copyright and Related Rights. A Work made available under CC0 may be protected by copyright and related or neighboring rights (“Copyright and Related Rights”). Copyright and Related Rights include, but are not limited to, the following:

    i. the right to reproduce, adapt, distribute, perform, display, communicate, and translate a Work;

    ii. moral rights retained by the original author(s) and/or performer(s);

    iii. publicity and privacy rights pertaining to a person’s image or likeness depicted in a Work;

    iv. rights protecting against unfair competition in regards to a Work, subject to the limitations in paragraph 4(a), below;

    v. rights protecting the extraction, dissemination, use and reuse of data in a Work;

    vi. database rights (such as those arising under Directive 96/9/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 March 1996 on the legal protection of databases, and under any national implementation thereof, including any amended or successor version of such directive); and

    vii. other similar, equivalent or corresponding rights throughout the world based on applicable law or treaty, and any national implementations thereof.

    2. Waiver. To the greatest extent permitted by, but not in contravention of, applicable law, Affirmer hereby overtly, fully, permanently, irrevocably and unconditionally waives, abandons, and surrenders all of Affirmer’s Copyright and Related Rights and associated claims and causes of action, whether now known or unknown (including existing as well as future claims and causes of action), in the Work

    i. in all territories worldwide,

    ii. for the maximum duration provided by applicable law or treaty (including future time extensions),

    iii. in any current or future medium and for any number of copies, and

    iv. for any purpose whatsoever, including without limitation commercial, advertising or promotional purposes (the “Waiver”).

    Affirmer makes the Waiver for the benefit of each member of the public at large and to the detriment of Affirmer’s heirs and successors, fully intending that such Waiver shall not be subject to revocation, rescission, cancellation, termination, or any other legal or equitable action to disrupt the quiet enjoyment of the Work by the public as contemplated by Affirmer’s express Statement of Purpose.

    3. Public License Fallback. Should any part of the Waiver for any reason be judged legally invalid or ineffective under applicable law, then the Waiver shall be preserved to the maximum extent permitted taking into account Affirmer’s express Statement of Purpose. In addition, to the extent the Waiver is so judged Affirmer hereby grants to each affected person a royalty-free, non transferable, non sublicensable, non exclusive, irrevocable and unconditional license to exercise Affirmer’s Copyright and Related Rights in the Work

    i. in all territories worldwide,

    ii. for the maximum duration provided by applicable law or treaty (including future time extensions),

    iii. in any current or future medium and for any number of copies, and

    iv. for any purpose whatsoever, including without limitation commercial, advertising or promotional purposes (the “License”).

    The License shall be deemed effective as of the date CC0 was applied by Affirmer to the Work. Should any part of the License for any reason be judged legally invalid or ineffective under applicable law, such partial invalidity or ineffectiveness shall not invalidate the remainder of the License, and in such case Affirmer hereby affirms that he or she will not i. exercise any of his or her remaining Copyright and Related Rights in the Work or ii. assert any associated claims and causes of action with respect to the Work, in either case contrary to Affirmer’s express Statement of Purpose.

    4. Limitations and Disclaimers.

    a. No trademark or patent rights held by Affirmer are waived, abandoned, surrendered, licensed or otherwise affected by this document.

    b. Affirmer offers the Work as-is and makes no representations or warranties of any kind concerning the Work, express, implied, statutory or otherwise, including without limitation warranties of title, merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, non infringement, or the absence of latent or other defects, accuracy, or the present or absence of errors, whether or not discoverable, all to the greatest extent permissible under applicable law.

    c. Affirmer disclaims responsibility for clearing rights of other persons that may apply to the Work or any use thereof, including without limitation any person’s Copyright and Related Rights in the Work. Further,

    Affirmer disclaims responsibility for obtaining any necessary consents, permissions or other rights required for any use of the Work. Affirmer understands and acknowledges that Creative Commons is not a party to this document and has no duty or obligation with respect to this CC0 or use of the Work.
    ISC Licensegotham-fonts: https://www.npmjs.org/package/gotham-fontsISC License (ISCL)

    gotham-fonts : Copyright @ Bogdan Pop

    Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.

    THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
    MIT LicenseXamarin.Android.Support.VersionedParcelable: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.VersionedParcelable

    Xamarin.Android.Support.CoordinaterLayout: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.CoordinaterLayout

    The Legion of the Bouncy Castle: http://www.bouncycastle.org/index.html

    Xamarin.Android.Support.SlidingPaneLayout: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.SlidingPaneLayout

    XamarinLibrary.Xamarin.Android.Support.Multidex: https://www.nuget.org/packages/XamarinLibrary.Xamarin.Android.Support.Multidex

    Xamarin.Android.Support.Interpolator: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.Interpolator

    Xamarin.Android.Support.LocalBroadcastManager: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.LocalBroadcastManager

    Xamarin.Android.Support.DrawerLayout: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.DrawerLayout

    @fontsource/Montserrat: https://www.npmjs.org/package/@fontsource/montserrat

    Xamarin.Android.Support.DocumentFile: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.DocumentFile

    Xamarin.Android.Support.Print: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.Print

    Xamarin.Android.Support.AsyncLayoutInflater: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.AsyncLayoutInflater

    SLF4J API Module: http://www.slf4j.org

    Xamarin.Android.Support.ViewPager: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.ViewPager

    secure-random: http://github.com/avodonosov/secure-random/

    Xamarin.Android.Support.CursorAdapter: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.CursorAdapter
    The MIT License

    Xamarin.Android.Support.VersionedParcelable: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    Xamarin.Android.Support.CoordinaterLayout: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    The Legion of the Bouncy Castle: Copyright (c) 2000-2023 The Legion of the Bouncy Castle Inc. (https://www.bouncycastle.org)

    All rights reserved.

    Xamarin.Android.Support.SlidingPaneLayout: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    XamarinLibrary.Xamarin.Android.Support.Multidex: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    Xamarin.Android.Support.Interpolator: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    Xamarin.Android.Support.LocalBroadcastManager: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    Xamarin.Android.Support.DrawerLayout: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    @fontsource/Montserrat: Copyright (c) 2023 fontsource All rights reserved.

    Xamarin.Android.Support.DocumentFile: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    Xamarin.Android.Support.Print: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    Xamarin.Android.Support.AsyncLayoutInflater: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    SLF4J API Module: Copyright © 2004-2023 QOS.ch All rights reserved.

    Xamarin.Android.Support.ViewPager: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    secure-random: Copyright (C) 2011 by Anton Vodonosov (avodonosov@yandex.ru). All rights reserved.

    Xamarin.Android.Support.CursorAdapter: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

    THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
    SIL Open Font License 1.1@fontsource/rubik, https://www.npmjs.org/package/@fontsource/rubik

    @fontsource/montserrat https://www.npmjs.org/package/@fontsource/montserrat
    SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE

    Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007

    PREAMBLE

    The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide development of collaborative font projects, to support the font creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and improved in partnership with others.

    The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modified and redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded, redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives, however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.

    DEFINITIONS

    “Font Software” refers to the set of files released by the Copyright Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may include source files, build scripts and documentation.

    “Reserved Font Name” refers to any names specified as such after the copyright statement(s).

    “Original Version” refers to the collection of Font Software components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).

    “Modified Version” refers to any derivative made by adding to, deleting, or substituting — in part or in whole — any of the components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting the Font Software to a new environment.

    “Author” refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.

    PERMISSION & CONDITIONS

    Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed, modify, redistribute, and sell modified and unmodified copies of the Font Software, subject to the following conditions:

    1. Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in Original or Modified Versions, may be sold by itself.

    2. Original or Modified Versions of the Font Software may be bundled, redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be included either as stand-alone text files, human-readable headers or in the appropriate machine-readable metadata fields within text or binary files as long as those fields can be easily viewed by the user.

    3. No Modified Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the primary font name as presented to the users.

    4. The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any Modified Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written permission.

    5. The Font Software, modified or unmodified, in part or in whole, must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to any document created using the Font Software.

    TERMINATION

    This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are not met.

    DISCLAIMER

    THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
    SingleID_MobileApp_Flutter-UMA

    5.2.1.5.6 - Open Source Licence(ISO)

    The open source licenses used in the SingleID solution are as follows. For more details, see below.

    SingleID_MobileApp_Client-IOS

    The following sets forth attribution notices for third party software that may be contained in portions of This product. If you have any questions, please contact global.cs@samsung.com.

    LicenseOpen Source ComponentLicense Text
    Apache License 2.0Open Computer Vision Library (OpenCV): KA ProgressLabel:Apache License Version 2.0, January 2004

    http://www.apache.org/licenses/

    TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION

    1. Definitions.

    “License” shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.

    “Licensor” shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.

    “Legal Entity” shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, “control” means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.

    “You” (or “Your”) shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.

    “Source” form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.

    “Object” form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.

    “Work” shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).

    “Derivative Works” shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.

    “Contribution” shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, “submitted” means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as “Not a Contribution.”

    “Contributor” shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.

    1. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.

    2. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.

    4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:
    a. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
    b. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
    c. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, rademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
    d. If the Work includes a “NOTICE” text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.

    You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License.

    5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.

    6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.

    7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.

    8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.

    9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.
    END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

    APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work
    To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets “[]” replaced with your own identifying information. (Don’t include the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be included on the same “printed page” as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party archives.

    Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner] Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.
    Apple MIT LicenseApple Reachability: https://developer.apple.com/library/ios/samplecode/Reachability/Introduction/Intro.htmlDisclaimer: IMPORTANT: This Apple software is supplied to you by Apple Computer, Inc.

    (“Apple”) in consideration of your agreement to the following terms, and your use, installation, modification or redistribution of this Apple software constitutes acceptance of these terms. If you do not agree with these terms, please do not use, install, modify or redistribute this Apple software.

    In consideration of your agreement to abide by the following terms, and subject to these terms, Apple grants you a personal, non-exclusive license, under Apple’s copyrights in this original Apple software (the “Apple Software”), to use, reproduce, modify and redistribute the Apple Software, with or without modifications, in source and/or binary forms; provided that if you redistribute the Apple Software in its entirety and without modifications, you must retain this notice and the following text and disclaimers in all such redistributions of the Apple Software. Neither the name, trademarks, service marks or logos of Apple Computer, Inc. may be used to endorse or promote products derived from the Apple Software without specific prior written permission from Apple. Except as expressly stated in this notice, no other rights or licenses, express or implied, are granted by Apple herein, including but not limited to any patent rights that may be infringed by your derivative works or by other works in which the Apple Software may be incorporated.

    The Apple Software is provided by Apple on an “AS IS” basis. APPLE MAKES NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, REGARDING THE APPLE SOFTWARE OR ITS USE AND OPERATION ALONE OR IN COMBINATION WITH YOUR PRODUCTS.

    IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE, REPRODUCTION, MODIFICATION AND/OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE APPLE SOFTWARE, HOWEVER CAUSED AND WHETHER UNDER THEORY OF CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF APPLE HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
    Brian Gladman AES LicenseGladman AES: http://www.gladman.me.uk/AESBrian Gladman AES License

    Copyright (c) 1998-2013, Brian Gladman, Worcester, UK. All rights reserved. The redistribution and use of this software (with or without changes) is allowed without the payment of fees or royalties provided that:
    source code distributions include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer; binary distributions include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in their documentation.
    This software is provided ‘as is’ with no explicit or implied warranties in respect of its operation, including, but not limited to, correctness and fitness for purpose.
    BSD 3-clause “New” or “Revised” LicenseTPPropertyAnimation: http://atastypixel.com/blog/key-path-based-property-animation

    Sqlcipher: https://cocoapods.org/pods/SQLCipher

    ASM All: http://asm.objectweb.org/asm/

    Protocol Buffers [BOM]: https://developers.google.com/protocol-buffers/
    TPPropertyAnimation: Copyright 2010 A TASTY PIXEL. All rights Reserved

    sqlcipher: Copyright (c) 2008-2023, ZETETIC LLC All rights reserved.

    ASM All: Copyright (c) 2000-2011 INRIA, France Telecom All rights reserved.

    Protocol Buffers [BOM]: Copyright 2008 Google Inc. All rights reserved.
    Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
    * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
    * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
    * Neither the name of the nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.

    THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
    MIT LicenseSlatherOrg/slather: https://github.com/SlatherOrg/slather

    FDKeychain: https://cocoapods.org/pods/FDKeychain

    JSONModel: https://cocoapods.org/pods/JSONModel

    FLAnimatedImage: https://cocoapods.org/pods/FLAnimatedImage

    Ssziparchive: https://cocoapods.org/pods/SSZipArchive
    The MIT License

    SlatherOrg/slather: Copyright (c) 2014 Mark Larsen All rights reserved

    FDKeychain: Copyright (c) 2016 Reid Main All rights reserved

    JSONModel: Copyright (c) 2012-2016 Marin Todorov and JSONModel contributors All rights reserved

    FLAnimatedImage: Copyright (c) 2014-2016 Flipboard All rights reserved

    ssziparchive: Copyright (c) 2013-2021, ZipArchive, https://github.com/ZipArchive All rights reserved

    Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

    The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

    THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
    OpenSSL Combined LicenseOpenSSL - in C: http://www.openssl.orgLICENSE ISSUES

    The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.

    OpenSSL License —————

    Copyright (c) 1998-2008 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

    Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

    1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
    2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
    3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
    4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
    5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
    6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:

    “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"

    THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

    This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

    Original SSLeay License

    Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.

    This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
    The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

    This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

    Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

    1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
    2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
    3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:

    “This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)” The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
    4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”

    THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

    The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
    zlib LicenseBase64: https://cocoapods.org/pods/Base64nl

    minizip: http://tracker.debian.org/pkg/minizip
    The zlib/libpng License

    Copyright (c)

    This software is provided ‘as-is’, without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software.

    Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions:

    1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required.
    2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software.
    3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution.
    SingleID_MobileApp_Client-APK

    SingleID_MobileApp_Flutter-UMA

    The following sets forth attribution notices for third party software that may be contained in portions of this product. If you have any questions, please contact global.cs@samsung.com

    LicenseOpen Source ComponentLicense Text
    Apache License 2.0Android Support Library media compat, Converter: Gson, Adapter: RxJava 2, Android Support Library core utils, Android Arch-Runtime, Guava (Google Common Libraries), Android Support AnimatedVectorDrawable, Android Support Library core UI, Android Support Library Custom View - androidx.customview:customview, Android Lifecycle LiveData, OkHttp, Gson, android.support.annotation, Android Support Library Custom View - androidx.swiperefreshlayout:swiperefreshlayout, Android Support Library v4, OkHttp, Android Lifecycle ViewModel, Commons Lang, rxjava, Android Support Library compat, Roboto Fonts, Apache Commons Collections, Android Support Library v4, Android Lifecycle LiveData Core, RxAndroid, joda-time, okio, Apache Commons IO, JetBrains/java-annotations, Android AppCompat Library v7, Android Support Library Collections, Android Support VectorDrawable, Kotlin Stdlib, Android Lifecycle-Common, Android Support Library loader, RetrofitApache License Version 2.0, January 2004

    http://www.apache.org/licenses/

    TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION

    1. Definitions.

    “License” shall me an the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1 through 9 of this document.

    “Licensor” shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the License.

    “Legal Entity” shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, “control” means (i) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.

    “You” (or “Your”) shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.

    “Source” form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software source code, documentation source, and configuration files.

    “Object” form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form, including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media types.

    “Work” shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided in the Appendix below).

    “Derivative Works” shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and Derivative Works thereof.

    “Contribution” shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, “submitted” means any form of electronic, verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright owner as “Not a Contribution.”

    “Contributor” shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.

    2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.

    3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.

    4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following conditions:

    a. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
    b. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and
    c. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent, trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
    d. If the Work includes a “NOTICE” text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file, excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot be construed as modifying the License.

    You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise complies with the conditions stated in this License.

    5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License, without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such Contributions.

    6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.

    7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.

    8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract, or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised of the possibility of such damages.

    9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.

    END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

    APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work

    To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by brackets “[]” replaced with your own identifying information. (Don’t include the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name and description of purpose be included on the same “printed page” as the copyright notice for easier identification within third-party archives.

    Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner] Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the “License”); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, software distributed under the License is distributed on an “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing permissions and limitations under the License.
    Creative Commons Zero v1.0 Universalreactive-streams: http://www.reactive-streams.org/Creative Commons CC0 1.0 Universal

    Creative Commons Legal Code CC0 1.0 Universal

    CREATIVE COMMONS CORPORATION IS NOT A LAW FIRM AND DOES NOT PROVIDE LEGAL SERVICES. DISTRIBUTION OF THIS DOCUMENT DOES NOT CREATE AN ATTORNEY-CLIENT RELATIONSHIP. CREATIVE COMMONS PROVIDES THIS INFORMATION ON AN “AS-IS” BASIS. CREATIVE COMMONS MAKES NO WARRANTIES REGARDING THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR THE INFORMATION OR WORKS PROVIDED HEREUNDER, AND DISCLAIMS LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR THE INFORMATION OR WORKS PROVIDED HEREUNDER.

    Statement of Purpose

    The laws of most jurisdictions throughout the world automatically confer exclusive Copyright and Related Rights (defined below) upon the creator and subsequent owner(s) (each and all, an “owner”) of an original work of authorship and/or a database (each, a “Work”).

    Certain owners wish to permanently relinquish those rights to a Work for the purpose of contributing to a commons of creative, cultural and scientific works (“Commons”) that the public can reliably and without fear of later claims of infringement build upon, modify, incorporate in other works, reuse and redistribute as freely as possible in any form whatsoever and for any purposes, including without limitation commercial purposes. These owners may contribute to the Commons to promote the ideal of a free culture and the further production of creative, cultural and scientific works, or to gain reputation or greater distribution for their Work in part through the use and efforts of others.

    For these and/or other purposes and motivations, and without any expectation of additional consideration or compensation, the person associating CC0 with a Work (the “Affirmer”), to the extent that he or she is an owner of Copyright and Related Rights in the Work, voluntarily elects to apply CC0 to the Work and publicly distribute the Work under its terms, with knowledge of his or her Copyright and Related Rights in the Work and the meaning and intended legal effect of CC0 on those rights.

    1. Copyright and Related Rights. A Work made available under CC0 may be protected by copyright and related or neighboring rights (“Copyright and Related Rights”). Copyright and Related Rights include, but are not limited to, the following:

    i. the right to reproduce, adapt, distribute, perform, display, communicate, and translate a Work;

    ii. moral rights retained by the original author(s) and/or performer(s);

    iii. publicity and privacy rights pertaining to a person’s image or likeness depicted in a Work;

    iv. rights protecting against unfair competition in regards to a Work, subject to the limitations in paragraph 4(a), below;

    v. rights protecting the extraction, dissemination, use and reuse of data in a Work;

    vi. database rights (such as those arising under Directive 96/9/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 11 March 1996 on the legal protection of databases, and under any national implementation thereof, including any amended or successor version of such directive); and

    vii. other similar, equivalent or corresponding rights throughout the world based on applicable law or treaty, and any national implementations thereof.

    2. Waiver. To the greatest extent permitted by, but not in contravention of, applicable law, Affirmer hereby overtly, fully, permanently, irrevocably and unconditionally waives, abandons, and surrenders all of Affirmer’s Copyright and Related Rights and associated claims and causes of action, whether now known or unknown (including existing as well as future claims and causes of action), in the Work

    i. in all territories worldwide,

    ii. for the maximum duration provided by applicable law or treaty (including future time extensions),

    iii. in any current or future medium and for any number of copies, and

    iv. for any purpose whatsoever, including without limitation commercial, advertising or promotional purposes (the “Waiver”).

    Affirmer makes the Waiver for the benefit of each member of the public at large and to the detriment of Affirmer’s heirs and successors, fully intending that such Waiver shall not be subject to revocation, rescission, cancellation, termination, or any other legal or equitable action to disrupt the quiet enjoyment of the Work by the public as contemplated by Affirmer’s express Statement of Purpose.

    3. Public License Fallback. Should any part of the Waiver for any reason be judged legally invalid or ineffective under applicable law, then the Waiver shall be preserved to the maximum extent permitted taking into account Affirmer’s express Statement of Purpose. In addition, to the extent the Waiver is so judged Affirmer hereby grants to each affected person a royalty-free, non transferable, non sublicensable, non exclusive, irrevocable and unconditional license to exercise Affirmer’s Copyright and Related Rights in the Work

    i. in all territories worldwide,

    ii. for the maximum duration provided by applicable law or treaty (including future time extensions),

    iii. in any current or future medium and for any number of copies, and

    iv. for any purpose whatsoever, including without limitation commercial, advertising or promotional purposes (the “License”).

    The License shall be deemed effective as of the date CC0 was applied by Affirmer to the Work. Should any part of the License for any reason be judged legally invalid or ineffective under applicable law, such partial invalidity or ineffectiveness shall not invalidate the remainder of the License, and in such case Affirmer hereby affirms that he or she will not i. exercise any of his or her remaining Copyright and Related Rights in the Work or ii. assert any associated claims and causes of action with respect to the Work, in either case contrary to Affirmer’s express Statement of Purpose.

    4. Limitations and Disclaimers.

    a. No trademark or patent rights held by Affirmer are waived, abandoned, surrendered, licensed or otherwise affected by this document.

    b. Affirmer offers the Work as-is and makes no representations or warranties of any kind concerning the Work, express, implied, statutory or otherwise, including without limitation warranties of title, merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, non infringement, or the absence of latent or other defects, accuracy, or the present or absence of errors, whether or not discoverable, all to the greatest extent permissible under applicable law.

    c. Affirmer disclaims responsibility for clearing rights of other persons that may apply to the Work or any use thereof, including without limitation any person’s Copyright and Related Rights in the Work. Further,

    Affirmer disclaims responsibility for obtaining any necessary consents, permissions or other rights required for any use of the Work. Affirmer understands and acknowledges that Creative Commons is not a party to this document and has no duty or obligation with respect to this CC0 or use of the Work.
    ISC Licensegotham-fonts: https://www.npmjs.org/package/gotham-fontsISC License (ISCL)

    gotham-fonts : Copyright @ Bogdan Pop

    Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.

    THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND THE AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
    MIT LicenseXamarin.Android.Support.VersionedParcelable: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.VersionedParcelable

    Xamarin.Android.Support.CoordinaterLayout: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.CoordinaterLayout

    The Legion of the Bouncy Castle: http://www.bouncycastle.org/index.html

    Xamarin.Android.Support.SlidingPaneLayout: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.SlidingPaneLayout

    XamarinLibrary.Xamarin.Android.Support.Multidex: https://www.nuget.org/packages/XamarinLibrary.Xamarin.Android.Support.Multidex

    Xamarin.Android.Support.Interpolator: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.Interpolator

    Xamarin.Android.Support.LocalBroadcastManager: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.LocalBroadcastManager

    Xamarin.Android.Support.DrawerLayout: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.DrawerLayout

    @fontsource/Montserrat: https://www.npmjs.org/package/@fontsource/montserrat

    Xamarin.Android.Support.DocumentFile: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.DocumentFile

    Xamarin.Android.Support.Print: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.Print

    Xamarin.Android.Support.AsyncLayoutInflater: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.AsyncLayoutInflater

    SLF4J API Module: http://www.slf4j.org

    Xamarin.Android.Support.ViewPager: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.ViewPager

    secure-random: http://github.com/avodonosov/secure-random/

    Xamarin.Android.Support.CursorAdapter: http://www.nuget.org/packages/Xamarin.Android.Support.CursorAdapter
    The MIT License

    Xamarin.Android.Support.VersionedParcelable: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    Xamarin.Android.Support.CoordinaterLayout: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    The Legion of the Bouncy Castle: Copyright (c) 2000-2023 The Legion of the Bouncy Castle Inc. (https://www.bouncycastle.org)

    All rights reserved.

    Xamarin.Android.Support.SlidingPaneLayout: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    XamarinLibrary.Xamarin.Android.Support.Multidex: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    Xamarin.Android.Support.Interpolator: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    Xamarin.Android.Support.LocalBroadcastManager: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    Xamarin.Android.Support.DrawerLayout: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    @fontsource/Montserrat: Copyright (c) 2023 fontsource All rights reserved.

    Xamarin.Android.Support.DocumentFile: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    Xamarin.Android.Support.Print: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    Xamarin.Android.Support.AsyncLayoutInflater: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    SLF4J API Module: Copyright © 2004-2023 QOS.ch All rights reserved.

    Xamarin.Android.Support.ViewPager: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    secure-random: Copyright (C) 2011 by Anton Vodonosov (avodonosov@yandex.ru). All rights reserved.

    Xamarin.Android.Support.CursorAdapter: Copyright (c) .NET Foundation Contributors All rights reserved.

    Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

    THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
    SIL Open Font License 1.1@fontsource/rubik, https://www.npmjs.org/package/@fontsource/rubik

    @fontsource/montserrat https://www.npmjs.org/package/@fontsource/montserrat
    SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE

    Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007

    PREAMBLE

    The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide development of collaborative font projects, to support the font creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and improved in partnership with others.

    The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modified and redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded, redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives, however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.

    DEFINITIONS

    “Font Software” refers to the set of files released by the Copyright Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may include source files, build scripts and documentation.

    “Reserved Font Name” refers to any names specified as such after the copyright statement(s).

    “Original Version” refers to the collection of Font Software components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).

    “Modified Version” refers to any derivative made by adding to, deleting, or substituting — in part or in whole — any of the components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting the Font Software to a new environment.

    “Author” refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.

    PERMISSION & CONDITIONS

    Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed, modify, redistribute, and sell modified and unmodified copies of the Font Software, subject to the following conditions:

    1. Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in Original or Modified Versions, may be sold by itself.

    2. Original or Modified Versions of the Font Software may be bundled, redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be included either as stand-alone text files, human-readable headers or in the appropriate machine-readable metadata fields within text or binary files as long as those fields can be easily viewed by the user.

    3. No Modified Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the primary font name as presented to the users.

    4. The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any Modified Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their explicit written permission.

    5. The Font Software, modified or unmodified, in part or in whole, must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to any document created using the Font Software.

    TERMINATION

    This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are not met.

    DISCLAIMER

    THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
    SingleID_MobileApp_Flutter-UMA

    5.2.1.6 - Open API guides

    SingleID Open API Guides

    To use the Samsung Cloud Platform SingleID Open API, the system must first be registered in Applications. You must obtain a JWT token with the registered system information and include the JWT token in the HTTP header when calling the Samsung Cloud Platform SingleID Open API.

    API Call Method

    1. Call with the token (JWT Token) value included in the HTTP header
    2. Set the access token header name to Authorization, and set the access token type value to Bearer - set the JWT Token value after the Bearer string.
    3. Test environment information
      • domain :
        • Internal: stg-scloud.iam.samsung.net
        • External: stg2-cloud.singleid.samsung.net
      • tenant-name : test-tenant
    4. Test Swagger UI URL

    API List

    ModuleAPIURIMethodDescription
    Portal Commonget MFA Tokenhttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/common-api/open/v1.1/asis/{tenant-name}/user/mfa/token/authenticationGETMFA token issuance
    Portal CommonOTP Sendhttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/common-api/open/v1.1/asis/otp/sendPOSTGenerate OTP based on the authentication type (email, sms, msg)
    Portal CommonOTP Validationhttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/common-api/open/v1.1/asis/otp/validatePOSTOTP verification
    Portal CommonMFA Consumer Requesthttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/requestGETMFA request
    Portal CommonMFA Consumer Requesthttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/requestPOSTMFA request
    Tenant Admin PortalSend Email about Anomaly Detectionhttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/admin-api/open/v1.1/emails/anomalyDetectionPOSTSend email to the user when abnormal authentication activity is detected
    Tenant Admin PortalSend Email about New Sign-in Environmenthttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/admin-api/open/v1.1/emails/newSignInEnvironmentPOSTSend user verification email upon logging into a new environment
    User PortalGet Userhttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/user-api/open/v1.1/users/{username}GETUser name, email, preferred language, timezone lookup
    User PortalGet User Profile Imagehttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/user-api/open/v1.1/users/image/{username}GETRetrieve user profile image
    User PortalCreate account assignment listhttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/user-api/1.0/scp-auth/createPOSTCreate user SCP permission
    User PortalDelete account assignment listhttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/user-api/1.0/scp-auth/deletePOSTDelete user SCP permission
    User PortalGet account assignment listhttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/user-api/1.0/scp-auth/listGETUser SCP permission lookup
    User PortalSearch Userhttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/user-api/1.0/scp-user/listGETSearch SCP target user
    Portal CommonMFA Consumer Requesthttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/request/mfaPOSTMFA request (including device)
    Portal CommonMFA Consumer Verificationhttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/verification/mfaPOSTMFA verification (including equipment)
    Table. API list

    API Specification - get MFA Token(Portal Common)

    ModuleAPIURIMethodDescription
    Portal Commonget MFA Tokenhttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/common-api/open/v1.1/asis/{tenant-name}/user/mfa/token/authenticationGETMFA Token issuance
    Table. get MFA Token(Portal Common)

    Request Parameters

    PropertiesAttributeMandatoryParameter TypeData TypeSample DataNote
    Tenant nametenant-nameYPathStringtest-tenant
    usernameuserNameYqueryStringmkdir.kim
    ProtocolprotocolYqueryStringuma-uaf
    sessionDataKeysessionDataKeyNqueryStringsessionDataKey1
    redirectUrlredirectUrlNqueryStringredirectUrl1
    errorRedirectUrlerrorRedirectUrlNqueryStringerrorRedirectUrl1
    paramsparamsNqueryStringparams1
    languagelanguageNqueryStringko
    Table. Request Parameters

    Response Parameters

    Properties (Result)AttributeData TypeSample DataNote
    ResultresultStringSUCCESS
    Result valuevalueObject{
    "token": "eyJpc3MiOiJodHRwczov...",
    "serviceUri": "/ua/MPHTOCHW5I/de6f67d0-8bec-46ac-bf53-16ef00eb2066/dgauth/mfa"
    }
    Table. Response Parameters

    Sample

    RequestResponse
    curl -X POST "https://stg-scloud.singleid.samsung.net:443/stg4/user-api/1.0/scp-auth/delete" -H "accept: application/json"-H "apiKey: {apiKey}" INPUT JSON{     "instanceId": "instnace-01",     "permissionSetId":   "PERMISSION-SET-Ablxc5__qEaIYmWGyMeqlf",     "principalId": "singleid.test001",     "principalType": "USER",     "targetId": "PROJECT-ka2tfhLHsweVwm4BrR1rae",     "targetType": "PROJECT"   }{   "instanceId": "instnace-01",   "permissionSetId": "PERMISSION-SET-Ablxc5__qEaIYmWGyMeqlf",   "principalId": "singleid.test001",   "principalType": "USER",   "targetId": "PROJECT-ka2tfhLHsweVwm4BrR1rae",   "targetType": "PROJECT"   "status": "SUCCESS",   "createdDate": "2024-04-03T01:58:46.538Z",   "failureReason": "" }
    Table. Sample

    Error Code

    HTTP Response CodeError CodeError MessageAction Required
    400N/AN/AuserName verification required
    Table. Error Code

    API Specification - OTP Send(Portal Common)

    ModuleAPIURIMethodDescription
    Portal CommonOTP Sendhttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/common-api/open/v1.1/asis/otp/sendPOSTGenerate OTP based on authentication type (email, sms, msg)
    Table. OTP Send (Portal Common)

    Request Parameters

    PropertiesAttributeMandatoryParameter TypeData TypeSample DataNote
    localelocaleYbodyStringko
    Authentication typetypeYbodyStringemail, sms, msg
    userNameuserNameYbodyStringgildong.hong
    Table. Request Parameters

    Response Parameters

    PropertiesAttributeData TypeSample DataNote
    otpStringotpStringString0000000c5bb286c166530ac928d0bdf1f0894ed3a6d891eb3ab7ec89fc9faef7817b9f2f02f8c89ae91558cdc9afec94d6bede93a91d9825f4fe14dc2a282f6456d09f823d194570bc91b353830826e69d5f818172c12dbdb7b524
    Table. Response Parameters

    Sample

    RequestResponse
    ccurl -X POST "https://localhost:7443/open/v1.1/asis/otp/send" -H "accept: */*" -H "Content-Type: application/json" -d "{\"locale\":\"ko\",\"type\":\"email\",\"userName\":\"gildong.hong\"}"{   "otpString": 0000000c5bb286c166530ac928d0bdf1f0894ed3a6d891eb3ab7ec89fc9faef7817b9f2f02f8c89ae91558cdc9afec94d6bede93a91d9825f4fe14dc2a282f6456d09f823d194570bc91b353830826e69d5f818172c12dbdb7b524}
    Table. Sample

    Error Code

    Http Response CodeError CodeError MessageAction Plan
    404N/AN/AWhen the user does not exist
    429N/AN/ADuplicate call within 60 seconds
    500N/AN/AServer error, check the error message and contact the administrator
    Table. Error Code

    API Specification - OTP Validation(Portal Common)

    ModuleAPIURIMethodDescription
    Portal CommonOTP Validationhttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/common-api/open/v1.1/asis/otp/validatePOSTValidate the OTP.
    Table. OTP Validation(Portal Common)

    Request Parameter

    PropertiesAttributeMandatoryParameter TypeData TypeSample DataNote
    userNameuserNameYBodyStringgildong.hong
    otp(6 digits)otpYBodyString121215
    checkValuecheckValueYBodyString0000000c5bb286c166530ac928d0bdf1f0894ed3a6d891eb3ab7ec89fc9faef7817b9f2f02f8c89ae91558cdc9afec94d6bede93a91d9825f4fe14dc2a282f6456d09f823d194570bc91b353830826e69d5f818172c12dbdb7b524The otpString value received in the response from sendOtp
    Authentication typetypeYBodyStringemailemail, sms, msg
    Table. Request Parameters

    Response Parameter

    PropertiesAttributeData TypeSample DataNote
    ResultresultStringSUCCESS
    Table. Response Parameters

    Sample

    RequestResponse
    curl -X POST “https://localhost:7443/open/v1.1/asis/otp/validate” -H “accept: /” -H “Content-Type: application/json” -d “{"checkValue":"0000000c5bb286c166530ac928d0bdf1f0894ed3a6d891eb3ab7ec89fc9faef7817b9f2f02f8c89ae91558cdc9afec94d6bede93a91d9825f4fe14dc2a282f6456d09f823d194570bc91b353830826e69d5f818172c12dbdb7b524","otp":"791462","type":"email","userName":"gildong.hong"}”{ “result”: “success” }
    Table. Sample

    Error Code

    Http Response CodeError CodeError MessageAction Plan
    400N/AN/AWhen the OTP is entered incorrectly
    404N/AN/AWhen the user does not exist
    410N/AN/AWhen the OTP expires
    429N/AN/AWhen API failure calls exceed 10 times
    500N/AN/AServer error, check the error message and contact the administrator
    Table. Error Code

    API Specification - MFA Consumer Reques(Portal Common)

    ModuleAPIURIMethodDescription
    Portal CommonMFA Consumer Requesthttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/requestGETRequest MFA.
    Table. MFA Consumer Reques(Portal Common)

    Request Parameter

    PropertiesAttributeMandatoryParameter TypeData TypeSample DataNote
    JWT TokenjwtTokenRequestYqueryStringeyJ0eXAiOiJKV1QiLCJhbGciOiJIUzI1NiJ9.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.-FWTK4IJsu8AonfJTTq7_OA1qAh-9FU89iC1JZcRg_cToken original data sample
    { "sys":"test-system", "req":"761efd52-97d0-451f-9cf9-cf86740e7ca3", "uid":"gildong.hong", "rtn":"https://test.com/mfa/response","email":"gildong.hong@samsung.com","mobile":"+82-1012345678", "nbf": 1698232068, "exp": 1698239268, "iat": 1698232068, "displayUid": "gildong.hong@samsung.com" }
    Table. Request Parameters

    Response

    Redirects to the MFA authentication page. By default, the response token is transmitted using POST, but to transmit it using GET (query), add the following parameter to the request token.

    • returnMethod: get

    Sample

    RequestResponse
    curl -X GET "https://stg2-cloud.singleid.samsung.net/test-tenant/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/request?jwtTokenRequest=eyJhbGciOiJIUzI1NiJ9.eyJzeXMiOiJ0ZXN0LXN5c3RlbSIsInJlcSI6Ijc2MWVmZDUyLTk3ZDAtNDUxZi05Y2Y5LWNmODY3NDBlN2NhMyIsInVpZCI6Imppbm9uZS5raW0iLCJydG4iOiJodHRwczovL3Rlc3QuY29tL21mYS9yZXNwb25zZSIsIm5iZiI6MTY5ODIzMjA2OCwiZXhwIjoxNjk4MjM5MjY4LCJpYXQiOjE2OTgyMzIwNjh9.cDgKMHIINaHhBiyAd_OIlVvQwmUs0QaXH_RfJ8B_KdY"Page navigation
    Table. Sample

    Error Code

    Http Response CodeError CodeError MessageAction Plan
    400N/AN/ACheck token data.
    Table. Error Code

    API Specification - MFA Consumer Reques(Portal Common)

    ModuleAPIURIMethodDescription
    Portal CommonMFA Consumer Requesthttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/requestPOSTRequest MFA.
    Table. MFA Consumer Reques(Portal Common)

    Request Parameter

    PropertiesAttributeMandatoryParameter TypeData TypeSample DataNote
    JWT TokenjwtTokenRequestYqueryStringeyJ0eXAiOiJKV1QiLCJhbGciOiJIUzI1NiJ9.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.-FWTK4IJsu8AonfJTTq7_OA1qAh-9FU89iC1JZcRg_cToken original data sample
    { "sys":"test-system", "req":"761efd52-97d0-451f-9cf9-cf86740e7ca3", "uid":"gildong.hong", "rtn":"https://test.com/mfa/response","email":"gildong.hong@samsung.com","mobile":"+82-1012345678", "nbf": 1698232068, "exp": 1698239268, "iat": 1698232068, "displayUid": "gildong.hong@samsung.com" }
    MFA Consumer Home move statusregisterFlagYqueryBooleantrueDetermines whether to navigate to the MFA Consumer Home. If true, it navigates to the MFA Consumer Home.
    Table. Request Parameters

    Response

    • When registerFlag = true: Redirect to MFA Consumer Home.
    • When registerFlag = false: Redirect to the MFA authentication page.

    Sample

    RequestResponse
    curl -X POST "https://stg2-cloud.singleid.samsung.net/test-tenant/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/request?jwtTokenRequest=eyJhbGciOiJIUzI1NiJ9.eyJzeXMiOiJ0ZXN0LXN5c2t5bSIsInJlcSI6Ijc2MWVmZDUyLTk3ZDAtNDUxZi05Y2Y5LWNmODY3NDBlN2NhMyIsInVpZCI6Imppbm9uZS5raW0iLCJydG4iOiJodHRwczovL3Rlc3QuY29tL21mYS9yZXNwb25zZSIsIm5iZiI6MTY5ODIzMjA2OCwiZXhwIjoxNjk4MjM5MjY4LCJpYXQiOjE2OTgyMzIwNjh9.cDgKMHIINaHhBiyAd_OIlVvQwmUs0QaXH_RfJ8B_KdY&registerFlag=true"Page navigation
    Table. Sample

    Error Code

    Http Response CodeError CodeError MessageAction Plan
    400N/AN/AChecking token data.
    Table. Error Code

    API Specification - Send Email about Anomaly Detection(Tenant Admin Portal)

    ModuleAPIURIMethodDescription
    Tenant Admin PortalSend Email about Anomaly Detectionhttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/admin-api/open/v1.1/emails/anomalyDetectionPOSTAn email is sent when a user is detected engaging in abnormal authentication behavior.
    Table. Send Email about Anomaly Detection (Tenant Admin Portal)

    Request Parameter

    PropertiesAttributeMandatoryParameter TypeData TypeSample DataNote
    User IPaccessIPYBodyString10.0.0.0
    Registration timedetectionTimeYBodyString2023-09-10 23:01:01
    emailemailYBodyStringgildong.hong@samsung.com
    User environmentenvironmentYBodyStringPC / Window / Chrome
    LanguagelanguageYBodyStringko
    Network environment (internal/external)locationYBodyStringInternal
    Detection rule numberruleYBodyStringP001
    User accountusernameYBodyStringgildong.hong
    Authentication unique valueenvGuidYBodyStringd8b09752-405a-4d52-8605-bff9aa3f4741
    Table. Request Parameters

    Response Parameter

    PropertiesData TypeSample DataNote
    Resultbooleantruetrue when mail sending succeeds / false when it fails
    Table. Response Parameters

    Sample

    RequestResponse
    curl -X POST "https://stg1-cloud.singleid.samsung.net:443/test-tenant/admin-api/open/v1.1/emails/anomalyDetection" -H "accept: application/json" -H "Content-Type: application/json" -d "{\"accessIP\":\"10.0.0.0\",\"detectionTime\":\"2023-09-10 23:01:01\",\"email\":\"gildong.hong@samsung.com\",\"environment\":\"PC / Window / Chrome\",\"language\":\"ko\",\"location\":\"Internal\",\"rule\":\"P001\",\"username\":\"gildong.hong\",\"envGuid\":\"d8b09752-405a-4d52-8605-bff9aa3f4741\"}"true
    Table. Sample

    Error code

    Http Response CodeError CodeError MessageAction Plan
    400N/AN/ABad Request
    403N/AN/AForbidden
    500N/AN/AInternal Server Error
    Table. Error Code

    API Specification - Send Email about New Sign-in Environment(Tenant Admin Portal)

    ModuleAPIURIMethodDescription
    Tenant Admin PortalSend Email about New Sign-in Environmenthttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/admin-api/open/v1.1/emails/newSignInEnvironmentPOSTWhen a user logs in to a new environment, a notification is sent to the user and an email is dispatched to confirm the environment registration.
    Table. Send Email about New Sign-in Environment (Tenant Admin Portal)

    Request Parameter

    PropertiesAttributeMandatoryParameter TypeData TypeSample DataNote
    User IPaccessIPYBodyString10.0.0.0
    Registration timedetectionTimeYBodyString2023-09-10 23:01:01
    emailemailYBodyStringgildong.hong@samsung.com
    User environmentenvironmentYBodyStringPC / Window / Chrome
    languagelanguageYBodyStringko
    Network environment (internal/external)locationYBodyStringInternal
    Detection rule numberruleYBodyStringP001
    User accountusernameYBodyStringgildong.hong
    Authentication unique valueenvGuidYBodyStringd8b09752-405a-4d52-8605-bff9aa3f4741
    Table. Request Parameters

    Response Parameter

    PropertiesData TypeSample DataNote
    Resultbooleantruetrue when mail sending succeeds / false when it fails
    Table. Response Parameters

    Sample

    RequestResponse
    curl -X POST “https://stg1-cloud.singleid.samsung.net:443/test-tenant/admin-api/open/v1.1/emails/anomalyDetection" -H “accept: application/json” -H “Content-Type: application/json” -d “{"accessIP":"10.0.0.0","detectionTime":"2023-09-10 23:01:01","email":"gildong.hong@samsung.com","environment":"PC / Window / Chrome","language":"ko","location":"Internal","rule":"P001","username":"gildong.hong","envGuid":"d8b09752-405a-4d52-8605-bff9aa3f4741"}”true
    Table. Sample

    Error Code

    Http Response CodeError CodeError MessageAction plan
    400N/AN/ABad Request
    403N/AN/AForbidden
    500N/AN/AInternal Server Error
    Table. Error Code

    API Specification - Get User(User Portal)

    ModuleAPIURIMethodDescription
    User PortalGet Userhttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/user-api/open/v1.1/users/{username}GETRetrieves the user’s name, email, preferred language, and timezone data.
    Table. Get User(User Portal)

    Request Parameter

    PropertiesAttributeMandatoryParameter TypeData TypeSample DataNote
    User IDusernameYPathStringgildong.hong
    Table. Request Parameters

    Response Parameter

    PropertiesAttributeData TypeSample DataNote
    User IDusernameStringgildong.hong
    EmailemailStringgildong.hong@stage.samsung.com
    NameformattedNameStringDongho Kim
    NamegivenNameStringDongho
    SurnamefamilyNameStringKim
    English Full NameenFormattedNameStringDongho Kim
    English nameenGivenNameStringDongho
    English surnameenFamilyNameStringKim
    Preferred languagepreferredLanguageStringko1) en : English 2) ko : Korean
    Time zonetimeZoneStringAsia/Seoul
    Table. Response Parameters

    Sample

    RequestResponse
    curl -X GET "https://stg2-cloud.singleid.samsung.net/test-tenant/user-api/open/v1.1/users/gildong.hong" -H "accept: application/json" -H "Authorization: Bearer {JWT_TOKEN}"{ “username”: “gildong.hong”, “email”: “gildong.hong@stage.samsung.com”, “formattedName”: “Kim Dongho”, “givenName”: “Dongho”, “familyName”: “Kim”, “enFormattedName”: “Dongho Kim”, “enGivenName”: “Dongho”, “enFamilyName”: “Kim”, “preferredLanguage”: “ko”, “timeZone”: “Asia/Seoul” }
    Table. Sample

    Error Code

    Http Response CodeError CodeError MessageAction Plan
    401N/AN/AWe need to verify whether the JWT Token is valid.
    Table. Error Code

    API Specification - Get User Profile Image(User Portal)

    ModuleAPIURIMethodDescription
    User PortalGet User Profile Imagehttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/user-api/open/v1.1/users/image/{username}GETRetrieves the user’s profile image data.
    Table. Get User Profile Image(User Portal)

    Request Parameter

    PropertiesAttributeMandatoryParameter TypeData TypeSample DataNote
    User IDusernameYPathStringgildong. hong
    Table. Request Parameters

    Response Parameter

    PropertiesAttributeData TypeSample DataNote
    usernameusernameStringnull
    2) File URL : ![image]({URL})–>
    Table. Response Parameters

    Sample

    RequestResponse
    curl -X GET "https://stg2-cloud.singleid.samsung.net:443/test-tenant/user-api/open/v1.1/users/image/gildong.hong" -H "accept: application/json" -H "Authorization: Bearer {JWT_TOKEN}"File data { "username": null, "image": "![default-profile.png](data:image/png;base64,iVBORw0KGgoAAAANSUhEUgAAAEAAAABACAMAAACdt4HsAAAAM1BMVEUyMjIxMTEyMjIrKysyMjIwMDANDQ1HcEAAAABJRU5ErkJggg==)" } File URL `{ “username”: “gildong.hong”, “image”: “
    image
    ” }
    Table. Sample

    Error Code

    Http Response CodeError CodeError MessageAction Plan
    401N/AN/AWe need to verify whether the JWT Token is valid.
    Table. Error Code

    API Specification - Create account assignment list(User Portal)

    ModuleAPIURIMethodDescription
    User PortalCreate account assignment listhttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/user-api/1.0/scp-auth/createPOSTCreate SCP permissions for the user.
    Table. Create account assignment list (User Portal)

    Request Parameter

    PropertiesAttributeMandatoryParameter TypeData TypeSample DataNote
    instance idinstanceIdYJSONStringSCP provision
    permission set idpermissionSetIdYJSONStringPERMISSION-SET-Ablxc5__qEaIYmWGyMeqlfSCP provision
    principal idprincipalIdYJSONStringgildong.honguser’s username
    principal typeprincipalTypeYJSONStringUSEROnly the current USER is allowed
    target idtargetIdYJSONString“PROJECT-ka2tfhLHsweVwm4BrR1rae”PROJECT ID, SCP provided
    target typetargetTypeYJSONStringPROJECTOnly the current PROJECT functions
    Table. Request Parameters

    Response Parameter

    PropertiesAttributeData TypeSample DataNote
    instance idinstanceIdJSONReturn stored value
    permission set idpermissionSetIdJSONPERMISSION-SET-Ablxc5__qEaIYmWGyMeqlfsaved value
    principal idprincipalIdJSONgildong.hongsaved value
    principal typeprincipalTypeJSONUSERReturn stored value
    target idtargetIdJSON“PROJECT-ka2tfhLHsweVwm4BrR1rae”Return stored value
    target typetargetTypeJSONPROJECTReturn stored value
    statusstatusJSON“SUCCESS”Success or failure
    failure reasonfailureReasonJSONReason for failure
    created datecreatedDateJSONCreation Date/Time
    Table. Response Parameters

    Sample

    RequestResponse
    curl -X POST "https://stg-scloud.singleid.samsung.net:443/stg4/user-api/1.0/scp-auth/create" -H "accept: application/json"-H "apiKey: {apiKey}" INPUT JSON{     "instanceId": "instnace-01",     "permissionSetId":   "PERMISSION-SET-Ablxc5__qEaIYmWGyMeqlf",     "principalId": "singleid.test001",     "principalType": "USER",     "targetId": "PROJECT-ka2tfhLHsweVwm4BrR1rae",     "targetType": "PROJECT"   }{   "instanceId": "instnace-01",   "permissionSetId": "PERMISSION-SET-Ablxc5__qEaIYmWGyMeqlf",   "principalId": "singleid.test001",   "principalType": "USER",   "targetId": "PROJECT-ka2tfhLHsweVwm4BrR1rae",   "targetType": "PROJECT"   "status": "SUCCESS",   "createdDate": "2024-04-03T01:58:46.538Z",   "failureReason": "" }
    Table. Sample

    API Specification - Delete account assignment list(User Portal)

    ModuleAPIURIMethodDescription
    User PortalDelete account assignment listhttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/user-api/1.0/scp-auth/create](https://{domain}/{tenant-name}/user-api/1.0/scp-auth/delete)POSTDelete the SCP permission for the user.
    Table. Delete account assignment list (User Portal)

    Request Parameter

    PropertiesAttributeMandatoryParameter TypeData TypeSample DataNote
    instance idinstanceIdYJSONStringSCP provision
    permission set idpermissionSetIdYJSONStringPERMISSION-SET-Ablxc5__qEaIYmWGyMeqlfSCP provision
    principal idprincipalIdYJSONStringgildong.honguser’s username
    principal typeprincipalTypeYJSONStringUSEROnly the current USER is allowed.
    target idtargetIdYJSONString“PROJECT-ka2tfhLHsweVwm4BrR1rae”PROJECT ID, SCP provided
    target typetargetTypeYJSONStringPROJECTOnly the current PROJECT functions
    Table. Request Parameters

    Response Parameter

    PropertiesAttributeData TypeSample DataNote
    instance idinstanceIdJSONReturn deleted value
    permission set idpermissionSetIdJSONPERMISSION-SET-Ablxc5__qEaIYmWGyMeqlfReturn deleted value
    principal idprincipalIdJSONgildong.hongReturn deleted value
    principal typeprincipalTypeJSONUSERReturn deleted value
    target idtargetIdJSON“PROJECT-ka2tfhLHsweVwm4BrR1rae”Return deleted value
    target typetargetTypeJSONPROJECTReturn deleted value
    statusstatusJSON“SUCCESS”Success or failure
    failure reasonfailureReasonJSONReason for failure
    created datecreatedDateJSONDeletion time
    Table. Response Parameters

    Sample

    RequestResponse
    curl -X GET "https://stg1-cloud.singleid.samsung.net/test-tenant/common-api/open/v1.1/asis/test-tenant/user/mfa/token/authentication?userName=mkdir.kim&protocol=uma-uaf&sessionDataKey=sessionDataKey111&redirectUrl=redirectUrl1111&errorRedirectUrl=errorRedirectUrl1111&params=params111&language=ko"{    "result": "SUCCESS",    "value": {        "token": "eyJpc3MiOiJodHRwczovL3N0ZzItY2xvdWQuaWFtLnNhbXN1bmcubmV0Iiwic3ViIjoibWtkaXIua2ltIiwiYXVkIjoiaHR0cHM6Ly9zdGcyLWNsb3VkLmlhbS5zYW1zdW5nLm5ldCIsImV4cCI6MTY5ODEyOTM2OSwiaWF0IjoxNjk4MTI5MTg5LCJqdGkiOiJkNWZmZGE5Ny1mMzZkLTRjZDktYWJmZi1mMzY4ZTkxYWVkNTUiLCJhbXIiOltdLCJ6b25laW5mbyI6IkFzaWEvU2VvdWwiLCJsb2NhbGUiOiJlbl9VUyIsInByb3RvY29sIjoidW1hLXVhZiIsInJlZGlyZWN0X3VybCI6InJlZGlyZWN0VXJsMSIsImVycm9yX3JlZGlyZWN0X3VybCI6ImVycm9yUmVkaXJlY3RVcmwxIiwicGFyYW1zIjoicGFyYW1zMSIsInVzZXJJZCI6Im1rZGlyLmtpbSJ9:MEUCIHqWV_UcgKHsMlDI7Ks31fw1QPpCYnKorMpnr2L653LwAiEAz30ShMmACEi6H-IuF1YMV2bKT1WIFmAdJ6OCsmEzscA",        "serviceUri": "/ua/MPHTOCHW5I/de6f67d0-8bec-46ac-bf53-16ef00eb2066/dgauth/mfa",        "appId": null    },    "message": "succeeded to get nexsign token.",    "statusCode": null,    "statusCodeValue": "0",    "data": null}
    Table. Sample

    Error Code

    Http Response CodeError CodeError MessageAction Plan
    400N/AN/AYou need to verify the userName.
    Table. Error Code

    API Specification - Get account assignment list(User Portal)

    ModuleAPIURIMethodDescription
    User PortalGet account assignment listhttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/user-api/1.0/scp-auth/listPOSTRetrieves the SCP permissions for a user.
    Table. Get account assignment list(User Portal)

    Request Parameter

    No.PropertiesAttributeMandatoryParameter TypeData TypeSample DataNote
    1principal typeprincipalTypeYqueryStringUSEROnly the current USER is allowed
    2principal idprincipalIdYqueryStringgildong.hongusername of the user to query
    Table. Request Parameters

    Response Parameter

    PropertiesAttributeData TypeSample DataNote
    instance idinstanceIdJSON
    permission set idpermissionSetIdJSONPERMISSION-SET-Ablxc5__qEaIYmWGyMeqlf
    principal idprincipalIdJSONgildong.hong
    principal typeprincipalTypeJSONUSER
    target idtargetIdJSON“PROJECT-ka2tfhLHsweVwm4BrR1rae”
    target typetargetTypeJSONPROJECT
    Table. Response Parameters

    Sample

    RequestResponse
    curl -X GET "https://stg-scloud.singleid.samsung.net:443/stg4/user-api/1.0/scp-auth/list?principalType=USER&principalId=singleid.test001" -H "accept: application/json" -H "apiKey: {apiKey}"[ { "instanceId": "instnace-01", "permissionSetId": "PERMISSION-SET-Ablxc5__qEaIYmWGyMeqlf", "principalId": "singleid.test001", "principalType": "USER", "targetId": "PROJECT-ka2tfhLHsweVwm4BrR1rae", "targetType": "PROJECT" }, { "instanceId": "instnace-01", "permissionSetId": "PERMISSION-SET-Ablxc5__qEaIYmWGyMe121", "principalId": "singleid.test001", "principalType": "USER", "targetId": "PROJECT-ka2tfhLHsweVwm4BrR1rae", "targetType": "PROJECT" } ]
    Table. Sample

    Error Code

    Http Response CodeError CodeError MessageAction Plan
    401N/AN/AIt is necessary to verify that the API key is valid.
    Table. Error Code

    API Specification - Search User(User Portal)

    ModuleAPIURIMethodDescription
    User PortalSearch Userhttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/user-api/1.0/scp-user/listPOSTSearch for the SCP target user.
    Table. Search User (User Portal)

    Request Parameter

    PropertiesAttributeMandatoryParameter TypeData TypeSample DataNote
    pagepageNqueryInteger0Page to fetch
    sizesizeNqueryInteger10Page size
    usernameusernameNqueryStringgildong.hongUser ID to query
    group namegroupNameNqueryStringADGroupGroup to query
    create Date(from)creationDateGeNqueryDateTime“2024-04-03T07:49:23.845Z”
    create Date(to)creationDateLeNqueryDateTime“2024-04-03T07:49:23.845Z”
    last change date(from)lastChangeDateGeNqueryDateTime“2024-04-03T07:49:23.845Z”
    last change date(to)lastChangeDateLeNqueryDateTime“2024-04-03T07:49:23.845Z”
    Table. Request Parameters

    Response Parameter

    PropertiesAttributeData TypeSample DataNote
    keykeyString“01890501-74fa-7785-91e0-67bd71217a2e”
    usernameusernameStringgildong.hong
    administratoradministratorBooleanfalse
    formatted nameformattedNameStringGil-dong Hong
    formatted Name(en)enFormattedNameString“gildong hong”
    emailemailStringgildong.hong@samsung.com
    mobilemobileString+02-01011112222
    preferred languagepreferredLanguageStringko
    time zonetimeZoneString“Asia/Seoul”
    managed bymanagedByStringSINGLEID
    creatorcreatorString“admin001”
    creation datecreationDateDateTime“2024-04-03T07:49:23.845Z”
    last modifierlastModifierString“admin001”
    last change datelastChangeDateDateTime“2024-04-03T07:49:23.845Z”
    Table. Response Parameters

    Sample

    RequestResponse
    curl -X POST "https://stg-scloud.singleid.samsung.net:443/stg4/user-api/1.0/scp-user/list" -H "accept: application/json" -H "apiKey: {apiKey}"[ { “key”: “01890501-74fa-7785-91e0-67bd71217a2e”, “administrator”: false, “username”: “gildong.hong”, “enFormattedName”: “gildong hong”, “formattedName”: “Gildong Hong”, “email”: “gildong.hong@samsung.com”, “mobile”: “+02-01011112222”, “preferredLanguage”: “ko”, “timeZone”: “Asia/Seoul”, “managedBy”: “SINGLEID”, “creator”: “admin001”, “creationDate”: “2024-04-03T07:49:23.845Z”, “lastModifier”: “admin001”, “lastChangeDate”: “2024-04-03T07:49:23.845Z” }, { “key”: “01890501-74fa-7785-91e0-67bd71217a2e”, “administrator”: false, “username”: “gildong.hong”, “enFormattedName”: “gildong hong”, “formattedName”: “Gildong Hong”, “email”: “gildong.hong@samsung.com”, “mobile”: “+02-01011112222”, “preferredLanguage”: “ko”, “timeZone”: “Asia/Seoul”, “managedBy”: “SINGLEID”, “creator”: “admin001”, “creationDate”: “2024-04-03T07:49:23.845Z”, “lastModifier”: “admin001”, “lastChangeDate”: “2024-04-03T07:49:23.845Z” } ]
    Table. Sample

    Error Code

    Http Response CodeError CodeError MessageAction Plan
    401N/AN/AIt is necessary to verify that the API key is valid.
    Table. Error Code

    API Specification - MFA Consumer Request(Portal Common)

    ModuleAPIURIMethodDescription
    Portal CommonMFA Consumer Requesthttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/request/mfaPOSTRequest MFA.
    Table. MFA Consumer Request(Portal Common)

    Request Parameter

    No.PropertiesAttributeMandatoryParameter TypeData TypeSample DataNote
    1usernameusernameYBodyStringmkdir.kim
    2Authentication typetypeNBodyStringemailOne of email, sms, msg, uaApp, uaMOTP. If unspecified, follow the default setting or the user’s preferred method.
    3serviceProviderIdserviceProviderIdYBodyStringd8b09752-405a-4d52-8605-bff9aa3f4741UUID. Device-specific ID generated after registration in the SingleID Admin Portal.
    Table. Request Parameters

    Response Parameter

    PropertiesAttributeData TypeSample DataNote
    requestIdrequestIdString01890501-74fa-7785-91e0-67bd71217a2eUUID. Used as a request parameter during MFA verification.
    Authentication typetypeStringsmsemail, sms, msg, uaApp, or uaMOTP. The verification logic may vary depending on the MFA type.
    otpotpString123456A 6-digit or 8-digit number. Issued only when the type is uaMOTP (6 digits) or uaApp (8 digits).
    Table. Response Parameters

    Sample

    RequestResponse
    curl -X POST "https://stg1-cloud.singleid.samsung.net:443/test/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/request/mfa" -H "accept: application/json" -H "Content-Type: application/json" -d "{\"username\":\"mkdir.kim\",\"type\":\"sms\",\"serviceProviderId\":\"dceef541-1f22-479d-96ac-c402ab0789e9\"}{ “otp”: “123456”, “requestId”: “d8b09752-405a-4d52-8605-bff9aa3f4741”, “serviceProviderId”: “”, “type”: “sms”, “username”: "" }
    Table. Sample

    Error Codes and Responses

    Http Response CodeError CodeError MessageAction Plan
    400N/Acommon.error.requiredValueA required value is missing. Please check.
    400N/Auser.error.notFoundUser not found. Please verify the user ID.
    400N/AserviceProvider.error.notFoundService provider not found. Please contact the administrator.
    400N/Aauthenticator.error.notFoundAuthentication method not found. Please contact the administrator.
    400N/Acommon.error.disallowedValueInvalid type. Please contact the administrator.
    400N/Auser.error.locked + remainYour account is locked. Please try again after {remain} minutes.
    400N/Aotp.error.tooManyAttemptsGo to the security warning screen (your account has been locked due to multiple authentication failures)
    Table. Error Code

    API Specification - MFA Consumer Verification(Portal Common)

    ModuleAPIURIMethodDescription
    Portal CommonMFA Consumer Verificationhttps://{domain}/{tenant-name}/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/verification/mfaPOSTVerifying MFA.
    Table. MFA Consumer Verification(Portal Common)

    Request Parameter

    PropertiesAttributeMandatoryParameter TypeData TypeSample DataNote
    requestIdrequestIdYBodyStringd8b09752-405a-4d52-8605-bff9aa3f4741UUID
    otpotpNBodyString1234566-digit number / not required for uaApp, uaMOTP
    Table. Request Parameters

    Response Parameter

    Http Status Codestatus
    200Authentication complete
    202Authentication pending (occurs only when type is uaMOTP or uaApp. Periodically poll and verify the result until it is delivered with 200)
    OtherError
    Table. Response Parameters

    Sample

    RequestResponse
    curl -X POST "https://stg1-cloud.singleid.samsung.net:443/test/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/verification/mfa" -H "accept: application/json" -H "Content-Type: application/json" -d "{\"otp\":\"000000\",\"requestId\":\"095db652-877f-42e5-b87f-e404fb07048b\"}"{ “statusCode”: “ACCEPTED”, }
    Table. Sample

    Error Codes

    Http Response CodeError CodeError MessageAction Plan
    400N/Acommon.error.requiredValueA required value is missing. Please check.
    400N/Acommon.error.invalidRequestThe request could not be found. Please contact the administrator.
    400N/Arequest.error.invalidStatusThe request status is incorrect. Please contact the administrator.
    400N/Aotp.error.notMatchInvalid OTP. Please check the OTP.
    400N/Aotp.error.tooManyAttemptsGo to the security warning screen (your account has been locked due to multiple authentication failures)
    Table. Error Code

    5.2.1.6.1 - ADFS Adapter Guide

    ADFS Adapter Guide

    Microsoft ADFS (ActiveDirectory Federation Service) is a service that supports SAML/OAuth-based SSO (Single Sign-On) for web services based on AD accounts.

    In MS, for web services linked with SSO, MFA (multi-factor authentication) using a 3rd Party solution is supported, and the component that must be developed/installed for this is the ADFS Adapter.

    There are two primary methods for implementing an ADFS Adapter.

    • Server-to-Server Call method
    • WebClient method

    Among them, the WebClient method minimizes firewall openings between the MFA server ↔ AD(FS) 間 and, by leveraging the CX offered by the MFA Provider, allows for a lightweight ADFS adaptor.

    Reference
    The SingleID ADFS Adapter was developed using the WebClient approach.
    Caution
    In the diagram of this document, it was written assuming a setting that stores the nonce value in LDAP. The nonce value is used to verify MFA results, and it can be configured to be stored on the MFA server instead of LDAP. For detailed information, please refer to the manual regarding ADFS Adaptor configuration.

    Server-to-Server Call method

    Server-to-Server Call
    Figure. Server-to-Server Call method

    WebClient method

    WebClient
    Figure. WebClient method

    Internal operation

    Overall flow diagram of the Adapter internals

    Adapter overall internal flow diagram
    Figure. Adapter overall internal flow diagram

    Adapter first execution flowchart

    Adapter first execution flow diagram
    Figure. Adapter first execution flow diagram

    Flowchart after MFA execution (when MFA PASS)

    Flowchart after MFA execution (MFA PASS case)
    Figure. Flowchart after MFA execution (MFA PASS case)

    Flowchart after performing MFA (if MFA PASS not achieved)

    Flowchart after performing MFA (when MFA PASS is not achieved)
    Figure. Flowchart after performing MFA (when MFA PASS is not achieved)

    Scenario-specific behavior

    Scenario-specific actions
    Figure. Scenario-specific actions

    Case #1

    • This occurs when the time limit is exceeded on the passcode entry screen, resulting in a timeout.
    • When a timeout occurs, the “Resend Code” button becomes active, and you can press this button to retry the Passcode.

    Case #2

    • This is the case when an incorrect Passcode is entered.
    • You can attempt to enter the Passcode up to three times.

    Case #3

    • This is the case where the passcode is entered incorrectly three times.
    • You cannot enter the Passcode for 1 minute.

    Case #4

    • This is a normal MFA process.

    Case #5

    • This occurs when a new browser tab is added on the MFA selection screen without entering the Passcode, and the MFA selection is completed.
    • After that, successfully complete MFA on the first tab.
    • This is the case where a timeout occurs in a new tab later.

    Case #6

    • This occurs when a new browser tab is added on the MFA selection screen without entering the Passcode, and the MFA selection is completed.
    • After that, successfully complete MFA on the first tab.
    • This occurs when an incorrect Passcode is entered in a new tab later.

    Case #7

    • This occurs when a new browser tab is added on the MFA selection screen without entering the Passcode, and the MFA selection is completed.
    • After that, MFA succeeds on the first tab.
    • This is the case when a valid Passcode is entered thereafter.
    • Both the 1st tab and 2nd tab are waiting for passcode input; after authenticating the 1st, attempting authentication on the 2nd yields no response on the 2nd (page freezes)
    • 1st tab passcode waiting for input, 2nd tab MFA selection waiting state, after the 1st authentication, selecting the 2nd MFA type causes an error, AD displays an error message before the adapter operates

    Scenario-specific behavior

    Adapter installation

    Application method

    Pre-check

    Pre‑inspection

    LocationInspection itemsRemarks
    ADFS serverMFA server accessibility (internal network, TCP 80/443)
    • Quality environment: ops-sopenapi.iam.samsung.net(42.15.248.26)
    • Production environment: sopenapi.iam.samsung.net(42.15.248.28)
    If configured to store the nonce in LDAP, communication with the MFA server is unnecessary.
    .NET Framework 4.8 installation status
    User PCMFA server connectivity (Internet network, TCP 80/443)
    • Quality environment: ops-sopenapi.singleid.samsung.net
    • Production environment: sopenapi.singleid.samsung.net
    If connection fails, check the following three items
    ① Firewall check
    ② Proxy check
    ③ Website blocking check
    Table. Personal Information Input Items

    Adapter deployment

    Caution
    If the ADFS servers are configured as multiple instances, steps 1 through 4 of the seven steps below must be applied uniformly to all servers.
    1. Upload the adapter-related files to the ADFS server
    위치 : [drvie]:\ADFSadapter\
    
    ADFSadapter.dll : Adapter 파일
    ADFSadatper.ini : 환경 설정 파일
    replace_dll.ps1 : 이미 설치된 Adapter를 개선 버전으로 교체 시 사용하는 스크립트 파일
    restart_adfs.ps1 : AD FS 서비스 재시작 스크립트 파일
    Assembly_netstandard2.0 폴더 : Adapter 적용 전 사전 설치 dll 파일들
    
    1. Grant full permissions to the ADFS service account on the folder
    C:\ADFSadapter 폴더 우클릭 > 속성 > 보안 > ADFS 서비스 계정 추가 후 모든 권한 허용 선택
    ※ ADFS 서비스 계정은 services.msc 실행 > ADFS 서비스 실행 계정 "다음 사용자로 로그온" 으로 확인
    
    1. Add Registry
    Adapter 관련 이벤트를 Windows 이벤트 로그에 찍기 위한 Registry 생성
    
    HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\EventLog 아래에 키 및 값(2개) 생성
    - 생성 키 : MFA_Adapter
    - MFA_Adapter에 값 2개 생성
       . 이름 : AutoBackupLogFiles
       . 종류 : DWORD(32비트) 값(REG_DWORD)
       . 데이터 : 0
    
       . 이름 : MaxSize
       . 종류 : DWORD(32비트) 값(REG_DWORD)
       . 데이터 : 16진수 80000
    
    MFA_Adapter 키 아래에 키 및 값(1개) 생성
    - 생성 키 : AdapterDLL
    - AdapterDLL에 값 1개 생성
      . 이름 : EventMessageFile
      . 종류 : 확장 가능한 문자열 값(REG_EXPAND_SZ)
      . 데이터 : C:\Windows\Microsoft.NET\Framework64\v4.0.30319\EventLogMessages.dll
    
    1. Pre-install the DLL required for the Adapter The Assembly_netstandard2.0 folder in C:\ADFSadapter contains libraries that require pre‑installation; refer to the following for the installation process. Install the DLL into the global assembly cache on the ADFS server so that the assembly required when the ADFS Adapter runs can be loaded.
    **dll 설치**
    
    #사전 작업
    C:\ADFSadapter 폴더에 Assembly_netstandard2.0 폴더 압축을 풀어 복사해둔다.
    #관리자 권한으로 Powershell 실행 후 수행 위치 이동
    PS>cd C:\ADFSadapter
    
    #dll 설치
    PS>.\gacutil.exe /il .\Assembly_netstandard2.0\AssemblyList.txt
    #dll 확인
    PS>.\gacutil.exe /l
    
    guide
    Assembly_netstandard v2.0.zip file should be requested separately via email (singleid.scp@samsung.com).

    The required assembly files for installation have been stored in the Assembly_netstandard2.0 folder, and after copying these files to the server, installation can be performed offline. Assembly_netstandard2.0 folder: Microsoft.IdentityModel.Tokens v7.2, System.IdentityModel.Tokens.Jwt v7.2 DLL files for installing the assembly (including all dependency files)

    Installation DLL list

    Assembly nameInstalled versionPackage version
    Microsoft.Bcl.AsyncInterfaces1.0.0.01.0.0
    Microsoft.IdentityModel.Abstractions7.2.0.07.2.0
    Microsoft.IdentityModel.JsonWebTokens7.2.0.07.2.0
    Microsoft.IdentityModel.Logging7.2.0.07.2.0
    Microsoft.IdentityModel.Tokens7.2.0.07.2.0
    System.Buffers4.0.3.04.5.1
    System.IdentityModel.Tokens.Jwt7.2.0.07.2.0
    System.Memory4.0.1.14.5.3
    System.Numerics.Vectors4.1.4.04.5.0
    Microsoft.CSharp4.0.4.04.5.0
    System.Runtime.CompilerServices.Unsafe4.0.4.14.5.3
    System.Security.Cryptography.Cng4.3.0.05.0.0
    System.Text.Encodings.Web4.0.5.14.7.2
    System.Text.Json4.0.1.24.7.2
    System.Threading.Tasks.Extensions4.2.0.14.5.4
    Table. Installation DLL list

    Adapter Deployment

    The NuGet file was downloaded and installed; note that the version displayed for the NuGet package may differ from the version installed on the server. Based on .NET Framework 4.8, use the DLL with the .NET Standard 2.0 (supports .NET Framework 4.8) specification.

    Package download : NuGet Gallery | Microsoft.IdentityModel.Tokens 7.2.0

    1. Apply Adapter Run PowerShell in administrator mode and execute the following command
    #수행 위치 이동
    PS>cd C:\ADFSadapter
    
    #dll 등록
    PS>./gacutil.exe /if ADFSadapter.dll
    
    #dll 확인
    PS>./gacutil.exe /l ADFSadapter
     전역 어셈블리 캐시에 다음 어셈블리가 들어 있습니다.
      ADFSadapter, Version=1.2.1.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=0e0fe476002e81b3, processorArchitecture=MSIL
    #ADFS에 인증 공급자로 등록
    PS>$typename="ADFSadapter.AuthenticationAdapter, ADFSadapter, Version=1.2.1.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=0e0fe476002e81b3, processorArchitecture=MSIL"
    PS>Register-AdfsAuthenticationProvider -TypeName $typename -Name "ADFSadapter"
    #ADFS에 인증 공급자 확인
    PS>Get-AdfsAuthenticationProvider 
    AdminName                          : ADFS MFA Adapter
    AllowedForPrimaryExtranet          : False
    AllowedForPrimaryIntranet          : False
    AllowedForAdditionalAuthentication : True
    AuthenticationMethods              : {http://schemas.microsoft.com/ws/2012/12/authmethod/otp}
    Descriptions                       : {[1033, ADFS MFA Adapter], [1042, ADFS MFA Adapter]}
    DisplayNames                       : {[1033, ADFS MFA Adapter], [1042, ADFS MFA Adapter]}
    Name                               : ADFSadapter
    IdentityClaims                     : {http://schemas.xmlsoap.org/ws/2005/05/identity/claims/upn}
    IsCustom                           : True
    RequiresIdentity                   : True
    #ADFS 서비스 재시작
    PS>net stop adfssrv
    PS>net start adfssrv
    
    #수행 위치 이동
    PS>cd C:\ADFSadapter
    #dll 등록
    PS>./gacutil.exe /if ADFSadapter.dll
    #dll 확인
    PS>./gacutil.exe /l ADFSadapter
     전역 어셈블리 캐시에 다음 어셈블리가 들어 있습니다.
      ADFSadapter, Version=1.2.1.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=0e0fe476002e81b3, processorArchitecture=MSIL
    #ADFS 서비스 재시작
    PS>net stop adfssrv
    PS>net start adfssrv
    
    1. Configure multi-factor authentication methods for ADFS AD FS Management > Services > Authentication Methods > Multi-Factor Authentication Methods > Click Edit, then select the created mfa (ADFS MFA Adapter) and apply (multiple selection possible)

    2. Apply MFA policy to the trusted party trust AD FS Management > Relying Party Trust > Select the Relying Party Trust to apply > Edit Access Control Policy > ‘Allow all users and require MFA’ Select and apply

    Adapter Upgrade and Change

    This method is the adapter replacement procedure performed when upgrading or modifying an already registered ADFS MFA Adapter. When performing the replacement, executing this script alone completes the Adapter change and its application.

    #수행 위치 이동하여 변경된 Adapter.dll 파일 업로드
    PS>cd C:\ADFSadapter
    
    #Adapter 교체 수행
    
    PS>./replace_dll.ps1
    
    확인창 출력 시 예(Y) 혹은 모두 예(A) 클릭
     - 예(Y) 혹은 모두 예(A) 선택 : ADFS에서 기존 Adapter 제거 후 교체 작업 진행 (정상 절차)
     - 아니요(N) 혹은 모두 아니요(L) 선택 : Adapter 제거 안하고 다음 단계로 수행되어 오류 발생
     - 일시 중단(S) 선택: 해당 스크립트 중단
    
    Reference
    ※ Execute on both the primary server and the secondary server. Although an error occurs when registering with ADFS on the secondary server, the operation is required to install the DLL.

    Adapter configuration

    This is a description of the Adapter configuration file. Before applying the ADFS Adapter, you must first configure the environment.

    guide

    Adapter installation location changes

    Starting with adapter 1.2.0.6, you can install to drives other than the C drive.

    Existing: installed only in C:/ADFSadapter Change: Install at the root of the Z drive Example: C:/ADFSadapter , D:/ADFSadapter , E:/ADFSadapter , …… , Z:/ADFSadapter

    Caution: Install on only one drive; if installed on multiple drives, the system scans from C to Z and uses the first directory it finds.

    The following example assumes the adapter is installed in the C:\ADFSadapter directory.

    If you installed on a drive other than C, simply change the drive letter in the example below.

    Example: If installed in D:\ADFSadapter, the ini path → D:\ADFSadapter\ADFSadapter.ini

    File name and path

    • File name → ADFSadapter.ini
    • Full path → C:\ADFSadapter\ADFSadapter.ini
    • File encoding → be sure to save as UTF-8 (otherwise Korean characters will become garbled)

    Things to note

    When representing a value, you can use " and ‘, and you may include spaces on either side of =. Whitespace before and after the Value is trimmed The values below are all the same. Example 1) MAIN_TITLE=DWP MFA Adapter Example 2) MAIN_TITLE = DWP MFA Adapter Example 3) MAIN_TITLE = “DWP MFA Adapter” Example 4) MAIN_TITLE = " DWP MFA Adapter "

    Sections whose names end with -1033 or -1042 indicate a locale. At least 1033 must be present.

    locale number : 1033 (en-us), 1042 (ko) locale section : MFA-1033, MFA-1042, TXT-1033, TXT-1042, MSG-1033, MSG-1042

    Example of ini file structure

    # ADFS MFA Adapter 환경 설정
    # 설치위치 변경 사항
    #   - v1.2.0.6 이전 : C:\ADFSadapter\ADFSadapter.ini
    #   - v1.2.0.6 부터 : C 이외의 다른 드라이브에 설치할 수 있음 (adapter 리소스 설치한 위치와 동일)
    #     예시: C:\ADFSadapter\ADFSadapter.ini , D:\ADFSadapter\ADFSadapter.ini , E:\ADFSadapter\ADFSadapter.ini
    # 주의 : DLL 파일명은 ADFSadapter.dll 이며, 기존의 Nexsign 연계한 MFAadapter.dll과는 다름
    
    
    # 값을 표현할때 " 와 ' 를 사용할 수 있으며 = 좌우에 빈칸을 입력해도 됩니다
    # Value 의 앞뒤에 있는 공백은 Trim 처리 됩니다.
    # 아래의 Value는 모두 동일합니다.
    # 예1) MAIN_TITLE=ADFS MFA Adapter
    # 예2) MAIN_TITLE = ADFS MFA Adapter
    # 예3) MAIN_TITLE = "ADFS MFA Adapter"
    # 예4) MAIN_TITLE = "   ADFS MFA Adapter   "
    
    
    # 섹션 이름들 중에 뒷부분에 -1033, -1042 가 붙는 것들은 locale 을 의미합니다
    # 최소한 1033 은 반드시 있어야 합니다
    # locale number : 1033 (en-us), 1042 (ko)
    # locale section : MFA-1033, MFA-1042, TXT-1033, TXT-1042, MSG-1033, MSG-1042
    
    
    # LOG_LEVEL (Windows 이벤트 로그에 기록하는 기준)
    # 0 : Error
    # 1 : Error + Warning
    # 2 : Error + Warning + Information + Debug
    
    
    [MAIN]
    MAIN_MFA_TITLE="ADFS MFA Adapter"
    MAIN_CLAIM1=http://schemas.microsoft.com/ws/2008/06/identity/claims/authenticationmethod
    MAIN_CLAIM2=http://schemas.microsoft.com/ws/2012/12/authmethod/otp
    
    
    # MFA API 정보
    # URL 끝부분에 "/" 붙이지 말 것
    #MFA_API_URL="https://stg2-cloud.singleid.samsung.net/test/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/request"
    MFA_API_URL="https://stg1-cloud.singleid.samsung.net/test/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/request"
    CONSUMER_KEY="**************************************"
    SECRET_KEY="**************************************"
    
    
    # Donmain vs Consumer Key 리스트
    # 도메인별로 Consumer Key가 다른 경우에는 리스트로 나열 (이런 경우, 위의 CONSUMER_KEY 값을 비울 것)
    # Reqeust Token의 sys 값에 대입
    # 형태 : DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_##=domain;consumerKey
    # 예시: DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_01=aaa.com;**************************************
    #     DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_02=bbb.com;**************************************
    # (주의) CONSUMER_KEY 값과 리스트 값이 모두 있다면, CONSUMER_KEY 값만 사용함
    DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_01=aaa.com;**************************************
    DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_02=bbb.com;**************************************
    
    # Donmain vs Secret Key 리스트
    # 도메인별로 Secret Key가 다른 경우에는 리스트로 나열 (이런 경우, 위의 SECRET_KEY 값을 비울 것)
    # 형태 : DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_##=domain;secretKey
    # 예시: DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_01=aaa.com;**************************************
    #     DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_02=bbb.com;**************************************
    # (주의) SECRET_KEY 값과 리스트 값이 모두 있다면, SECRET_KEY 값만 사용함
    DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_01=aaa.com;**************************************
    DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_02=bbb.com;**************************************
    
    # LDAP Search 결과에 따른, MFA 진행 여부
    # 0 : LDAP Search를 하지 않음 (아래의 LDAP_SERVER, LDAP_USE_IDPW, ... 등의 정보 사용하지 않음. token에는 빈 값 대입)
    # 1 : LDAP Search를 시도하지만 실패해도 관계없음 (서버 실패, 정보 없음 등이 발생하여도 MFA 진행함. token에는 빈 값 대입)
    # 2 : LDAP Search가 성공 & 사용자 정보가 존재해야 함 (사용자 정보가 존재할 경우에만 진행함. 단, 결과 값이 빈 값이어도 진행함)
    USE_LDAP_SEARCH=1
    
    
    # LDAP 주소와 ID/PW
    # LDAP_SERVER는 domain, ipv4, ipv6 등의 3가지 모두 가능하며, 앞부분에 대문자 "LDAP://" 을 붙여야 함 (반드시 대문자)
    # 예시: LDAP://adpw5004.hw.dev , LDAP://70.2.180.218 , LDAP://fe80::644b:3c9f:c5ac:ce1c%10
    # ID/PW를 사용하려면 LDAP_USE_IDPW 값을 1, 사용하지 않으려면 LDAP_USE_IDPW 값을 0 으로 설정
    # SSL/TLS 사용하려면 LDAP_SSLTLS 값을 1, 사용하지 않으려면 LDAP_SSLTLS 값을 0 으로 설정 (단, LDAP_USE_IDPW=1 인 경우에만 해당)
    LDAP_SERVER="LDAP://adpw5004.hw.dev"
    LDAP_USE_IDPW=1
    LDAP_SSLTLS=1
    LDAP_ID="isadmin"
    LDAP_PW="sds*****"
    
    
    # DNS Lookup을 하여 LDAP 서버(LDAP_SERVER)의 IP 주소를 확인하고, IP 주소 기반으로 접속 여부
    # LDAP_SERVER 값이 IP(ipv4, ipv6)로 설정되어 있어도 DNS Lookup을 수행하며, IP 그대로 리턴됨
    # 만약, DNS Lookup을 실패하면, LDAP_SERVER 값 그대로 접속
    # 0 : LDAP_SERVER 값 그대로 서버에 접속 (DNS lookup 하지 않음)
    # 1 : DNS lookup으로 IP 주소를 확인하여 LDAP 서버에 접속 (DNS lookup 결과 리스트에서 첫번째 IP 사용)
    # 2 : DNS lookup으로 IP 주소를 확인하고, LDAP_WHITE_IP_## 리스트에서 가장 먼저 해당되는 IP를 사용 (리스트에 없으면, LDAP_SERVER 사용)
    # 3 : DNS lookup으로 IP 주소를 확인하고, LDAP_WHITE_IP_## 리스트에서 가장 먼저 해당되는 IP를 사용 (리스트에 없으면, LDAP 접속 안함)
    LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP=1
    
    
    # DNS Lookup 결과가 여러 개일때, 첫번째 IP 주소로 연결이 안되면 그 다음 IP 주소로 시도할지 여부
    # 예시: lookup 결과가 4개 : 1차 IP 연결 실패 -> 2차 IP 연결 시도 & 싪패 -> 3차 IP 연결 시도 & 싪패 -> 4차 IP 연결 시도
    LDAP_DNS_IF_FAIL_USE_NEXT=1
    
    
    # DNS Lookup 결과와 비교하는 접속 허용된 LDAP 서버 IP 리스트 (LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP = 2 or 3 인 경우에만 해당)
    # LDAP_WHITE_IP_## 형태이며, 01부터 99까지 순차적으로 기록
    # DNS Lookup 결과와 리스트를 순차적으로 비교
    # IPv4, IPv6 형태로 기록 (동일한 서버의 IPv4, IPv6가 있다면 리스트의 앞순위에 있는 IP가 적용됨)
    # DNS Lookup 결과 순서와 White IP 리스트 순서가 다르다면 -> White IP 리스트 순서를 따름
    LDAP_WHITE_IP_01="70.2.180.218"
    LDAP_WHITE_IP_02="fe80::644b:3c9f:c5ac:ce1c%10"
    
    
    # 사용자 정보를 암호화할지 여부 (예: mobile, email 등)
    # 대상 : USERINFO_## 리스트
    # 암호화 여부에 따라 API 서버에 전송하는 token의 claim 이름이 다름
    # 0 : 암호화 하지 않음 -> token의 claim 이름이 plainMobile, plainEmail
    # 1 : 암호화 -> token의 claim 이름이 mobile, email
    USERINFO_ENCRYPT=0
    
    
    # LDAP Search할 사용자 정보 attribute name과 JWT token에 사용할 claim name (2개 값을 구분하는 delimeter = ";")
    # 형태: USERINFO_## = attribute;encryptedClaim;plainClaim
    #   예시: LDAP에서 "mail" 속성을 읽어서, JWT에 "email" claim으로 사용된다면 -> "mail;email;plainEmail"
    # key 명칭은 "USERINFO_##" 형태로 하고, 시작은 USERINFO_01
    # key 갯수 : 0개 ~ 최대 99개 (0개인 경우, ini에 아무것도 적지 않으면 되며, USERINFO_00 이라고 적지 말 것)
    # 주의사항) USERINFO_##에서 ## 에 해당되는 숫자는 반드시 01부터 시작하며, 여러 개인 경우 번호가 끊어지지 않아야 함
    #           USERINFO_01, USERINFO_02, USERINFO_03 : OK (01, 02, 03 정보가 사용됨)
    #           USERINFO_01, USERINFO_02, USERINFO_05 : 02까지 읽고, 끊어진 번호 이후는 사용하지 않음 (01, 02 정보가 사용됨)
    USERINFO_01=mobile;mobile;plainMobile
    USERINFO_02=mail;email;plainEmail
    
    
    # MFA API 서버가 Callback 해줄때, 결과 Parameter에 사용되는 Key 이름
    # 예시: https://adpw5004.hw.dev/adfs/ls?client-request-id=xxxxxx&pullStatus=0&jwtTokenResponse=yyyyyy
    KEY_NAME_IN_RESPONSE="jwtTokenResponse"
    
    
    # JWT Token의 exp에 적용될 더하기 값
    # 형테 : 일시분초(dhms) 형태의 문자열 -> 1d=86400, 1h=3600, 1m=60 (dhms 가 전혀 없는 단순 숫자는 초로 판단함)
    # 예시1 : 1d02h38m27s -> 95907 초
    # 예시2 : 12345 -> 12345 초
    TOKEN_EXP_TIME=1d
    
    
    # API 호출할때 구성하는 token에 client claim을 추가할지 여부
    # client : SAML인 경우 issuer, OIDC인 경우 client-id
    # 0 : token에 client 포함시키지 않음
    # 1 : token에 client 포함
    TOKEN_CLAIM_CLIENT=0
    
    
    # MFA nonce(guid, requset-id) 검증 방법
    # 0 : 검증 안함
    # 1 : adapter가 생성한 guid를 LDAP에 저장/비교하는 방식 (adapter가 검증)
    #     -> 관련 설정 값 : CACHE_ATTRIBUTE, CACHE_DELIMETER, SKEW_SECONDS, CACHE_LIFE_TIME
    # 2 : API 서버가 생성한 requeset-id를 adapter가 받아서 호출 URL에 사용하는 방식 (API 서버가 검증)
    #     -> 관련 설정 값 : MFA_VERIFY_URL
    MFA_VERIFY_TYPE=2
    
    
    # MFA 결과검증 URL (서버 to 서버 통신) : URL 뒷부분에 API 서버로부터 받은 {request-id}를 덧붙여서 호출함
    # adapter는 리턴 200 (OK) 인지 확인하여 MFA 결과 처리
    # URL 끝부분에 "/" 붙이지 말 것
    MFA_VERIFY_URL="https://stg1-cloud.iam.samsung.net/test/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/request/status"
    
    
    # MFA 결과검증할때 사용할 보안 프로토콜
    # 선택 가능한 프로토콜 (대소문자 구분 없음) : TLS12, TLS13
    # (주의) SSL3, TLS, TLS11 은 사용하지 않음
    MFA_VERIFY_SECURE_PROTOCOL="TLS12"
    
    
    # 사용자의 req guid 값을 저장할 LDAP attribute의 이름
    # (주의) LDAP에 write 권한이 있어야 함
    CACHE_ATTRIBUTE="otherPager"
    
    
    # LDAP에 저장하는 req + 시간 정보를 조합할때 사용하는 delimeter -> "req;시간"
    CACHE_DELIMETER=";"
    
    
    # LDAP에 저장된 req의 시간과 JWT 수신시 시간의 차이 허용치 (초단위)
    # MFA 선택화면 누를 때가 아니라, AD 로그인 직후의 시간이므로 (MFA 선택화면 보일때 이미 시간이 저장되었음)
    # 사용자가 MFA 선택화면 누르고 Passcode 입력할 때까지의 시간이 아님
    # 따라서, tight 하게 시간을 설정하면 안되며, 1시간 정도가 적당?? (MFA 선택을 1시간 고민하는 사람이 있나?)
    SKEW_SECONDS=3600
    
    
    # LDAP에 저장된 req의 수명 -> 다음 access시 시간 확인해서 이전의 오래된 것들 삭제
    # 형태 : 일시분초(dhms) 형태의 문자열 -> 1d=86400, 1h=3600, 1m=60 (dhms 가 전혀 없는 단순 숫자는 초로 판단함)
    # 예시1 : 1d02h38m27s -> 95907 초
    # 예시2 : 12345 -> 12345 초
    CACHE_LIFE_TIME=1d
    
    
    # Adapter 기능을 ByPass 할 것인지 여부 (0=정상 사용, 283901=무력화, 그 외 값들=정상 사용)
    # MFA 기능 문제로 급하게 adapter 기능의 무력화가 필요한 비상 상황에서 사용
    # 평상시에는 절대로 수정하지 말 것 -> 평상시 값은 0
    # 주의 : 무력화하려면 반드시 정확한 값을 설정해야 함 (0 이외의 숫자가 해당되는 것이 아니며 정확한 숫자 필요함. noise 우려)
    BYPASS_ADAPTER=0
    
    
    [API]
    API_SYSTEMNAME=SingleID
    
    
    [MSG-1033]
    MSG_INTERNAL_ERROR="Internal error occurred. Contact administrator."
    
    
    [MSG-1042]
    MSG_INTERNAL_ERROR="Internal error occurred. Contact administrator."
    
    
    [MANAGE]
    LOG_LEVEL=2
    

    Configuration value description

    • Fixed value: means that the value displayed in the “Configured Value” column of the table below is used unchanged when installing on the ADFS server.
    • If you want to add languages other than English and Korean, you can add them for two sections. → MSG-1033, MSG-1042
    dssKeyConfiguration values (example)Fixed valueExplanation
    MAINMAIN_MFA_TITLEADFS MFA AdapterOHTML page title (no impact on MFA functionality)
    MAIN_CLAIM1http://schemas.microsoft.com/ws/2008/06/identity/claims/authenticationmethodOApply the left value exactly as is
    MAIN_CLAIM2http://schemas.microsoft.com/ws/2012/12/authmethod/otpOApply the left value exactly as is
    MFA_API_URLhttps://stg2-cloud.singleid.samsung.net/test/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/requestSince the SingleID MFA API URL
    can vary depending on the tenant, you need to verify the exact URL.
    CONSUMER_KEY4312a8b9-75c4-7897-89a7-89347f18943eConsumer Key issued by SingleID
    SECRET_KEYgQgkyLVO6FR8vJkLtlgBiupsRM/ilgrbEfoKWRnhALd=Secret Key issued by SingleID
    used for JWT Signautre verification
    External disclosure prohibited
    DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_014312a8b9-75c4-7897-89a7-89347f18943eDomain vs Consumer Key list
    If the Consumer Key differs per domain, list them (in this case, clear the CONSUMER_KEY value above)
    Format: DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_##=domain;consumerKey
    Example:
    DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_01=aaa.com;4312a8b9-75c4-7897-89a7-89347f18943e
    DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_02=bbb.com;96567780-2b12-23da-637c-9375a6502d5a
    (Note) If both CONSUMER_KEY and list values are present, use only the CONSUMER_KEY value.
    DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_0296567780-2b12-23da-637c-9375a6502d5a
    DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_##367c89d5-88f7-978a-9739-8ed21748f36b
    DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_01gQgkyLVO6FR8vJkLtlgBiupsRM/ilgrbEfoKWRnhALd=Domain vs Secret Key list
    If the Secret Key differs per domain, list them (in this case, clear the above SECRET_KEY value)
    Format: DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_##=domain;secretKey
    Example:
    DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_01=aaa.com;gQgkyLVO6FR8vJkLtlgBiupsRM/ilgrbEfoKWRnhALd=
    DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_02=bbb.com;kgkWRnLygQhsRgrLVbtKlO6FiLdABupEgoMR8v/ilfJ=
    (Note) If both SECRET_KEY value and list values are present, use only the SECRET_KEY value.
    DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_02kgkWRnLygQhsRgrLVbtKlO6FiLdABupEgoMR8v/ilfJ=
    DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_##dABupkRnLygQhsrLgWVRbt8vRgkLilLKlO1FioMgfJE=
    USE_LDAP_SEARCH0 or 1 or 2LDAP Search based MFA decision
    0 : Do not perform LDAP Search (do not use information such as LDAP_SERVER, LDAP_USE_IDPW, etc. Assign an empty value to the token)
    1 : Attempt LDAP Search but failure is acceptable (proceed with MFA even if server failure, missing information, etc. Assign an empty value to the token)
    2 : LDAP Search succeeds & user information must exist (proceed only if user information exists. However, proceed even if the result value is empty)
    LDAP_SERVERLDAP://adpw5004.hw.devLDAP address that can query AD user information
    All three types such as domain, ipv4, and ipv6 are supported, and you must prepend “LDAP://” to the beginning.
    LDAP_USE_IDPW0 or 1Whether to use id/pw when connecting to LDAP
    Since the adapter operates with system privileges, it is typical for LDAP connections to work without id/pw, though there are cases where this is not true
    If the system is configured to connect without id/pw and an AD connection error appears in the event log, it is necessary to configure it to connect using id/pw.
    Setting this value to 1 requires that LDAP_ID and LDAP_PW be set.
    LDAP_SSLTLS0 or 1Whether to use SSL/TLS when connecting to LDAP
    Set to use by default
    LDAP_IDLDAP connection IDLDAP connection ID (when LDAP_USE_IDPW=1)
    LDAP_PWLDAP connection pwLDAP connection password (when LDAP_USE_IDPW=1)
    LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP0 or 1 or 2 or 3Perform a DNS lookup to obtain the IP address of the LDAP server (LDAP_SERVER) and determine connection status based on the IP address


    0 : Connect to the server using the LDAP_SERVER value directly (no DNS lookup)


    1 : Perform a DNS lookup to obtain the IP address and connect to the LDAP server (use the first IP from the DNS lookup result list)


    2 : Perform a DNS lookup to obtain the IP address and use the first matching IP from the LDAP_WHITE_IP_## list (if not found, use LDAP_SERVER)


    3 : Perform a DNS lookup to obtain the IP address and use the first matching IP from the LDAP_WHITE_IP_## list (if not found, do not connect to LDAP) | | | LDAP_DNS_IF_FAIL_USE_NEXT | 0 or 1 | | When there are multiple DNS lookup results, whether to try the next IP address if the first IP address fails to connect
    Example: lookup results are 4: 1st IP connection failure -> attempt 2nd IP & failure -> attempt 3rd IP & failure -> attempt 4th IP | | | LDAP_WHITE_IP_01 | 70.2.180.218 | | List of allowed LDAP server IPs compared with DNS Lookup results (applicable only when LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP = 2 or 3)
    LDAP_WHITE_IP_## format, recorded sequentially from 01 to 99
    Compare the DNS Lookup results with the list sequentially
    Recorded in IPv4 or IPv6 format (if the same server has both IPv4 and IPv6, the IP appearing earlier in the list is used)
    If the order of DNS Lookup results differs from the White IP list order → follow the White IP list order | | | LDAP_WHITE_IP_02 | | | fe80::644b:3c9f:c5ac:ce1c%10 | | | LDAP_WHITE_IP_## | | | A. : 01 ~ 99
    White IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) | | | USERINFO_ENCRYPT | 0 or 1 | | Whether to encrypt user information (e.g., mobile, email, etc.)
    Target : USERINFO_## list
    The claim name of the token sent to the API server varies depending on encryption status
    0 : No encryption -> token claim names are plainMobile, plainEmail
    1 : Encryption -> token claim names are mobile, email | | | USERINFO_01 | mobile;mobile;plainMobile | O | The attribute name of user information to search in LDAP and the claim name to use in the JWT token (the delimiter separating the three values is “;”)
    Format: USERINFO_## = attribute;encryptedClaim;plainClaim
    Example: If you read the “mail” attribute from LDAP and use the encrypted value as the “email” claim and the plain value as the “plainEmail” claim in the JWT → “mail;email;plainEmail” | | | USERINFO_02 | mail;email;plainEmail | O | | | | USERINFO_## | | | A. : 01 ~ 99
    [LDAP attribute name];[encrypted token claim name];[plain token claim name] | | | KEY_NAME_IN_RESPONSE | jwtTokenResponse | O | Key name used in the result parameter when the MFA API server performs a callback
    Example: https://adpw5004.hw.dev/adfs/ls?client-request-id=xxxxxx&pullStatus=0&jwtTokenResponse=yyyyyy | | | TOKEN_EXP_TIME | 1d | | The additive value applied to the JWT token’s exp
    a string in day-hour-minute-second (dhms) format
    1d=86400, 1h=3600, 1m=60
    A plain number without any dhms is interpreted as seconds
    Example 1: 1d02h38m27s → 95907 seconds
    Example 2: 12345 → 12345 seconds | | | TOKEN_CLAIM_CLIENT | 0 or 1 | | Whether to add a client claim to the token configured when making an API call
    client: issuer for SAML, client-id for OIDC
    0: do not include client in the token
    1: include client in the token | | | MFA_VERIFY_TYPE | 0 or 1 or 2 | | MFA nonce(guid, requset-id) verification method
    0 : No verification
    1 : Method where the guid generated by the adapter is stored/compared in LDAP (adapter verifies) → related configuration values: CACHE_ATTRIBUTE, CACHE_DELIMETER, SKEW_SECONDS, CACHE_LIFE_TIME
    2 : Method where the requeset-id generated by the API server is received by the adapter and used in the call URL (API server verifies) → related configuration value: MFA_VERIFY_URL | | | MFA_VERIFY_URL | https://stg1-cloud.iam.samsung.net/test/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/request/status | | MFA result verification URL (server-to-server communication): Append the {request-id} received from the API server to the end of the URL and call it → the adapter checks that the return is 200 (OK) to process the MFA result
    Do not append a “/” at the end of the URL | | | MFA_VERIFY_SECURE_PROTOCOL | TLS12 or TLS13 | | Security protocol to use when verifying MFA results
    Available protocols (case-insensitive): TLS12, TLS13
    (Note) Do not use SSL3, TLS, TLS11 | | | CACHE_ATTRIBUTE | otherPager | O | Name of the LDAP attribute that stores the user’s req guid value | | | CACHE_DELIMETER | ; | | Delimiter used when combining the req and time information stored in LDAP -> “req;time” | | | SKEW_SECONDS | 3600 | | Allowed time difference (in seconds) between the request time stored in LDAP and the time when the JWT is received
    It is the time immediately after AD login, not when the MFA selection screen is clicked (the time is already recorded when the MFA selection screen appears)
    It is not the time until the user clicks the MFA selection screen and enters the passcode
    Therefore, the time should not be set too tightly; about one hour is appropriate?? (Is there anyone who would consider MFA selection for an hour?) | | | CACHE_LIFE_TIME | 1d | | Lifetime of req stored in LDAP -> On the next access, check the time and delete the older ones
    String in dhms (days, hours, minutes, seconds) format
    1d=86400, 1h=3600, 1m=60
    (A plain number without dhms is interpreted as seconds) | | | BYPASS_ADAPTER | 0 or 283901 | | Whether to bypass the Adapter function (0 = normal operation, 283901 = disable, other values = normal operation)
    Used in emergency situations where the adapter function must be quickly disabled due to MFA issues
    Never modify under normal circumstances -> the normal value is 0
    Caution: To disable, you must set the exact value (numbers other than 0 are not applicable; a precise number is required. Concern about noise) | | API | API_SYSTEMNAME | SingleID | O | (No impact on MFA functionality) | | MSG-1033 | MSG_INTERNAL_ERROR | Internal error occurred. Contact administrator. | | Message displayed to the user when the process stops due to authentication interruption, error occurrence, etc. (English) | | MSG-1042 | MSG_INTERNAL_ERROR | Internal error occurred. Contact administrator. | | Message displayed to the user when the process stops due to authentication interruption, error occurrence, etc. (Korean)
    Since entering Korean causes an error, please input in English. | | MANAGE | LOG_LEVEL | 0 or 1 or 2 | | Criteria for recording in the Windows event log
    0 = Record only errors
    1 = Record errors + warnings only
    2 = Record errors + warnings + informational messages, etc. |

    Table. Description of configuration values

    INI configuration method

    1. LDAP Search related

      • When you want to use DNS lookup for the LDAP server’s hostName.
      • When you want to use only the first address among multiple DNS lookup results
      • When you want to attempt connections sequentially to all DNS lookup results.
      • When you want to use an ID/password to connect to an LDAP server.
      • When you want to connect only to allowed LDAP addresses (White IP list)
      • Configure the user attributes to retrieve from LDAP
    2. Regarding API connection

      • Whether user information included in the token sent to the API server is encrypted
      • MFA integrity verification method: Adapter verifies
      • MFA integrity verification method: API server verification
    3. etc.

      • Options that must never be changed
      • Options that must be obtained from the SingleID operations department and configured
      • Options that need to be set according to the installation environment
    Caution
    The consumer key and secret key used on this page are sample data. (fake value)

    LDAP Search related

    When you want to use DNS Lookup with the hostName of the LDAP server

    USE_LDAP_SEARCH=1
    LDAP_SERVER="LDAP://adpw5004.hw.dev"
    LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP=1
    

    The leading part of the LDAP server address must be uppercase “LDAP://”. It was found that connections fail when using lowercase on the development server during testing. If the DNS lookup fails, the LDAP_SERVER value is used directly as the LDAP connection address.

    When you want to use only the first address among multiple DNS lookup results

    LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP=1
    LDAP_DNS_IF_FAIL_USE_NEXT=0
    DNS Lookup 결과가 다음과 같다고 하면,
    
    • IP1 = 10.10.10.10
    • IP2 = 10.10.10.20
    • IP3 = 10.10.10.30

    LDAP_DNS_IF_FAIL_USE_NEXT=0, because it is set to Only IP1 attempts to connect to the server and then stops, regardless of success or failure. Therefore, setting LDAP_DNS_IF_FAIL_USE_NEXT=0 requires caution.

    When you want to attempt connections sequentially to all DNS lookup results

    LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP=1
    LDAP_DNS_IF_FAIL_USE_NEXT=1
    

    If the DNS Lookup result is as follows,

    • IP1 = 10.10.10.10
    • P2 = 10.10.10.20
    • IP3 = 10.10.10.30

    LDAP_DNS_IF_FAIL_USE_NEXT=1 is set, so Attempt to connect to IP1, IP2, and IP3 sequentially until successful. For example, if the connection to IP2 succeeds, IP3 will not attempt to connect.

    When you want to use an ID/password when connecting to an LDAP server

    LDAP_ID="******"
    LDAP_PW="******"
    

    Since MFA operates with system privileges, it may not require an id/pw. If the LDAP connection fails without an ID/password (you can determine the connection status from the server logs) Please try a configuration that uses an ID/password.

    When you want to connect only to allowed LDAP addresses (White IP list)

    LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP=2
    또는
    LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP=3
    
    LDAP_WHITE_IP_01="70.2.180.218"
    LDAP_WHITE_IP_02="fe80::644b:3c9f:c5ac:ce1c%10"
    

    Without using the DNS lookup result as is, It compares against the White IP list and uses only the addresses that are included in the White IP list. For example, the DNS Lookup result is as follows,

    • IP1 = 10.10.10.10
    • IP2 = 10.10.10.20
    • IP3 = 10.10.10.30

    If the white IP list is as follows,

    • WIP1 = 10.10.10.20
    • WIP2 = 10.10.10.40

    The actual address used is IP2 = WIP1 = 10.10.10.20.

    The order follows the White IP list order. In the following case, attempts to connect to the server are made in the order 10.10.10.30, 10.10.10.20.

    • IP1 = 10.10.10.10
    • IP2 = 10.10.10.20
    • IP3 = 10.10.10.30
    • WIP1 = 10.10.10.30
    • WIP2 = 10.10.10.20

    If there is nothing that belongs to the White IP list,

    • LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP=2 → Use the LDAP_SERVER value directly as the LDAP connection address.
    • LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP=3 → Does not connect to the LDAP server. (Option that requires careful use)

    Configure user attributes to query from LDAP

    USERINFO_01=mobile;mobile;plainMobile
    USERINFO_02=mail;email;plainEmail
    USERINFO_03=company;company;plainCompany
    USERINFO_04=department;department;plainDepartment
    USERINFO_05=displayname;displayname;plainDisplayname
    

    User information claim to be included in the Request Token sent to the MFA API server. It queries LDAP for the number of items specified in the ini list, includes the results in the token, and sends them to the MFA API server. Please refer to the description of “USERINFO_##” in the table on the page below for the configuration rules.

    If you configure as in the above sample and the LDAP query result is as follows,

    • mobile = +82-10-1234-5678
    • mail = gd.hong@samsung.com
    • company = no value
    • department = no value
    • displayname = Hong Gil Dong

    The Request Token is composed as follows. If the query result is empty, include the empty value in the token as is (as with plainCompany and plainDepartment below).

    {
      "sys": "4312a8b9-75c4-7897-89a7-89347f18943e",
      "uid": "gd.hong",
      "displayUid": "gd.hong",
      "rtn": "https://adpw5004.hw.dev:443/adfs/ls?client-request-id=4b978185-59e1-4018-c800-0080020000f6&pullStatus=0",
      "nbf": 1716346465,
      "exp": 1716432865,
      "iat": 1716346465,
      "authType": "saml",
      "returnMethod": "get",
      "plainMobile": "+82-10-1234-5678",
      "plainEmail": "gd.hong@samsung.com",
      "plainCompany": "",
      "plainDepartment": "",
      "plainDisplayname": "Hong Gil Dong"
    }
    

    To prevent querying LDAP, clear the setting value or mark it as a remark. In this case, the token does not contain user information.

    USERINFO_01=
    또는
    #USERINFO_01=mobile;mobile;plainMobile
    

    API connection related

    Whether user information included in the token sent to the API server is encrypted

    USERINFO_ENCRYPT=0
    

    As of adapter version 1.2.0.8, it is not implemented the same as the API server’s encryption logic, making encrypted transmission impossible. The server uses AES GCM encryption, but the adapter cannot use AES GCM due to the characteristics of the development environment.

    • Target information: mobile, email

    Therefore, use USERINFO_ENCRYPT=0. The adapter and the API server are connected via HTTPS, so there should be no man‑in‑the‑middle hijacking issue.

    MFA integrity verification method : adapter verification

    MFA_VERIFY_TYPE=1
    CACHE_ATTRIBUTE="otherPager"
    CACHE_DELIMETER=";"
    SKEW_SECONDS=3600
    CACHE_LIFE_TIME=1d
    

    Prerequisite for using this option

    • Must have write (write) permission on LDAP → important weekly!

    It uses the otherPager attribute in LDAP user information as a temporary storage area. Adapters lack a session concept, so they cannot store or remember information themselves.

    The LDAP server has the same address as the LDAP Search. In other words, it means that options such as LDAP SERVER and LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP are also applied.

    The above configuration is interpreted as follows.

    • MFA_VERIFY_TYPE=1 : The method of storing/comparing the guid generated by the adapter in LDAP (adapter verification)
    • Use the attribute called “otherPager” in LDAP user information
    • Multiple pieces of information to be stored are separated by ‘;’ and concatenated as a string → example: “aaa;bbb;ccc”
    • The allowed time difference between the time stored in LDAP for the request and the time when the JWT is received is 3600 seconds.
    • The lifetime of req stored in LDAP is 1d (one day) → On the next access, check the time and delete the older entries.

    MFA integrity verification method: API server verification

    MFA_VERIFY_TYPE=2
    MFA_VERIFY_URL="https://stg1-cloud.iam.samsung.net/test/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/request/status"
    MFA_VERIFY_SECURE_PROTOCOL="TLS12"
    

    When the adapter receives the MFA result JWT token returned by the API server, it uses the req value from the token’s information to It queries the API server again and verifies that the result is 200.

    The above configuration is interpreted as follows.

    • MFA_VERIFY_TYPE=2 : The method where the adapter receives the request-id generated by the API server and uses it in the call URL (validated by the API server)
    • Re-queries the MFA_VERIFY_URL address
    • The security protocol uses TLS 1.2

    Other

    MAIN_CLAIM1=http://schemas.microsoft.com/ws/2008/06/identity/claims/authenticationmethod
    MAIN_CLAIM2=http://schemas.microsoft.com/ws/2012/12/authmethod/otp
    KEY_NAME_IN_RESPONSE="jwtTokenResponse"
    CACHE_ATTRIBUTE="otherPager"
    CACHE_DELIMETER=";"
    BYPASS_ADAPTER=0
    

    You must keep the contents of the INI file provided during the initial installation unchanged. If changed arbitrarily, the adapter may not work at all. Some values may need to be changed depending on the system context, but gathering input from the relevant parties or responsible personnel must precede any changes.

    Options that need to be obtained from the SingleID operations department and configured

    MFA_API_URL="https://stg1-cloud.singleid.samsung.net/test/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/request"
    CONSUMER_KEY="4312a8b9-75c4-7897-89a7-89347f18943e"
    SECRET_KEY="gQgkyLVO6FR8vJkLtlgBiupsRM/ilgrbEfoKWRnhALd="
    MFA_VERIFY_URL="https://stg1-cloud.iam.samsung.net/test/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/request/status"
    MFA_VERIFY_SECURE_PROTOCOL="TLS12"
    

    API-related URLs, keys, and bearer values, which are provided by the SingleID operations department. The typical setting for the security protocol (MFA_VERIFY_SECURE_PROTOCOL) is TLS 1.2.

    Options that must be set according to the installation environment

    LDAP_SERVER="LDAP://adpw5004.hw.dev"
    LDAP_ID="******"
    LDAP_PW="******"
    LDAP_WHITE_IP_01="70.2.180.218"
    LDAP_WHITE_IP_02="fe80::644b:3c9f:c5ac:ce1c%10"
    

    These are the options determined after the installation environment assessment is completed.

    INI configuration and results

    1. USERINFO_ENCRYPT
    2. USE_LDAP_SEARCH
    3. LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP
    4. LDAP_DNS_IF_FAIL_USE_NEXT
    5. LDAP_USE_IDPW
    6. MFA_VERIFY_TYPE
      Caution
      The consumer key and secret key used on this page are sample data. (fake value)

    USERINFO_ENCRYPT

    USERINFO_ENCRYPT=0
    

    Set whether the user information included in the token sent by the adapter to the MFA API server is encrypted or plain text. (For example, mobile, email) Adapter version v1.2.0.8 (April 2024) currently cannot use AES/GCM/NoPadding, so it is set to plaintext. In other words, it is fixed at USERINFO_ENCRYPT=0. In the future, if the adapter can support AES/GCM/NoPadding, the configuration can be changed.

    USE_LDAP_SEARCH

    USE_LDAP_SEARCH=0
    

    LDAP_SERVER=“LDAP://adpw5004.hw.dev” Since USE_LDAP_SEARCH is 0, the LDAP_SERVER value is not used. In other words, if USE_LDAP_SEARCH is 0, you can set LDAP_SERVER to an empty value or remove it.

    USE_LDAP_SEARCH=1
    

    What if the LDAP search fails?

    • Treat the user information as empty and proceed to the next step.
    • It doesn’t matter whether the cause of the failure is a server connection failure or missing information.
    USE_LDAP_SEARCH=2
    

    What if the LDAP search fails?

    • Displays an error to the user and halts execution.
    • The server log records as follows. (Or similar content) Unable to retrieve user information from LDAP.

    This option should be used very carefully, and it is recommended to set it to USE_LDAP_SEARCH=1 whenever possible. It would be advisable to delegate handling of missing user information to the MFA API side. Because adapters inevitably provide insufficient user guidance and functionality in such situations.

    LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP

    LDAP_SERVER="LDAP://adpw5004.hw.dev"
    LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP=1
    LDAP_WHITE_IP_01="10.10.10.10"
    LDAP_WHITE_IP_02="10.10.10.30"
    

    The adapter stores DNS lookup results in memory as a list (an ordered list) → LDAP address list Assume LDAP server redundancy and that each IP is as follows. (The IP that is looked up in DNS)

    • IP#1 : 10.10.10.10
    • IP#2 : 10.10.10.20

    Since the DNS lookup result applies to both IPv4 and IPv6, the result appears as follows. (The below is a sample and may differ from the actual.)

    • IP#1 = fe80::644b:3c9f:c5ac:ce1c%10
    • IP#2 = fe80::f03d:b045:8dc3:f5ed%3
    • IP#3 = 10.10.10.10
    • IP#4 = 10.10.10.20

    In this state, we can consider the following cases.

    Case 1) If DNS Lookup failed

    • The LDAP address list contains one entry, and the LDAP_SERVER value is assigned directly.
    • In other words, the first value of the LDAP address list = “LDAP://adpw5004.hw.dev”

    Case 2) If DNS Lookup succeeds and there is a White IP list setting (LDAP_WHITE_IP_##=“x.x.x.x”)

    • The LDAP address list is created in the order of the White IP list.
    • In the above sample, the values of the LDAP address list are as follows.
    • first value = 10.10.10.10
    • The second White IP 10.10.10.30 is not included in the LDAP address list because it does not appear in the DNS lookup results.

    Case 3) If DNS Lookup succeeds and there is no White IP list configuration value (LDAP_WHITE_IP_##="" or LDAP_WHITE_IP_## not set)

    • Incorporate the DNS lookup results into the LDAP address list.
    • In the above sample, the values of the LDAP address list are as follows.
    • first value = fe80::644b:3c9f:c5ac:ce1c%10
    • Second value = fe80::f03d:b045:8dc3:f5ed%3
    • third value = 10.10.10.10
    • 4th value = 10.10.10.20

    LDAP_DNS_IF_FAIL_USE_NEXT

    LDAP_DNS_IF_FAIL_USE_NEXT=0
    

    Assume that the LDAP address list is as follows.

    • First value = 10.10.10.10
    • Second value = 10.10.10.20

    If the connection attempt to the first address 10.10.10.10 fails, do not proceed further. Set the LDAP search result (user information) to an empty value.

    LDAP_DNS_IF_FAIL_USE_NEXT=1
    

    Assume that the LDAP address list is as follows.

    • First value = 10.10.10.10
    • Second value = 10.10.10.20

    If the connection attempt to the first address 10.10.10.10 fails, it attempts to connect to the second address. If it fails up to the second connection attempt, set the LDAP search result (user information) to an empty value.

    LDAP_USE_IDPW

    LDAP_USE_IDPW=0
    LDAP_ID="******"
    LDAP_PW="******"
    

    If LDAP_USE_IDPW is 0, the LDAP_ID and LDAP_PW values are not used. In other words, if LDAP_USE_IDPW is 0, you can set LDAP_ID and LDAP_PW to empty values or delete them.

    LDAP_USE_IDPW=1
    LDAP_ID=""
    LDAP_PW=""
    

    If LDAP_USE_IDPW is 1, LDAP_ID and LDAP_PW values are required. Therefore, if you leave the LDAP_ID and LDAP_PW values empty or delete them as shown in the sample above, you will not be able to connect to the LDAP server.

    LDAP_USE_IDPW=1
    LDAP_ID="******"
    LDAP_PW="******"
    

    It means that the LDAP connection uses an ID/password; if the connection fails, verify that the ID/password are correct. Since INI files are plain text, there is a risk that the ID/password could be exposed. Therefore, it is necessary to configure the server environment so that LDAP access works without using an ID/password whenever possible.

    MFA_VERIFY_TYPE

    MFA_VERIFY_TYPE=0
    

    Verification of MFA results from the adapter’s perspective, The user’s MFA execution is performed via the MFA API, and the adapter revalidates the result. If the MFA_VERIFY_TYPE value is 0, it means that the MFA result is not verified. In normal operation, it is not set to 0.

    MFA_VERIFY_TYPE=1
    CACHE_ATTRIBUTE="otherPager"
    CACHE_DELIMETER=";"
    

    The adapter directly performs MFA result verification. To do this, you need to use an LDAP server, and LDAP write permission is required. The CACHE_ATTRIBUTE value must not be changed.

    MFA_VERIFY_TYPE=2
    MFA_VERIFY_URL="https://stg1-cloud.iam.samsung.net/test/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/request/status"
    MFA_VERIFY_SECURE_PROTOCOL="TLS12"
    

    We request the MFA API server to verify the MFA result. This is an alternative when you lack LDAP write permission.

    INI configuration example

    Example 1

    USE_LDAP_SEARCH=0
    LDAP_SERVER="LDAP://adpw5004.hw.dev"
    LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP=0
    MFA_VERIFY_TYPE=1
    CACHE_ATTRIBUTE="otherPager"
    CACHE_DELIMETER=";"
    
    • LDAP search is not used.
    • The user information included in the token sent to the API server is set to an empty string value. (e.g., mobile, email, etc.)
    • Even though LDAP search is not used, the LDAP_SERVER information is present because MFA_VERIFY_TYPE=1.
    • DNS lookup for the LDAP server is not performed.
    • In other words, use the LDAP_SERVER value directly as the LDAP address.
    • The adapter directly validates the MFA result, using the LDAP server at this point. Therefore, an LDAP server address value must be provided.
    • The above configuration means that the adapter stores the generated nonce in the “otherPager” attribute of the user information in the LDAP server, and retrieves it for comparison when MFA is completed.

    Example 2

    USE_LDAP_SEARCH=1
    LDAP_SERVER="LDAP://adpw5004.hw.dev"
    LDAP_USE_IDPW=0
    LDAP_SSLTLS=1
    LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP=0
    MFA_VERIFY_TYPE=1
    CACHE_ATTRIBUTE="otherPager"
    CACHE_DELIMETER=";"
    
    • Use LDAP search.
    • Retrieve user information from LDAP (e.g., mobile, email, etc.).
    • If the LDAP connection fails or there are no query results, the user information is set to an empty string.
    • Do not use an ID/password when connecting to LDAP.
    • This applies to cases where you can connect to LDAP without entering an ID/password.
    • Use SSL/TLS when connecting to LDAP to enhance security.
    • DNS lookup for the LDAP server is not performed.
    • In other words, use the LDAP_SERVER value directly as the LDAP address.
    • The adapter directly validates the MFA result, using the LDAP server. Therefore, an LDAP server address must be provided.
    • The above configuration means that the adapter stores the generated nonce in the “otherPager” attribute of the user information in the LDAP server, and retrieves it for comparison when MFA is completed.

    Example 3

    USE_LDAP_SEARCH=1
    LDAP_SERVER="LDAP://adpw5004.hw.dev"
    LDAP_USE_IDPW=0
    LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP=0
    MFA_VERIFY_TYPE=2
    MFA_VERIFY_URL="https://stg1-cloud.iam.samsung.net/test/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/request/status"
    MFA_VERIFY_SECURE_PROTOCOL="TLS12"
    
    • Use LDAP search.
    • Retrieve user information from LDAP. (e.g., mobile, email, etc.)
    • If the LDAP connection fails or there are no query results, the user information is set to an empty string.
    • Do not use an ID/password when connecting to LDAP.
    • This applies to situations where LDAP can be accessed without entering an ID/password.
    • DNS lookup is not performed for the LDAP server.
    • In other words, use the LDAP_SERVER value directly as the LDAP address.
    • The API server validates the MFA result, and the security protocol uses TLS 1.2.
    • Extract the “req” value included in the MFA result response token received from the API server, and append it to the end of the result verification URL.
    • → MFA_VERIFY_URL + “/” + req
    • → Example: when req is “xxxxxx”,
    • https://stg1-cloud.iam.samsung.net/test/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/request/status/xxxxxx

    Example 4

    USE_LDAP_SEARCH=1
    LDAP_SERVER="LDAP://adpw5004.hw.dev"
    LDAP_USE_IDPW=1
    LDAP_SSLTLS=1
    LDAP_ID="******"
    LDAP_PW="******"
    LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP=1
    LDAP_DNS_IF_FAIL_USE_NEXT=0
    MFA_VERIFY_TYPE=1
    CACHE_ATTRIBUTE="otherPager"
    CACHE_DELIMETER=";"
    
    • Use LDAP search.
    • Retrieve user information from LDAP. (e.g., mobile, email, etc.)
    • If the LDAP connection fails or there are no query results, the user information is set to an empty string.
    • Use id/pw when connecting to LDAP. This account must have write permission.
    • Use SSL/TLS when connecting to LDAP to enhance security.
    • Use DNS lookup for the LDAP server.
    • Assign the DNS lookup results directly to the LDAP address table.
    • If DNS lookup fails, only one LDAP_SERVER value is recorded in the LDAP address table.
    • Attempt to connect only to the first entry in the LDAP address table.
    • Even if it fails, it does not attempt to connect to the next server in the sequence.
    • The adapter directly validates the MFA result, using the LDAP server at this stage. Therefore, an LDAP server address value must be provided.
    • The above configuration means that the adapter stores the generated nonce in the “otherPager” attribute of the user information in the LDAP server, and retrieves it for comparison when MFA is completed.

    Example 5

    USE_LDAP_SEARCH=1
    LDAP_SERVER="LDAP://adpw5004.hw.dev"
    LDAP_USE_IDPW=1
    LDAP_SSLTLS=1
    LDAP_ID="******"
    LDAP_PW="******"
    LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP=1
    LDAP_DNS_IF_FAIL_USE_NEXT=0
    LDAP_WHITE_IP_01=""
    LDAP_WHITE_IP_02=""
    MFA_VERIFY_TYPE=1
    CACHE_ATTRIBUTE="otherPager"
    CACHE_DELIMETER=";"
    
    • The same configuration as Example 4.
    • LDAP_WHITE_IP_## exists but is empty, which means it is equivalent to not existing.

    Example 6

    USE_LDAP_SEARCH=1
    LDAP_SERVER="LDAP://adpw5004.hw.dev"
    LDAP_USE_IDPW=1
    LDAP_SSLTLS=1
    LDAP_ID="******"
    LDAP_PW="******"
    LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP=1
    LDAP_DNS_IF_FAIL_USE_NEXT=1
    LDAP_WHITE_IP_01="70.2.180.218"
    LDAP_WHITE_IP_02="fe80::644b:3c9f:c5ac:ce1c%10"
    MFA_VERIFY_TYPE=2
    MFA_VERIFY_URL="https://stg1-cloud.iam.samsung.net/test/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/request/status"
    MFA_VERIFY_SECURE_PROTOCOL="TLS12"
    
    • Use LDAP search.
    • Retrieve user information from LDAP (e.g., mobile, email, etc.).
    • If the LDAP connection fails or there are no query results, the user information is set to an empty string.
    • Use id/pw when connecting to LDAP.
    • This account must have write permission.
    • Use SSL/TLS when connecting to LDAP to enhance security.
    • Use DNS lookup for the LDAP server.
    • Create an LDAP address table in the order of the White IP list by comparing the DNS lookup results with the White IP list.
    • Even if the DNS lookup succeeds, if it is not in the White IP list, only one LDAP_SERVER value is recorded in the LDAP address table.
    • If DNS lookup fails, only one LDAP_SERVER value is recorded in the LDAP address table.
    • Attempt to connect to the LDAP address table sequentially from the beginning,
    • If it fails, it attempts to connect to the next server in order.
    • The API server validates the MFA result, and the security protocol uses TLS 1.2.
    • Extract the “req” value included in the MFA result response token received from the API server, and append it to the end of the result verification URL.
    • → MFA_VERIFY_URL + “/” + req
    • → Example: when req is “xxxxxx”, https://stg1-cloud.iam.samsung.net/test/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/request/status/xxxxxx

    ADFS Adapter Management

    Service Check

    Check configuration

    • AD FS Management > Service > Authentication Methods > Multi-Factor Authentication Methods > Verify ADFS MFA Adapter Configuration
    Check Settings
    Check Settings
    Test SP
    Test SP

    Server Event Log

    The logs of the Adapter execution process are recorded in the Windows Event Log area.

    By adjusting the LOG_LEVEL value in the ADFSadapter.ini configuration, you can selectively record errors, warnings, and general logs.

    Setting LOG_LEVEL in ADFSadapter.ini

    Set valuerecording log
    LOG_LEVEL=0Error log
    LOG_LEVEL=1Error and warning logs
    LOG_LEVEL=2Log errors, warnings, and general messages

    Windows event log location

    • Computer Management (Local) > System Tools > Event Viewer > Application and Services Logs > MFA_Adapter
    • At the beginning of each account’s log, the MFA version and account name are displayed → reference for log analysis/tracing
    • During operation, focus on monitoring parts marked as “error” or “warning”.
      Event Viewer

    Windows Event Log Description and Mitigation Steps

    [#0000] Success
    Err.Success
    에러가 아니고, 단순한 로그입니다.
    불필요한 로그이며, 이 로그가 보인다면 개발자에게 해당 로그 삭제하라고 하시면 됩니다.
    
    [#0001] Invalid Arguments
    Err.InvalidArguments
    에러 : adapter 프로그램 내부의 함수 호출할 때, 함수 인자(argument) 누락이 있다는 뜻입니다.
    조치 : 심각한 에러이며, 개발자에게 즉시 전달하여 신속히 조치되도록 합니다.
    참고
    별다른 증상없이 adapter가 동작할 수도 있으나, 심각한 에러 잠재성이 있으므로 방치하면 안됩니다.
    
    [#1000] identityClaim 에서 계정정보(account)를 추출할 수 없습니다.
    Err.IdentityClaimHasNoAccount
    에러 : adapter 실행 초기에 AD 서버로부터 현재 사용자의 정보를 받는데, account 정보를 찾을 수 없습니다.
    조치 : AD 서버 상태를 확인해봅니다.
    참고
    LDAP에서 Query 하는 것이 아니라, ADFS 내부적으로 처리되는 정보 흐름으로서, 이 상황이 발생하면 adapter가 정상 동작할 수 없는 환경이라고 보면 됩니다.
    
    [#1001] INI 파일을 load 할 수 없습니다.
    Err.FailToLoadIni
    에러 : 서버에서 MFA 환경설정 INI 파일을 읽을 수 없습니다.
    조치 : 서버에 다음의 경로에 파일이 있는지 확인
    C:\ ADFSadapter \ ADFSadapter.ini
    참고
    만일, 파일이 있다면, 파일 속성 또는 권한 확인합니다.
    
    [#1002] HTML 파일들을 load 할 수 없습니다.
    Err.FailToLoadHtml
    에러 : 서버에서 HTML 파일을 읽을 수 없습니다.
    조치 : 서버에 다음의 경로에 파일이 있는지 확인합니다.
    C:\ ADFSadapter \ Html_*.txt
    참고
    만일, 파일이 있다면, 파일 속성 또는 권한 확인합니다. 1개라도 없으면 에러 발생힙니다. 어떤 것이 누락되었는지는 서버 이벤트 로그에서 알 수 있습니다.
    
    [#1003] LDAP에서 사용자 정보를 가져올 수 없습니다.
    Err.FailToLdapSearch
    에러 : LDAP 서버에 Query를 헀으나, AD 사용자 정보를 가져오지 못했습니다.
    조치 : AD 서버 상태를 확인해봅니다.
    참고
    Token 구성에 mobile, email 정보가 필요한데, 이 정보들을 가져올때 실패한 것입니다. 사용자 정보가 존재한다면, mobile, email이 빈 값이어도 에러로 처리하지 않습니다. 그래서, 본 에러가 발생한 것은 LDAP Query 자체가 안된다고 보면 됩니다.
    
    [#1004] BeginAuthentication 함수의 request에 URL 정보가 없습니다.
    Err.NoURLInRequest
    에러 : Adapter 실행 초기에 실행되는 BeginAuthentication 함수의 인자 request에 URL 정보가 없습니다.
    조치 : SingleID MFA API 서버가 정상적으로 response를 보내는지 확인합니다.
    참고
    URL 정보가 없으면, SingleID MFA API 서버가 GET 방식으로 전송한 response를 사용할 수 없습니다.
    
    [#1005] JWT token 생성을 할 수 없습니다.
    Err.FailToMakeJwtToken
    에러 : GenerateRequestToken 함수가 token 생성에 실패했습니다.
    조치 : 정확한 원인은 서버 이벤트 로그에서 확인 가능하며, 개발자에게 원인 분석을 요청합니다.
    
    [#1006] ADFSadapter 디렉토리 또는 INI 파일을 찾을 수 없습니다. C to Z 드라이브 중의 한 곳에 [drive]:/ADFSadapter/ADFSadapter.ini 파일이 존재해야 합니다.
    Err.CannotFindDirOrIni
    에러 : adapter 버전 1.2.0.6 부터 adapter 설치 위치가 C 드라이브 고정이 아닌 C to Z 드라이브 중의 한 곳에 설치할 수 있으며, adapter는 C to Z 드라이브 스캔을 통해서 설치된 위치를 알아냅니다. [drive]:/ADFSadapter/ADFSadapter.ini 파일이 존재해야 합니다.
    조치 : 서버에 adapter 설치가 제대로 되었는지, 디렉토리명과 파일명이 정확한지 확인합니다. 드라이브 억세스가 막혀있는지 확인합니다.
    
    [#2000] TryEndAuthentication()에 계정정보(account)가 없습니다.
    Err.TryEndHasNoAccount
    에러 : TryEndAuthentication 단계로 넘어왔으나, 계정 정보를 알 수 없습니다. (adpater 자체 에러)
    조치 : 개발자에게 신속히 상황 전달 및 원인 분석을 요청합니다.
    참고
    이러한 경우는 절대 발생할 수 없으며, 발생해서도 안됩니다.
    
    [#2001] Step 정보가 없습니다.
    Err.NoStepInfo
    에러 : MFA 진행 단계(step) 정보가 없습니다. (adpater 자체 에러)
    조치 : 개발자에게 신속히 상황 전달 및 원인 분석을 요청합니다.
    참고
    이러한 경우는 절대 발생할 수 없으며, 발생해서도 안됩니다.
    
    [#2002] 잘못된 Step 정보입니다.
    Err.InvalidStepInfo
    에러 : MFA 진행 단계(step) 정보가 잘 못 되었습니다. (adpater 자체 에러)
    조치 : 개발자에게 신속히 상황 전달 및 원인 분석을 요청합니다.
    참고
    이러한 경우는 절대 발생할 수 없으며, 발생해서도 안됩니다.
    
    [#3000] HTML 문자열을 가져옵니다.
    Err.SucceedInGetHtml
    에러가 아니고, 단순한 로그입니다. 서버의 Html_.txt 파일을 읽은 내용을 보여줍니다. Html_.txt 파일 내용 수정 후에 adpater가 파일 내용을 제대로 읽었는지 확인할 때 도움이 됩니다.
    
    [#3001] HTML을 가져올 수 없습니다.
    Err.FailToGetHtml
    에러 : 서버의 Html_*.txt 파일을 읽지 못한 것입니다.
    조치 : 파일이 존재하는지, Read 권한이 있는지, Lock 걸려있는지 등을 확인해봅니다.
    
    [#4000] Html 파일이 존재하지 않습니다.
    Err.HtmlFileNotFound
    에러 : 서버의 Html_*.txt 파일을 읽지 못한 것입니다.
    조치 : 파일이 존재하는지, 확인해봅니다.
    
    [#4001] Html 파일이 존재하나, 파일 내용이 없습니다.
    Err.HtmlFileIsEmpty
    에러 : 서버의 Html_*.txt 파일을 읽지 못한 것입니다.
    조치 : 파일 Read 권한이 있는지, Lock 걸려있는지 등을 확인해봅니다.
    
    [#4002] HtmlPrefix 리스트에 없는 step 입니다.
    Err.StepNotInHtmlPrefixList
    에러 : adapter 내부에는 처리 step 별로 정의해 둔 keyword 리스트가 있는데, 그 리스트에 없는 keyword가 발견되었다는 뜻입니다.
    조치 : 개발자에게 신속히 상황 전달 및 원인 분석을 요청합니다.
    참고
    이러한 경우는 절대 발생할 수 없으며, 발생해서도 안됩니다.
    
    [#4003] HtmlPrefix 리스트에서 prefix 값이 비어 있습니다.
    Err.EmptyPrefixInHtmlPrefixList
    에러 : adapter 내부에는 처리 step 별로 정의해 둔 keyword 리스트가 있는데, 그 리스트에 아무런 내용이 없다는 뜻입니다.
    조치 : 개발자에게 신속히 상황 전달 및 원인 분석을 요청합니다.
    참고
    이러한 경우는 절대 발생할 수 없으며, 발생해서도 안됩니다.
    
    [#5000] ini 파일을 읽을 수 없습니다.
    Err.FailToReadIniFile
    에러 : INI 파일을 읽을 수 없습니다.
    조치 : 서버에 다음의 경로에 파일이 있는지 확인
    C:\ ADFSadapter \ ADFSadapter.ini
    참고
    만일, 파일이 있다면, 파일 속성 또는 권한 확인합니다.
    
    [#5001] 시스템명칭(API_SYSTEMNAME)이 ini 에 없습니다.
    Err.NoSystemNameInIni
    에러 : INI 파일에 "API_SYSTEMNAME" 설정 값이 없습니다.
    조치 : INI 전체적으로 누락된 것이 없는지, INI 가 구버전의 것인지 등을 확인힙니다.
    
    [#5002] claim1(MAIN_CLAIM1)이 ini 에 없습니다.
    Err.NoClaim1InIni
    에러 : INI 파일에 "MAIN_CLAIM1" 설정 값이 없습니다.
    조치 : INI 전체적으로 누락된 것이 없는지, INI 가 구버전의 것인지 등을 확인힙니다.
    
    [#5003] claim2(MAIN_CLAIM2)가 ini 에 없습니다.
    Err.NoClaim2InIni
    에러 : INI 파일에 "MAIN_CLAIM2" 설정 값이 없습니다.
    조치 : INI 전체적으로 누락된 것이 없는지, INI 가 구버전의 것인지 등을 확인힙니다.
    
    [#5004] ini 파일이 존재하지 않습니다.
    Err.IniFileNotFound
    에러 : 서버에서 MFA 환경설정 INI 파일을 찾을 수 없습니다.
    조치 : 서버에 다음의 경로에 파일이 있는지 확인
    C:\ ADFSadapter \ ADFSadapter.ini
    
    [#5005] ini 리스트에 AddToList() 실패했습니다.
    Err.FailToAddIniList
    에러 : adapter 내부 에러입니다.
    조치 : 개발자에게 신속히 상황 전달 및 원인 분석을 요청합니다.
    참고
    이러한 경우는 절대 발생할 수 없으며, 발생해서도 안됩니다.
    
    [#5006] ini 파일에서 읽어온 key, value가 아무것도 없습니다.
    Err.NoKeyValueInIni
    에러 : INI 파일을 읽었으나, key, value 조합으로 설정된 것이 전혀 없습니다.
    조치 : INI 파일 내용을 확인힙니다.
    
    [#5007] LDAP 서버 정보가 ini 에 없습니다. (LDAP_SERVER)
    Err.NoLdapServerValueInIni
    에러 : INI 파일에 "LDAP_SERVER" 설정 값이 없습니다.
    조치 : INI 전체적으로 누락된 것이 없는지, INI 가 구버전의 것인지 등을 확인힙니다.
    
    [#5008] MFA API URL이 ini 에 없습니다. (MFA_API_URL)
    Err.NoMfaApiUrlValueInIni
    에러 : INI 파일에 "MFA_API_URL" 설정 값이 없습니다.
    조치 : INI 전체적으로 누락된 것이 없는지, INI 가 구버전의 것인지 등을 확인힙니다.
    
    [#5009] Consumer Key 값이 ini 에 없습니다. (CONSUMER_KEY)
    Err.NoConsumerKeyValueInIni
    에러 : INI 파일에 "CONSUMER_KEY" 설정 값이 없습니다.
    조치 : INI 전체적으로 누락된 것이 없는지, INI 가 구버전의 것인지 등을 확인힙니다.
    
    [#5010] Secret Key 값이 ini 에 없습니다. (SECRET_KEY)
    Err.NoSecretKeyValueInIni
    에러 : INI 파일에 "SECRET_KEY" 설정 값이 없습니다.
    조치 : INI 전체적으로 누락된 것이 없는지, INI 가 구버전의 것인지 등을 확인힙니다.
    
    [#5011] Cache Attribute 값이 ini 에 없습니다. (CACHE_ATTRIBUTE)
    Err.NoCacheAttributeValueInIni
    에러 : INI 파일에 "CACHE_ATTRIBUTE" 설정 값이 없습니다.
    조치 : INI 전체적으로 누락된 것이 없는지, INI 가 구버전의 것인지 등을 확인힙니다.
    
    [#5012] Cache Delimeter 값이 ini 에 없습니다. (CACHE_DELIMETER)
    Err.NoCacheDelimeterValueInIni
    에러 : INI 파일에 "CACHE_DELIMETER" 설정 값이 없습니다.
    조치 : INI 전체적으로 누락된 것이 없는지, INI 가 구버전의 것인지 등을 확인힙니다.
    
    [#5013] Skew Seconds 값이 ini 에 없습니다. (SKEW_SECONDS)
    Err.NoSkewSecondsValueInIni
    에러 : INI 파일에 "SKEW_SECONDS" 설정 값이 없습니다.
    조치 : INI 전체적으로 누락된 것이 없는지, INI 가 구버전의 것인지 등을 확인힙니다.
    
    [#5014] Token expiration time 값이 ini 에 없습니다. (TOKEN_EXP_TIME)
    Err.NoTokenExpTimeInIni
    에러 : INI 파일에 "TOKEN_EXP_TIME" 설정 값이 없습니다.
    조치 : INI 전체적으로 누락된 것이 없는지, INI 가 구버전의 것인지 등을 확인힙니다.
    
    [#5015] Cache life time 값이 ini 에 없습니다. (CACHE_LIFE_TIME)
    Err.NoCacheLifeTimeInIni
    에러 : INI 파일에 "CACHE_LIFE_TIME" 설정 값이 없습니다.
    조치 : INI 전체적으로 누락된 것이 없는지, INI 가 구버전의 것인지 등을 확인힙니다.
    
    [#5016] 사용자 정보 claim 리스트가 ini 에 없습니다. (USERINFO_##)
    Err.NoUserinfoListInIni
    reserved (예약된 에러 코드이며, 향후 사용 예정)
    
    [#5017] LDAP 연결시 id/pw 사용하도록 설정되어 있으나(LDAP_USE_IDPW=1), LDAP id 또는 pw가 ini 에 없습니다. (LDAP_ID, LDAP_PW)
    Err.NoLdapIdPwInIni
    에러 : LDAP 접속시 id/pw 사용하도록 설정되어 있으나, INI 파일에 LDAP_ID, LDAP_PW 설정 값이 없습니다.
    조치 : INI 전체적으로 누락된 것이 없는지, INI 가 구버전의 것인지 등을 확인힙니다.
    
    [#6000] AD(LDAP)에서 사용자 정보를 검색하는 과정에 Exception이 발생했습니다.
    Err.ExceptionInAD
    에러 : LDAP 서버에 Query를 헀으나, 그 과정 중에 Exception이 발생했습니다.
    조치 : INI에 설정한 AD 서버 주소가 정확한지 확인해봅니다. 그리고, AD 서버 상태를 확인해봅니다.
    참고
    이벤트 로그에 있는 자세한 Exception 내용을 개발자에게 전달합니다.
    
    [#6001] AD(LDAP)에서 사용자 정보를 찾을 수 없습니다.
    Err.CannotFindUserInAD
    에러 : LDAP 서버에 Query를 헀으나, AD 사용자 정보를 가져오지 못했습니다.
    조치 : AD 서버 상태를 확인해봅니다.
    참고
    Token 구성에 mobile, email 정보가 필요한데, 이 정보들을 가져올때 실패한 것입니다. 사용자 정보가 존재한다면, mobile, email이 빈 값이어도 에러로 처리하지 않습니다. 그래서, 본 에러가 발생한 것은 LDAP Query 자체가 안된다고 보면 됩니다
    

    User error message

    If an error occurs during the MFA process, an error message is displayed on the user’s PC screen. The error message is fixed as “Internal error occurred. Contact administrator.”, and the error code is displayed on the next line.

    Internal error occurred. Contact administrator.
    ErrorCode : 0001
    

    The following provides an explanation of the causes and remedies for error codes.
    ※ Refer to event logs of server internal processing steps other than user error messages.

    ErrorCode : 0001
    * Err.IdentityClaimHasNoAccount
    * 함수 호출시 인자(arguments)가 잘 못 되었음
    * 사용자에게 보여주는 에러는 아님
    + → 혹시 보인다면, 개발자에게 문의
    + → 이 시점의 서버 이벤트 로그를 봐야 함
    
    ErrorCode : 1000
    * Err.IdentityClaimHasNoAccount
    * "identityClaim 에서 계정정보(account)를 추출할 수 없습니다."
    * adapter 실행 초기에 AD 서버로부터 현재 사용자의 정보를 받는데, account 정보를 찾을 수 없음
    * LDAP에서 Query 하는 것이 아니라, ADFS 내부적으로 처리되는 정보 흐름으로서,
    + 이 상황이 발생하면 adapter가 정상 동작할 수 없는 환경이라고 보면 됨
    * AD 서버 상태를 먼저 확인해 볼 것
    
    ErrorCode : 1001
    * Err.FailToLoadIni
    * 서버에서 MFA 환경설정 INI 파일을 읽을 수 없음
    * 서버에 다음의 경로에 파일이 있는지 확인
    + C:\ ADFSadapter \ ADFSadapter.ini
    * 만일, 파일이 있다면, 파일 속성 또는 권한 확인
    
    ErrorCode : 1002
    * Err.FailToLoadHtml
    * 서버에서 HTML 파일을 읽을 수 없음
    * 서버에 다음의 경로에 파일이 있는지 확인
    + C:\ ADFSadapter \ Html_*.txt
    * 만일, 파일이 있다면, 파일 속성 또는 권한 확인
    * 1개라도 없으면 에러 발생함 → 어떤 것이 누락되었는지는 서버 이벤트 로그에서 알 수 있음
    
    ErrorCode : 1003
    * Err.FailToLdapSearch
    * "LDAP에서 사용자 정보를 가져올 수 없습니다."
    * LDAP 서버에 Query를 헀으나, AD 사용자 정보를 가져오지 못함
    * Token 구성에 mobile, email 정보가 필요한데, 이 정보들을 가져올때 실패하였음
    * mobile, email이 빈 값이어도 에러로 처리하지 않음
    * 그래서, 본 에러가 발생한 것은 LDAP Query 자체가 안된다고 보면 됨
    
    ErrorCode : 1004
    * Err.NoURLInRequest
    * "BeginAuthentication 함수의 request에 URL 정보가 없습니다."
    * Adapter 실행 초기에 실행되는 BeginAuthentication 함수의 인자 request에 URL 정보가 없음
    * URL 정보가 없으면, SingleID MFA API 서버가 GET 방식으로 전송한 response를 사용할 수 없음
    * SingleID MFA API 서버가 정상적으로 response를 보내는지 확인 필요
    
    ErrorCode : 1005
    * Err.FailToMakeJwtToken
    * "JWT token 생성을 할 수 없습니다."
    * GenerateRequestToken 함수가 token 생성에 실패하였음
    * 정확한 원인은 서버 이벤트 로그에서 확인
    
    ErrorCode : 1006
    * Err.CannotFindDirOrIni
    * "JWT token 생성을 할 수 없습니다."
    * ADFSadapter 디렉토리 또는 INI 파일을 찾을 수 없음
    * adapter 버전 1.2.0.6 부터 adapter 설치 위치가 C 드라이브 고정이 아닌 C to Z 드라이브 중의 한 곳에 설치할 수 있으며,
    + adapter는 C to Z 드라이브 스캔을 통해서 설치된 위치를 알아냄
    * [drive]:/ADFSadapter/ADFSadapter.ini 파일이 존재해야 함
    * 서버에 adapter 설치가 제대로 되었는지, 디렉토리명과 파일명이 정확한지 확인
    * 드라이브 억세스가 막혀있는지 확인
    
    ErrorCode : 2000
    * Err.TryEndHasNoAccount
    * "TryEndAuthentication()에 계정정보(account)가 없습니다."
    * TryEndAuthentication 단계로 넘어왔으나, 계정 정보를 알 수 없음
    * 이러한 경우는 절대 발생할 수 없음 (발생하였다면, 개발자에게 문의)
    
    ErrorCode : 2001
    * Err.NoStepInfo
    * MFA 진행 단계(step) 정보가 없음
    * 상세 정보와 원인은 서버의 이벤트 로그를 확인할 것
    
    ErrorCode : 2002
    * Err.InvalidStepInfo
    * MFA 진행 단계(step) 정보가 잘 못 되었음
    * 상세 정보와 원인은 서버의 이벤트 로그를 확인할 것
    

    Modify ADFS login page

    onload.js edit

    Background

    If multiple MFA methods are configured, the user will see a selection screen as shown below. If you are viewing the screen for the first time (MFA not yet completed), you need to make a selection on this screen.

    ADFS login page modification
    ADFS login page modification

    The issue is that after completing MFA, the selection screen is displayed again, and the user has to make the selection again. This creates a user inconvenience, and selecting a different MFA for the second option will lead to unintended results.

    After MFA is completed and the above selection screen appears, an automatic transition feature is needed. (auto submit) To achieve this, edit the contents of the onload.js file that already exists in ADFS. If it is not Multi MFA, editing the onload.js file is not required.

    File path

    It is located at the following path on the AD server.

    • Directory = C:/default_WebTheme/script
    • Filename = onload.js

    File Edit

    Add the script below at the end of the file content.

    Caution
    Do not copy and paste the Script Text from the example below. The multilingual message is not being entered properly in the Text below. You need to prepare a separate file that contains valid script text. onload.js must be saved as UTF-8.
    // ------------------------------------------ SingleID MFA : begin
    function singleidMfa() {
        var authOptions = document.getElementById('authOptions')
        if (authOptions) {
            var noticeflag = document.getElementById('mfaGreeting');
            var url = document.location.href;
            var isToken = url.indexOf('jwtTokenResponse');
            if (noticeflag && isToken < 1) {
                var browserLang = navigator.language || navigator.userLanguage;
                // 다국어 처리
                // 한국어
                if (lang == 'ko-KR' || lang == 'ko') {
                    document.getElementById('footerPlaceholder').innerHTML="<h3 style='font-weight: bold;'><br/> <br/> ※ 신규 복합인증솔루션 테스트 중 (13:00~15:00) <br/> &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp;'My Authentication Provider' 메뉴를 이용해주세요. </h3>";
                }
                // 중국어
                else if (lang == "zh" || lang.indexOf("zh-") > -1) {
                    document.getElementById('footerPlaceholder').innerHTML="<h3 style='font-weight: bold;'><br/> <br/> ※ 正在??新的?合??解?方案 (13:00~15:00) <br/> &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; ?登? 'My Authentication Provider' 菜?。 </h3>";
                }
                // 베트남어
                else if (lang == "vi") {
                    document.getElementById('footerPlaceholder').innerHTML="<h3 style='font-weight: bold;'><br/> <br/> ※ đang ki?m tra gi?i phap xac th?c k?t h?p m?i (13:00~15:00) <br/> &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Xin vui long đ?ng nh?p vao trinh đ?n 'My Authentication Provider'. </h3>";
                }
                // 스페인어
                else if (lang == "es" || lang.indexOf("es-") > -1) {
                    document.getElementById('footerPlaceholder').innerHTML="<h3 style='font-weight: bold;'><br/> <br/> ※ Prueba de una nueva solucion de autenticacion compleja (13:00~15:00) <br/> &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Inicie sesion en el menu 'My Authentication Provider'. </h3>";
                }
                // 영어
                else {
                    document.getElementById('footerPlaceholder').innerHTML="<h3 style='font-weight: bold;'><br/> <br/> ※ Testing a new MFA solution (13:00~15:00) <br/> &nbsp;&nbsp;&nbsp; Please use 'My Authentication Provider' menu. </h3>";
                }
            }
            var opt = document.getElementById('optionSelection');
            if (opt && isToken > 0) {
                opt.value = 'ADFSadapter';
                document.forms['options'].submit();
            }
        }
    }
    window.addEventListener('load', function () {
        singleidMfa();
    });
    // ------------------------------------------ SingleID MFA : end
    

    Script functionality

    • This applies when the page’s controls include authOptions.
    • This operates after the page load has fully completed. (Because executing before that causes an error)
    • Add to the load event using window.addEventListener (same as the window.onload event)
    • Case 1 : When mfaGreeting is present in the control and jwtTokenResponse is not in the URL, display a user guidance message according to the browser’s language settings (multilingual)
    • Case 2: If there is an optionSelection among the controls and the URL contains jwtTokenResponse, assign ADFSadapter to optionSelection and force the options form to submit.

    Cautions when adding scripts

    • To avoid affecting the existing script and to make management easier, placing it at the end of the script is safest.

    Apply onload.js

    Modify the onload.js file and apply the changes to enable ADFS Sign-in Page customization.

    Caution
    The malicious script includes commands that could trigger false positives, and some commands are shown differently from the ones you actually need to input. -ON-LOADScriptPath is actually the following command, so please avoid any confusion.

    Application Method

    Check Status

    PS> Get-AdfsWebConfig ## Check the applied (active) WebTheme PS> Get-AdfsWebTheme ## Check the list of generated WebThemes

    Apply theme

    Theme application method 1) Create a new one from the default theme

    PS> New-AdfsWebTheme -Name "custom_stg" -SourceName default  ## 새로운 WebTheme 생성
    PS> Set-AdfsWebTheme -TargetName "custom_stg" -Illustration @{Path="C:\adfs_Login_dev\illustration\image_0624\8.jpg"} -Logo @{Path="C:\adfs_Login_dev\images\logo.png"} -StyleSheet @{Path="C:\adfs_Login_dev\css\style.css"} -ON-LOADScriptPath "C:\adfs_Login_dev\script\ON-LOAD_new.js"  ## custom 한 js 파일 적용
    

    How to Apply Theme 2) Update from the Existing Theme

    PS> New-AdfsWebTheme -Name "custom_stg" -SourceName [전자테마]  ## 새로운 WebTheme 생성
    PS > Set-AdfsWebTheme -TargetName "custom_stg" -OnLoadScriptPath "C:\adfs_Login_dev\script\onload_stg.js"  ## custom 한 js 파일 적용
    
    Onload.js
    Figure. Theme applied

    ※ Theme application methods 1) and 2): server command screenshot. When organizing Confluence, the OnLoad command is automatically altered, so a screenshot is attached.

    PS> Set-AdfsWebConfig -ActiveThemeName "custom_stg"  ## 생성된 WebTheme 활성화
    

    Restore existing theme

    PS> Set-AdfsWebConfig -ActiveThemeName "default" ## 기존 WebTheme 활성화
    
    Reference

    A WebTheme can only apply one custom js file We also contacted Microsoft, but officially only one onload.js file can be applied, and the additional method we suggested does not work**

    “the ON-LOAD.js is an integrated part of the HTML (the last script in the body) which always executes when the ADFS Page is loaded
    There can be only one named ON-LOAD.JS per Web theme.
     
    What is possible though is that additional ('external') scripts can be loaded as part of the actual ON-LOAD.js execution
    
    let’s say in a specific part of your ON-LOAD.JS you want to load a bootstap.js which implements additional functionality
    you would firstly import that additional JS to the webpage as AdditionalFileResource //it should not be named ON-LOAD.js
    
    eg
    Set-AdfsWebTheme -TargetName custom -AdditionalFileResource @{Uri='/adfs/portal/script/bootstrap.js';path="c:\theme\script\bootstrap.js"}
    
    then you implement a loading functionality in the ON-LOAD.js which dynamically loads your additional script as needed”
    

    Reference Document
    http://www.javascriptkit.com/javatutors/loadjavascriptcss.shtml
    https://www.codeproject.com/Articles/5310336/Dynamically-Loading-a-JavaScript-File


    In other words, as stated in the official documentation, only one ON-LOAD.JS file can be applied to a single ADFS theme page. However, we presented that an additional file named bootstap.js can be applied on the same page using AdditionalFileResource.
    Reference

    Additional options can be applied when setting WebTheme

    • You can apply illustration, logo, stylesheet, and other items through options.
    PS> Set-AdfsWebTheme -TargetName "custom_stg" -Illustration @{Path="C:\adfs_Login_dev\illustration\image_0624\8.jpg"} -Logo @{Path="C:\adfs_Login_dev\images\logo.png"}
           -StyleSheet @{Path="C:\adfs_Login_dev\css\style.css"} -OnLoadScriptPath "C:\adfs_Login_dev\script\onload_stg.js" 
    

    Reference Document
    https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/powershell/module/adfs/set-adfswebtheme?view=windowsserver2022-ps

    Adapter display name change

    When applying multiple adapters and the user selects one, you can set the adapter’s display name to show it to the user (browser). By default, the name (Name) used when registering the Adapter is displayed.

    1. Before applying
      • Displayed to the user (browser) using the name used when registering the adapter.
    2. After applying
      • Displayed to the user (browser) as the Adapter’s display name
      • You can set different display names for each language.
    guide

    During testing, the language setting is applied in three options: Korean, English, and Global

    1. The display name of the Adapter changes according to the browser’s language (chrome://settings/languages, edge://settings/languages).
    2. For browser languages that start with en- such as English (United States) and English (United Kingdom), the English setting is applied. If Korean or a non‑English language is selected, the global setting is applied.
    3. Configuration method
      • Set the display name of ADFSadapter (new adapter name)
      • ko(Korean), en(English), unset(global) set to three locales
      Set-AdfsAuthenticationProviderWebContent -Name "ADFSadapter" -Locale ko -DisplayName "신규 ADFS 플러그인(ko)" -Description "신규 ADFS 플러그인 설명(ko)"
      Set-AdfsAuthenticationProviderWebContent -Name "ADFSadapter" -locale en -DisplayName "New ADFS Plugin (en)" -Description "New ADFS Plugin Description (en)"
      Set-AdfsAuthenticationProviderWebContent -Name "ADFSadapter" -DisplayName "New ADFS Plugin(global)" -Description "New ADFS Plugin Description(global)"
      
      • Set display name of MyAuthenticationProvider (existing Adapter name)
      • ko(Korean), en(English), unset(global) set to three locales
      Set-AdfsAuthenticationProviderWebContent -Name "MyAuthenticationProvider" -locale "ko" -DisplayName "기존 ADFS 플러그인(ko)" -Description "기존 ADFS 플러그인 설명 (ko)"
      Set-AdfsAuthenticationProviderWebContent -Name "MyAuthenticationProvider" -locale "en" -DisplayName "ADFS Plugin (en)" -Description "ADFS Plugin Description (en)"
      Set-AdfsAuthenticationProviderWebContent -Name "MyAuthenticationProvider"  -DisplayName "ADFS Plugin (global)" -Description "ADFS Plugin Description (global)"
      

    Locale ID: see the following reference [MS-OE376]; separate inquiry

    Tips related to ADFS Adapter

    Adapter registration and operation sequence summary

    • Adapter DLL → Register in the GAC area → Register in ADFS → Check the multi‑factor authentication method in ADFS management → Adapter operates when AD authentication requires MFA

    Tools required for managing adapters (gacutil.exe)

    • Tool for registering or unregistering the Adapter DLL in the AD FS server’s GAC.
    Reference

    What is GAC?

    It is an abbreviation for Global Assembly Cache, and the special cache GAC for sharing .NET assemblies across the entire machine is located in a directory named assembly under the Windows directory.

    • Assemblies installed in the GAC must be strongly-named assemblies.
    • A DLL must include the Version, Culture, and public key along with its name.
    • When a DLL is installed in the GAC, it takes priority at runtime.
    • Even when using the same DLL name, multiple versions can coexist.

    Register/Delete Adapter in GAC (using gacutil.exe)

    Usually used in cmd, but for convenience we use it in PowerShell (however, it must be used in the form .\gacutil.exe).

    • Register in GAC
    PS C:\ADFSadapter> .\gacutil.exe  /if  ADFSadapter.dll
    
    • Deleted from GAC → C:\ADFSadapter\ADFSadapter.dll file is not deleted
    PS C:\ADFSadapter> .\gacutil.exe  /u  ADFSadapter
    
    • Check whether it is registered in GAC
    PS C:\ADFSadapter> .\gacutil.exe  /l  ADFSadapter
    
    • DLL replacement order in the GAC
      1. Delete with gacutil.exe /u
      2. Replace the C:\ADFSadapter\ADFSadapter.dll file
      3. Register with gacutil.exe /if

    Register/Delete GAC Assembly in ADFS (PowerShell commands)

    • Register with ADFS First, check the Version, Culture, and public key information using the gacutil.exe /l option.
    PS C:\ADFSadapter> .\gacutil.exe /l ADFSadapter
    ADFSadapter, Version=1.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=3b3a799d949dc414, processorArchitecture=MSIL
              결과 문자열을 이용하여 TypeName 구성하고, AD FS에 등록
               ( TypeName의 앞부분은 ADFSadapter.AuthenticationAdapter 는 고정값 )
    
    PS C:\ADFSadapter> $typename = "ADFSadapter.AuthenticationAdapter, ADFSadapter, Version=1.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=3b3a799d949dc414, processorArchitecture=MSIL"
    PS C:\ADFSadapter> Register-AdfsAuthenticationProvider -TypeName $typename -Name "ADFSadapter" -Verbose
    
    • Delete from ADFS
    PS C:\ADFSadapter> Unregister-AdfsAuthenticationProvider -Name "ADFSadapter"
    
    • Check if it is registered in ADFS
    PS C:\ADFSadapter> Get-AdfsAuthenticationProvider
    
    • ADFS Adapter replacement order

      1. Disable multi-factor authentication method in ADFS management
      2. Unregister-AdfsAuthenticationProvider
      3. Restart ADFS service
      4. Replace the DLL in the GAC
      5. Register-AdfsAuthenticationProvider
      6. Restart ADFS service
      7. Set multi-factor authentication method in ADFS management

      The above step1) ~ step7) process can be automated with the replace_dll.ps1 script file.

    If the MFA feature does not work properly

    • AD account/password authentication unavailable
      → Since it is before the MFA stage, it is not related to the Adapter

    • Check adapter registration status
      → Verify that ADFS MFA Adapter is displayed when executing the Get-AdfsAuthenticationProvider command

    • Check AD FS configuration
      → Check that ADFS MFA Adapter is specified in Service > Authentication Methods > Multi-Factor Authentication Methods
      Service > Device Registration Check that it is configured
      Access Control Policy is configured to require MFA, verify this.

    • Check Adapter execution logs
      → Log location: Computer Management > System Tools > Event Viewer > Application and Services Logs > MFA_Adapter
      → Check if there are logs displayed as error
      → If an error occurs, forward the log details to the developer for analysis.

    5.2.1.6.2 - Adapter Configuration Guide

    Adapter Configuration Guide

    This is a description of the Adapter configuration file. Before applying the ADFS Adapter, you must first configure the environment.

    Caution

    adapter installation location changes

    Starting with adapter 1.2.0.6, installation is possible on drives other than the C drive.

    • Existing : Installed only at C:/ADFSadapter
    • Change : Install at the root of the C to Z drive
    • Example: C:/ADFSadapter , D:/ADFSadapter , E:/ADFSadapter , …… , Z:/ADFSadapter
    • Caution : It must be installed on only a single drive; if installed on multiple drives, the system scans from C to Z and uses the first directory found.

    The following example assumes the adapter is installed in the C:\ADFSadapter directory.
    If installed on a drive other than C, simply change the drive letter in the example below.

    • Example: If installed in D:\ADFSadapter, the ini path → D:\ADFSadapter\ADFSadapter.ini

    File name and path

    • File name: ADFSadapter.ini
    • Full path: C:\ADFSadapter\ADFSadapter.ini
    • File encoding: must be saved as UTF-8 (Korean characters may become garbled)

    Points to note

    * 값을 표현할때 "와" 를 사용할 수 있으며 = 좌우에 빈칸을 입력해도 됩니다.
    + Value 의 앞뒤에 있는 공백은 Trim 처리 됩니다.
    + 아래의 Value는 모두 동일함
    + 예1) MAIN_TITLE = DWP MFA Adapter
    + 예2) MAIN_TITLE = DWP MFA Adapter
    + 예3) MAIN_TITLE = "DWP MFA Adapter"
    + 예4) MAIN_TITLE = " DWP MFA Adapter "
    
    * 섹션 이름들 중에 뒷부분에 -1033, -1042 가 붙는 것들은 locale 을 의미합니다.
    + 최소한 1033 은 반드시 있어야 합니다.
    + locale number : 1033 (en-us), 1042 (ko)
    + locale section : MFA-1033, MFA-1042, TXT-1033, TXT-1042, MSG-1033, MSG-1042
    

    Example of ini file structure

    Among the example configuration values below, some values are masked for security purposes, and the actual values are not asterisks.

    # ADFS MFA Adapter 환경 설정
    # 설치위치 변경 사항
    #   - v1.2.0.6 이전 : C:\ADFSadapter\ADFSadapter.ini
    #   - v1.2.0.6 부터 : C 이외의 다른 드라이브에 설치할 수 있음 (adapter 리소스 설치한 위치와 동일)
    #     예시: C:\ADFSadapter\ADFSadapter.ini , D:\ADFSadapter\ADFSadapter.ini , E:\ADFSadapter\ADFSadapter.ini
    # 주의 : DLL 파일명은 ADFSadapter.dll 이며, 기존의 Nexsign 연계한 MFAadapter.dll과는 다름
    
    
    # 값을 표현할때 " 와 ' 를 사용할 수 있으며 = 좌우에 빈칸을 입력해도 됩니다
    # Value 의 앞뒤에 있는 공백은 Trim 처리 됩니다.
    # 아래의 Value는 모두 동일합니다.
    # 예1) MAIN_TITLE=ADFS MFA Adapter
    # 예2) MAIN_TITLE = ADFS MFA Adapter
    # 예3) MAIN_TITLE = "ADFS MFA Adapter"
    # 예4) MAIN_TITLE = "   ADFS MFA Adapter   "
    
    
    # 섹션 이름들 중에 뒷부분에 -1033, -1042 가 붙는 것들은 locale 을 의미합니다
    # 최소한 1033 은 반드시 있어야 합니다
    # locale number : 1033 (en-us), 1042 (ko)
    # locale section : MFA-1033, MFA-1042, TXT-1033, TXT-1042, MSG-1033, MSG-1042
    
    
    # LOG_LEVEL (Windows 이벤트 로그에 기록하는 기준)
    # 0 : Error
    # 1 : Error + Warning
    # 2 : Error + Warning + Information + Debug
    
    
    [MAIN]
    MAIN_MFA_TITLE="ADFS MFA Adapter"
    MAIN_CLAIM1=http://schemas.microsoft.com/ws/2008/06/identity/claims/authenticationmethod
    MAIN_CLAIM2=http://schemas.microsoft.com/ws/2012/12/authmethod/otp
    
    
    # MFA API 정보
    # URL 끝부분에 "/" 붙이지 말 것
    #MFA_API_URL="https://stg2-cloud.singleid.samsung.net/test/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/request"
    MFA_API_URL="https://stg1-cloud.singleid.samsung.net/test/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/request"
    CONSUMER_KEY="**************************************"
    SECRET_KEY="**************************************"
    
    
    # Donmain vs Consumer Key 리스트
    # 도메인별로 Consumer Key가 다른 경우에는 리스트로 나열 (이런 경우, 위의 CONSUMER_KEY 값을 비울 것)
    # Reqeust Token의 sys 값에 대입
    # 형태 : DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_##=domain;consumerKey
    # 예시: DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_01=aaa.com;**************************************
    #     DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_02=bbb.com;**************************************
    # (주의) CONSUMER_KEY 값과 리스트 값이 모두 있다면, CONSUMER_KEY 값만 사용함
    DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_01=aaa.com;**************************************
    DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_02=bbb.com;**************************************
    
    # Donmain vs Secret Key 리스트
    # 도메인별로 Secret Key가 다른 경우에는 리스트로 나열 (이런 경우, 위의 SECRET_KEY 값을 비울 것)
    # 형태 : DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_##=domain;secretKey
    # 예시: DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_01=aaa.com;**************************************
    #     DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_02=bbb.com;**************************************
    # (주의) SECRET_KEY 값과 리스트 값이 모두 있다면, SECRET_KEY 값만 사용함
    DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_01=aaa.com;**************************************
    DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_02=bbb.com;**************************************
    
    # LDAP Search 결과에 따른, MFA 진행 여부
    # 0 : LDAP Search를 하지 않음 (아래의 LDAP_SERVER, LDAP_USE_IDPW, ... 등의 정보 사용하지 않음. token에는 빈 값 대입)
    # 1 : LDAP Search를 시도하지만 실패해도 관계없음 (서버 실패, 정보 없음 등이 발생하여도 MFA 진행함. token에는 빈 값 대입)
    # 2 : LDAP Search가 성공 & 사용자 정보가 존재해야 함 (사용자 정보가 존재할 경우에만 진행함. 단, 결과 값이 빈 값이어도 진행함)
    USE_LDAP_SEARCH=1
    
    
    # LDAP 주소와 ID/PW
    # LDAP_SERVER는 domain, ipv4, ipv6 등의 3가지 모두 가능하며, 앞부분에 대문자 "LDAP://" 을 붙여야 함 (반드시 대문자)
    # 예시: LDAP://adpw5004.hw.dev , LDAP://70.2.180.218 , LDAP://fe80::644b:3c9f:c5ac:ce1c%10
    # ID/PW를 사용하려면 LDAP_USE_IDPW 값을 1, 사용하지 않으려면 LDAP_USE_IDPW 값을 0 으로 설정
    # SSL/TLS 사용하려면 LDAP_SSLTLS 값을 1, 사용하지 않으려면 LDAP_SSLTLS 값을 0 으로 설정 (단, LDAP_USE_IDPW=1 인 경우에만 해당)
    LDAP_SERVER="LDAP://adpw5004.hw.dev"
    LDAP_USE_IDPW=1
    LDAP_SSLTLS=1
    LDAP_ID="isadmin"
    LDAP_PW="sds*****"
    
    
    # DNS Lookup을 하여 LDAP 서버(LDAP_SERVER)의 IP 주소를 확인하고, IP 주소 기반으로 접속 여부
    # LDAP_SERVER 값이 IP(ipv4, ipv6)로 설정되어 있어도 DNS Lookup을 수행하며, IP 그대로 리턴됨
    # 만약, DNS Lookup을 실패하면, LDAP_SERVER 값 그대로 접속
    # 0 : LDAP_SERVER 값 그대로 서버에 접속 (DNS lookup 하지 않음)
    # 1 : DNS lookup으로 IP 주소를 확인하여 LDAP 서버에 접속 (DNS lookup 결과 리스트에서 첫번째 IP 사용)
    # 2 : DNS lookup으로 IP 주소를 확인하고, LDAP_WHITE_IP_## 리스트에서 가장 먼저 해당되는 IP를 사용 (리스트에 없으면, LDAP_SERVER 사용)
    # 3 : DNS lookup으로 IP 주소를 확인하고, LDAP_WHITE_IP_## 리스트에서 가장 먼저 해당되는 IP를 사용 (리스트에 없으면, LDAP 접속 안함)
    LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP=1
    
    
    # DNS Lookup 결과가 여러 개일때, 첫번째 IP 주소로 연결이 안되면 그 다음 IP 주소로 시도할지 여부
    # 예시: lookup 결과가 4개 : 1차 IP 연결 실패 -> 2차 IP 연결 시도 & 싪패 -> 3차 IP 연결 시도 & 싪패 -> 4차 IP 연결 시도
    LDAP_DNS_IF_FAIL_USE_NEXT=1
    
    
    # DNS Lookup 결과와 비교하는 접속 허용된 LDAP 서버 IP 리스트 (LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP = 2 or 3 인 경우에만 해당)
    # LDAP_WHITE_IP_## 형태이며, 01부터 99까지 순차적으로 기록
    # DNS Lookup 결과와 리스트를 순차적으로 비교
    # IPv4, IPv6 형태로 기록 (동일한 서버의 IPv4, IPv6가 있다면 리스트의 앞순위에 있는 IP가 적용됨)
    # DNS Lookup 결과 순서와 White IP 리스트 순서가 다르다면 -> White IP 리스트 순서를 따름
    LDAP_WHITE_IP_01="70.2.180.218"
    LDAP_WHITE_IP_02="fe80::644b:3c9f:c5ac:ce1c%10"
    
    
    # 사용자 정보를 암호화할지 여부 (예: mobile, email 등)
    # 대상 : USERINFO_## 리스트
    # 암호화 여부에 따라 API 서버에 전송하는 token의 claim 이름이 다름
    # 0 : 암호화 하지 않음 -> token의 claim 이름이 plainMobile, plainEmail
    # 1 : 암호화 -> token의 claim 이름이 mobile, email
    USERINFO_ENCRYPT=0
    
    
    # LDAP Search할 사용자 정보 attribute name과 JWT token에 사용할 claim name (2개 값을 구분하는 delimeter = ";")
    # 형태: USERINFO_## = attribute;encryptedClaim;plainClaim
    #   예시: LDAP에서 "mail" 속성을 읽어서, JWT에 "email" claim으로 사용된다면 -> "mail;email;plainEmail"
    # key 명칭은 "USERINFO_##" 형태로 하고, 시작은 USERINFO_01
    # key 갯수 : 0개 ~ 최대 99개 (0개인 경우, ini에 아무것도 적지 않으면 되며, USERINFO_00 이라고 적지 말 것)
    # 주의사항) USERINFO_##에서 ## 에 해당되는 숫자는 반드시 01부터 시작하며, 여러 개인 경우 번호가 끊어지지 않아야 함
    #           USERINFO_01, USERINFO_02, USERINFO_03 : OK (01, 02, 03 정보가 사용됨)
    #           USERINFO_01, USERINFO_02, USERINFO_05 : 02까지 읽고, 끊어진 번호 이후는 사용하지 않음 (01, 02 정보가 사용됨)
    USERINFO_01=mobile;mobile;plainMobile
    USERINFO_02=mail;email;plainEmail
    
    
    # MFA API 서버가 Callback 해줄때, 결과 Parameter에 사용되는 Key 이름
    # 예시: https://adpw5004.hw.dev/adfs/ls?client-request-id=xxxxxx&pullStatus=0&jwtTokenResponse=yyyyyy
    KEY_NAME_IN_RESPONSE="jwtTokenResponse"
    
    
    # JWT Token의 exp에 적용될 더하기 값
    # 형테 : 일시분초(dhms) 형태의 문자열 -> 1d=86400, 1h=3600, 1m=60 (dhms 가 전혀 없는 단순 숫자는 초로 판단함)
    # 예시1 : 1d02h38m27s -> 95907 초
    # 예시2 : 12345 -> 12345 초
    TOKEN_EXP_TIME=1d
    
    
    # API 호출할때 구성하는 token에 client claim을 추가할지 여부
    # client : SAML인 경우 issuer, OIDC인 경우 client-id
    # 0 : token에 client 포함시키지 않음
    # 1 : token에 client 포함
    TOKEN_CLAIM_CLIENT=0
    
    
    # MFA nonce(guid, requset-id) 검증 방법
    # 0 : 검증 안함
    # 1 : adapter가 생성한 guid를 LDAP에 저장/비교하는 방식 (adapter가 검증)
    #     -> 관련 설정 값 : CACHE_ATTRIBUTE, CACHE_DELIMETER, SKEW_SECONDS, CACHE_LIFE_TIME
    # 2 : API 서버가 생성한 requeset-id를 adapter가 받아서 호출 URL에 사용하는 방식 (API 서버가 검증)
    #     -> 관련 설정 값 : MFA_VERIFY_URL
    MFA_VERIFY_TYPE=2
    
    
    # MFA 결과검증 URL (서버 to 서버 통신) : URL 뒷부분에 API 서버로부터 받은 {request-id}를 덧붙여서 호출함
    # adapter는 리턴 200 (OK) 인지 확인하여 MFA 결과 처리
    # URL 끝부분에 "/" 붙이지 말 것
    MFA_VERIFY_URL="https://stg1-cloud.iam.samsung.net/test/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/request/status"
    
    
    # MFA 결과검증할때 사용할 보안 프로토콜
    # 선택 가능한 프로토콜 (대소문자 구분 없음) : TLS12, TLS13
    # (주의) SSL3, TLS, TLS11 은 사용하지 않음
    MFA_VERIFY_SECURE_PROTOCOL="TLS12"
    
    
    # 사용자의 req guid 값을 저장할 LDAP attribute의 이름
    # (주의) LDAP에 write 권한이 있어야 함
    CACHE_ATTRIBUTE="otherPager"
    
    
    # LDAP에 저장하는 req + 시간 정보를 조합할때 사용하는 delimeter -> "req;시간"
    CACHE_DELIMETER=";"
    
    
    # LDAP에 저장된 req의 시간과 JWT 수신시 시간의 차이 허용치 (초단위)
    # MFA 선택화면 누를 때가 아니라, AD 로그인 직후의 시간이므로 (MFA 선택화면 보일때 이미 시간이 저장되었음)
    # 사용자가 MFA 선택화면 누르고 Passcode 입력할 때까지의 시간이 아님
    # 따라서, tight 하게 시간을 설정하면 안되며, 1시간 정도가 적당?? (MFA 선택을 1시간 고민하는 사람이 있나?)
    SKEW_SECONDS=3600
    
    
    # LDAP에 저장된 req의 수명 -> 다음 access시 시간 확인해서 이전의 오래된 것들 삭제
    # 형태 : 일시분초(dhms) 형태의 문자열 -> 1d=86400, 1h=3600, 1m=60 (dhms 가 전혀 없는 단순 숫자는 초로 판단함)
    # 예시1 : 1d02h38m27s -> 95907 초
    # 예시2 : 12345 -> 12345 초
    CACHE_LIFE_TIME=1d
    
    
    # Adapter 기능을 ByPass 할 것인지 여부 (0=정상 사용, 283901=무력화, 그 외 값들=정상 사용)
    # MFA 기능 문제로 급하게 adapter 기능의 무력화가 필요한 비상 상황에서 사용
    # 평상시에는 절대로 수정하지 말 것 -> 평상시 값은 0
    # 주의 : 무력화하려면 반드시 정확한 값을 설정해야 함 (0 이외의 숫자가 해당되는 것이 아니며 정확한 숫자 필요함. noise 우려)
    BYPASS_ADAPTER=0
    
    
    [API]
    API_SYSTEMNAME=SingleID
    
    
    [MSG-1033]
    MSG_INTERNAL_ERROR="Internal error occurred. Contact administrator."
    
    
    [MSG-1042]
    MSG_INTERNAL_ERROR="Internal error occurred. Contact administrator."
    
    
    [MANAGE]
    LOG_LEVEL=2
    

    Configuration value description

    • Fixed value : It means that the value displayed in the Setting Value column of the table below is used as-is when installing on the ADFS server.
    • If you want to add languages other than English and Korean, you can add them for two sections.
      • MSG-1033, MSG-1042
    dssKeyConfiguration values (example)Fixed valueExplanation
    MAINMAIN_MFA_TITLEADFS MFA AdapterOHTML page title (no impact on MFA functionality)
    MAIN_CLAIM1http://schemas.microsoft.com/ws/2008/06/identity/claims/authenticationmethodOApply the left value exactly as is
    MAIN_CLAIM2http://schemas.microsoft.com/ws/2012/12/authmethod/otpOApply the left value exactly as is
    MFA_API_URLhttps://stg2-cloud.singleid.samsung.net/test/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/requestSingleID MFA API URL
    • since it can vary depending on the tenant, you must verify the exact URL value
    CONSUMER_KEY4312a8b9-75c4-7897-89a7-89347f18943eConsumer Key issued by SingleID
    SECRET_KEYgQgkyLVO6FR8vJkLtlgBiupsRM/ilgrbEfoKWRnhALd=Secret Key issued by SingleID
    • used for JWT Signautre verification
    • External disclosure prohibited
    DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_014312a8b9-75c4-7897-89a7-89347f18943eDomain vs Consumer Key list
    • If the Consumer Key differs per domain, list them (in this case, leave the CONSUMER_KEY value above empty)
    • Format: DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_##=domain;consumerKey
    • Example:
      DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_01=aaa.com;4312a8b9-75c4-7897-89a7-89347f18943e
      DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_02=bbb.com;96567780-2b12-23da-637c-9375a6502d5a
    • (Note) If both the CONSUMER_KEY value and the list values are present, use only the CONSUMER_KEY value.
    DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_0296567780-2b12-23da-637c-9375a6502d5a
    DOMAIN_CONSUMER_KEY_##367c89d5-88f7-978a-9739-8ed21748f36b
    DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_01gQgkyLVO6FR8vJkLtlgBiupsRM/ilgrbEfoKWRnhALd=Domain vs Secret Key list
    • If the Secret Key differs per domain, list them (in this case, clear the above SECRET_KEY value)
    • Format: DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_##=domain;secretKey
    • Example:
      DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_01=aaa.com;gQgkyLVO6FR8vJkLtlgBiupsRM/ilgrbEfoKWRnhALd=
      DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_02=bbb.com;kgkWRnLygQhsRgrLVbtKlO6FiLdABupEgoMR8v/ilfJ=
    • (Note) If both the SECRET_KEY value and the list value exist, use only the SECRET_KEY value
    DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_02kgkWRnLygQhsRgrLVbtKlO6FiLdABupEgoMR8v/ilfJ=
    DOMAIN_SECRET_KEY_##dABupkRnLygQhsrLgWVRbt8vRgkLilLKlO1FioMgfJE=
    USE_LDAP_SEARCH0 or 1 or 2Whether to proceed with MFA based on LDAP Search results
    • 0 : Do not perform LDAP Search (do not use information such as LDAP_SERVER, LDAP_USE_IDPW, etc. Assign an empty value to the token)
    • 1 : Attempt LDAP Search but failure does not matter (proceed with MFA even if server failure, missing information, etc. Assign an empty value to the token)
    • 2 : LDAP Search succeeds & user information must exist (proceed only if user information exists. However, proceed even if the result value is empty)
    LDAP_SERVERLDAP://adpw5004.hw.devLDAP address that can query AD user information
    • All three of domain, ipv4, ipv6 are supported, and you must prepend “LDAP://” at the beginning.
    LDAP_USE_IDPW0 or 1Whether to use id/pw when connecting to LDAP
    • Since the adapter operates with system privileges, it is typical for LDAP connections to work without id/pw, but there are cases where this is not true.
    • If the system is configured to connect without id/pw and an AD connection error appears in the event log, you need to configure it to connect using id/pw.
    • If this value is set to 1, you must set LDAP_ID and LDAP_PW.
    LDAP_SSLTLS0 or 1Whether to use SSL/TLS when connecting to LDAP
    • Set to use by default
    LDAP_IDLDAP connection IDLDAP connection ID (when LDAP_USE_IDPW=1)
    LDAP_PWLDAP connection pwLDAP connection password (when LDAP_USE_IDPW=1)
    LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP0 or 1 or 2 or 3Perform a DNS lookup to obtain the IP address of the LDAP server (LDAP_SERVER) and determine connection based on the IP address
    • 0: Connect to the server using the LDAP_SERVER value as is (no DNS lookup)
    • 1: Perform a DNS lookup to obtain the IP address and connect to the LDAP server (use the first IP from the DNS lookup result list)
    • 2: Perform a DNS lookup to obtain the IP address and use the first matching IP from the LDAP_WHITE_IP_## list (if not found, use LDAP_SERVER)
    • 3: Perform a DNS lookup to obtain the IP address and use the first matching IP from the LDAP_WHITE_IP_## list (if not found, do not connect to LDAP)
    LDAP_DNS_IF_FAIL_USE_NEXT0 or 1When there are multiple DNS lookup results, whether to try the next IP address if the first IP address fails to connect
    • Example: lookup results are 4: 1st IP connection failure -> 2nd IP attempt & failure -> 3rd IP attempt & failure -> 4th IP attempt
    LDAP_WHITE_IP_0170.2.180.218LDAP server IP list allowed for connection compared with DNS Lookup results (applicable only when LDAP_DNS_LOOKUP = 2 or 3)
    • In the form LDAP_WHITE_IP_##, recorded sequentially from 01 to 99
    • Compare DNS Lookup results with the list sequentially
    • Recorded in IPv4 or IPv6 format (if the same server has both IPv4 and IPv6, the IP appearing earlier in the list is applied)
    • If the order of DNS Lookup results differs from the White IP list order → follow the White IP list order
    LDAP_WHITE_IP_02fe80::644b:3c9f:c5ac:ce1c%10
    LDAP_WHITE_IP_##A. : 01 ~ 99
    White IP address (IPv4 or IPv6)
    USERINFO_ENCRYPT0 or 1Whether to encrypt user information (e.g., mobile, email, etc.)
    • Target: USERINFO_## list
      • The claim name in the token sent to the API server varies depending on encryption status
      • 0: No encryption -> token claim names are plainMobile, plainEmail
      • 1: Encryption -> token claim names are mobile, email
    USERINFO_01mobile;mobile;plainMobileOThe attribute name of user information to search in LDAP and the claim name to use in the JWT token (delimiter separating the three values = “;”)
    • Format: USERINFO_## = attribute;encryptedClaim;plainClaim
    • Example: If you read the “mail” attribute from LDAP and use the encrypted value as the “email” claim and the plain value as the “plainEmail” claim in the JWT, then → “mail;email;plainEmail”
    USERINFO_02mail;email;plainEmailO
    USERINFO_##A. : 01 ~ 99
    [LDAP attribute name];[encrypted token claim name];[plain token claim name]
    KEY_NAME_IN_RESPONSEjwtTokenResponseOWhen the MFA API server performs a callback, the key name used in the result parameters
    TOKEN_EXP_TIME1dThe additive value applied to the JWT token’s exp
    • A string in day-hour-minute-second (dhms) format
      1d=86400, 1h=3600, 1m=60
    • A plain number without any dhms is interpreted as seconds
    • Example 1: 1d02h38m27s → 95907 seconds
      Example 2: 12345 → 12345 seconds
    TOKEN_CLAIM_CLIENT0 or 1Whether to add a client claim to the token configured when calling the API
    • client: issuer for SAML, client-id for OIDC
    • 0: Do not include client in the token
    • 1: Include client in the token
    MFA_VERIFY_TYPE0 or 1 or 2MFA nonce (guid, request-id) verification methods
    • 0: No verification
    • 1: Store and compare the guid generated by the adapter in LDAP (adapter performs verification) → related configuration values: CACHE_ATTRIBUTE, CACHE_DELIMETER, SKEW_SECONDS, CACHE_LIFE_TIME
    • 2: The adapter receives the request-id generated by the API server and uses it in the call URL (API server performs verification) → related configuration value: MFA_VERIFY_URL
    MFA_VERIFY_URLhttps://stg1-cloud.iam.samsung.net/test/common-api/open/v1.1/mfa/request/statusMFA verification URL (server-to-server communication): Append the {request-id} received from the API server to the end of the URL and call it → the adapter checks that the return is 200 (OK) to process the MFA result
    • Do not append a ‘/’ at the end of the URL
    MFA_VERIFY_SECURE_PROTOCOLTLS12 or TLS13Security protocol to use when verifying MFA results
    • Selectable protocols (case-insensitive): TLS12, TLS13
    • (Note) Do not use SSL3, TLS, TLS11
    CACHE_ATTRIBUTEotherPagerOName of the LDAP attribute that stores the user’s req guid value
    CACHE_DELIMETER;Delimiter used when combining the req and time information stored in LDAP -> “req;time”
    SKEW_SECONDS3600Allowed time difference (in seconds) between the request time stored in LDAP and the time the JWT is received
    • It is measured right after AD login, not when the MFA selection screen is pressed (the time is already recorded when the MFA screen appears)
    • It does not include the period until the user presses the MFA selection screen and enters the passcode
    • Therefore, the time should not be set too tightly; about one hour is appropriate ?? (Does anyone really spend an hour deciding on MFA?)
    CACHE_LIFE_TIME1dLifetime of req stored in LDAP -> check the time on the next access and delete the older ones
    • String in day-hour-minute-second (dhms) format
      1d=86400, 1h=3600, 1m=60
      (A plain number without dhms is interpreted as seconds)
    BYPASS_ADAPTER0 or 283901Whether to bypass the Adapter function (0 = normal operation, 283901 = disable, other values = normal operation)
    • Used in emergency situations where the adapter function must be quickly disabled due to MFA issues
    • Never modify under normal conditions -> normal value is 0
    • Note: To disable, you must set the exact value (any number other than 0 is not valid; a precise number is required. Concern about noise)
    APIAPI_SYSTEMNAMESingleIDO(No impact on MFA functionality)
    MSG-1033MSG_INTERNAL_ERRORInternal error occurred. Contact administrator.Message displayed to the user when the process stops due to authentication interruption, error occurrence, etc. (English)
    MSG-1042MSG_INTERNAL_ERRORInternal error occurred. Contact administrator.Message displayed to the user when the process stops due to authentication interruption, error occurrence, etc. (Korean)
    • An error occurs if you enter Korean, so please enter in English.
    MANAGELOG_LEVEL0 or 1 or 2Criteria for recording in the Windows Event Log
    • 0 = Record only errors
    • 1 = Record errors + warnings
    • 2 = Record errors + warnings + informational messages, etc.
    Table. Explanation of setting values

    5.3 - Release Note

    SingleID

    2026.05.21
    FEATURE Add AI agent registration and management feature, add 3rd‑party TOTP authenticator method, add SMS provider (InfoBank)
    • Add AI agent registration and management functionality
      • AI agent registration and configuration features for authentication between the MCP server and MCP client have been added.
      • The features for registering information, generating authentication key values, and retrieving information for AI agent authentication have been newly added.
    • Add 3rd Party TOTP Authenticator support
      • A TOTP authentication method registration/setting feature has been added to support 3rd Party Authenticators such as Google Authenticator and Microsoft Authenticator in the Admin Portal.
      • A feature has been added that allows users to register or delete a 3rd Party TOTP Authenticator in the User Portal and MFA Portal.
    • New SMS Provider (InfoBank) added
      • You can register and use the Infobank SMS service, an external SMS service provider.
    2026.05.21
    CHANGED Improved admin authentication delegation functionality, enhanced security, improved SingleID Authenticator, support for console access control, expanded CSP, and other feature improvements
    • Improved admin authentication delegation feature
      • When no authentication method is available for identity verification, we have enhanced the system so that the admin authentication delegation feature can be applied when 1) registering an authentication method or 2) attempting to log in.
      • You can register a list of authentication delegation administrators in the JWT Token.
      • Enhanced to allow the authentication delegation manager list to be registered in SCP Cloud Object Storage and utilized.
      • The detailed MFA SP configuration feature has been added in the Admin Portal.
        • Whether to perform delegated authentication at login
        • Whether to perform verification during registration when no authentication method is registered.
        • Use of SCP Cloud Object Storage
        • Select user information update method when running MFA
        • Select whether to automatically add Knox Messenger as an authentication factor when executing MFA.
    • Security improvement
      • Personal information fields (name, email, mobile phone number) are now stored encrypted.
      • In admin screens such as TAP, searching personal information fields (name, email, mobile phone number) has been changed from Like to Exact search, and the existing sorting function has been removed.
    • SingleID Authenticator improvement
      • When retrieving authentication methods for SingleID Authenticator, a feature to view detailed information (OS version, browser, and IP) has been added.
      • The process has been improved so that when SingleID Authenticator information is deleted on the authentication server, the authentication server (tenant) information is also removed from the user app.
      • The registration failure error that occurred when registering biometric data in PIN registration mode has been resolved.
    • Expanded CSP support for console access control
      • Support CSP for console access control has been expanded from the existing AWS, Azure, Samsung Cloud Platform (KR EAST1 region, KR WEST1 region) to GCP.
    • Other functional improvements
      • Maintained overall UI/UX consistency of the Admin Portal/User Portal and improved usability.
      • We improved it so that when a user accesses the SingleID service via a mobile device’s browser and authenticates, the appropriate mobile keypad (default, password, numeric, email keyboard) is automatically selected based on the attributes of the input data on the authentication screen.
      • When creating or editing a SAML-type application, we removed the unnecessary input restriction (Issuer setting).
      • Improved the usability and security of the CAM Portal.
        • Added a masking feature for sensitive information (Password, Key).
        • Users assigned the PM/PL role can now modify the IP/Port of registered resources, improving usability.
        • When resource registration fails, we have improved it to provide information about the failure status based on a checklist.
        • When registering resources, it has been improved to allow registering multiple resources at once and to support PEM key registration.
        • After the resource connection expires, we improved usability so that clicking the Rotation button allows you to easily refresh the expired OTP connection information.
        • Improved usability to display the Account ID information when submitting approval for a permission request to access resources.
    2025.11.04
    FEATURE Add console access history log monitoring feature, expand CSP support for console access control, improve notice feature, improve approval system feature, improve batch scheduler management feature, improve CAM system user role management feature, improve system global variable management feature
    • Add console access history log monitoring feature
      • You can view and download console access logs.
    • Expand CSP support for console access control
      • Support CSP for console access control has been expanded from the existing AWS to Azure and Samsung Cloud Platform (KR EAST1 region, KR WEST1 region).
    • Notice feature improvement
      • The feature that allows registering and managing notices per tenant has been improved.
    • Improvement of the approval system functionality
      • We added a self‑managed approval system feature to the existing approval function based on the Knox approval system.
    • Improved batch scheduler management functionality
      • The batch scheduler management feature has been enhanced to allow viewing execution results and details, and to enable immediate execution.
    • Improvement of CAM system user role management functionality
      • The CAM system has been improved to allow creating, listing, viewing, and detailing user roles for the system itself.
    • System-wide global variable management feature improvement
      • The system-wide variable management functionality for the CAM system itself has been improved.
    • Other convenience improvements
      • PM/PL authorized users can change the IP of an already enrolled resource (no need to re‑enroll the resource).
      • Improved the multi-select functionality when searching User, Role, and Policy (preserves previously added items during multiple selections).
      • Improved to allow navigation to the detailed pages for Role/Policy/Account from the Console Access menu.
      • The Manual, Release Note, and FAQ URLs have been changed to the SCP Documentation URL.
    2025.10.23
    FEATURE Add admin delegation feature, Add approval status menu to dashboard, Add member registration status menu to dashboard, Add user campaign feature, Add dormant account policy feature, Add user lifecycle management feature, Add rebranding feature to login page, Improve simple authentication feature, Add user security enhancement feature, Improve user profile attribute setting feature, Add application entitlement (Entitlement) management feature
    • Add admin delegation feature
      • A feature has been added that allows delegating identity verification to an administrator. * This feature is available only for MFA products.
    • Add approval status menu to the dashboard
      • A feature has been added to the dashboard that allows managing users’ approval requests and statuses.
    • Add a sign‑up status menu to the dashboard
      • A feature has been added to the dashboard that allows managing users’ sign‑up status.
    • Add user campaign feature
      • A campaign feature that recommends registering additional authentication methods has been added when only one user authentication method is registered.
    • Add dormant account policy feature
      • Added features for dormant user settings, alarm dispatch configuration, exception user registration, long-term dormant users, and dormant self-recovery settings.
    • Add user lifecycle management feature
      • During sign-up and user registration, features for setting user defaults, configuring user account expiration periods, and defining approval policies have been added.
    • Add rebranding functionality to the login page
      • A feature has been added that allows changing the top and bottom logos, key visual images, and text in the Admin Portal.
      • Redirection functionality for the sign‑up page settings, bottom privacy policy, terms of service, and similar items has been added.
    • Improved simple authentication feature
      • Mobile Passkey, security key, and Windows PIN code have been added as convenient authentication methods for easy login.
    • Add user security enhancement feature
      • A conditional authentication policy feature has been added that requires additional identity verification when only one authentication method is used for an extended period.
    • User profile attribute setting feature improvement
      • You can further expand and apply the user’s personal information attributes.
    • Add application entitlement (Entitlement) management feature
      • Synchronize application permissions to manage application access for users and groups.
    • Other convenience improvements
      • Improved the process when the authentication session timeout expires.
      • Improved the app access process in the mobile app.
      • We have improved the screen for mobile app download.
      • Improved the application registration/edit screen (field modifications, mapping screen enhancements, etc.).
      • Improved the Identity Providers registration/edit screen (added/modified fields)
      • Added a user mobile app (device) reset feature.
      • Added a feature to set a prefix text when sending SMS.
      • Improved the image upload screen and process.
    2025.07.01
    NEW Official release of SingleID service
    • We have launched the SingleID service, which integrates various access environments so that users can log into business systems with a single ID, and enables administrators to easily control access.

    6 - WAF

    6.1 - Overview

    Service Overview

    WAF(Web Application Firewall) is a service that safely protects web applications by monitoring website traffic and blocking threat events. It quickly detects and blocks HTTP, HTTPS-based security threats that target website vulnerabilities.

    Samsung Cloud Platform WAF is SECaaS‑based, and all user traffic passes through a SECaaS PoP before reaching the server. When attack traffic arrives, it is analyzed by SECaaS Rules, detected and blocked, and only clean traffic is forwarded to the server. Additionally, the service is provided from a nearby PoP based on the user’s connection country, and if a PoP fails, service is offered from another PoP within the same country or region.

    Features

    • Powerful detection/blocking: Monitor HTTP and HTTPS traffic of user‑registered domains to detect hacker attack attempts in real time. Analyze web firewall events to classify attacks such as Injection, XSS, Bot, Remote File Inclusion, and provide various defense capabilities needed for web security, including protection against bot attacks and various CVE vulnerabilities (Apache Struts, Log4j, etc.), enabling immediate response to emerging web attack types.
    • Stable Web Service Operation: Perform web firewall signature pattern updates, and detect emerging web threats such as the top 10 OWASP (Open Web Application Security Project) attacks, Zero-Day attacks, and hacker attempts, to support efficient and reliable web service operation.
    • Convenient Security Management: By monitoring various attack events in real time and notifying the customer’s representative, it enables proactive response to security threats. Additionally, detailed alert information about attacks (attack IP, target domain, detection time, etc.) can be conveniently viewed through the dashboard.

    Service Architecture Diagram

    Diagram
    Figure. WAF operation method

    Provided features

    We provide the following features.

    • Intrusion detection and response via monitoring of registered URLs
      • Attack classification through web firewall event analysis (Injection, XSS, Bot, Remote File Inclusion, etc.)
      • Block attack traffic targeting registered URLs
      • 24x365 event monitoring
      • Precise security Rule creation and application through Customizing
      • Supports various response settings (IP, request blocking, redirect, rewrite, rate limit, CAPTCHA, etc.)
    • Web firewall operation
      • Automatic updates of security threats (e.g., signature patterns) collected by TI and firmware updates
      • Web firewall ACL management
      • Flexible White List implementation (IP, Network, URL, country-based access control)
    • Dashboard and Report screens (attack types, target IP, alarm list, etc.) provided

    Component

    domain

    SECaaS WAF is registered on a per-domain basis.

    • It can only be applied to domains served with an FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name); if the service is provided using an IP address instead of a domain, SECaaS WAF cannot be applied.
    • Registration is allowed only for domains registered in the public DNS, and after verifying domain integrity via DNS lookup, it cannot be used when registering a private internal IP.
    • It applies to traffic that uses HTTP/HTTPS protocols based on web applications, and other TCP traffic is dropped and cannot be used.

    Traffic

    Traffic is aggregated as the total Mbps of each registered domain between the SECaaS WAF and the Origin server.

    Constraints

    To use WAF, first verify the following items.

    • Domain Use
      • It can be applied only when the service uses an FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name). If the service is provided via an IP address instead of a website URL, WAF cannot be applied.
      • Registration is possible only for domains registered in the public DNS. The WAF is located in the external Internet segment and verifies domain integrity via DNS lookup. (Registration with an internal private IP such as 10.10.10.10 makes WAF usage unavailable.)
    • Use HTTP/HTTPS
      • Only traffic using the HTTP/HTTPS protocol for web applications is accepted.
      • TCP traffic that uses protocols other than http/https is dropped, so WAF cannot be used.
    • XFF(X-Forwarded-For) header function Enable required
      • SECaaS WAF has the XFF header feature enabled by default. If the XFF header feature is disabled, a session termination issue may occur.
    • Client Source IP Change
      • When forwarding a user request from the SECaaS WAF to the customer system, the Source IP is changed from the user’s original public IP to an IP range owned by the WAF. The original user public IP is delivered via the XFF header.
    • Maximum Upload Size Limit
      • The maximum uploadable file size is limited to 500 MB. (If the file exceeds 500 MB, separate agreement is required.)

    Provision status by region

    WAF is available in the environments below.

    RegionProvision status
    Korea West (kr-west1)Provided
    Korea East (kr-east1)Provided
    South Korea South 1 (kr-south1)Not provided
    South Korea South 2 (kr-south2)Not provided
    South Korea South 3 (kr-south3)Not provided
    Table. WAF regional availability status

    Prior Service

    This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before applying for the service. For details, refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance.

    Service CategoryServiceDetailed description
    ComputeVirtual ServerVirtual server optimized for cloud computing
    Table. WAF pre-service

    6.2 - How-to guides

    Users can create the service by entering the required information to obtain the WAF service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Create WAF

    You can create and use a WAF service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    To request the creation of a WAF service, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > WAF menu. You will be taken to the WAF’s Service Home page.

    2. On the Service Home page, click the WAF Service Request button. Navigate to the Support Center > Service Request List > Service Request page.

    3. On the Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.

      • Select WAF creation for the task type.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: WAF Service Creation Request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • automatically entered with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect the service category and service. If you click the WAF service request button, it is entered automatically
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: WAF
        Task classificationSelect the Activity you want to request
        • Create WAF: select when requesting a new service
        contentGuide to the service application process and reference information
        AttachmentUpload the completed WAF service application (required) and, if you have any additional files you want to share, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif files are allowed
        Table. WAF Service Creation Request Items
    4. After reviewing the application process and reference information, download the form > click the Service Request Form Download button to download the WAF Service Application Form.

    5. Please fill out the WAF Service Application.

      • Please refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs and complete the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationComplete required fields such as application type, usage period, and usage amount.
        Control informationComplete required items such as migration schedule, domain, and secure recipient information
        • Complete all items except for special notes
        Table. Main contents of the WAF service creation request form
    6. Attach the completed application form in the attachment area.

    7. Click the request button on the service request page.

      • When the request is completed, check the submitted details on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
    8. After the monitoring personnel review the submitted service request, they proceed with the process to use the service.

      • The monitoring officer is contacting you via email to proceed with opening the firewall, SECaaS domain authentication, and certificate deployment.
      • Please refer to Applying WAF Service and proceed with the monitoring integration.
      • We confirm the monitoring integration by conducting a test at the security monitoring center (securitycenter@samsung.com).
      • Perform a final check to confirm normal service access and detect any SSL certificate errors.
    9. The WAF service is being launched.

    Check WAF detailed information

    Detailed WAF information can be accessed on the separate Security Platform(SSMP).

    VM list

    1. Security Platform(SSMP) Please access it.
    2. Enter Knox login information.
    3. Assets > Cloud Monitoring Management > Cloud URL List page, verify the SECaaS deployment status. You can enter the required fields to perform a query.
      Item
      Detailed description
      Business UnitSelect the appropriate business unit
      Business nameSelect the magnifying glass icon, then search for and enter the corresponding business name.
      website URLEnter URL
      SECaaS implementationSelect whether to apply SECaaS (Apply/Do not apply)
      SECaaS modeSelect SECaaS mode (block/detect)
      SECaaS vendorSelect SECaaS vendor (None/Imperva/Cloudflare)
      PlatformInput with SCP
      Deletion status
      Table. Search items
    4. When you click individual URL, you can view the URL details.
      SECaaS status
      Detailed description
      Apply (Detection)SECaaS applied state, conduct attack pattern detection and log analysis
      • Recommend maintaining detection mode for at least one month, and after analyzing false positives/negatives for at least one month, send an email recommending switching to blocking mode
      Apply (Block)SECaaS applied state, automatic blocking of detected attacks
      Not appliedState where SECaaS is not applied
      Table. SECaaS implementation status

    Terminate WAF

    To request termination of the WAF service, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Management > Support Center menu. Go to the Support Center > Service Home page.
    2. On the Support Center Service Home page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request List page.
    3. On the Service Request List page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request page.
    4. On the Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
      • Select WAF termination as the operation type.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: WAF Service Termination Request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • Automatically filled with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect service category and service
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: WAF
        Task classificationSelect the Activity you want to request
        • WAF termination: select if you are requesting service termination
        contentGuide to the service application process and reference information
        AttachmentIf you have a completed WAF service application (required) and any additional files you wish to share, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, and tif files are allowed
        Table. Table. WAF service termination request items
    5. After reviewing Application Process and Notes, click the Form Download > Service Request Form Download button to download the WAF Service Application Form.
    6. Please complete the WAF Service Application.
      • Refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs and complete the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationFill in required fields such as request type, usage period, and usage amount
        • Usage amount does not need to be filled in
        Monitoring informationComplete required items such as migration schedule, domain, and secure recipient information
        • Complete all items except for special notes
        Table. Main contents of WAF service termination request form
    7. Attach the completed application form to the attachment area.
    8. Click the Request button on the service request page.
      • After the request is completed, verify the submitted information on the Support Center > Service Request list page.
    9. After the monitoring staff verifies the submitted service request, the termination process is completed once the URL is deleted.
      • Service termination takes 2–3 business days (including the cancellation request date).
      • The restoration of DNS settings that were changed for SECaaS implementation must be performed directly by the service operator.
      • When the service termination is completed, you cannot view the URL on the Security Platform (SSMP) > Assets > Cloud Monitoring Management > Cloud URL List page.

    6.2.1 - WAF Preparation

    Configure firewall open settings

    Client (User) - SECaaS (WAF) - Origin Server Each segment requires firewall opening. For the information required to open the firewall (Source, Type, Protocol, Destination), please inquire via the Support Center > Contact menu.

    Reference
    Samsung SDS network users do not need to submit a separate firewall opening request.
    1. Please open the firewall for the segment where the client (User) connects to the SECaaS (WAF).
      • The default supported web ports for SECaaS are as follows.
        • http : 80, 8080, 8880, 2052, 2082, 2086, 2095
        • https : 443, 2053, 2087, 2096, 8443
      • For websites that use ports other than the default supported web port, fill out the WAF service request form to proceed with the service request. We will provide the Destination IP via the email account in the service request form. If, after applying SECaaS, the port changes (added or removed) or the Origin changes, the IP may change. If you email the security monitoring center account (securitucenter@samsung.com) in advance, we will inform you of the updated IP through the responsible person.
        • If you do not use an IPv6 IP, you do not need to register it.
        • The service application form can be downloaded and attached from the All Services > Security > WAF menu by clicking the WAF Service Request button, then on the Service Request page.
        • For information related to service application, please refer to the How-to guides’ Create WAF.
          SourceTypeProtocolDestination: SECaaS
          ClientHTTP, HTTPSTCP
          • IPv4: 162.159.141.5 / 172.66.1.3
          • IPv6: 2606:4700:7::102 / 2a06:98c1:58::102
          Table. Example of IP forwarding form
    2. Proceed with opening the firewall for the segment that connects to the Origin Server from SECaaS (WAF).
      • The origin server is the device that receives traffic from SECaaS. (e.g., LB, server, etc.)
      • The firewall or security device in front of the origin server must allow a specific range.
        • Cloudflare IP range information: https://www.cloudflare.com/ko-kr/ips/
        • If you do not use an IPv6 IP, you do not need to register it.
          Caution
          We recommend blocking web traffic (HTTP, HTTPS) outside the specified range. If not blocked, the Origin IP may be exposed, leading to attacks that bypass SECaaS, and such bypass attacks are difficult to monitor; please note this.

    Authenticate SECaaS domain

    To verify the ownership of the registered domain, you need to create a host and add a TXT record for domain verification to DNS for authentication.

    • Authentication typically takes about 15 minutes after registration, but can take up to 24 hours depending on the environment. For example, when registering www.test.com, you must create and enter the Host and TXT Record values we provide into DNS.

    Applying SECaaS Certificate

    You can select and use either the certificate provided by SECaaS or the certificate provided by the customer. Certificate installation is possible only when HTTPS is prepared for the domain, and if the certificate is not installed, HTTPS communication will be unavailable.

    1. When using SECaaS certificate

    • A new SSL certificate used between the Client ↔ SECaaS server will be generated.
    • Domain owner verification (validation) is required for the generated SSL certificate. The verification process is carried out by creating or entering the provided HOST and CNAME values in DNS.
    • Certificates cannot be extracted and delivered, and there is an automatic renewal feature, so no separate renewal is required.
    • Authentication typically takes about 15 minutes after registration, but may take up to 24 hours depending on the environment.

    2. When using a client (Custom) certificate

    • Provide the Full chain certificate, Key File, and Key Value.
    • An API communication issue occurs when registering a single certificate. (Only pfx, pem, cer files are supported)
    • The renewed certificate must be provided for renewal before the certificate expires.

    6.2.2 - WAF Service Application

    After completing the service request on the service request page, proceed with the steps below in order.

    Perform pre-test

    1. Before changing the traffic path with SECaaS, verify its proper operation through a test.
      • The security monitoring center provides the IP to be used in SECaaS. Example: 103.22.200.1
      • We will explain using aaa.test.com as the example website.
      • Add the example text below to the C:\Windows\System32\drivers\etc\hosts file and save it.
        • Example phrase : 103.22.200.1 aaa.test.com
    2. In Chrome browser, press F12 and when accessing the URL, select F5 (refresh) in the ‘Network tab at the top of the developer tools’.
    3. The process completes when the response header ‘X-cdn’ has the value imperva, or when a SECaaS IP is present in the remote address.

    Changing DNS Settings

    The path is changed so that actual traffic is transmitted via SECaaS.

    • We will configure each domain’s address as a CNAME using the provided CNAME domain. When using a CDN, change the CDN’s origin address to a CNAME.
    • Root (Naked) domains cannot have a CNAME record. It is recommended to set an A record using the two Anycast IPs provided by default. If configuring both IPs is difficult, set only one.
      • Example: Register/modify DNS for test.com with the provided CNAME, and register/modify the A Record DNS for test.com with the provided IP.

    Notify DNS Change

    After the DNS change is announced, the security monitoring center checks for proper integration and traffic inflow.

    Caution
    If the DNS change is not reported, we cannot determine whether it will be applied. Be sure to notify the service manager before changing DNS settings or after the change is completed.

    Check Service

    Verify normal service connectivity.

    • Check whether an SSL certificate error occurs.
    • The WAF is operated in detection mode for one month, after which the logs are analyzed and provided to the service owner.
      • If no legitimate traffic is detected as an attack, switch to blocking mode. If a false positive occurs, verify with the service owner and then add an exception in the WAF.

    6.2.3 - WAF Service Outage Response

    When a WAF service outage occurs, address and respond to the issue in the order below.

    Service outage detection

    • The service owner will become aware of a failed service URL health check or a response error.
    • The security monitoring center will encounter SECaaS service disruptions and cause the registered Origin Healthcheck to fail.

    Remediation

    • After confirming the cause of the outage, if it is determined to be a failure of the SECaaS service, you must change the registered CNAME/A Record values back to the original service’s Origin IP/address for redirection (reversion). Since DNS values need to be changed, the user must handle it directly.
    • When an urgent bypass (restoration) is required.
      • SECaaS(WAF) → Server(Origin) Open the segment firewall to any.
      • You can achieve the same effect by asking the SECaaS administrator to request DNS bypass processing in the SECaaS settings. (It is applied based on the DNS TTL value and takes about 5 minutes.)
      • Websites that use an A Record for DNS, such as root (naked) domains, cannot be applied.

    SECaaS reapplication

    After the outage is resolved, reapply the modified CNAME/A Record values to the SECaaS CNAME/A Record address.

    6.3 - Release Note

    WAF

    2025.04.28
    NEW Official release of WAF service
    • We are launching a WAF service that protects web applications from web vulnerabilities and attacks.

    7 - WAF

    7.1 - Overview

    Service Overview

    WAF (Web Application Firewall) is a service that monitors website traffic to securely protect web applications. It quickly detects and analyzes HTTP and HTTPS‑based security threats that target website vulnerabilities.

    Features

    • Powerful Detection/Blocking: We monitor the HTTP and HTTPS traffic of web pages registered by the customer to detect hacker attack attempts in real time. We classify attacks such as SQL Injection, Cross-Site Scripting (XSS), Web Scan, and provide various defense features needed for web security to respond immediately to new web attack types.
    • Stable web service operation support: We address new security threats through web firewall signature patterns and firmware updates. We detect hacker attempts, including emerging web threats such as OWASP (Open Web Application Security Project) Top 10 attacks, the National Intelligence Service’s eight major vulnerabilities, Zero-Day attacks, and Bad Bots, to help you operate an efficient and stable web service.
    • Convenient Security Management: By monitoring various attack events in real time and notifying the customer’s representative, it enables proactive response to security threats. It also provides monthly reports so you can review event details.

    Service Architecture Diagram

    Diagram
    Figure. WAF concept diagram

    Provided features

    We provide the following features.

    • Provision of intrusion detection/analysis and monitoring information
      • 24x365 event monitoring (alert issuance, monthly report provision)
      • Attack classification (Injection, XSS, File Include, File Up/Download, Web Scan, etc.) through web firewall event analysis
      • Detection of latest attack patterns (e.g., Apache Struts vulnerabilities)
    • Intrusion Response
      • Provide IP information for attack attempts targeting registered URLs (recommended to block on Samsung Cloud Platform network firewall)

    Component

    We install a WAF license on the Virtual Server within the VPC of Samsung Cloud Platform and provide the service.

    Constraints

    To use WAF, first verify the following items.

    • If the WAF is configured as a single instance, service continuity cannot be guaranteed in the event of a failure of the WAF installation VM or the WAF application.
      • The Load Balancer and WAF of Samsung Cloud Platform do not support bypass.
    • The security monitoring service provided by Samsung Cloud Platform is offered only for Pentasecurity products. (operation + monitoring product)
    • The WAF service is installed with direct support from an engineer, and it takes a certain amount of time from request to deployment.

    Provision status by region

    WAF is available in the environments below.

    RegionProvision status
    Korea West (kr-west1)Not provided
    Korea East (kr-east1)Not provided
    South Korea South 1 (kr-south1)Provided
    South Korea South 2 (kr-south2)Provided
    South Korea South 3 (kr-south3)Provided
    Table. WAF regional availability status

    Prior Service

    This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before applying for the service. For details, refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance.

    • When using the WAF service, a WAF license is installed on the Virtual Server and provided. Install a Virtual Server that matches the service specifications you want first.
    Service CategoryServiceDetailed description
    ComputeVirtual ServerVirtual server optimized for cloud computing
    Table. WAF pre-service

    7.2 - How-to guides

    Users can apply for the service by entering the required information for using the WAF service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Apply for WAF

    You can apply for and use the WAF service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    To request the creation of a WAF service, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > WAF menu. You will be taken to the WAF’s Service Home page.

    2. On the Service Home page, click the WAF Service Request button. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Request List > Service Request page.

    3. Service Request page: enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.

      • Select WAF creation in the task type.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: WAF Service Creation Request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • Automatically filled with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect the service category and service. If you click the WAF service request button, it is entered automatically
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: WAF
        Task classificationSelect the type you want to request
        • Create WAF: select when requesting a new service
        contentGuide to the service application process and reference information
        AttachmentIf you have a completed WAF service application (required) and any additional files you wish to share, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each not exceeding 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, and tif files are allowed
        Table. WAF Service Creation Request Items
    4. After reviewing the application process and reference information, click the Form Download > Service Request Form Download button to download the WAF Service Application Form.

    5. Please fill out the WAF Service Application.

      • Refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs and complete the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationFill in required items such as application type, usage period, throughput information, basic information, etc.
        Monitoring informationFill in required items such as WAF service application information and SSL certificate information.
        Table. Main contents of the WAF service creation request form
    6. Attach the completed application form in the attachment area.

    7. Click the Request button on the service request page.

      • After the request is completed, check the submitted details on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
    8. After the monitoring personnel review the submitted service request, they proceed with the process to use the service.

    9. The WAF service is being launched.

    Terminate WAF

    To request termination of the WAF service, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Management > Support Center menu. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Home page.
    2. On the Support Center Service Home page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request List page.
    3. On the Service Request List page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request page.
    4. Service Request page: enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
      • Select WAF termination in the task category.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: WAF Service Termination Request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • automatically entered with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect service category and service
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: WAF
        Task classificationSelect the type you want to request
        • WAF termination: select if you are terminating the service
        contentGuide to the service application process and reference information
        AttachmentIf you have a completed WAF service application (required) and any additional files you wish to share, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, and tif files are allowed
        Table. Table. WAF service termination request items
    5. After reviewing Application Process and Notes, click the Form Download > Service Request Form Download button to download the WAF Service Application Form.
    6. Please complete the WAF Service Application.
      • Refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs, and fill out the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationFill out required fields such as application type, usage period, transaction volume information, and basic information.
        Monitoring informationWhen terminating the entire service, no input is required.
        Table. Main contents of WAF service termination request form
    7. Attach the completed application form to the attachment area.
    8. On the service request page, click the Request button.
      • After the request is completed, verify the submitted information on the Support Center > Service Request list page.
    9. After the monitoring staff verifies the submitted service request, the termination process is completed once the monitored URL, port, and IP are removed.
      • Service termination requires three business days, including the cancellation request date.

    7.3 - Release Note

    WAF

    2025.10.23
    NEW Official release of WAF service
    • We are launching a WAF service that protects web applications from web vulnerabilities and attacks.

    8 - WAF

    8.1 - Overview

    Service Overview

    WAF (Web Application Firewall) is a service that monitors website traffic to securely protect web applications. It quickly detects and analyzes HTTP and HTTPS–based security threats that target website vulnerabilities.

    Features

    • Powerful Detection/Blocking: We monitor the HTTP and HTTPS traffic of web pages registered by the customer to detect hacker attack attempts in real time. We classify attacks such as SQL Injection, Cross-Site Scripting (XSS), Web Scan, and provide various defense features needed for web security to respond immediately to new web attack types.
    • Stable Web Service Operation Support: Respond to new security threats through web firewall signature patterns and firmware updates. Detect hacker attack attempts such as the top 10 OWASP (Open Web Application Security Project) attacks, the 8 major vulnerabilities identified by the National Intelligence Service, Zero-Day attacks, emerging web threats, and Bad Bots, to help operate efficient and stable web services.
    • Convenient Security Management: Provides monthly reports, allowing you to conveniently review event details.

    Service Architecture Diagram

    Diagram
    Figure. WAF concept diagram
    The public WAF service does not provide monitoring (Security Center).

    Provided features

    We provide the following features.

    • Provides intrusion detection/analysis
      • 24x365 event monitoring (alert issuance, monthly report provision), however, the public-facing WAF service does not provide this.
      • Attack classification (Injection, XSS, File Include, File Up/Download, Web Scan, etc.) through web firewall event analysis
      • Detection of latest attack patterns (e.g., Apache Struts vulnerabilities)
    • Intrusion Response
      • Provide IP information for attack attempts targeting registered URLs

    Component

    We install a WAF license on the Virtual Server within the VPC of Samsung Cloud Platform and provide the service.

    Constraints

    To use WAF, first verify the following items.

    • If the WAF is configured as a single instance, service continuity cannot be guaranteed in the event of a failure of the WAF installation VM or the WAF application.
      • The Load Balancer and WAF of Samsung Cloud Platform do not support bypass.
    • The security monitoring service provided by Samsung Cloud Platform is offered only for Pentasecurity products. (operation + monitoring product)
      • The public-facing WAF service does not provide security monitoring services.
    • The WAF service is installed with direct support from an engineer, and it takes a certain amount of time from request to deployment.

    Provision status by region

    WAF is available in the environments below.

    RegionGeneral (Enter)Public
    Korea West (kr-west1)ProvidedNot provided
    Korea East (kr-east1)Not providedNot provided
    South Korea South 1 (kr-south1)Not providedProvided
    South Korea South 2 (kr-south2)Not providedProvided
    South Korea South 3 (kr-south3)Not providedProvided
    Table. WAF regional availability status

    Prior Service

    This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before applying for the service. For details, refer to the guide provided for each service and prepare in advance.

    • When using the WAF service, a WAF license is installed on the Virtual Server and provided. Install a Virtual Server that matches the service specifications you want first.
    Service CategoryServiceDetailed description
    ComputeVirtual ServerVirtual server optimized for cloud computing
    NetworkingDirect ConnectA service that securely and quickly connects the customer’s network to the Samsung Cloud Platform
    Table. WAF pre-service
    Reference
    Customers using Secured VPN do not need to apply for Direct Connect separately. (Direct Connect application is required when applying for Secured VPN) However, regular (enterprise) customers who do not use Secured VPN must apply for Direct Connect separately. * Application path : Console > Support Center > Service Request * Service : Networking > Direct Connect * Task Category : Uplink Line Request

    8.2 - How-to guides

    Users can apply for the service by entering the required information for using the WAF service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Apply for WAF

    You can apply for and use the WAF service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    To request the creation of a WAF service, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > WAF menu. You will be taken to the WAF’s Service Home page.

    2. On the Service Home page, click the WAF Service Request button. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Request List > Service Request page.

    3. Service Request page: enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.

      • Select WAF creation in the task type.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: WAF Service Creation Request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • Automatically filled with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect the service category and service. If you click the WAF service request button, it is entered automatically
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: WAF
        Task classificationSelect the type you want to request
        • Create WAF: select when requesting a new service
        contentCustomer Basic Information Entry and Application Process Guide
        • Content: End Customer/MSP Information
        AttachmentUpload the completed WAF service application (required) and any additional files you wish to share
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, and tif files are allowed
        Table. WAF Service Creation Request Items
    4. After reviewing the application process and reference information, click the Form Download > Service Request Form Download button to download the WAF Service Application Form.

    5. Please complete the WAF Service Application.

      • Refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs and complete the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationWrite required items such as application type, usage period, throughput information, basic information, etc.
        Monitoring informationEnter required items such as WAF service application information and SSL certificate information
        • Public-sector customers do not need to fill this out
        Table. Main contents of the WAF service creation request form
    6. Attach the completed application form in the attachment area.

    7. Click the Request button on the service request page.

      • When the request is completed, check the submitted details on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
    8. After the monitoring personnel review the submitted service request, they proceed with the process to use the service.

    9. The WAF service is being launched.

    Terminate WAF

    To request termination of the WAF service, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Management > Support Center menu. Go to the Support Center > Service Home page.
    2. On the Support Center Service Home page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request List page.
    3. On the Service Request List page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request page.
    4. Service Request page: enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
      • Select WAF termination in the task type.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: WAF Service Termination Request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • automatically entered with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect service category and service
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: WAF
        Task classificationSelect the type you want to request
        • WAF termination: select if you are terminating the service
        contentCustomer Basic Information Entry and Application Process Guide
        • Content: End Customer/MSP Information
        AttachmentIf you have a completed WAF service application (required) and any additional files you wish to share, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, and tif files are allowed
        Table. Table. WAF service termination request items
    5. After reviewing Application Process and Notes, click the Form Download > Service Request Form Download button to download the WAF Service Application Form.
    6. Please complete the WAF Service Application.
      • Refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs and complete the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationFill out required fields such as application type, usage period, transaction volume information, and basic information.
        Monitoring informationWhen terminating the entire service, no input is required.
        Table. Main contents of WAF service termination request form
    7. Attach the completed application form to the attachment area.
    8. Click the Request button on the service request page.
      • After the request is completed, verify the submitted information on the Support Center > Service Request list page.
    9. After the monitoring staff verifies the submitted service request, the termination process is completed once the monitored URL, port, and IP are removed.
      • Service termination requires three business days, including the cancellation request date.

    8.2.1 - WAF Build Process Guide

    To start the WAF service, you need to apply for the service and then perform WAF license installation and monitoring integration verification. After you request the WAF service, the person in charge will review the service request details and contact you. Please refer to the process below to request the WAF service.

    guide

    WAF installation is directly supported by SDS engineers and proceeds after consulting with the client on configuration, specifications, and related details.

    • Considering the overall process schedule, apply for the service at least one month before the service launch (business days).
    Diagram
    Figure. WAF Build Process

    Preliminary preparation work

    The preliminary preparation steps for using the WAF service are carried out according to the following procedure.

    1. Submit a service request to install the WAF. (MSP → SDS)
    2. Please request WAF SW installation. (SDS → Engineer)
    3. Please provide the engineer information for the WAF installation work. (SDS → MSP)

    Samsung Cloud Platform Console task (MSP execution)

    To use the WAF service, the Samsung Cloud Platform Console performs the following steps.

    1. Register an SSL certificate in the Certificate Manager service.
      • Application path: Samsung Cloud Platform Console > Security > Certificate Manager
      • Purpose: Operation
    2. Create a Virtual Server service for WAF.
      • Application path: Samsung Cloud Platform Console > Compute > Virtual Server
      • Determine CPU, memory, and block storage capacity based on WAF specifications.
      • WAF Virtual Server specifications: view quotation
    3. Create a Load Balancer service.
      • Application path: Samsung Cloud Platform Console > Networking > Load Balancer
    4. Create an L7 service for SSL offloading.
    5. Create an L4 service when load balancing is required for WAF redundancy.
    6. Create an L4 service when load balancing is required for web server redundancy.
    7. Configure the required Load Balancer/Firewall/Security Group.
      • Configure the Firewall and Security Group to match the Load Balancer’s communication path as follows.
      • The source inputs the user’s network information.
        CategoryCommon Security Zone FWInternet Gateway FWLoad Balancer FWVirtual Server SG
        Inbound (destination)LB service public IPLB service private IPLB service private IPLB Link IP
        IP (example)123.43.8.xxx10.10.0.xxx10.10.0.xxx192.168.254.xxx
        PortLB service portLB service portLB service portForwarding/Health Check Port
        Table. FW/SG configuration items according to the Load Balancer's communication path
    8. Configure HTTP redirection for the LB service. (Optional)
      • Set the Load Balancer’s HTTP redirection option as follows.
        LB serviceL7 HTTPL7 HTTPS
        LB Profile > Profile TypeApplicationApplication
        LB Profile > Service ClassificationL7 HTTPL7 HTTP
        LB Profile > HTTP RedirectionSettingsNot set
        IP/NAT IPSet the sameSet the same
        service port80443
        forwarding port8080
        Server Group > When Using WAFNot setWAF Virtual Server
        Server Group > When WAF is not usedNot setWEB Virtual Server
        Certificate registrationUnregisteredRegister
        Table. Load Balancer HTTP redirection configuration items
    9. Grant the WAF engineer access permissions to the Virtual Server for WAF.

    WAF SW Installation and Test (WAF Engineer & MSP)

    When the WAF specifications are finalized, the engineer installs the WAF software and conducts testing.

    Policy request and implementation for WAF security monitoring

    Create and apply policies required for WAF security monitoring.

    1. Request the required policy from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console. (SDS → MSP)
    2. Deliver and apply the created policy. (SDS → MSP)
    3. Check the items that require policy registration. (Direct Connect Firewall/Security Group/Routing)
      • SDS → Verify that the WAF access path for each client is secured. If additional registration is required, request it by email.
      • Check whether the WAF → SIEM log transmission path is secured for each client. If additional registration is needed, request it via email.

    Constraints

    When installing the WAF, first check the following constraints before proceeding.

    • When WAF is configured as a single instance, service continuity cannot be guaranteed in case of a failure of the WAF-installed Virtual Server or the WAF application. (Bypass is not supported between Samsung Cloud Platform LB and WAF)
    • If service availability of the website where WAF is applied is critical, WAF redundancy must be implemented. If WAF redundancy is required, a separate request must be made.
    • Security monitoring through the Samsung Cloud Platform service is available only for Penta Security products.
    • Other vendors’ products are listed in the marketplace, but Samsung SDS security monitoring services are not offered.

    8.3 - Release Note

    WAF

    2025.07.01
    NEW Official release of WAF service
    • We are launching a WAF service that protects web applications from web vulnerabilities and attacks.

    9 - DDoS Protection

    9.1 - Overview

    Service Overview

    DDoS Protection is a service that detects and defends against DDoS (Distributed Denial of Service) attacks, which generate large volumes of traffic to cause service disruptions. Continuous monitoring detects and blocks external traffic attacks, protecting the servers within the Samsung Cloud Platform. When a DDoS attack occurs, blocking the malicious traffic minimizes the traffic load entering the internal servers of the Samsung Cloud Platform, ensuring the continuity of web services.

    Features

    • Rapid Attack Detection: When a large volume of traffic arrives, it detects DDoS attacks in real time. Continuously updating DDoS defense items enables effective response to the latest attack techniques.
    • Effective Attack Defense: When a DDoS attack occurs, we detect it in real time and block malicious traffic to ensure service availability, supporting regular users to access the website normally.
    • Stable web service operation: Based on extensive network operation experience, we can effectively respond to external security threats. Additionally, we provide monthly reports so you can review event details.

    Configuration diagram

    Diagram
    Figure. DDoS Protection concept diagram
    The public DDoS Protection service does not provide monitoring (Security Center).

    Provided features

    We provide the following features.

    • Intrusion Detection and Analysis
      • 24x365 event monitoring (Note: the public DDoS Protection service does not provide this feature.)
      • Automatic detection of DDoS attacks
    • Intrusion Response
      • Provides learning-based detection and blocking for various DDoS attacks at the L3/L4 level.
    • Monitoring Information Provision
      • Alert on event detection
      • Monthly report provision

    Component

    • DDoS Protection provides services based on public IPs configured within the VPC.
    • We provide services for servers that can be accessed over the Internet, and blocking can be performed based on attacker IP addresses.

    Constraints

    When providing DDoS Protection service, a minimum one-month learning period is required to set the protection threshold, and we analyze the learned thresholds to provide optimal policy settings.

    Provision status by region

    DDoS Protection is available in the following environments.

    RegionGeneral (Enter)Public
    Korea West (kr-west1)ProvidedNot provided
    Korea East (kr-east1)Not providedNot provided
    South Korea South 1 (kr-south1)Not providedNot provided
    South Korea South 2 (kr-south2)Not providedNot provided
    South Korea 3 (kr-south3)Not providedProvided
    Table. DDoS Protection regional availability status

    Preceding Service

    • This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating a DDoS Protection service. Refer to the guides provided for each service for detailed information and prepare in advance.
    • When creating a VPC Internet Gateway, you must select SIGW (Secure Internet Gateway) in Category to be able to use DDoS Protection.
    Caution
    • When creating an Internet Gateway for a VPC, selecting Internet Gateway in ‘Category’ prevents the use of the DDoS Protection service.
    • If you switch to Secure Internet Gateway, you need to change the public IP you are using.
    Service CategoryServiceDetailed description
    NetworkingVPCA service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment
    Table. DDoS Protection pre-service

    9.2 - How-to guides

    Users can apply for the service by entering the required information for using the DDoS Protection service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Create DDoS Protection

    You can apply for and use the DDoS Protection service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    To request the creation of a DDoS Protection service, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > DDoS Protection menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of DDoS Protection.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the DDoS Protection Service Request button. Navigate to the Support Center > Service Request List > Service Request page.
    3. Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
      • Select Create DDoS Protection in the task category.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: DDoS Protection service creation request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • Automatically filled with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect the service category and service. If you click the DDoS Protection service request button, it is entered automatically
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: DDoS Protection
        Task classificationSelect the type you want to request
        • Create DDoS Protection: select when requesting a new service
        contentGuide to Creating Customer Basic Information and Application Process
        • Content: End Customer/MSP Information
        | | Attachment | If you have a completed DDoS Protection service application (required) and any additional files you wish to share, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, and tif files are allowed
        |
        Table. DDoS Protection Service Creation Request Items
    4. After reviewing the application process and reference information, click the Form Download > Service Request Form Download button to download the DDoS Protection Service Application Form.
    5. Please complete the DDoS Protection Service Application Form.
      • Refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs and complete the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationFill out required items such as application type, usage period, and basic information
        • Application type: select application
        • Usage period: enter desired start date, contract status, and estimated usage period
        • Basic information: enter Account name, Project name, and recipient information
        Monitoring informationEnter required items such as protected IPs, exception handling IPs, etc. (Specify purpose per IP)
        • Specify application type per IP
        • New: select when applying for a new service
        • Public-sector customers do not need to fill this out
        Table. Main contents of the DDoS Protection service creation request form
    6. Attach the completed application form in the attachment area.
    7. On the service request page, click the Request button.
      • After the request is completed, check the submitted details on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
    8. After the monitoring personnel review the submitted service request, they proceed with the process to use the service.
    9. The DDoS Protection service is now available.

    DDoS Protection Terminate

    To request cancellation of the DDoS Protection service, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Management > Support Center menu. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Home page.
    2. On the Support Center Service Home page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request List page.
    3. On the Service Request List page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request page.
    4. Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
      • Select DDoS Protection termination in the operation type.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: DDoS Protection Service Cancellation Request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • Automatically filled with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect service category and service
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: DDoS Protection
        Task classificationSelect the type you want to request
        • Cancel DDoS Protection: select if you are canceling the service
        contentGuide to Entering Customer Basic Information and Application Process
        • Content: End Customer/MSP Information
        AttachmentUpload the completed DDoS Protection service application (required) and, if you have any additional files to share, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, and tif files are allowed
        Table. Table. DDoS Protection service termination request items
    5. After reviewing the Application Process and Reference Information, click the Form Download > Service Request Form Download button to download the DDoS Protection Service Application Form.
    6. Please fill out the DDoS Protection Service Application Form.
      • Refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs and complete the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationFill out required fields such as application type, usage period, and basic information
        • Application type: select termination
        • Usage period: enter desired termination date
        • Basic information: Account name, Project name, recipient information
        Monitoring informationWhen terminating the entire service, no input is required.
        Table. Main contents of DDoS Protection service termination request form
    7. Attach the completed application form to the attachment section.
    8. Click the Request button on the service request page.
      • Once the request is completed, verify the submitted information on the Support Center > Service Request list page.
    9. After the monitoring staff verifies the submitted service request, the termination process is completed when the monitored IP/policy is deleted.
      • Service termination requires three business days, including the cancellation request date.

    9.3 - Release Note

    DDoS Protection

    2025.07.01
    NEW DDoS Protection Service Official Version Release
    • We are launching a DDoS Protection service that provides detection and mitigation of large-scale network traffic attacks.

    10 - DDoS Protection

    10.1 - Overview

    Service Overview

    DDoS Protection is a service that detects and defends against DDoS (Distributed Denial of Service) attacks, which generate large volumes of traffic to cause service disruptions. Continuous monitoring detects and blocks external traffic attacks, protecting the servers within the Samsung Cloud Platform. When a DDoS attack occurs, blocking the attack traffic minimizes the traffic load entering the internal servers of the Samsung Cloud Platform, ensuring the continuity of web services.

    Features

    • Rapid Attack Detection: When a large volume of traffic arrives, it detects DDoS attacks in real time. Continuously updating DDoS defense items enables effective response to the latest attack techniques.
    • Effective Attack Defense: When a DDoS attack occurs, we detect it in real time and block malicious traffic to ensure service availability, supporting regular users to access the website normally.
    • Stable web service operation: Provide 24/7 security monitoring services, and based on extensive network operation experience, effectively respond to external security threats, delivering alerts with attack information when incidents occur. Additionally, monthly reports are provided to review event details.

    Configuration diagram

    Diagram
    Figure. DDoS Protection concept diagram

    Provided features

    We provide the following features.

    • Intrusion Detection and Analysis
      • 24x365 event monitoring
      • Automatic detection of DDoS attacks
    • Intrusion Response
      • Provides learning-based detection and blocking for various DDoS attacks at the L3/L4 level.
    • Monitoring Information Provision
      • Alert on event detection
      • Provide monthly report (alert list and details)

    Component

    • DDoS Protection provides services based on public IPs configured within the VPC.
    • We provide services for servers that can be accessed over the Internet, and blocking can be performed based on attacker IP addresses.

    Constraints

    When providing DDoS Protection service, a minimum one‑month learning period is required to set the protection threshold, and we analyze the learned thresholds to provide optimal policy settings.

    Provision status by region

    DDoS Protection is available in the following environments.

    RegionProvision status
    Korea West (kr-west1)Not provided
    Korea East (kr-east1)Not provided
    South Korea South 1 (kr-south1)Provided
    South Korea South 2 (kr-south2)Provided
    South Korea 3 (kr-south3)Provided
    Table. DDoS Protection regional availability status

    Preceding Service

    • This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating a DDoS Protection service. For details, refer to the guides provided for each service and prepare in advance.
    • When creating a VPC Internet Gateway, you must select SIGW (Secure Internet Gateway) in Category to be able to use DDoS Protection.
    Caution
    • When creating an Internet Gateway for a VPC, selecting Internet Gateway in ‘Category’ prevents the use of the DDoS Protection service.
    • If you switch to Secure Internet Gateway, you need to change the public IP you are using.
    Service CategoryServiceDetailed description
    NetworkingVPCA service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment
    Table. DDoS Protection Pre-Service

    10.2 - How-to guides

    Users can apply for the service by entering the required information for using the DDoS Protection service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Create DDoS Protection

    You can apply for and use the DDoS Protection service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    To request the creation of a DDoS Protection service, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > DDoS Protection menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of DDoS Protection.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the DDoS Protection Service Request button. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Request List > Service Request page.
    3. Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
      • Select Create DDoS Protection in the task category.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: DDoS Protection Service Creation Request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • Automatically filled with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect the service category and service. If you click the DDoS Protection service request button, it is entered automatically
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: DDoS Protection
        Task classificationSelect the type you want to request
        • Create DDoS Protection: select when requesting a new service
        contentGuide to the service application process and reference information
        AttachmentUpload the completed DDoS Protection service application (required) and any additional files you wish to share
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif files are allowed
        Table. DDoS Protection Service Creation Request Items
    4. After reviewing the application process and reference information, click the Form Download > Service Request Form Download button to download the DDoS Protection Service Application Form.
    5. Please fill out the DDoS Protection Service Application Form.
      • Refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs and complete the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationFill out required items such as application type, usage period, and basic information
        • Application type: select application
        • Usage period: enter desired start date, contract status, and estimated usage period
        • Basic information: enter Account name, Project name, and recipient information
        Monitoring informationEnter required fields such as protected IPs and exception handling IPs (purpose per IP must be specified)
        • Specify application classification per IP
        • New: select when applying for a new service
        Table. Main contents of the DDoS Protection service creation request form
    6. Attach the completed application form in the attachment area.
    7. Click the Request button on the service request page.
      • After the request is completed, check the submitted details on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
    8. After the monitoring personnel review the submitted service request, they proceed with the process to use the service.
    9. The DDoS Protection service is now available.

    Cancel DDoS Protection

    To request cancellation of the DDoS Protection service, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Management > Support Center menu. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Home page.
    2. On the Support Center Service Home page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request List page.
    3. On the Service Request List page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request page.
    4. Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
      • Select DDoS Protection termination in the operation type.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: DDoS Protection Service Cancellation Request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • Automatically filled with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect service category and service
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: DDoS Protection
        Task classificationSelect the type of request you want to make
        • Cancel DDoS Protection: select if you are terminating the service
        contentGuide to the service application process and reference information
        AttachmentIf you have a completed DDoS Protection service application (required) and any additional files you wish to share, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, and tif files are allowed
        Table. Table. DDoS Protection service termination request items
    5. After reviewing the Application Process and Reference Information, click the Form Download > Service Request Form Download button to download the DDoS Protection Service Application Form.
    6. Please complete the DDoS Protection Service Application Form.
      • Refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs and complete the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationFill out required fields such as application type, usage period, and basic information
        • Application type: select termination
        • Usage period: enter desired termination date
        • Basic information: Account name, Project name, recipient information
        Monitoring informationWhen terminating the entire service, no input is required.
        Table. Main contents of DDoS Protection service termination request form
    7. Attach the completed application form to the attachment area.
    8. On the service request page, click the Request button.
      • When the request is completed, check the submitted details on the Support Center > Service Request list page.
    9. After the monitoring staff verifies the submitted service request, the termination process is completed when the monitored IP/policy is deleted.
      • Service termination requires three business days, including the cancellation request date.

    10.3 - Release Note

    DDoS Protection

    2025.10.23
    NEW Official release of DDoS Protection service
    • We are launching a DDoS Protection service that provides detection and mitigation of large-scale network traffic attacks.

    11 - IPS

    11.1 - Overview

    Service Overview

    IPS(Intrusion Prevention System) continuously updates IPS intrusion detection policies reflecting the latest security threats to respond in real time. Additionally, packet monitoring detects up to the application layer.

    Features

    • Latest Attack Type Detection: Generate detection patterns for new threats and improve detection rates through continuous signature management. Apply the TI DB of a security specialist company and our own advanced detection policies, and provide services by correlating attack patterns detected by IPS with patterns configured in SIEM(Security Information and Event Management) through correlation analysis.
    • Cloud Optimized Operations: We provide detection services optimized for cloud environments. When a security threat occurs, we respond promptly with specialized security personnel.
    • Efficient response and support: Monthly reports are provided so you can review the details of events.

    Configuration diagram

    Diagram
    Figure. IPS Concept Diagram
    The public IPS service does not provide monitoring (Security Center).

    Provided features

    We provide the following features.

    • Intrusion Detection and Analysis
      • In-depth analysis using raw data
      • Update new threat detection patterns incorporating external trend information
      • Periodic detection pattern optimization
    • Monitoring Information Provision
      • Monthly report provision
    • Intrusion Response
      • Provide IP information of attack attempts targeting SCP client servers

    Component

    • IPS provides services based on public IPs configured within the VPC.
    • We provide services for servers that are accessible over the Internet, and when a user requests a service, we refer to the server (Virtual Server) specifications listed in the service application form.

    Constraints

    IPS provides detection for traffic that is not encrypted with HTTP. It does not provide monitoring for HTTS SSL encrypted traffic.

    The public IPS service does not provide monitoring (Security Center).

    Provision status by region

    IPS is available in the environments below.

    RegionGeneral (Enter)Public
    Korea West (kr-west1)ProvidedNot provided
    Korea East (kr-east1)Not providedNot provided
    South Korea South 1 (kr-south1)Not providedProvided
    South Korea South 2 (kr-south2)Not providedProvided
    South Korea South 3 (kr-south3)Not providedProvided
    Table. IPS provision status by region

    Preceding Service

    • This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating an IPS service. Refer to the guides provided for each service and prepare them in advance.
    • When creating a VPC Internet Gateway, you must select SIGW (Secure Internet Gateway) in Category to be able to use IPS.
    Caution
    • When creating a VPC Internet Gateway, if you select Internet Gateway in the ‘Category’, you cannot use the IPS service.
    • If you switch to Secure Internet Gateway, you need to change the public IP you are using.
    Service CategoryServiceDetailed description
    NetworkingVPCA service that provides an isolated virtual network in a cloud environment
    Table. IPS pre-service

    11.2 - How-to guides

    Users can apply for the service by entering the required information for using the IPS service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Create IPS

    You can apply for and use the IPS service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    To request the creation of an IPS service, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > IPS menu. You will be taken to the IPS Service Home page.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the IPS Service Request button. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Request List > Service Request page.
    3. Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
      • Select IPS creation in the task classification.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request content
        • Example: IPS Service Creation Request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • Automatically filled with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect the service category and service. If you click the IPS service request button, it is entered automatically
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: IPS
        Task classificationSelect the type you want to request
        • Create IPS: select when requesting a new service
        contentGuide to Creating Customer Basic Information and Application Process
        • Content: End Customer/MSP Information
        AttachmentUpload the completed IPS service application (required) and any additional files you wish to share
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif files are allowed
        Table. IPS Service Creation Request Items
    4. After reviewing the application process and reference information, click the Form Download > Service Request Form Download button to download the IPS Service Application Form.
    5. Please fill out the IPS Service Application.
      • Refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs, and fill out the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationFill out required items such as application type, usage period, and basic information
        • Application type: select application
        • Usage period: enter desired start date, contract status, and estimated usage period
        • Basic information: enter Account name, Project name, and recipient information
        Monitoring informationEnter required items such as protected IP and exception handling IP (specify purpose per IP)
        • Specify application category per IP
        • New: select when applying for a new service
        • Public-sector customers do not need to fill this out
        Table. Main contents of the IPS service creation application form
    6. Attach the completed application form in the attachment area.
    7. On the service request page, click the Request button.
      • After the request is completed, check the submitted details on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
    8. After the monitoring personnel review the submitted service request, they proceed with the process to use the service.
    9. The IPS service is being launched.

    Terminate IPS

    To request termination of the IPS service, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Management > Support Center menu. Go to the Support Center > Service Home page.
    2. On the Support Center Service Home page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request List page.
    3. On the Service Request List page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request page.
    4. Service Request page: enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
      • Select IPS termination in the task type.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: IPS Service Termination Request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • Automatically filled with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect service category and service
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: IPS
        Task classificationSelect the type you want to request
        • IPS termination: select if you want to cancel the service
        contentCustomer Basic Information Entry and Application Process Guide
        • Content: End Customer/MSP Information
        AttachmentIf you have a completed IPS service application (required) and any additional files you wish to share, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif files can be attached
        Table. Table. IPS service termination request items
    5. After reviewing the Application Process and Reference Information, click the Form Download > Service Request Form Download button to download the IPS Service Application Form.
    6. Please fill out the IPS Service Application.
      • Refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs and complete the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationFill in required fields such as request type, usage period, and basic information
        • Request type: select termination
        • Usage period: enter desired termination date
        • Basic information: Account name, Project name, recipient information
        Monitoring informationWhen terminating the entire service, no input is required.
        Table. Main contents of IPS service termination application form
    7. Attach the completed application form to the attachment section.
    8. Click the Request button on the service request page.
      • Once the request is completed, verify the submitted information on the Support Center > Service Request list page.
    9. After the monitoring staff verifies the submitted service request, the termination process is completed once the monitored IP is removed.
      • Service termination requires three business days, including the cancellation request date.

    11.3 - Release Note

    IPS

    2025.07.01
    NEW Official release of IPS service
    • We have launched an IPS service that continuously updates intrusion detection policies to reflect the latest security threats and provides real‑time response.

    12 - Secured Firewall

    12.1 - Overview

    Service Overview

    Secured Firewall is a next‑generation firewall service for cloud network security provided by Samsung Cloud Platform. It manages network access to servers based on IP address/port policies and supports detailed analysis in the event of a security incident.

    Features

    • Protecting Diverse Network Environments: Supports setting robust network security policies to securely protect cloud assets. Detects and blocks based on IP and protocol/port‑based ACL policies, providing a safe network communication environment.
    • Easy and Simple Network Management: You can easily establish firewall policies and conveniently create and manage applied rules such as source/destination IP, protocol/port, inbound/outbound, etc.
    • Security expert-based firewall policy implementation: We support establishing firewall policies optimized for customers’ systems migrating to the cloud. To make it easier to apply security policies in cloud environments, we accept firewall policy requests from customers and provide a service where security experts incorporate the policies.
    • Security Authentication Product-Based Service: You can use firewall services that meet various networks and requirements for internet connectivity and ensure an optimized security environment. This safely protects the internal network from unauthorized access.

    Configuration diagram

    Diagram
    Figure. Secured Firewall concept diagram
    The public Secured Firewall service does not provide monitoring (Security Center).

    Provided features

    We provide the following features.

    • Cloud Optimized Firewall
      • Applying domain policies considering cloud environments
      • Apply firewall rules and logging
    • Monitoring Information Provision
      • Monthly report provision

    Component

    • Secured Firewall provides services based on a public IP configured within the VPC.
    • We provide services for servers that are accessible over the Internet, and when a user requests a service, we refer to the server (Virtual Server) specifications listed in the service application form.

    Constraints

    • Firewall policy requests cannot be submitted from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
      • We will send the application form to the email you registered when applying for the service. Please refer to the form to proceed with the firewall request.
    • The access control management (such as Security Group and other firewall policy management) for systems built inside the pool must be performed directly by the customer.

    Provision status by region

    Secured Firewall is available in the following environments.

    RegionGeneral (Enter)Public
    Korea West (kr-west1)ProvidedNot provided
    Korea East (kr-east1)Not providedNot provided
    South Korea South 1 (kr-south1)Not providedProvided
    South Korea South 2 (kr-south2)Not providedProvided
    South Korea South 3 (kr-south3)Not providedProvided
    Table. Secured Firewall regional availability status

    Preceding Service

    • This is a list of services that must be pre‑configured before creating a Secured Firewall service. For details, refer to the guides provided for each service and prepare in advance.
    • When creating a VPC’s Internet Gateway, you must select SIGW (Secure Internet Gateway) in Category to be able to use Secured Firewall.
    Caution
    • When creating an Internet Gateway for a VPC, selecting Internet Gateway in the “Category” prevents the use of the Secured Firewall service.
    • If you switch to Secure Internet Gateway, you need to change the public IP you are using.
    Service CategoryServiceDetailed description
    NetworkingVPCA service that protects web applications from web vulnerabilities and attacks
    Table. Secured Firewall Pre‑Service

    12.2 - How-to guides

    Users can apply for the service by entering the required information for using the Secured Firewall service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Create Secured Firewall

    You can request and use the Secured Firewall service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    To request the creation of a Secured Firewall service, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > Secured Firewall menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of Secured Firewall.

    2. On the Service Home page, click the Secured Firewall Service Request button. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Request List > Service Request page.

    3. Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.

      • Select Secured Firewall creation in the task type.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: Secured Firewall service creation request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • Automatically entered with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect the service category and service. If you click the Secured Firewall service request button, it is entered automatically
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: Secured Firewall
        Task classificationSelect the type you want to request
        • Create Secured Firewall: select when requesting a new service
        contentCustomer Basic Information Entry and Application Process Guide
        • Content: End Customer/MSP Information
        AttachmentIf you have a completed Secured Firewall service application (required) and any additional files you wish to share, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, and tif files can be attached
        Table. Secured Firewall Service Creation Request Items
    4. After reviewing the application process and reference information, click the Form Download > Service Request Form Download button to download the Secured Firewall Service Application Form.

    5. Please fill out the Secured Firewall Service Application.

      • Refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs and complete the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationFill in required items such as application type, usage period, and basic information
        • Application type: select application
        • Usage period: enter desired start date, contract status, and estimated usage period
        • Basic information: enter Account name, Project name, and recipient information
        Monitoring informationEnter required items such as protected IP and exception handling IP (specify purpose per IP)
        • Specify application category per IP
        • New: select when applying for a new service
        • Public-sector customers do not need to fill this out
        Table. Main contents of the Secured Firewall service creation request form
    6. Attach the completed application form in the attachment area.

    7. Click the Request button on the service request page.

      • After the request is completed, check the submitted details on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
    8. After the monitoring personnel review the submitted service request, they proceed with the process to use the service.

    9. The Secured Firewall service is now being launched.

    Terminate Secured Firewall

    To request termination of the Secured Firewall service, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Management > Support Center menu. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Home page.
    2. On the Support Center Service Home page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request List page.
    3. On the Service Request List page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request page.
    4. Service Request page: enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
      • Select Secured Firewall termination in the task type.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: Secured Firewall service termination request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • Automatically entered with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect service category and service
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: Secured Firewall
        Task classificationSelect the type of request you want to make
        • Terminate Secured Firewall: select when terminating the service
        contentCustomer Basic Information Entry and Application Process Guide
        • Content: End Customer/MSP Information
        AttachmentIf you have a completed Secured Firewall service application (required) and any additional files you wish to share, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, and tif files are allowed
        Table. Table. Secured Firewall Service Termination Request Items
    5. After reviewing Application Process and Reference Information, click the Form Download > Service Request Form Download button to download the Secured Firewall Service Request Form.
    6. Please fill out the Secured Firewall Service Application.
      • Refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs, and fill out the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationFill in required fields such as request type, usage period, and basic information
        • Request type: select termination
        • Usage period: enter desired termination date
        • Basic information: Account name, Project name, recipient information
        Monitoring informationWhen terminating the entire service, no input is required.
        Table. Main contents of Secured Firewall service termination application form
    7. Attach the completed application form to the attachment area.
    8. Click the Request button on the service request page.
      • After the request is completed, verify the submitted information on the Support Center > Service Request list page.
    9. After the monitoring team reviews the submitted service request, the termination is completed once the monitored IP is deleted.
      • Service termination requires three business days, including the cancellation request date.

    12.3 - Release Note

    Secured Firewall

    2025.07.01
    NEW Secured Firewall Service Official Version Release
    • We have launched the Secured Firewall service, a next‑generation firewall for cloud network security provided by Samsung Cloud Platform.

    13 - Secured VPN

    13.1 - Overview

    Service Overview

    Secured VPN(Virtual Private Network) is a service that securely connects external customer networks and the Samsung Cloud Platform network through an encrypted virtual private network. Authenticated customer networks can safely access the Samsung Cloud Platform at any time via a secure channel.

    Features

    • Rapid Service Provision: To ensure a secure VPN communication link between the customer’s network and the Samsung Cloud Platform, a dedicated VPN device must be deployed, and we provide installation support services by security specialists during deployment.
    • Secure Access: Provides a virtual network tunnel equipped with certified authentication devices and nationally certified encryption modules that have proven performance and reliability, allowing customers to securely connect from their external network to their internal network built on the Samsung Cloud Platform.
    • Simple operating environment: We provide network configuration and VPN operation services optimized for the customer’s environment by security experts, offering an operating environment that makes it easier to use VPN services.

    Configuration diagram

    Diagram
    Figure. Secured VPN concept diagram

    Provided features

    We provide the following features.

    • IPSec VPN Provision
      • Providing IPSec VPN with a nationally certified cryptographic module
    • Virtual Private Gateway Creation
      • Create a Virtual Private Gateway to connect the cloud internal network with the customer’s network.
      • Select traffic bandwidth for bidirectional communication based on network scale
    • Create VPN Tunnel
      • Ensuring service continuity in the event of a failure by configuring redundant IPsec VPN Gateways.

    Component

    Secured VPN(Virtual Private Network) provides services composed of Center VPN managed by SDS and Branch VPN installed within the customer’s premises.

    Constraints

    • The center VPN equipment is a shared device used by many customers, and it cannot be used if its address range overlaps with VPC ranges used by other customers or ranges currently used in Samsung Cloud Platform. Customers who need to use the Secured VPN service should check the available ranges in advance.
      • Samsung Cloud Platform usage range: 172.16.0.0/12, 192.168.240.0/20
      • Example: Customer A has applied for and is using the 10.0.0.1/24 range; when Customer B newly applies for a Secured VPN, the 10.0.0.1/24 range cannot be used. Verify the available ranges in advance and configure the VPC range accordingly.
    Reference
    • To verify the available band, contact Console > Support Center > Contact or email mssp.scp@samsung.com.
    • After confirming the available address range, SDS performs NAT on the rented branch VPN to change the IP. However, if the branch VPN equipment was purchased directly by the customer, the NAT configuration is handled by the customer.
    • The MSP adds the NATed IP to the VPC routing rules in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
    • Check for cases where the branch VPN and Samsung Cloud Platform IP ranges overlap. If the destination IP range is included in the source IP range, the router will send traffic internally instead of outward, making communication impossible.
    • Branch VPN is offered as a rental of SECUI equipment, and a separate fee applies for the equipment lease. If the client already uses VPN equipment, it is necessary to confirm whether non‑SECUI vendor devices are compatible with the center VPN equipment (SECUI).
      • For compatibility testing matters other than SECUI equipment, please contact Console > Support Center > Contact Us or via mssp.scp@samsung.com.

    Provision status by region

    Secured VPN is available in the following environments.

    RegionGeneral (Enter)Public
    Korea West (kr-west1)ProvidedNot provided
    Korea East (kr-east1)Not providedNot provided
    South Korea South 1 (kr-south1)Not providedProvided
    South Korea South 2 (kr-south2)Not providedProvided
    South Korea South 3 (kr-south3)Not providedProvided
    Table. Secured VPN regional availability status

    Preceding Service

    This is a list of services that must be pre‑configured before creating a Secured VPN service. Refer to the guides provided for each service for details and prepare them in advance.

    • When creating a Direct Connect, create a connection to the target VPC and a DCon-VPN connection.
    Service CategoryServiceDetailed description
    NetworkingDirect ConnectA service that securely and quickly connects the customer’s network with the Samsung Cloud Platform
    Table. Secured VPN preliminary service
    • To use the Secured VPN service, configuration work is required for communication between the customer’s on-premise Office and the customer’s VPC within the Samsung Cloud Platform. Please follow the process below to request an uplink line, including external integration software and VPN configuration, and opening the Direct Connect firewall.
      • Application path : Console > Support Center > Service Request
      • Service : Networking > Direct Connect
      • Task Category : Uplink line request
    Reference
    Direct Connect creation and Uplink line request must be completed to use the Secured VPN service.

    13.2 - How-to guides

    Users can create the service by entering the required information for using the Secured VPN (Virtual Private Network) service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Create Secured VPN

    You can apply for and use the Secured VPN service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    To request the creation of a Secured VPN service, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > Secured VPN menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of Secured VPN.

    2. On the Service Home page, click the Secured VPN Service Request button. Navigate to the Support Center > Service Request List > Service Request page.

    3. Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.

      • In the task category, select Secured VPN creation.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: Secured VPN Service Creation Request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • Automatically filled with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect the service category and service. If you click the Secured VPN service request button, it is entered automatically
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: Secured VPN
        Task classificationSelect the type you want to request
        • Create Secured VPN: select when requesting a new service
        contentCustomer Basic Information Entry and Application Process Guide
        • Content: End Customer/MSP Information
        AttachmentIf you have a completed Secured VPN service application (required) and any additional files you wish to share, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, and tif files are allowed
        Table. Secured VPN service creation request items
    4. After reviewing the application process and reference information, click the Form Download > Service Request Form Download button to download the Secured VPN Service Application Form.

    5. Please fill out the Secured VPN Service Application Form.

      • Refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs and complete the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationComplete required fields such as request type, usage period, and basic information
        • Application type: select application
        • Usage period: enter desired start date
        • Guaranteed bandwidth: select bandwidth
        • Basic information: enter Account name, Project name, recipient information
        Monitoring informationCommon application information, same-model/different-model connection application information, etc., fill in required items (specify usage per IP)
        • Same-model connection application information: when connecting SECUI equipment
        • Different-model connection application information: when connecting equipment other than SECUI
        Table. Main contents of the Secured VPN service creation request form
    6. Attach the completed application form in the attachment area.

    7. Click the Request button on the service request page.

      • After the request is completed, check the submitted details on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
    8. After the monitoring personnel review the submitted service request, they proceed with the process to use the service.

    9. Secured VPN service will be launched.

    Terminate Secured VPN

    To request termination of the Secured VPN service, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Management > Support Center menu. Go to the Support Center > Service Home page.
    2. On the Support Center Service Home page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request List page.
    3. On the Service Request List page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request page.
    4. Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
      • In the task category, select Secured VPN termination.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: Secured VPN Service Termination Request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • Automatically filled with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect service category and service
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: Secured VPN
        Task classificationSelect the type you want to request
        • Terminate Secured VPN: select if you are terminating the service
        contentGuide to Entering Customer Basic Information and Application Process
        • Content: End Customer/MSP Information
        AttachmentIf you have a completed Secured VPN service application (required) and any additional files you wish to share, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, and tif files can be attached
        Table. Table. Secured VPN Service Termination Request Items
    5. After reviewing Application Process and Notes, click the Form Download > Service Request Form Download button to download the Secured VPN Service Request Form.
    6. Please fill out the Secured VPN Service Application Form.
      • Refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs, and fill out the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationComplete required fields such as request type, usage period, and basic information
        • Request type: select termination
        • Usage period: enter desired termination date
        • Guaranteed bandwidth: select the bandwidth you applied for
        • Basic information: enter Account name, Project name, and recipient details
        Monitoring informationWhen terminating the entire service, no input is required.
        Table. Main contents of the Secured VPN service termination request form
    7. Attach the completed application form to the attachment area.
    8. Click the Request button on the service request page.
      • Once the request is completed, verify the submitted information on the Support Center > Service Request list page.
    9. After the monitoring team reviews the submitted service request, the termination is completed once the monitored IP is deleted.
      • Service termination requires three business days, including the cancellation request date.

    13.2.1 - Secured VPN Build Process Guide

    To launch the Secured VPN service, you need to install a branch VPN in the client’s network and then perform an integration check. However, if you have a VPN that you operate directly, the integration check is not required. Refer to the process below to apply for the Secured VPN service.

    Caution
    Be sure to check the restrictions when using the Secured VPN service.
    Diagram
    Figure. Secured VPN deployment process

    Samsung Cloud Platform Console task (perform MSP)

    1. Apply for Direct Connect.
    2. Create a VPC and DCon-VPN connection for the connection target.
    3. Apply for Uplink line.
      • Purpose of request: Configuration work to enable communication between the customer’s Office(On-premise) and the customer’s VPC within the Samsung Cloud Platform.
      • Select the application path: Console > Support Center > Service Request.
        • Service: Networking > Direct Connect
        • Task Category: Uplink line request
      • For the construction lead time and Uplink line work schedule, please inquire via Console > Support Center > Contact.
    4. Set up routing for Firewall, Security Group, Direct Connect, etc.

    Routing and firewall configuration (client performed)

    1. Configure routing between the client’s Office internal network and the branch VPN, and set up the client’s firewall.
      • Prior consultation is required for routing and firewall configuration. (SDS → MSP → customer)
    2. Configure the Samsung Cloud Platform segment and the client Office segment for bidirectional communication.

    Installation of client VPN equipment and tunnel activation (MSP/SDS performed)

    When installing the customer’s VPM equipment, you can either rent equipment from SDS or use your own equipment. Check the process that applies to your situation.

    Case 1) When using the branch VPN device as a SECUI rental device provided by SDS

    1. Check the specifications, quantity, schedule, and installation location of the leased VPN equipment. (MSP→SDS)
    2. Please request the preparation of a pre‑installation environment survey for VPN. (SDS → MSP)
    3. Visit the client site and install the SECUI rental VPN equipment. (SDS)
    4. Open a tunnel between the branch VPN and the center VPN. (SDS)

    Case 2) When using the branch VPN device as the customer’s own equipment

    1. Check the branch VPN equipment specifications and schedule. (MSP→SDS)
    2. Request equipment compatibility and IPSec VPN license/equipment setup. (SDS → client/MSP)
    3. Establish a tunnel between the branch VPN ↔ center VPN. (Customer/SDS)
    Reference
    • If the client requests a VPN installation work plan, contact via Console > Support Center > Contact or mssp.scp@samsung.com.
    • Proceed with the work in compliance with the National Intelligence Service VPN installation guide and security review standards.

    End-to-End test (perform MSP/SDS)

    1. Verify and share the test schedule after installing the branch VPN equipment (or configuring existing equipment). (SDS → MSP)
    2. Verify communication between the branch VPN device and the VPC (bidirectional).
    Caution
    Uplink line not requested, customer routing and firewall configuration errors, etc., can cause the End-to-End test to fail.

    13.3 - Release Note

    Secured VPN

    2025.07.01
    NEW Secured VPN Service Official Version Release
    • We have launched a Secured VPN service that safely connects external customer networks with the Samsung Cloud Platform’s cloud network via an encrypted virtual private network.

    14 - FPMS

    14.1 - Overview

    Service Overview

    FPMS (Firewall Policy Management System) is an automated firewall operation service designed to efficiently and securely manage firewalls across various cloud environments. It automates all processes that operators currently perform manually, eliminating human errors and failures, and reducing users’ service lead time.

    Features

    • Failure Prevention: Prevent human errors that can occur when manually registering firewall policies, and verify that the IP and Port information in the request conforms to proper syntax and structure, converting it to correct data to proactively prevent failures.
    • Operational Convenience Improvement: It automates the application of firewall policies and provides a function that replicates a requested policy to another firewall for redundancy. By leveraging the firewall policy expiration feature offered by FPMS, policies can be limited to a specific period, and features such as automatic deletion of disabled policies help reduce the workload of operational personnel.
    • Firewall Policy Optimization: Use an optimization algorithm for the requested firewall policy to optimize the firewall policy. Also, by checking for duplicate or permanent policies, you can prevent the application of unnecessary rules.
    • Continuous Security Enhancement: Analyze excessive open policies and expired or unmanaged policies, quantify diagnostic scores by category, and easily identify vulnerability status. Additionally, you can continuously strengthen security through the vulnerability remediation guide.

    Service Architecture Diagram

    Architecture diagram
    Figure. FPMS architecture diagram

    Provided features

    FPMS provides the following features.

    • Policy Management
      • Policy change history management and real-time monitoring
      • Policy search and policy expiration management
    • Automatic Policy Registration
      • Application data consistency check and automatic conversion
      • Network operation/security standard inspection and conversion
      • Automatic rule creation and application based on firewall vendor characteristics
    • Policy Optimization
      • Remove duplicate policy address/port/protocol
      • Policy pattern analysis optimization
      • Unused/Expired/Duplicate Policy Analysis
    • Policy Security Analysis
      • Provide security index results for each firewall policy
      • Report risk status after similarity analysis of application information and policy

    Component

    Firewall

    FPMS can register and manage firewalls that are currently in operation.

    • Before registering a firewall, you need to confirm that it is compatible (check manufacturer, model name, OS version).
    • FPMS uses the API to connect to firewall devices to insert policies or retrieve information. To do this, firewall operators must create an integration account on the firewall device and configure the API or verify information so that access is possible.

    Firewall Application System

    To retrieve firewall application data, FPMS must be integrated with the application system.

    Constraints

    The constraints of the FPMS service are as follows. Please be sure to review the constraints below before use and incorporate them into your service usage plan.

    • Separate infrastructure must be prepared for the installation and service provision of FPMS.
    • A VM for web/app services and a DBMS configuration for data storage are required.

    Provision status by region

    FPMS is available in the following environments.

    RegionProvision status
    Korea West (kr-west1)Provided
    Korea East (kr-east1)Provided
    South Korea South 1 (kr-south1)Not provided
    South Korea South 2 (kr-south2)Not provided
    South Korea South 3 (kr-south3)Not provided
    Table. FPMS regional availability status

    Prior Service

    FPMS has no prior service.

    14.2 - How-to guides

    Users can create the service by entering the required information to receive the FPMS service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Create FPMS

    You can create and use the FPMS service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    To request the creation of an FPMS service, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > FPMS menu. Navigate to the FPMS Service Home page.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the FPMS Service Request button. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Request List > Service Request page.
    3. Service Request page: enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
      • In the task type, select FPMS Service Creation.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: FPMS Service Creation Request
        RegionSelect the location of Samsung Cloud Platform
        ServiceSelect the service group and service. If you click the FPMS service request button, it is entered automatically
        • Service Group: Security
        • Service: FPMS
        Task classificationSelect the task you want to request
        • Create FPMS Service: Select if you are requesting a new service
        contentCheck the service application process and reference information, then enter the detailed application details.
        AttachmentIf you have additional files you want to share for the service application, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif files can be attached
        Table. FPMS Service Creation Request Items
    4. Check the required information entered on the Service Request page and click the Request button.
      • After completing the FPMS service application, a dedicated FPMS technical support representative will contact you by email to set up the installation and usage of FMPS.
      • After confirming the details with the dedicated FPMS technical support representative, the FPMS installation and related system integration work will proceed.

    Check FPMS Application Details

    After applying for the FPMS service, you can view the detailed information and processing steps.

    To check the FPMS service application details, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Support Center menu. Go to the Service Home page of Support Center.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Service Request menu. You will be taken to the Service Request List page.
    3. On the Service Request List page, select the request item. You will be taken to the Service Request Details page.
    4. Check the detailed information and processing steps on the Service Request Details page.
    information

    Detailed FPMS information can be viewed in a separate FPMS management portal.

    • The management portal address will be sent separately by the person in charge via email after the FPMS installation is complete.

    Terminate FPMS

    To request cancellation of the FPMS service, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > FPMS menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of FPMS.

    2. On the Service Home page, click the FPMS Service Request button. Navigate to the Support Center > Service Request List > Service Request page.

    3. Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.

      • Select FPMS Service Termination in the task type.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: FPMS Service Termination Request
        RegionSelect the location of Samsung Cloud Platform
        ServiceSelect the service group and service. If you click the FPMS service request button, it is entered automatically
        • Service Group: Security
        • Service: FPMS
        Task classificationSelect the operation you want to request
        • FPMS Service Termination: Select if you want to terminate the service
        contentReview the service termination process and reference information, then enter the detailed application details.
        AttachmentIf you have any additional files you want to share for service termination, proceed with the upload
        • Attachments can be up to 5 MB each, with a maximum of 5 files
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif files are allowed
        Table. Table. FPMS Service Termination Request Items
    4. Verify the required information entered on the Service Request page, and click the Request button.

      • After you complete the FPMS service termination request, the dedicated FPMS technical support staff will verify it and proceed with the FPMS service termination and deletion.

    14.3 - Release Note

    FPMS

    2025.12.16
    FEATURE Add firewall and Security Group registration feature, improve SecuAI firewall support
    • A feature has been added to FPMS that allows registering and managing firewalls and Security Groups of the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.
    • The SecuAI firewall v3.7 support (anyzone) feature has been improved.
    2025.07.01
    NEW FPMS service official version release
    • We have launched the FPMS (Firewall Policy Management System) service, which automates firewall operation tasks to efficiently and securely manage firewalls across diverse cloud environments.

    15 - Secrets Manager

    15.1 - Overview

    Service Overview

    Secrets Manager is a service that encrypts customers’ sensitive information as Secrets (secure data) and stores and manages it safely. Remove hard-coded sensitive information from the application source code and retrieve it by invoking Secrets stored securely in a Key-Value format. A secret is encrypted with a user‑managed key in conjunction with the Key Management Service and stored securely.

    Service Architecture Diagram

    Diagram
    Figure. Secrets Manager diagram

    Provided features

    Secrets Manager provides the following features.

    • Secret creation/deletion: Secrets Manager can create, delete, and manage Secrets. * The user stores security (sensitive) information in key/value format in the generated Secret.
    • Secret lookup: You can retrieve Secret values based on custom policies and permission settings.
    • Label-based version control: When a Secret is modified, you can set a label on the version, which is a snapshot of the uniquely generated data, allowing you to manage Secrets more efficiently.

    Component

    Secret

    It stores sensitive (critical) information as a logical unit, encrypting security information values in Key/Value format with a KMS key.

    • A Secret is an object created through the creation of a Secrets Manager product service in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Version

    It is a snapshot of unique data that is newly created each time a Secret is modified (the unit that stores the actual value of the Secret).

    Label

    It is a label or tag attached to a specific version of a Secret (a pointer for referencing a specific version).

    Constraints

    The limitations of the Secrets Manager service are as follows. Before use, be sure to review the following constraints and incorporate them into your service usage plan.

    Reference
    • Secrets Manager is a regional service, and a created secret can be used only within that region.
    • When rotating a customer-managed key, the key version is changed internally. * By using the newly generated version of the key, you can decrypt data that was encrypted with the previous version of the key. * (maintain compatibility)
      • Versions through key rotation are compatible up to the 100th version, regardless of the encryption algorithm.
    ItemDetailed descriptionQuota
    Secret Value SizeSize of the encrypted Secret value65,536
    SecretsNumber of Secrets per region in an account500,000
    Attached Labels for SecretNumber of Labels attached to all versions of Secret20
    Versions per SecretNumber of versions of Secret100
    Table. Secrets Manager constraints

    Preliminary Service

    Secrets Manager has no prerequisite services.

    15.2 - How-to guides

    Users can create the service by entering the required information for the Secrets Manager service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console and selecting detailed options.

    Create Secrets Manager

    You can create and use Secrets Manager in the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    To create a Secrets Manager, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > Secrets Manager menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of Secrets Manager.

    2. On the Service Home page, click the Create Secrets Manager button. 2. Navigate to the Create Secrets Manager page.

    3. Create Secrets Manager page, enter the information required to create the service and input additional details.

      • Enter or select the required information in the Service Information Input area.
        Category
        required status
        Detailed description
        Secret nameRequiredEnter the secret name
        typeRequiredSelect the type to manage encrypted with Secret from the list.
        Key/Value inputRequiredEnter a pair of Key/Value for Secret information
        • Click the Add button to add up to 10 entries
        • Click the X icon to delete the entry
        encryption keyEssentialSelect the KMS key from the list to encrypt the Secret
        • Select a key created in the KMS service from the list. Or click +Create New to create a KMS key
        • Only KMS keys for encryption/decryption can be selected. The selectable encryption/decryption KMS key types are encryption/decryption (AES-256), encryption/decryption and signing/verification (RSA-2048), and encryption/decryption (ARIA) – three types.
        • When entering Key/Value, input must be within 64 KB; registration is not allowed if the size exceeds this limit.
        Public access controlRequiredEnter public access allowed IP
        • After entering the IP address, click the Add button to register up to 10 entries
        • Click the Delete All button to remove all IP entries from the list
        • You can register the 0.0.0.0/24 - 0.0.0.0/32 range, but it may be insecure
        Private access controlSelectionUse After selecting, select the resource to allow private access
        • Click the Add button to add an access‑allowed resource
        • If the setting is not enabled, access is allowed for all subnet resources in the same region
        ExplanationSelectionEnter description for Secrets Manager
        Table. Secrets Manager service information input items
      • Enter or select the required information in the Additional Information Input area.
        Category
        required status
        Detailed description
        tagSelectionAdd Tag
        • Up to 50 per resource can be added
        • After clicking the Add Tag button, input or select Key, Value values
        Table. Secrets Manager additional information input fields
    4. Summary Check the detailed information and estimated charges generated in the panel, and click the Create button.

      • Once creation is complete, verify the created resource on the Secrets Manager list page.

    Check Secrets Manager detailed information

    Secrets Manager can view and edit the complete list of resources and detailed information. Secrets Manager Details page consists of Details, Versions, Tags, Activity History tabs.

    To view detailed information about Secrets Manager, follow these steps.

    1. All Services > Security > Secrets Manager Click the menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of Secrets Manager.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Secrets Manager menu. 2. Go to the Secrets Manager List page.
    3. On the Secrets Manager List page, click the resource to view its details. 3. Go to the Secrets Manager Details page.
      • Secrets Manager Details At the top of the page, status information and descriptions of additional features are displayed.
        CategoryDetailed description
        statusDisplay the status of Secrets Manager
        • Active: available/enabled
        • To be terminated: scheduled for deletion
        Service terminationCancel Service button
        Table. Secrets Manager status information and additional features

    Detailed Information

    Secrets Manager list page allows you to view detailed information of the selected resource and edit the information if necessary.

    Category
    Detailed description
    serviceService name
    Resource TypeResource Type
    SRNUnique resource ID in Samsung Cloud Platform
    Resource nameResource Name
    Resource IDUnique resource ID in the service
    ConstructorUser who created the service
    Creation date and timeService creation date and time
    ModifierUser who modified the service
    Modification dateService modification date and time
    Secret nameName of the generated Secret
    Secret valuethe entered Secret value
    • View button, when clicked, after entering the password you can view and edit the information in the Secret value view window
    typeType of the generated Secret
    Recent search date and timeLast retrieval time of the generated Secret
    encryption keyDisplay the KMS key name selected by the user
    • Clicking the key name navigates to the KMS key details page
    • Clicking the edit icon allows the key to be changed in the encryption key edit window
    URLPublic/Private URL information display
    • Copy icon can be clicked to copy the URL address
    Public access controlDisplay the registered public access allowed IP
    • Edit icon can be clicked to modify the IP address
    Private access controlDisplay registered private access allowed resources
    • Edit Click the icon to edit the resource
    ExplanationDisplay additional description for Secret
    • Click the edit icon to modify the description
    Table. Secrets Manager Details tab items

    Version

    Secrets Manager list page allows you to use labels to track the version of the selected Secret.

    Reference

    Refer to the definition of each item when checking the version information of Secret Manager.

    • Secret: logical unit that stores sensitive (important) information
    • Version: A snapshot of unique data generated each time a Secret is modified (the unit that stores the actual value of the Secret)
    • Label: a nameplate or tag attached to a specific version of a Secret (a pointer for referencing a specific version)
    CategoryDetailed description
    Version IDCurrent version, previous version, and the ID of the version with a custom label (Custom Label) displayed
    • Copy icon can be clicked to copy the version ID value
    LabelSecret version display
    • CURRENT: current version
    • PREVIOUS: previous version
    • CUSTOM_LABEL: custom label
    Last access timeSecret’s most recent access time
    Creation date and timeSecret creation timestamp
    Table. Secrets Manager version tab items
    Caution

    The limitations when using a version of Secret are as follows.

    • You can store up to 100 versions per Secret. * Regardless of whether a custom label is set, if the number of versions exceeds 100, the oldest versions are deleted first.
    • For important versions with custom labels, create a new Secret before the version is deleted due to quota limits, and configure it so that the running application can reference the new Secret.

    Tag

    Secrets Manager list page allows you to view the tag information of the selected resource, and to add, modify, or delete it.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Tag listTag list
    • You can view the Key, Value information of the tag
    • Up to 50 tags can be added per resource
    • When entering tags, search the existing list of created Keys and Values and select
    Table. Secrets Manager tag tab items

    Job History

    Secrets Manager list page lets you view the operation history of the selected resource.

    CategoryDetailed description
    Work historyTask execution details
    Work Date/TimeTask execution date and time
    Resource TypeResource Type
    Resource nameResource Name
    Operation resultTask execution result (success/failure)
    Operator InformationUser information of the person who performed the task
    Table. Secrets Manager operation history tab detailed information items

    Terminate Secrets Manager

    You can cancel Secrets Manager that you are not using.

    Caution
    If you cancel Secret Manager, you will not be able to use any features of Secrets Manager, and it will be permanently deleted after the cancellation waiting period. During the termination pending period, the Secret cannot be searched.

    To cancel Secrets Manager, follow the steps below.

    1. All Services > Security > Secrets Manager Click the menu. 1. Go to the Service Home page of Secrets Manager.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Secrets Manager menu. 2. Go to the Secrets Manager List page.
    3. On the Secrets Manager List page, click the resource to view its details. 3. Go to the Secrets Manager Details page.
    4. On the Secrets Manager Details page, click the Cancel Service button. 4. Service Cancellation popup will be opened.
    5. Service Cancellation in the popup window, enter the cancellation waiting period, and click the Confirm button.
      • The termination waiting period can be entered within a range of 7 to 30 days.
    6. After termination is complete, check on the Secrets Manager List page whether the resource has been terminated.
    Information
    If you want to reuse a Secret during the termination pending period, on the Secrets Manager List page, open the context menu of the desired Secret item > click Cancel Termination. If the cancellation succeeds, you can reuse the Secret.

    15.2.1 - Secret Retrieval API Reference

    This user guide explains how to use and invoke the Public/Private endpoints of Secrets Manager.

    Caution
    • Public Endpoint can be called from an environment that can communicate over the Internet.
    • Private Endpoint can only be called from a Samsung Cloud Platform VM.

    Pre-configuration for Endpoint Calls

    Describes the prerequisite configuration items required when calling the Secrets Manager endpoint.

    Register Outbound Rule for Security Group

    To call the endpoint, you need to register an outbound rule in the security group.

    To register an Outbound Rule for a Security Group, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > Secrets Manager menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of Secrets Manager.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Secrets Manager menu. You will be taken to the Secrets Manager List page.
    3. On the Secrets Manager List page, click the resource whose details you want to view. You will be taken to the Secrets Manager Details page.
    4. On the Secrets Manager Details page, check the URL information.
      • You can copy the public/private URL information from the URL field.
    5. Use the nslookup command to verify the IP to register in the Security Group.
    nslookup <호출할 endpoint url>
    
    1. From Security Group > Security Group List, select the Security Group of the VM for which you want to set access control. Then navigate to the Security Group Details page.
    2. In the Security Group Details > Rules tab, click the Add Rule button. When the Add Rule window appears, enter the information below to add a rule.
      ItemDetailed description
      Target input methodCIDR selection
      Target addressEnter the IP address retrieved by nslookup
      typeSelect Destination Port/Type then enter protocol information
      • Select TCP among the protocols, and enter 443 in the TCP Destination Port
      directionOutbound rule Select
      ExplanationEnter the invocation rules for Secrets Manager public/private endpoints
      Table. Input items for adding Security Group rules
    3. Security Group rules Verify that the rule you entered in the list has been added.

    Register access control for Secrets Manager

    You can register public/private access controls for Secrets Manager.

    To configure the access control items of Secrets Manager, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > Secrets Manager menu. You will be taken to the Service Home page of Secrets Manager.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Secrets Manager menu. You will be taken to the Secrets Manager list page.
    3. On the Secrets Manager List page, click the resource to view detailed information. You will be taken to the Secrets Manager Details page.
    4. On the Secrets Manager Details page, click the edit icon of Public Access Control to add an allowed IP for Public Endpoint access.
      • Public Access Control Edit Popup window, enter the IP and click the Add button. When the addition is complete, click the Confirm button.
      • For security, we recommend adding a single IP, and you can register up to 10.
      • You can register the 0.0.0.0/24 – 0.0.0.0/32 range, but be careful as it may be insecure.
    5. On the Secrets Manager Details page, click the edit icon of Private Access Control to add a VM that allows Private Endpoint access.
      • Private Access Control Edit Popup window, select the resource to allow access and click the Add button. When addition is complete, click the Confirm button.
      • If you do not enable the setting, you can access all subnet resources in the same region.

    Calling Secrets Manager API

    Describes how to call the Secrets Manager API.

    Check the URL information of Secrets Manager

    On the All Services > Security > Secrets Manager > Secrets Manager Details page, check the URL information.

    • You can copy the public/private URL information from the URL field.

    Secrets Manager Retrieval API

    get /v1/secret
    

    Description

    Secret value lookup

    Parameters

    TypeNameDescriptionSchema
    querysecretId (required)Secret ID
    (Example : b3ed8b7637574255b83c274a6ed79426)
    string
    Table. API Call Parameters

    Responses

    Http CodeDescriptionSchema
    200OKNone
    400Bad RequestNone
    401UnauthorizedNone
    403IP Not AllowedNone
    404Not FoundNone
    Table. API call Responses items

    Example HTTP request

    Request path

    /v1/secret?secretId={secretId}
    

    Request header

    "AccessKey = 341g54421b5d67a1gf2b30f1a5415e75",
    "SecretKey = 87d5eec6-998h-4933-e865-fd837495je28"
    

    Example HTTP response

    Response 200

    {
      "status": "success",
      "data": {
        "key": "value"
      },
      "timestamp": "2026-01-20T09:21:18.92730172"
    }
    

    15.3 - Release Note

    Secrets Manager

    2026.03.19
    FEATURE Private Endpoint service provision
    • Provides a Private Endpoint that can be called as a Secret from VM resources in the Samsung Cloud Platform.
      • You can select a VM resource in Samsung Cloud Platform that stores secret security information and configure access control.
    2025.12.16
    NEW Secrets Manager service official version release
    • We have launched a service that encrypts customers’ sensitive information as Secret(secure information) and safely stores and manages it.
    • Remove hard-coded security information from the application source code and retrieve it by invoking securely stored Secrets.

    16 - DDoS Protection

    16.1 - Overview

    Service Overview

    DDoS Protection is a DDoS (Distributed Denial of Service) detection and mitigation service that uses multiple servers to detect and block attacks that generate concentrated traffic on the network. Through continuous monitoring, it detects external traffic attacks targeting a domain, performs additional verification and blocking, and protects servers inside the DMZ. When a DDoS attack occurs, it blocks and disperses traffic to minimize the load on the origin server, ensuring the continuity of the web service.

    The DDoS Protection service of Samsung Cloud Platform is based on SECaaS. All user traffic passes through the SECaaS PoP before reaching the server, and when attack traffic arrives, it is analyzed by the SECaaS Rule, detected and blocked, and only clean traffic is forwarded to the server. Additionally, the service is provided from a nearby PoP based on the user’s connection country, and if a PoP failure occurs, service is provided from another PoP within the same country or region.

    Features

    • Rapid Attack Detection: When a large volume of traffic arrives, it detects and blocks DDoS attacks in real time. Continuously update detection criteria to address the latest attack techniques.
    • Effective Attack Blocking: When L3/L4/L7 DDoS attacks are detected, through additional verification such as JAVA Script, Captcha, we ensure service availability by blocking only DDoS attack traffic, and allow regular users to access the website normally.
    • Stable web service operation: With experience in large-scale network operations and 24x365 security monitoring, we can effectively respond to external security threats.

    Configuration diagram

    Diagram
    Figure. DDoS Protection operation

    Provided features

    We provide the following features.

    • Intrusion detection through network flow and monitoring
      • Detecting and blocking high-volume traffic inbound to a domain
      • Perform deep inspection (JAVA Script verification, Captcha verification, etc.)
      • Block L7 application vulnerability attacks
      • 24/7 event monitoring
    • Fast traffic processing through a global network
      • Fast traffic handling via global PoPs
      • Rapid routing transition through SDN and Tier 1 ISP integration

    Component

    domain

    SECaaS DDoS Protection is registered on a per-domain basis.

    • It can only be applied to domains served with an FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name); if the service is provided using an IP address instead of a domain, SECaaS DDoS Protection cannot be applied.
    • Registration is only possible for domains registered in the public DNS, and after verifying the domain’s integrity via DNS lookup, it cannot be used when registering a private internal IP.
    • It applies to traffic that uses HTTP/HTTPS protocols based on web applications, and other TCP traffic is dropped and cannot be used.

    Traffic

    Traffic is aggregated as the combined Mbps value of the individually registered domains between SECaaS DDoS Protection and the Origin server.

    Constraints

    To use DDoS Protection, please check the following items in advance.

    • Domain Use
      • It can be applied only when the service is provided using an FQDN(Fully Qualified Domain Name). If you serve with an IP address instead of a website URL, DDoS Protection cannot be applied.
      • Registration is possible only for domains registered in a public DNS. DDoS Protection is located in the external Internet segment and verifies domain integrity via DNS Lookup. (Registration with internal private IPs such as 10.10.10.10 makes DDoS Protection unavailable.)
    • Use HTTP/HTTPS
      • Only traffic using the HTTP/HTTPS protocol for web applications is accepted.
      • TCP traffic that uses protocols other than http/https is dropped, so DDoS Protection cannot be used.
    • XFF(X-Forwarded-For) header function Enable required
      • SECaaS DDoS Protection has the XFF header feature enabled by default. If the XFF header feature is set to disabled, the session may be terminated.
    • Client Source IP Change
      • When forwarding a user request from SECaaS DDoS Protection to the customer system, the Source IP is changed to an IP range owned by DDoS Protection rather than the original user’s public IP. The original user’s public IP is delivered via the XFF header.
    • Maximum Upload Size Limit
      • The maximum uploadable file size is limited to 500 MB. (If it exceeds 500 MB, separate agreement is required.)

    Provision status by region

    DDoS Protection is available in the following environments.

    RegionProvision status
    Korea West (kr-west1)Provided
    Korea East (kr-east1)Provided
    South Korea South 1 (kr-south1)Not provided
    South Korea South 2 (kr-south2)Not provided
    South Korea South 3 (kr-south3)Not provided
    Table. DDoS Protection regional availability status

    Preliminary Service

    This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before applying for the service. Please refer to the guide provided for each service for details and prepare in advance.

    Service CategoryServiceDetailed description
    ComputeVirtual ServerVirtual server optimized for cloud computing
    SecurityWAFA service that protects web applications from web vulnerabilities and attacks
    Table. DDoS Protection Preliminary Service

    16.2 - How-to guides

    Users can create the DDoS Protection service by entering the required information through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Create DDoS Protection

    You can create and use the DDoS Protection service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    guide
    We offer DDoS Protection service only to customers using WAF. Apply for WAF and DDoS Protection together.

    To request the creation of a DDoS Protection service, follow these steps.

    1. All Services > Security > DDoS Protection menu, click it. You will be taken to the Service Home page of DDoS Protection.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the DDoS Protection Service Request button. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Request List > Service Request page.
    3. Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
      • In the operation type, select Create DDoS Protection.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: DDoS Protection service creation request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • Automatically filled with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect the service category and service. If you click the DDoS Protection service request button, it is entered automatically
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: DDoS Protection
        Task classificationSelect the Activity you want to request
        • Create DDoS Protection: select if you are requesting a new service
        contentGuide to the service application process and reference information
        AttachmentIf you have a completed DDoS Protection service application (required) and any additional files you wish to share, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, and tif files are allowed
        Table. DDoS Protection Service Creation Request Items
    4. After reviewing the application process and reference information, download the form > click the Service Request Form Download button to download the DDoS Protection Service Application Form.
    5. Please fill out the DDoS Protection Service Application Form.
      • Refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs and complete the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationComplete required fields such as application type, usage period, and usage amount.
        Monitoring informationComplete required items such as migration schedule, domain, and secure recipient information
        • Fill out all items except for special cases
        Table. Main contents of the DDoS Protection service creation request form
    6. Attach the completed application form in the attachment area.
    7. Click the Request button on the service request page.
      • When the request is completed, check the submitted details on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
    8. After the monitoring personnel review the submitted service request, they proceed with the process to use the service.
      • The monitoring officer is contacting you via email to proceed with opening the firewall, SECaaS domain authentication, and certificate deployment.
      • User Guide > Security > DDoS Protection > How-to guides > Refer to the DDoS Protection Service Application page to proceed with monitoring integration.
      • We will conduct a test at the Security Monitoring Center (securitycenter@samsung.com) to verify the monitoring integration.
      • Perform a final check to confirm normal service access and detect any SSL certificate errors.
    9. The DDoS Protection service is now available.

    Check DDoS Protection detailed information

    Detailed information on DDoS Protection can be accessed from a separate Security Platform (SSMP).

    VM list

    1. Security Platform (SSMP) Please access it.
    2. Enter Knox login information.
    3. Assets > Cloud Monitoring Management > Cloud URL List Check the SECaaS deployment status on the page. You can enter the required fields to query.
      Item
      Detailed description
      Business UnitSelect the appropriate business unit
      Business nameSelect the magnifying glass icon, then search for and enter the corresponding business name.
      website URLEnter URL
      SECaaS implementationSelect whether to apply SECaaS (Apply/Do not apply)
      SECaaS modeSelect SECaaS mode (block/detect)
      SECaaS vendorSelect SECaaS vendor (None/Imperva/Cloudflare)
      PlatformEnter using SCP
      Deletion status
      Table. Search items
    4. When you click the individual URL, you can view the URL details.
      SECaaS status
      Detailed description
      Apply (Detection)SECaaS applied state, conduct attack pattern detection and log analysis
      • Recommend maintaining detection mode for at least one month, and after analyzing false positives/false negatives for at least one month, recommend switching to blocking mode via email
      Apply (Block)SECaaS applied state, automatic blocking of detected attacks
      Not appliedState where SECaaS is not applied
      Table. SECaaS implementation status

    DDoS Protection Terminate

    To request termination of the DDoS Protection service, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Management > Support Center menu. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Home page.

    2. On the Support Center Service Home page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request List page.

    3. On the Service Request List page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request page.

    4. Service Request page: enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.

      • Select DDoS Protection termination in the work category.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: DDoS Protection Service Cancellation Request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • Automatically filled with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect service category and service
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: DDoS Protection
        Task classificationSelect the Activity you want to request
        • Cancel DDoS Protection: select if you are canceling the service
        contentGuide to the service application process and reference information
        AttachmentIf you have a completed DDoS Protection service application form (required) and any additional files you wish to share, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, and tif files are allowed
        Table. Table. DDoS Protection service termination request items
    5. After reviewing the Application Process and Reference Information, click the Form Download > Service Request Form Download button to download the DDoS Protection Service Application Form.

    6. Please complete the DDoS Protection Service Application Form.

      • Refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs and complete the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationFill in required items such as application type, usage period, and usage amount
        • Usage amount does not need to be filled in
        Monitoring informationComplete required items such as migration schedule, domain, and secure recipient information
        • Complete all items except for special notes
        Table. Main contents of DDoS Protection service termination request form
    7. Attach the completed application form to the attachment area.

    8. Click the Request button on the service request page.

      • Once the request is completed, verify the submitted information on the Support Center > Service Request list page.
    9. After the monitoring staff verifies the submitted service request, the termination process is completed once the URL is deleted.

      • Service termination takes 2–3 business days (including the cancellation request date).
      • The restoration of DNS settings that were changed for SECaaS implementation must be performed directly by the service operator.
      • When the service termination is completed, you cannot view the URL on the Security Platform (SSMP) Assets > Cloud Monitoring Management > Cloud URL List page.

    16.2.1 - DDoS Protection Preparation

    Configure firewall open settings

    Client (User) - SECaaS (DDoS Protection) - Origin Server Each segment requires firewall opening. For the information required to open the firewall (Source, Type, Protocol, Destination), please inquire via the Support Center > Contact Us menu.

    Reference
    Samsung SDS network users do not need to submit a separate firewall opening request.
    1. Proceed with opening the firewall for the segment where the client (User) connects to SECaaS (DDoS Protection).
      • The default supported web ports for SECaaS are as follows.
        • http : 80, 8080, 8880, 2052, 2082, 2086, 2095
        • https : 443, 2053, 2087, 2096, 8443
      • For websites that use ports other than the default supported web ports, fill out the DDoS Protection service request form to submit a service request. We will provide the Destination IP via the email account on the service request form. If the ports are changed (added, removed) or the Origin is changed after applying SECaaS, the IP may change. If you email the security monitoring center account (securitucenter@samsung.com) in advance, we will inform you of the changed IP through the responsible person.
        • If you are not using an IPv6 address, registration is not required.
        • The service application form can be downloaded and attached from the All Services > Security > DDoS Protection menu by clicking the DDoS Protection Service Request button, then downloading it on the Service Request screen.
        • For information related to service application, see the How-to guides’ DDoS Protection 생성하기.
          SourceTypeProtocolDestination: SECaaS
          ClientHTTP, HTTPSTCP
          • IPv4: 162.159.141.5 / 172.66.1.3
          • IPv6: 2606:4700:7::102 / 2a06:98c1:58::102
          Table. Example of IP forwarding form
    2. Proceed with opening the firewall for the segment that connects to the Origin Server in SECaaS(DDoS Protection).
      • The origin server is the device that receives traffic from SECaaS. (e.g., LB, server, etc.)
      • The firewall or security device in front of the origin server must allow a specific range.
        • Cloudflare IP range information: https://www.cloudflare.com/ko-kr/ips/
        • If you are not using an IPv6 address, registration is not required.
          Caution
          We recommend blocking web traffic (HTTP, HTTPS) outside the specified range. If not blocked, the Origin IP may be exposed, potentially enabling attacks that bypass SECaaS, and such bypass attacks are difficult to monitor for security.

    Authenticate SECaaS domain

    To authenticate the registrant of the domain, you must create a host and add a TXT record for domain verification to DNS.

    • Authentication typically takes about 15 minutes after registration, but can take up to 24 hours depending on the environment. For example, when registering www.test.com, you must create/enter the Host and TXT Record values we provide into DNS.

    Applying SECaaS Certificate

    You can select and use either the certificate provided by SECaaS or the certificate supplied by the customer. Certificate installation is possible only if HTTPS is enabled for the domain; if the certificate is not installed, HTTPS communication will not work.

    1. When using SECaaS certificate

    • A new SSL certificate used between the Client ↔ SECaaS server will be generated.
    • Validation of the domain owner is required for the generated SSL certificate. The owner verification is performed by creating/entering the HOST and CNAME values we provide into DNS.
    • Certificates cannot be extracted and delivered, and there is an automatic renewal feature, so no separate renewal is required.
    • Authentication typically takes about 15 minutes after registration, but may take up to 24 hours depending on the environment.

    2. When using a client (Custom) certificate

    • Provide the Full chain certificate, Key File, and Key Value.
    • An API communication issue occurs when registering a single certificate. (Only pfx, pem, cer files are supported)
    • The renewed certificate must be provided for renewal before the certificate expires.

    16.2.2 - DDoS Protection Service Application

    After completing the service request on the service request page, proceed with the steps below in order.

    Perform pre-test

    1. Before changing the traffic path with SECaaS, run a test to verify that it works correctly.
      • The security monitoring center provides the IP to be used in SECaaS. Example: 103.22.200.1
      • We will explain using aaa.test.com as the website example.
      • Add the example text below to the C:\Windows\System32\drivers\etc\hosts file and save it.
        • Example phrase : 103.22.200.1 aaa.test.com
    2. When accessing a URL in Chrome, press F12 and then select F5 (Refresh) in the Network tab at the top of the developer tools.
    3. The process completes when the response header ‘X-cdn’ has the imperva value, or when a SECaaS IP is present in the remote address.

    Changing DNS Settings

    The path is changed so that actual traffic is transmitted via SECaaS.

    • We will configure each domain’s address as a CNAME using the provided CNAME domain. When using a CDN, change the CDN’s origin address to a CNAME.
    • Root (Naked) domains cannot have a CNAME record. It is recommended to configure an A record using the two default Anycast IPs. If setting both IPs is difficult, configure only one.
      • Example: Register or modify DNS for test.com using the CNAME we provide, and register or modify an A Record DNS for test.com using the IP we provide.

    Notify DNS Change

    After the DNS change is announced, the security monitoring center checks for proper integration and traffic inflow.

    Caution
    If the DNS change is not reported, we cannot determine whether it will be applied. Be sure to notify the service manager before changing DNS settings or after the change is completed.

    Check Service

    Verify normal service connectivity.

    • Check whether an SSL certificate error occurs.
    • DDoS Protection is operated in detection mode for one month, after which the logs are analyzed and provided to the service owner.
      • If no legitimate traffic is detected as an attack, switch to block mode. If a false positive occurs, verify with the service owner and then add an exception in DDoS Protection.

    16.2.3 - DDoS Protection Service Outage Response

    When a DDoS Protection service outage occurs, follow the steps below to address and respond to the issue.

    Service outage detection

    • The service owner will become aware of a failed service URL health check or a response error.
    • The security monitoring center will encounter SECaaS service disruptions and cause the registered Origin Healthcheck to fail.

    Remediation

    • After identifying the cause of the failure, if it is determined to be a SECaaS service outage, you must change the registered CNAME/A Record values to the original service’s Origin IP/address for redirection (reversion) and apply them. Since DNS values need to be changed, the user must handle it directly.
    • When an urgent bypass (restoration) is required.
      • SECaaS(DDoS Protection) → Server(Origin) Open the segment firewall to any.
      • You can achieve the same effect by asking the SECaaS administrator to request DNS bypass processing in the SECaaS settings. (It is applied based on the DNS TTL value and takes about five minutes.)
      • Websites that have DNS applied via an A Record value, such as a root (naked) domain, cannot be used.

    SECaaS reapplication

    After the outage is resolved, reapply the modified CNAME/A Record values to the SECaaS CNAME/A Record address.

    16.3 - Release Note

    DDoS Protection

    2025.04.28
    NEW Official release of DDoS Protection service
    • We are launching a DDoS Protection service that provides detection and mitigation of large-scale network traffic attacks.

    17 - Log Transmission

    17.1 - Overview

    Service Overview

    Log Transmission is a service that collects and stores logs in real time from firewalls, IPS, and DDoS security devices, and transmits them to the areas required by the customer. It provides a foundation for performing security monitoring in the user domain using those logs.

    Features

    • Security Event Log Collection/Transmission: Collect and store logs in real time from security devices, and transmit security events.
    • Secure Log Storage/Transmission: Log data can be stored securely, and backup and recovery are possible when needed. Collected logs are safely kept in a redundant storage, and data is transmitted by utilizing VPN services, etc. Sending securely.

    Configuration diagram

    Diagram
    Figure. Log Transmission concept diagram

    Provided features

    We provide the following features.

    • Integration of various security log sources
      • Real-time log collection from various sources such as firewalls, IPS, and DDoS security devices.
    • Log Filtering and Processing
      • Filter out unnecessary logs or extract only the logs requested by the customer.

    Component

    Log Transmission sends service log sources from the Samsung Cloud Platform to the equipment or system desired by the customer.

    • The service runs by connecting via VPN to the customer’s office (server room) where the device that receives the log source is located.

    Constraints

    To use Log Transmission, please check the following items in advance.

    • We collect and transmit logs for Security products offered by the Samsung Cloud Platform.
    • To send logs, you must be connected via VPN to the device that receives the logs.

    Provision status by region

    Log Transmission is available in the environments below.

    RegionProvision status
    Korea West (kr-west1)Provided
    Korea East (kr-east1)Not provided
    South Korea South 1 (kr-south1)Not provided
    South Korea South 2 (kr-south2)Not provided
    South Korea South 3 (kr-south3)Not provided
    Table. Log Transmission regional availability status

    Preceding Service

    This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the Log Transmission service. Refer to the guide provided for each service for details and prepare in advance.

    Service CategoryServiceDetailed description
    NetworkingDirect ConnectA service that securely and quickly connects the customer’s network with the Samsung Cloud Platform
    SecurityDDoS ProtectionLarge-scale network traffic attack detection and response service
    SecurityIPSA service that detects and responds to intrusions on websites and application servers in real time.
    SecuritySecured FirewallNext-generation firewall service that meets high security requirement levels
    Table. Log Transmission Pre-service
    • When running Log Transmission, you must select the service to which logs will be sent. Once the log transmission service target is determined, a VPN connection is required for secure log transmission.
    • To use the Log Transmission service, configuration work is required for communication between the customer’s Office (on‑premise) and the customer’s VPC within the Samsung Cloud Platform. Please follow the process below to request an uplink line, including external integration software and VPN settings, Direct Connect firewall opening, etc.
    1. Create a Direct Connect service.
    2. Create a connection between the customer’s VPC and DCon-VPN.
    3. Apply for an uplink line for communication between the client’s On-premise and VPC.
      • Application path: Support Center > Service Request List > Service Request
      • Select service: Networking > Direct Connect
      • Task Category: Uplink line request
    4. Configure routing for the VPN path.
      • Set up the required routing information such as Firewall, Security Group, Direct Connect, etc.
    Reference
    Direct Connect creation and Uplink line request must be completed to use the Log Transmission service.

    17.2 - How-to guides

    Users can create the service by entering the required information for using the Log Transmission service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Create Log Transmission

    You can apply for and use the Log Transmission service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    To request the creation of a Log Transmission service, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > Log Transmission menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Log Transmission.

    2. On the Service Home page, click the Log Transmission Service Request button. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Request List > Service Request page.

    3. Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.

      • In the task type, select Log Transmission creation.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request content
        • Example: Log Transmission Service Creation Request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • Automatically filled with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect the service category and service. If you click the Log Transmission service request button, it is entered automatically
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: Log Transmission
        Task classificationSelect the type you want to request
        • Create Log Transmission: select when requesting a new service
        contentCustomer Basic Information Entry and Application Process Guide
        • Content: End Customer/MSP Information
        AttachmentUpload the completed Log Transmission service application (required) and any additional files you wish to share
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif files are allowed
        Table. Log Transmission Service Creation Request Items
    4. After reviewing the application process and reference information, click the Form Download > Service Request Form Download button to download the Log Transmission Service Application Form.

    5. Please fill out the Log Transmission Service Application Form.

      • Refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs and complete the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationFill in required items such as application type, usage period, recipient information, etc.
        • Application type: select application
        • Usage period: enter desired start date
        • Basic information: enter Account name, Project name, recipient information
        Monitoring informationEnter required items such as log transmission target and customer IP (range)
        • Complete all items except special cases
        Table. Main contents of Log Transmission service creation request form
    6. Attach the completed application form in the attachment area.

    7. On the service request page, click the Request button.

      • After the request is completed, check the submitted details on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
    8. After the monitoring personnel review the submitted service request, they proceed with the process to use the service.

    9. The Log Transmission service is now available.

    Log Transmission Check detailed information

    The Log Transmission service proceeds with the process for the service after applying through an SR. Unlike other services, detailed Log Transmission information cannot be viewed in the Console.

    • To view detailed information, click the Contact Us button on the Support Center > Inquiry List page. On the Contact Us page, you can write your question and submit it.

    Terminate Log Transmission

    To request cancellation of the Log Transmission service, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Management > Support Center menu. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Home page.
    2. On the Support Center Service Home page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request List page.
    3. On the Service Request List page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request page.
    4. Service Request page: enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
      • In the task category, select Log Transmission Cancellation.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: Log Transmission Service Termination Request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • Automatically entered with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect service category and service
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: Log Transmission
        Task classificationSelect the type you want to request
        • Log Transmission termination: select if you are terminating the service
        contentCustomer Basic Information Entry and Application Process Guide
        • Content: End Customer/MSP Information
        AttachmentUpload the completed Log Transmission service application (required) and, if you have additional files you want to share, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, and tif files are allowed
        Table. Table. Log Transmission Service Termination Request Items
    5. After reviewing Application Process and Reference Information, click the Form Download > Service Request Form Download button to download the Log Transmission Service Application Form.
    6. Log Transmission Service Application Form please fill out.
      • Refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs and complete the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationFill in required fields such as request type, usage period, recipient information, etc.
        • Request type: select request
        • Usage period: enter desired service termination date
        • Basic information: enter Account name, Project name, recipient information
        • Usage amount does not need to be filled out
        Monitoring informationFill in required items such as log transmission target and customer IP (range)
        • Fill out all items except special cases
        Table. Log Transmission Service Termination Application Form Main Contents
    7. Attach the completed application form to the attachment area.
    8. Click the Request button on the service request page.
      • After the request is completed, verify the submitted information on the Support Center > Service Request list page.
    9. After the monitoring staff verifies the submitted service request, the termination process is completed once the log transmission target and the customer’s used IP (range) are removed.
      • Service termination takes 2–3 business days, counting from the cancellation request date.

    17.3 - Release Note

    Log Transmission

    2025.10.23
    NEW Log Transmission Service Official Version Release
    • We have launched the Log Transmission service that enables security monitoring of the user domain on Samsung Cloud Platform.

    18 - ESS(Endpoint Security Suite)

    18.1 - Overview

    Service Overview

    The Endpoint Security Suite (ESS) provides the existing on‑premise Endpoint Security solutions ESCORT, NASCA, and SecuPrint as SaaS, allowing reduced deployment and operational costs. Additionally, the One‑View integrated management console enables easy and convenient management of each point solution, supporting efficient security solution operation.

    Features

    • One-View Integrated Management
      By consolidating the management consoles previously provided for each solution—ESCORT, NASCA, and SecuPrint—into One-View, integrated installation and removal of the solutions became possible, improving the efficiency of solution management and security operations.

    • Expansion of PC Security Management Scope
      The traditional On-Premise solution managed only PCs within the site after configuring a local network, but the Endpoint Security Suite that uses the Internet enables the same level of PC security management regardless of whether the PCs are inside or outside the site.

    • Flexible scalability based on Rest API
      By providing various common functions such as personnel information, administrator account information, and license management information through Rest API, integration and expansion with point solutions become easy.

    Service Architecture Diagram

    Diagram
    Figure. Endpoint Security Suite (ESS) Concept Diagram

    Provided features

    ESS provides the following features.

    • ESCORT

      • Control of information leakage through storage devices (USB, external HDD, etc.)
      • Control of information leakage via network (WiFi, Bluetooth, etc.)
      • Program execution control and vulnerability mitigation
    • NASCA

      • Electronic document permission management and encryption/decryption
      • Ensuring business continuity by providing automatic decryption functionality
      • Screen watermark
    • SecuPrint

      • Output watermark
      • Output history management (log/statistics/tracking)
      • Personal data search and blocking (resident registration number/account number/card number, etc.)

    Component

    • ESCORT Windows Client

      • ESCORT solution client for Windows PC to prevent internal information leakage
    • ESCORT Linux Client

      • ESCORT solution client for Linux PC to prevent internal data leakage
    • NASCA Client

      • Windows PC client for the NASCA solution for document encryption/decryption and permission management
    • SecuPrint Client

      • Windows PC client for the SecuPrint solution, providing output watermarks and output security
    • Base Plan

      • Annual license cost for each server software of the ESCORT, NASCA, and SecuPrint solutions

    Provision status by region

    ESS is available in the following environments.

    RegionProvision status
    Korea West (kr-west1)Provide
    Korea East (kr-east1)Not provided
    South Korea South 1 (kr-south1)Not provided
    South Korea South 2 (kr-south2)Not provided
    South Korea South 3 (kr-south3)Not provided
    Table. ESS availability by region

    Preliminary Service

    ESS has no prior service.

    18.2 - How-to guides

    Users can apply for the service by entering the required information for using the Endpoint Security Suite (ESS) service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Create ESS

    You can apply for and use the ESS service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    To request the creation of an ESS service, follow these steps.

    1. All Services > Security > ESS Click the menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of ESS.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the ESS Service Request button. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Request List > Service Request page.
    3. Service Request page: enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
      • Select ESS creation in the task category.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request content
        • Example: ESS Service Creation Request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • Automatically entered with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect the service category and service. If you click the ESS service request button, it is entered automatically
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: ESS
        Task classificationSelect the type you want to request
        • Create ESS: select when requesting a new service
        contentGuide to the service application process and reference information
        AttachmentIf you have a completed ESS service application (required) and any additional files you wish to share, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, and tif files are allowed
        Table. ESS Service Creation Request Items
    4. Check the required information entered on the Service Request page, and click the Request button.
      • When the request is completed, check the submitted details on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
      • After the service manager reviews the submitted service request, the process for using the service is initiated.

    Check ESS application details

    After applying for the ESS service, you can view the detailed information and processing steps.

    To check your ESS service application details, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Support Center menu. Go to the Service Home page of Support Center.
    2. On the Service Home page, click the Service Request menu. You will be taken to the Service Request List page.
    3. On the Service Request List page, select the request item. You will be taken to the Service Request Details page.
    4. Service Request Details page lets you view detailed information and processing steps.

    Terminate ESS

    To request termination of the ESS service, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > ESS menu. Go to the Service Home page of ESS.

    2. On the Service Home page, click the ESS Service Request button. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Request List > Service Request page.

    3. Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.

      • Select ESS Service Termination in the task category.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: ESS Service Termination Request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • automatically entered with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect the service group and service. If you click the ESS service request button, it is entered automatically
        • Service Group: Security
        • Service: ESS
        Task classificationSelect the task you want to request
        • ESS Service Termination: select if you want to terminate the service
        contentReview the service termination process and reference information, then enter the detailed application details.
        AttachmentIf you have any additional files you wish to share for service termination, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each within 5 MB
        • Only files with the following extensions are allowed: doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, tif
        Table. ESS Service Termination Request Items
    4. Check the required information entered on the Service Request page, and click the Request button.

      • After you complete the ESS service termination request, the service manager will verify it, and the ESS service termination and deletion process will proceed.

    18.3 - Release Note

    ESS

    2026.03.19
    FEATURE ESS external product launch
    • We are launching the ESS external-facing product that offers the previously on-premises Endpoint Security service, which was provided to external customers under a perpetual license, as a SaaS-based Endpoint Security service with a subscription license.
    2025.12.16
    NEW ESS Service Official Version Launch
    • We are launching a service that offers the on‑premise Endpoint Security solutions ESCORT, NASCA, and SecuPrint as SaaS, and enables efficient management of endpoint security solutions from the One‑view integrated admin console.

    19 - Log Transmission

    19.1 - Overview

    Service Overview

    Log Transmission is a service that collects and stores logs in real time from firewalls, IPS, and DDoS security devices, and transmits them to the areas required by the customer. It provides a foundation for performing security monitoring in the user domain using those logs.

    Features

    • Security Event Log Collection/Transmission: Collect and store logs in real time from security devices, and transmit security events.
    • Safe log storage/transfer: Log data can be stored securely, and backup and recovery are possible when needed. Collected logs are safely kept in a redundant storage, and data is transmitted using VPN services, etc. Sending securely.

    Configuration diagram

    Diagram
    Figure. Log Transmission concept diagram

    Provided features

    We provide the following features.

    • Integration of various security log sources
      • Real-time log collection from various log sources such as firewalls, IPS, and DDoS security devices.
    • Log Filtering and Processing
      • Filter out unnecessary logs or extract only the logs requested by the customer.

    Component

    Log Transmission sends service log sources from the Samsung Cloud Platform to the equipment or system desired by the customer.

    • The service runs by connecting via VPN to the customer’s office (server room) where the device that receives the log source is located.

    Constraints

    To use Log Transmission, please check the following items in advance.

    • We collect and transmit logs for Security products offered by the Samsung Cloud Platform.
    • To send logs, you must be connected via VPN to the device that receives the logs.

    Provision status by region

    Log Transmission is available in the environments below.

    RegionProvision status
    Korea West (kr-west1)Not provided
    Korea East (kr-east1)Not provided
    South Korea South 1 (kr-south1)Provided
    South Korea South 2 (kr-south2)Provided
    South Korea South 3 (kr-south3)Provided
    Table. Log Transmission regional availability status

    Preceding Service

    This is a list of services that must be pre-configured before creating the Log Transmission service. Refer to the guide provided for each service to prepare in advance.

    Service CategoryServiceDetailed description
    NetworkingDirect ConnectA service that securely and quickly connects the customer’s network to the Samsung Cloud Platform
    Table. Secured VPN preliminary service
    • When running Log Transmission, you must select the service to which logs will be sent. Once the log transmission service target is determined, a VPN connection is required for secure log transmission.
    • To use the Log Transmission service, configuration work is required for communication between the customer’s Office (on‑premise) and the customer’s VPC within the Samsung Cloud Platform. Please follow the process below to request an uplink line, including external integration software and VPN settings, Direct Connect firewall opening, etc.
    1. Create a Direct Connect service.
    2. Create a connection between the customer’s VPC and DCon-VPN.
    3. Apply for an uplink line for communication between the customer’s on‑premise environment and the VPC.
      • Application path: Support Center > Service Request List > Service Request
      • Select service: Networking > Direct Connect
      • Task Category: Uplink line request
    4. Configure routing for the VPN path.
      • Set up the required routing information such as Firewall, Security Group, Direct Connect, etc.
    Reference
    Direct Connect creation and Uplink line request must be completed to use the Log Transmission service.

    19.2 - How-to guides

    Users can create the service by entering the required information for using the Log Transmission service through the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    Create Log Transmission

    You can apply for and use the Log Transmission service from the Samsung Cloud Platform Console.

    To request the creation of a Log Transmission service, follow these steps.

    1. Click the All Services > Security > Log Transmission menu. Navigate to the Service Home page of Log Transmission.

    2. On the Service Home page, click the Log Transmission Service Request button. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Request List > Service Request page.

    3. Service Request page: enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.

      • In the task type, select Log Transmission Creation.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request content
        • Example: Log Transmission Service Creation Request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • Automatically filled with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect the service category and service. If you click the Log Transmission service request button, it is entered automatically
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: Log Transmission
        Task classificationSelect the type you want to request
        • Create Log Transmission: select when requesting a new service
        contentGuide to the service application process and reference information
        AttachmentIf you have a completed Log Transmission service application (required) and any additional files you wish to share, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, and tif files are allowed
        Table. Log Transmission Service Creation Request Items
    4. After reviewing the application process and reference information, click the Form Download > Service Request Form Download button to download the Log Transmission Service Application Form.

    5. Please fill out the Log Transmission Service Application Form.

      • Refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs and complete the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationFill in required items such as application type, usage period, recipient information, etc.
        • Application type: select application
        • Usage period: enter desired start date
        • Basic information: enter Account name, Project name, recipient information
        Monitoring informationFill in required items such as log transmission target and customer IP (range)
        • Fill out all items except special cases
        Table. Main contents of Log Transmission service creation request form
    6. Attach the completed application form in the attachment area.

    7. On the service request page, click the Request button.

      • When the request is completed, check the submitted details on the Support Center > Service Request List page.
    8. After the monitoring personnel review the submitted service request, they proceed with the process to use the service.

    9. The Log Transmission service is now available.

    Log Transmission Check detailed information

    The Log Transmission service proceeds with the process for the service after applying through an SR. Unlike other services, detailed Log Transmission information cannot be viewed in the Console.

    • To view detailed information, on the Support Center > Inquiry List page, click the Inquiry button. On the Inquiry page, you can write your question and submit it.

    Terminate Log Transmission

    To request cancellation of the Log Transmission service, follow the steps below.

    1. Click the All Services > Management > Support Center menu. You will be taken to the Support Center > Service Home page.
    2. On the Support Center Service Home page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request List page.
    3. On the Service Request List page, click the Service Request button. You will be taken to the Service Request page.
    4. Service Request page, enter or select the required information in the mandatory input fields.
      • In the task category, select Log Transmission Cancellation.
        Input fieldDetailed description
        TitleEnter the title of the service request
        • Example: Log Transmission Service Termination Request
        RegionSelect the location of the Samsung Cloud Platform
        • automatically entered with the region corresponding to the Account
        ServiceSelect service category and service
        • Service Category: Security
        • Service: Log Transmission
        Task classificationSelect the type of request you want to make
        • Terminate Log Transmission: select if you are terminating the service
        contentGuide to the service application process and reference information
        AttachmentIf you have a completed Log Transmission service application (required) and any additional files you wish to share, proceed with the upload
        • You can attach up to 5 files, each no larger than 5 MB
        • Only doc, docx, xls, xlsx, ppt, ppts, hwp, txt, pdf, jpg, jpeg, png, gif, and tif files are allowed
        Table. Table. Log Transmission Service Termination Request Items
    5. After reviewing Application Process and Reference Information, click the Form Download > Service Request Form Download button to download the Log Transmission Service Application Form.
    6. Log Transmission Service Application Form please fill out.
      • Refer to the item descriptions in the Application Information and Monitoring Information tabs and complete the required fields.
        CategoryDetailed description
        Application InformationFill in required fields such as request type, usage period, recipient information, etc.
        • Request type: select request
        • Usage period: enter desired service termination date
        • Basic information: enter Account name, Project name, recipient information
        • Usage amount does not need to be filled out
        Monitoring informationFill in required items such as log transmission target and customer IP (range)
        • Fill out all items except special cases
        Table. Log Transmission Service Termination Application Form Main Contents
    7. Attach the completed application form to the attachment area.
    8. On the service request page, click the Request button.
      • Once the request is completed, verify the submitted information on the Support Center > Service Request list page.
    9. After the monitoring staff verifies the submitted service request, the termination process is completed once the log transmission target and the customer’s used IP range are removed.
      • Service termination takes 2–3 business days, counting from the cancellation request date.

    19.3 - Release Note

    Log Transmission

    2025.10.23
    NEW Log Transmission Service Official Version Release
    • We have launched the Log Transmission service that enables security monitoring of the user domain on Samsung Cloud Platform.